这是最新版本 Org mode 的官方手册.
本手册适用于Org版本9.4。
版权所有©2004-2020自由软件基金会
根据GNU自由文档许可证1.3版或自由软件基金会发布的任何更新版本的条款,允许复制、分发或修改本文档;没有固定章节,封面文本为“GNU手册”,封底文本如下(a)所示。该许可证的副本包含在标题为“GNU自由文档许可证”的部分中。
(a) FSF的封底正文是:“您有复制和修改本GNU手册的自由。”
• 简介: | 开始吧。 | |
• 文档结构: | 类似大脑工作原理的一棵树。 | |
• 表格: | 用于快速格式化的纯魔法。 | |
• 超链接: | 上下文中的笔记。 | |
• TODO: | 每个树分支都可以是一个TODO。 | |
• 标签: | 给标题打标签和按标签聚类 | |
• 属性和列: | 存储有关条目的信息。 | |
• 日期与时间: | 使条目对计划有用。 | |
• 转接与归档: | 轻松移动和复制信息。 | |
• 捕获和附件: | 处理外部数据。 | |
• 议程视图: | 将信息收集到视图中。 | |
• 富文本标记: | 撰写漂亮的文档。 | |
• 导出: | 共享和发布笔记。 | |
• 发布: | 创建链接到Org文件的网站。 | |
• 使用源代码: | 导出、求值和糅合代码块。 | |
• 杂项: | 所有其他地方放不下的剩余部分。 | |
• 高度定制化: | 如何定制你想要的功能。 | |
• 历史和致谢: | Org是如何产生的。 | |
• GNU自由文档许可证: | 此文档的许可证。 | |
• 主索引: | Org的概念和功能的索引。 | |
• 按键索引: | 按键绑定和描述它的位置。 | |
• 命令和函数索引: | 命令名一些内部函数。 | |
• 变量索引: | 手册中提到的变量。 | |
— 详细的节点列表 — 介绍 | ||
---|---|---|
• 概述: | Org的功能概述。 | |
• 安装: | 安装 Org。 | |
• 激活: | 如何从某一缓冲区激活Org。 | |
• 反馈: | 报告bug, 提出建议和补丁等。 | |
• 约定: | 本指南的排版约定。 | |
文档结构 | ||
• 标题: | 如何排版Org树标题。 | |
• 可见性循环: | 显示和隐藏,非常简单。 | |
• 移动: | 跳转到其它标题。 | |
• 结构编辑: | 改变标题的顺序和级别。 | |
• 稀疏树: | 在嵌入式上下文中匹配。 | |
• 普通列表: | 条目内的附加结构。 | |
• 抽屉: | 把东西藏起来。 | |
• 块: | 折叠块。 | |
可见性循环 | ||
• 全局局循环和局部循环: | 在各种可见性状态之间循环。 | |
• 初始可见性: | 设置初始可见性状态。 | |
• 捕获不可见编辑: | 防止编辑不可见部分时出错。 | |
表格 | ||
• 内置表格编辑器: | 简单的表格。 | |
• 列宽和对其方式: | 废除自动设置。 | |
• 列组: | 分组以触发垂直线。 | |
• Orgtbl模式: | 表格编辑器作为次要模式。 | |
• 电子表格: | 具有电子表格功能的表格编辑器。 | |
• Org图表: | 从Org表格中生成图表格。 | |
电子表格 | ||
• 引用: | 如何引用另一个字段或范围。 | |
• 计算公式语法: | 使用Calc来计算东西。 | |
• Lisp的公式语法: | 用Emacs Lisp编写公式。 | |
• 时间与时长: | 如何计算时间与时长。 | |
• 字段和范围公式: | 特定(范围)字段的公式。 | |
• 列公式: | 公式对整列有效。 | |
•查找函数: | 用于搜索表格的查找函数。 | |
• 编辑调试公式: | 修正公式。 | |
• 更新表格: | 重新计算所有从属字段。 | |
• 高级功能: | 字段和列名,自动重新计算. | |
超链接 | ||
• 链接格式: | Org中链接的格式设置方式。 | |
• 内部链接: | 链接到当前文件中的其他位置。 | |
• 无线电目标: | 生成目标触发纯文本形式的链接。 | |
• 外部链接: | 指向互联网的类似URL的链接。 | |
• 处理链接: | 创建、插入和跟随。 | |
• 使用Org外部链接: | 从我的C源代码链接吗? | |
• 链接缩写: | 编写复杂链接的快捷方式。 | |
• 搜索选项: | 链接到特定位置。 | |
• 自定义搜索: | 当默认搜索不够用时。 | |
TODO项 | ||
• TODO基础知识: | 标记和显示TODO条目。 | |
• TODO扩展: | 工作流和工作分配。 | |
• 进度日志记录: | 进度的日期和备注。 | |
• 优先级: | 有些事情比其他事情更重要。 | |
• 细分任务: | 将任务拆分成可管理的部分。 | |
• 复选框: | 勾选列表。 | |
TODO扩展 | ||
• 工作流状态: | 从TODO到DONE的步骤。 | |
• TODO类型: | 我做这个,Fred休息。 | |
• 一个文件中有多个集合: | 把它们混合在一起,仍然能找到你的路。 | |
• 快速访问TODO状态: | 状态的单字母选择。 | |
• 每个文件的关键字: | 不同的文件,不同的要求。 | |
• TODO关键字的字符样式: | 状态的高亮显示。 | |
• TODO依赖关系: | 当一个任务需要等待其他任务时。 | |
进度日志记录 | ||
·关闭项: | 此条目是何时标记为完成的? | |
• 跟踪TODO状态更改: | 状态是什么时候更改的? | |
• 跟踪您的习惯: | 你一直坚持到什么程度? | |
标签 | ||
• 标签继承: | 标签使用大纲的树形结构。 | |
• 设置标签: | 如何为标题分配标签。 | |
• 标签层次: | 创建标签的层次结构。 | |
• 标签搜索: | 搜索标签的组合。 | |
属性和列 | ||
• 属性语法: | 属性的拼写方式。 | |
• 特殊属性: | 访问其他Org模式功能。 | |
• 属性搜索: | 匹配属性值。 | |
• 属性继承: | 把值从树上向下传递。 | |
• 列视图: | 表格查看和编辑。 | |
列视图 | ||
• 列定义: | COLUMNS格式属性。 | |
• 使用列视图: | 如何创建和使用列视图。 | |
• 捕获列视图: | 列视图的动态块。 | |
列定义 | ||
• 列定义范围: | 哪里定义了,哪里有效? | |
• 列属性: | 列的外观和内容。 | |
日期和时间 | ||
• 时间戳: | 为树的枝干条目分配时间。 | |
• 创建时间戳: | 用于插入时间戳的命令。 | |
• 截止日期和日程安排: | 计划你的工作。 | |
• 工作时间计时: | 跟踪您在一项任务上花费的时间。 | |
• 工作量估算: | 计划会提高工作成果。 | |
• 计时器: | 带运行计时器的笔记。 | |
创建时间戳 | ||
• 日期/时间提示: | Org模式如何帮助您输入日期和时间。 | |
• 自定义时间格式: | 让日期看起来不一样。 | |
截止日期和日程安排 | ||
• 插入截止日期/日程安排: | 计划项。 | |
• 重复任务: | 一次又一次出现的项目。 | |
工作时间计时 | ||
• 计时命令: | 启动和停止计时。 | |
• 计时表格: | 详细的报告。 | |
• 解决空闲时间: | 在你空闲的时候解决时间问题。 | |
转接和归档 | ||
• 转接和拷贝: | 移动/拷贝一棵节点树到另外一个地方。 | |
• 归档: | 完成后的节点怎么处理。 | |
归档 | ||
• 移动节点子树: | 移动一棵节点树到一个归档文件中。 | |
• 内部归档: | 关闭一棵节点树,但是依旧保留在文件中。 | |
捕获和附件 | ||
• 捕获: | 捕捉新的东西。 | |
• 附件: | 将文件附加到大纲。 | |
• RSS订阅: | 从RSS订阅获取输入。 | |
捕获 | ||
• 设置捕获: | 将存储笔记的位置。 | |
• 使用捕获: | 调用和终止捕获的命令。 | |
• 捕获模板: | 针对不同的笔记类型定义大纲。 | |
捕获模板 | ||
• 模板元素: | 完整的模板条目需要什么。 | |
• 模板扩容: | 填写有关时间和上下文的信息。 | |
• 上下文中的模板的使用: | 仅在特定上下文中显示模板。 | |
附件 | ||
• 附件默认值和调度程序: | 如何访问附件命令 | |
• 附件选项: | 配置附件系统 | |
• 附件链接: | 附件的超链接访问 | |
• Git自动版本控制: | 所有东西都安全地存放起来 | |
• 从Dired添加附件: | 使用Dired选择附件 | |
议程视图 | ||
• 议程文件: | 从哪些文件中搜索提供给agenda展示的信息 | |
议程• 议程调度程序: | 议程视图快捷键 | |
• 内置议程视图: | 开箱即用的功能有哪些? | |
• 展示和排序: | 议程事项的显示方式。 | |
• 议程命令: | 远程编辑原Org文件。 | |
• 自定义议程视图: | 定义自定义搜索内容和显示视图。 | |
• 导出议程视图: | 将视图写入文件。 | |
• 议程列视图: | 对收集到的条目使用列视图。 | |
内置议程视图 | ||
• 每周/每日议程: | 包含当前任务的日历页。 | |
• 全局TODO列表: | 所有未完成的行动项目。 | |
• 匹配标签和属性: | 具有微调搜索功能的结构化信息。 | |
• 搜索视图: | 通过搜索文本查找条目。 | |
• 停滞的项目: | 查找您需要审阅的项目。 | |
演示文稿和排序 | ||
• 分类: | 并不是所有的任务都是相等的。 | |
• 时间格式规范: | 议事日程怎么知道时间。 | |
• 议程项排序: | 事物的秩序。 | |
• 过滤/限制议程项数量: | 动态缩小议程规模。 | |
自定义议程视图 | ||
• 存储搜索条件: | 打字一次,经常使用。 | |
• "挡路"议程: | 你需要的所有东西都放在一个缓冲区里。 | |
• 设置选项: | 改变规则。 | |
富文本标记 | ||
• 段落: | 文本的基本单位。 | |
• 强调和等宽: | 粗体、斜体等。 | |
• 下标和上标: | 升降文本的简单语法。 | |
• 特殊符号: | 希腊字母和其他符号。 | |
• 嵌入式LaTeX: | LaTeX可在Org文档内自由使用。 | |
• 字面示例: | 具有特殊格式的源代码示例。 | |
• 图片: | 显示图像。 | |
• 标题: | 描述表格、图像. | |
• 水平尺: | 排成一条线。 | |
• 创建脚注: | 编辑并阅读脚注。 | |
LaTeX嵌入 | ||
• LaTeX片段: | 复杂的公式变得简单。 | |
• 预览LaTeX片段: | 这个片段会是什么样子呢? | |
• CDLaTeX模式: | 加快公式输入速度。 | |
导出 | ||
• 导出调度程序: | 主界面。 | |
• 导出设置: | 通用导出设置。 | |
• 目录: | 是否需要目录和目录的位置。 | |
• 包括文件: | 将其他文件包括到文档中。 | |
• 宏置换: | 使用宏来创建模板。 | |
• 注释行: | 不会导出的内容。 | |
• ASCII/Latin-1/UTF-8导出: | 使用指定编码导出到纯文本文件。 | |
• Beamer导出: | 制作演示文稿和幻灯片。 | |
• HTML导出: | 导出到HTML。 | |
• LaTeX导出: | 导出为LaTeX并处理为PDF。 | |
• Markdown导出: | 导出到Markdown。 | |
• OpenDocument文本导出: | 导出到OpenDocument文本。 | |
• Org导出: | 导出到Org。 | |
• Texinfo导出: | 导出到Texinfo: | |
• iCalendar导出: | 导出到iCalendar。 | |
• 其他内置后端: | 导出到手册页。 | |
• 高级导出配置: | 微调导出产出。 | |
• 导出外部缓冲区: | 使用Org语法创建表格和列表。 | |
Beamer导出 | ||
• Beamer导出命令: | 用于创建Beamer文档。 | |
• Beamer特定导出设置: | 用于自定义Beamer导出。 | |
• Beamer中的帧和块: | 用来创作光束幻灯片。 | |
• Beamer特定语法: | 在Org文档中使用。 | |
• 编辑支持: | 编辑支持。 | |
• Beamer示例: | 完整的演示文稿。 | |
HTML导出 | ||
• HTML导出命令: | 调用HTML导出。 | |
• HTML特定导出设置: | HTML导出的设置。 | |
• HTML文档类型: | 导出各种(X)种HTML风格。 | |
• HTML前导和后导: | 插入前导和后导。 | |
• 引用HTML标签: | 在Org文件中使用直接HTML。 | |
• HTML导出中的标题: | 设置标题格式。 | |
• HTML导出中的链接: | 插入链接并设置其格式。 | |
• HTML导出中的表格: | 如何修改表格的格式。 | |
• HTML导出中的图像: | 如何将图形插入到HTML输出中。 | |
• HTML导出中的数学格式设置: | 网上也有漂亮的数学作品。 | |
• HTML导出中的文本域: | 展示示例的另一种方式。 | |
• CSS支持: | 更改输出的外观。 | |
• JavaScript支持: | Web浏览器中的信息和折叠。 | |
LaTeX导出 | ||
• LaTeX/PDF导出命令: | 用于生成LaTeX和PDF文档。 | |
• 特定于LaTeX的导出设置: | 这是这个LaTeX后端独有的。 | |
• LaTeX标题和分段: | 设置导出文件结构。 | |
• 引用LaTeX代码: | 包含字面LaTeX代码。 | |
• LaTeX导出中的表格: | 将表格导出到LaTeX的选项。 | |
• LaTeX导出中的图像: | 如何将图形插入到LaTeX输出中。 | |
• LaTeX导出中的普通列表: | 特定于列表的属性。 | |
• LaTeX导出中的源码快: | 特定于源代码块的属性。 | |
• LaTeX导出中的示例块: | 特定于样例块的属性。 | |
• LaTeX导出中的特殊块: | 特定于特殊块的属性。 | |
• LaTeX导出中的横向规则: | 特定于水平尺的属性。 | |
OpenDocument文本导出 | ||
• ODT导出的前提条件: | 所需的包。 | |
• ODT导出命令: | 调用导出。 | |
• ODT特定导出设置: | 配置选项。 | |
• 扩展ODT导出: | 制作DOC、PDF文件。 | |
• 应用自定义样式: | 设置输出样式。 | |
• ODT导出中的链接: | 处理和格式化链接。 | |
• ODT导出中的表格: | Org表格转换。 | |
• ODT导出中的图片: | 插入图像。 | |
• ODT导出中的数学格式: | 格式化LaTeX片段。 | |
• ODT导出中的标签和标题: | 渲染对象。 | |
• ODT导出中的文字示例: | 源代码和示例块。 | |
• ODT导出中的高级主题: | 适用于高级用户。 | |
ODT导出中的数学格式设置 | ||
• LaTeX数学片段: | 以LaTeX格式嵌入。 | |
• MathML和OpenDocument公式文件: | 以本机格式嵌入。 | |
Texinfo导出 | ||
• Texinfo导出命令: | 调用命令。 | |
• 特定于Texinfo的导出设置: | 环境设置。 | |
• Texinfo文件标头: | 生成标题。 | |
• Texinfo标题和版权页: | 创建引言页面。 | |
• 信息目录文件: | 在信息文件层次结构中安装手册。 | |
• 标题和分段结构: | 构建文档结构。 | |
• 索引: | 创建索引。 | |
• 引用Texinfo代码: | 包含字面Texinfo代码 | |
• Texinfo导出中的普通列表: | 列出属性。 | |
• Texinfo导出中的表格: | 表格属性。 | |
• Texinfo导出中的图像: | 图像属性。 | |
• Texinfo导出中的引用: | 引用块属性。 | |
• Texinfo导出中的特殊块: | 特殊块属性。 | |
• 一个Texinfo示例: | 处理Org到Texinfo的导出 | |
在外部缓冲区中导出 | ||
• 裸HTML: | 导出不带CSS、Javascript等的HTML。 | |
发布 | ||
• 配置: | 定义项目。 | |
• 上传文件: | 如何将文件上传到服务器。 | |
• 示例配置: | 示例项目。 | |
• 触发发布: | 发布命令。 | |
配置 | ||
• 项目列表: | 重要的配置变量。 | |
• 源和目标: | 从这里到那里。 | |
• 选择文件: | 哪些文件是项目的一部分? | |
• 发布操作: | 设置进行发布的函数。 | |
• 发布选项: | 调整HTML/LaTeX导出。 | |
• 发布链接: | 哪些链接在发布后仍然有效? | |
• 站点地图: | 生成所有页面的列表。 | |
• 生成索引: | 跨页的索引。 | |
配置示例 | ||
• 简单示例: | 单组件发布。 | |
• 复杂示例: | 多组件发布示例。 | |
使用源代码 | ||
• 功能概述: | 享受源码块的多功能性。 | |
• 代码块结构: | 代码块语法描述。 | |
• 使用标题参数: | 设置标头参数的不同方式。 | |
• 代码块环境: | 参数、会话、工作目录. | |
• 代码块求值: | 将求值结果放入Org缓冲区。 | |
• 求值结果: | 选择结果类型、后处理. | |
• 导出代码块: | 导出内容或结果。 | |
• 提取源代码: | 创建纯源代码文件。 | |
• 语言: | 支持的代码块语言列表。 | |
• 编辑源代码: | 语言主模式编辑。 | |
• Noweb引用语法: | Org模式下的文学编程。 | |
• Babel库: | 使用有用的代码块类库并为其做出贡献。 | |
• 按键绑定和有用的函数: | 快速处理代码块。 | |
• 批量执行: | 从命令行调用函数。 | |
杂项 | ||
• 补全: | M-TAB补全联想 | |
• 结构模板: | 快速插入结构元素。 | |
• 快捷键: | 标题开头的电子命令。 | |
• 净化视图: | 剔除大纲中的前面星号。 | |
• 在活动区执行命令: | 在Org或议程视图中对多个项执行命令。 | |
• 动态标题编号: | 显示和更新大纲编号。 | |
• 非常繁忙的C-c-c键: | 如果有疑问,请按C-c C-c。 | |
• 缓冲区内设置: | 关键字概述。 | |
• Org语法: | Org语法的正式描述。 | |
• 文档访问: | 阅读有关当前语法的文档。 | |
• 转义字符: | 阻止Org解释您的写作。 | |
• 代码求值安全性: | Org文件求值行内代码。 | |
• 交互: | 与其他Emacs软件包一起使用。 | |
• TTY按键: | 在tty上使用Org。 | |
• 协议: | 外部访问Emacs和Org。 | |
• Org加密: | 加密Org文件。 | |
• Org移动版: | 在移动设备上查看和捕获。 | |
净化视图 | ||
• Org缩进模式: | ||
• 硬缩进: | ||
交互 | ||
• 合作: | 和Org合作的包。 | |
• 冲突: | 导致冲突的包。 | |
协议 | ||
• 存储链接 协议: | 存储一个链接,将URL推送到剪切板。 | |
• 捕获 协议: | 用外部信息填充缓冲区。 | |
• 开源 协议: | 编辑发布的内容。 | |
Org移动版 | ||
• 设置舞台区域: | 用于移动设备。 | |
• 推送到移动应用: | 上传Org文件和议程。 | |
• 从移动应用拉取: | 集成捕获和标记的项。 | |
高度定制化 | ||
• 钩子: | 如何进入Org的内部。 | |
• 附加软件包: | 可用的扩展。 | |
• 添加超链接类型: | 新的自定义链接类型。 | |
• 添加导出后端: | 如何编写新的导出后端。 | |
• 任意语法的表格: | 用于LaTeX和其他程序的Orgtbl。 | |
• 动态块: | 自动填充的块。 | |
• 特殊议程视图: | 自定义视图。 | |
• 加快您的议程: | 关于如何加快日程安排的小贴士。 | |
• 提取议程信息: | 后处理议程信息。 | |
• 使用属性接口: | 编写使用条目属性的程序。 | |
• 使用映射接口: | 在所有或选定条目上映射。 | |
任意语法中的表格 | ||
• 无线电表格: | 发送和接收无线电表格。 | |
• LaTeX示例: | 一步一步,完整的教程。 | |
• 转换器函数: | 复制并修改。 | |
• 概述: | Org的功能概述。 | |
• 安装: | 安装 Org。 | |
• 激活: | 如何从某一缓冲区激活Org。 | |
• 反馈: | 报告bug, 提出建议和补丁等。 | |
• 约定: | 本指南的排版约定。 |
Org是Emacs的一个模式,它使用一种快速高效的纯文本标记语言,用来进行笔记管理、维护TODO列表以及项目规划。它也是一个创作系统,对文学式编程和可重复性研究提供独特的支持。
Org基于大纲模式实现,这样就可以保持大型文件的内容结构良好。可见性循环和结构编辑有助于与树配合使用。使用内置的表格编辑器可以轻松创建表格。类似纯文本URL的链接连接到网站,电子邮件,Usenet消息,BBDB记录以及与项目相关的任何文件。
Org围绕笔记文件开发组织任务,这些笔记文件以纯文本形式包含有关项目的列表或信息。项目计划和任务管理利用了元数据,这些元数据是作为大纲节点一部分存在。基于这些数据,可以在查询中提取特定记录并创建动态的 议程视图,该视图还集成了Emacs日历和日记。Org可以用来实践多种不同的项目规划方案,例如David Allen的GTD系统。
Org文件可以用作单一源创作系统,并可以导出多种不同的格式,例如HTML、LaTeX,Open Document和Markdown。新的导出后端可以从现有的后端衍生出来,也可以从头开始定义。
Org文件可以包含源代码块,这使Org特别适合编写带有代码示例的技术文档。Org源代码块功能齐全,可以对其进行求值,并将结果捕获到文件中。这使得创建单文件可重复性研究手册成为了可能。
Org使简单的事情变得更简单。初次启动时,它应该看起来像一个简单易用的大纲工具。虽然并不要求复杂性,但是在需要时有大量的功能可以使用。Org是一个工具箱。实际上,许多用户只运行Org的一部分功能(非常个人化),并且知道在需要时还会有更多功能。
所有这些都是通过严格的纯文本文件实现的,这是可移植且面向未来的文件格式。Org运行在Emacs之上。Emacs是最广泛的移植程序之一,因此Org模式可以在每个主流平台上使用。
有一个用于Org的网站,该网站提供指向Org最新版本的链接,以及其他信息,常见问题解答(FAQ),教程链接等。此页面位于https://orgmode.org.
本手册的早期版本(7.3)可作为平装书从Network Theory Ltd获得。.
Org包含在GNU Emacs的所有最新发行版中,因此您可能不需要安装它。大多数用户只需要激活Org并开始探索其众多功能。
如果出于某种原因要在此预打包版本之上安装Org,可以通过以下三种方法进行:
我们强烈建议坚持只使用一种安装方法。
最新的Emacs发行版包括一个打包系统,可让您方便的安装Elisp库。输入命令 M-x list-packages,你便可以从“软件包清单”中安装Org。详情查阅(emacs)软件包清单。
重要提示:你需要在未访问' .org '文件的会话(即未加载Org内置函数的会话)中执行此操作。否则,自动加载的Org函数会破坏安装操作。
如果你想使用Org的软件包仓库,请访问 Org ELPA page。
你可以从 Org官网下载Org的最新版本。在这种情况下,请确保在Emacs初始化文件中正确设置了加载路径:
(add-to-list 'load-path "~/path/to/orgdir/lisp")
下载的档案包含Emacs中没有的贡献库。如果你使用它们,添加‘contrib/’目录到你的加载路径中::
(add-to-list 'load-path "~/path/to/orgdir/contrib/lisp" t)
(可选)您可以编译文件和/或将它们安装在系统中。运行‘make help’来列出编译和安装选项。
你可以克隆Org的仓库到本地,然后安装Org,像这样:
$ cd ~/src/ $ git clone https://code.orgmode.org/bzg/org-mode.git $ cd org-mode/ $ make autoloads
请注意,在这种情况下,必须使用'make autoloads':它在'org-version.el'中定义Org的版本,并在'org-loaddefs .el'中定义Org的自动加载。
请记住按照上述方法添加正确的加载路径。
你也可以使用'make'进行编译,使用'make doc'生成文档,使用'make config'创建本地配置,使用'make install'安装Org。请运行‘make help’ 来获得编译/安装选项的列表。
关于Org的构建系统的详细说明,请查看Worg上面的Org构建系统页面。
Org模式缓冲区需要打开字体锁定,这是Emacs中的默认设置s1。
Org模式与某些其他Elisp软件包之间存在兼容性问题(请参见冲突)。请花一些时间检查这个列表。
为了获得更好的体验,有三个Org命令应该是在Emacs的任何地方都可以访问的,而不仅仅是在Org缓冲区内,它们是org-store-link
, org-capture
和org-agenda
。为此,你需要把它们绑定到全局可用的按键上,例如为用户保留的按键(请参阅 (elisp)键绑定约定)。以下是建议的绑定,请根据自己的喜好修改按键。
(global-set-key (kbd "C-c l") 'org-store-link) (global-set-key (kbd "C-c a") 'org-agenda) (global-set-key (kbd "C-c c") 'org-capture)
默认情况下,扩展名为'.org'的文件自动使用Org模式。要在非“ .org'扩展名的文件中打开Org模式,请在文件的第一行增加以下内容:
我的项目 -*- mode: org; -*-
不管文件名是什么,都会为该缓冲区选择组织模式。另请查阅org-insert-mode-line-in-empty-file
变量。
如果某区域为活跃状态,则Org中的许多命令都可以在该区域上使用。要使用此功能,您需要打开“瞬变标记”模式,这是默认设置。如果您不喜欢它,可以通过使用鼠标选择一个区域或在光标之前按两次C-SPC来创建活动区域。
如果你发现了Org的的问题,或者你有对Org的疑问、评价或者好的想法,请发送邮件到Org邮件列表emacs-orgmode@gnu.org。你可以从这个页面订阅此列表。如果你不是一个邮件组的成员,经过主持人的批准后,你的邮件将被传递到该列表。2. 在此邮件列表上发送消息时,我们请您阅读并遵守GNU善意沟通准则
对于bug提交,请先尝试使用最新的Org版本重现该错误——如果您运行的是过时的版本,则很可能已经在后续版本修复了该bug。如果bug在新版本依旧存在,请准备一份报告,并提供尽可能多的信息,包括Emacs(M-x emacs-version)和Org (M-x org-version)的版本信息,以及在Emacs init文件中关于Org的相关配置。最简单的方式就是使用命令
M-x org-submit-bug-report <RET>
它将所有这些信息放入Emacs邮件缓冲区中,因此你只需要添加你的描述即可。如果您不是从Emacs内部发送电子邮件,请复制内容并将其粘贴到您的电子邮件程序中。
有时您可能会由于Emacs或Org模式设置错误而遇到问题。在报告错误之前,使用最少的自定义启动Emacs并重现问题非常有帮助。这样做通常可以帮助您确定问题出在您的自定义设置还是Org模式本身。您可以使用类似以下示例的命令启动典型的最小会话。
$ emacs -Q -l /path/to/minimal-org.el
但是,如果您使用的是随Emacs一起分发的Org模式,则无需进行最小设置。在这种情况下,以'emacs -Q'启动Emacs就足够了。'minimal-org.el”设置文件可以具有如下所示的内容。
;;; 最少的配置加载最新的'org-mode' ;; 激活调试 (setq debug-on-error t debug-on-signal nil debug-on-quit nil) ;; 添加最新的Org模式到加载路径中。 (add-to-list 'load-path (expand-file-name "/path/to/org-mode/lisp")) (add-to-list 'load-path (expand-file-name "/path/to/org-mode/contrib/lisp" t))
如果发生错误,“回溯”可能会非常有用-请参阅下文,了解如何创建。通常,一个小的示例文件会有所帮助,同时提供以下方面的清晰信息:
感谢您帮助改进此程序。
如果与Org一起使用时出现错误,并显示一条您不理解的消息,则可能是您遇到了错误。最好的报告方法是,除了上面提到的以外,还提供回溯。这是内置调试器提供的有关错误发生的位置和方式的信息。这是产生有用的回溯的方法:
C-u M-x org-reload <RET>
或者,从菜单中进入:Org→刷新/重新加载→重新加载未编译的Org。
M-x toggle-debug-on-error <RET>
或者,从菜单进入:选项→错误时进入调试器。
Org使用各种语法元素:TODO关键字,标签,属性名称,关键字,块等。在本指南中,我们使用以下约定:
即使是用户定义的,也要使用大写字母写TODO关键字。
标签要区分大小写。用户定义的标签以小写形式编写; 具有特殊含义的内置标签应按应在文档中出现的方式书写,通常使用全大写。
用户定义的属性以首字母大写形式; 具有特殊含义的内置属性使用全大写字母书写。
关键字和块以大写形式编写,以增强其可读性,但是您可以在Org文件中使用小写形式。
该手册列出了用于访问一个功能的按键和相应的命令。Org模式通常根据上下文将相同的键用于不同的功能。绑定到此类键的命令具有通用名称,例如org-metaright
。在手册中,我们将尽可能提供内部函数调用的通用命令例如,在文档结构一章中,将列出M-RIGHT来调用org-do-demote
,在表格章节时,org-table-move-column-right
命令会被列出来。
首先,Org是一个大纲。大纲可以使使文档按层次进行组织结构,至少对我而言,这是笔记和思想的最佳表示形式。这种结构的概述是通过折叠来实现的,即隐藏文档的大部分以仅显示一般文档结构和当前正在处理的部分。Org通过将显示和隐藏的功能压缩到org-cycle
这个单一的命令上来简化大纲的使用,它的按键绑定为TAB。
• 标题: | 如何排版Org树标题。 | |
• 可见性循环: | 显示和隐藏,非常简单。 | |
• 移动: | 跳转到其它标题。 | |
• 结构编辑: | 改变标题的顺序和级别。 | |
• 稀疏树: | 在嵌入式上下文中匹配。 | |
• 普通列表: | 条目内的附加结构。 | |
• 抽屉: | 把东西藏起来。 | |
• 块: | 折叠块。 |
标题定义了大纲树的结构。Org标题从左边距3开始,后面跟着一个或者多个星号和空格。例如:
* 顶级标题 ** 二级标题 *** 三级标题 一些文本 *** 三级标题 更多文本 * 另一个顶级标题
org-footnote-section
中定义的名称是保留的。不要将其作为你自己的笔记的标题。
有些人觉得星号太多了,他们更喜欢在大纲中使用空格后跟着一个星号作为标题的开头。这可以使用Org缩进辅模式来实现。有关详细信息,请参阅干净的视图。
标题是没有编号的。但是,你可能希望对其中的一些或全部进行动态编号。请参阅动态标题编号。
子树末尾之后的空行被认为是子树的一部分,并且在子树折叠时被隐藏。但是,如果您保留至少两个空行,则在折叠子树后仍有一个空行可见,以便构建折叠视图的结构。要修改此行为,请参阅变量org-cycle-separator-lines
。
• 全局局循环和局部循环: | 在各种可见性状态之间循环。 | |
• 初始可见性: | 设置初始可见性状态。 | |
• 捕获不可见编辑: | 防止编辑不可见部分时出错。 |
大纲可以让隐藏缓冲区中的部分文本成为可能。Org只使用两个命令来更改缓冲区中的可见性,分别是按键绑定TAB和S-TAB。
org-cycle
)子树循环:让子树在多个状态直接循环
,-> 折叠状态 -> 直属子元素 -> 完整子树 --. '-----------------------------------'
必须位于标题上才能正常工作4。
org-global-cycle
)全局循环:整个缓冲区在多个状态之间循环
,-> 概述 -> 内容 -> 全部显示 --. '--------------------------------------'
当S-TAB使用数字前缀参数N调用时,仅查看直到N级别的标题的内容。
请注意,在表格中(请参阅表格),S-TAB会跳转到上一个字段。
您可以使用TAB运行全局循环,前提是光标位于缓冲区的最开始处,而不是在标题上,并且org-cycle-global-at-bob
设置为非nil
值。
org-set-startup-visibility
)切换回缓冲区的启动可见性(请参阅初始可见性)。
outline-show-all
)全部展示,包括抽屉。
org-reveal
)显示光标周围的上下文,显示当前条目、下面的标题和上面的层次结构。对于在由稀疏树命令(请参阅稀疏树)或议程命令(请参阅议程命令)暴露出来的位置操作时,它非常有用。使用前缀参数,在每个级别上显示所有同级标题。使用双前缀参数,还可以显示父级的整个子树。
outline-show-branches
)显示子树的所有标题,但不显示子树的主体。
outline-show-children
)显示该子树的所有直接子级。使用数字前缀参数N,将所有子级向下显示到N。
org-tree-to-indirect-buffer
)在间接缓冲区中显示当前子树5。使用数字前缀参数N,转到级别N,然后获取该树。如果N为负,则上升到该级别。使用C-u前缀,请勿删除以前使用的间接缓冲区。
org-copy-visible
)将区域中的可见性文本复制到剪切板中。
当Emacs首次访问Org文件时,全局状态设置为showeverything
,即所有文件内容均可见6。这可以通过变量org-start-folded
进行配置,也可以通过在缓冲区中的任意位置添加以下行之一来针对每个文件进行配置:
#+STARTUP: overview #+STARTUP: content #+STARTUP: showall #+STARTUP: showeverything
此外,任何具有“VISIBILITY”属性的条目(请参阅属性和列)都会相应地调整其可见性。此属性允许的值为“folded”、“children”、“content”和“all”。
有时,您可能会无意中编辑缓冲区的不可见部分,并对已编辑的内容以及如何撤消错误感到困惑。将org-catch-insible-edits
设置为非nil
有助于防止出现这种情况。请参阅此选项的文档字符串,了解组织应如何捕获不可见的编辑并对其进行处理。
以下命令跳转到缓冲区中的其他标题。
org-next-visible-heading
)下一个标题。
org-previous-visible-heading
)上一个标题。
org-forward-heading-same-level
)下一个同级标题。
org-backward-heading-same-level
)上一个同级标题。
outline-up-heading
)跳回到更高级别的标题
org-goto
)在不更改当前大纲可见性的情况下跳到其他位置。显示在临时缓冲区中的文档结构,您可以在其中使用以下键查找目标:
TAB | 可见性循环。 |
DOWN / UP | 下一个/上一个可见标题。 |
RET | 选择此位置。 |
/ | 执行稀疏树搜索 |
如果关闭org-goto-auto-isearch
,则以下键起作用
n / p | 下一个/上一个可见标题。 |
f / b | 下一个/上一个同级标题。 |
u | 往上一级。 |
0 … 9 | 数字参数。 |
q | 退出。 |
另请参阅变量org-goto-interface
。
org-meta-return
)插入新标题、项或行。
如果在行的开始处使用该命令,并且在光标处有标题或普通列表项(请参阅普通列表),则在当前行之前创建新的标题/项。在常规文本行的开头使用时,会将该行转换为标题。
当在行中间使用此命令时,该行将被拆分,该行的剩余部分将成为新项或标题。如果不想拆分该行,请自定义org-M-ret-May-plit-line
。
无条件地调用带有C-u前缀的命令会在当前子树的末尾插入一个新标题,从而保留其内容。使用双C-u C-u前缀,将在父子树的末尾创建新标题。
org-insert-heading-respect-content
)在当前子树的末尾插入新标题。
org-insert-todo-heading
)插入与当前标题级别相同的新TODO条目。另请参阅变量org-treat-insert-todo-heading-as-state-change
.
org-insert-todo-heading-respect-content
)插入与当前标题级别相同的新TODO条目。与C-ret类似,新标题插入到当前子树之后。
org-cycle
)在还没有文本的新条目中,第一次TAB将该条目降级为前一个条目的子项。下一次TAB使其成为父级,依此类推,一直到顶层。再来一次Tab,您将返回到初始级别。
org-do-promote
)org-do-demote
)将当前标题提升或降低一个级别。
当存在活动区域时-即,当瞬变标记模式处于活动状态时-该区域中的所有标题都会执行升级和降级。要选择标题区域,最好将光标和标记同时放置在行的开头,标记在第一个标题的开头,然后指向要更改的最后一个标题之后的行。
org-promote-subtree
)将当前子树提升一个级别。
org-demote-subtree
)将当前子树降低一个级别。
org-move-subtree-up
)上移子树,即与同级的上一个子树互换。
org-move-subtree-down
)下移子树,即与同级的下一个子树互换。
org-mark-subtree
)在光标位置标记该子树。重复执行标记命令将会标记的与该子树相同级别的后续子树。
org-cut-subtree
)删除子树,即将其从缓冲区中移除,但保存在剪切板中。使用数字前缀参数N,删除N个连续的子树。
org-copy-subtree
)将子树复制到剪切板。使用数字前缀参数N复制N个连续子树。
org-paste-subtree
)从剪切板上粘贴一棵子树。这会修改子树的级别,以确保树很好地适应在所粘贴的位置。粘贴时的级别也可以使用数字前缀参数指定,或者通过粘贴标题标记(如“****”)来指定。
org-yank
)根据变量org-yank-adjusted-subtree
和org-yank-folded-subtree
的不同,Org的内部yank
命令使用与C-c-x C-y相同的命令巧妙地粘贴折叠的子树。使用默认设置时,不会进行任何级别调整,但会折叠粘贴的树,除非这样做会吞噬以前可见的文本。此命令的任何前缀参数都强制执行正常的粘贴
操作,并传递前缀。强制执行一个普通粘贴的一个好方法是C-u C-y。如果在在一次粘贴之后使用yank-pop
,它会简单的粘贴之前的内容,不会调整和折叠。
org-clone-subtree-with-time-shift
)通过制作多个同级副本来克隆子树。系统会提示您输入要制作的副本数量,您还可以指定条目中的任何时间戳是否应该移位。例如,这对于创建与要准备的一系列讲座相关的多个任务非常有用。有关更多详细信息,请参阅命令org-clone-subtree-with-time-Shift
的文档说明。
org-refile
)将条目或区域转接到其他位置。请参阅转接和复制。
org-sort
)对同级条目进行排序。当存在活动区域时,将对该区域中的所有条目进行排序。否则,对当前标题的子项进行排序。该命令提示您输入排序方法,该方法可以按字母顺序、数字顺序,也可以首次有效时间戳、创建时间、计划时间、截止日期时间排序,同样也可以按优先级、按TODO关键字(按照关键字在设置中定义的顺序)或按属性的值进行排序。反向排序也是可能的。您还可以提供自己的函数来提取排序关键字。使用C-u前缀,排序区分大小写。
org-narrow-to-subtree
)将缓冲区聚焦到当前子树
org-narrow-to-block
)将缓冲区聚焦到当前块。
widen
)扩大缓冲区以取消聚焦。
org-toggle-heading
)将普通行或普通列表项转换为标题-使其在其所在位置成为副标题。还可以通过去掉星号来将标题转换为正常行。如果存在活动区域,会将该区域中的所有行都变成标题。如果区域中的第一行是列表项,则仅将列表项行变为标题。最后,如果第一行是标题,则从该区域的所有标题中删除星号。
请注意,当光标位于表格中时(请参见表格),Meta修饰标键具有不同的功能。
An important feature of Org mode is the ability to construct sparse trees for selected information in an outline tree, so that the entire document is folded as much as possible, but the selected information is made visible along with the headline structure above it7. Just try it out and you will see immediately how it works.
Org mode contains several commands creating such trees, all these commands can be accessed through a dispatcher:
org-sparse-tree
)This prompts for an extra key to select a sparse-tree creating command.
org-occur
)Prompts for a regexp and shows a sparse tree with all matches. If the match is in a headline, the headline is made visible. If the match is in the body of an entry, headline and body are made visible. In order to provide minimal context, also the full hierarchy of headlines above the match is shown, as well as the headline following the match. Each match is also highlighted; the highlights disappear when the buffer is changed by an editing command, or by pressing C-c C-c8. When called with a C-u prefix argument, previous highlights are kept, so several calls to this command can be stacked.
next-error
)Jump to the next sparse tree match in this buffer.
previous-error
)Jump to the previous sparse tree match in this buffer.
For frequently used sparse trees of specific search strings, you can use the variable org-agenda-custom-commands
to define fast keyboard access to specific sparse trees. These commands will then be accessible through the agenda dispatcher (see Agenda Dispatcher). 例如:
(setq org-agenda-custom-commands '(("f" occur-tree "FIXME")))
defines the key f as a shortcut for creating a sparse tree matching the string ‘FIXME’.
The other sparse tree commands select headings based on TODO keywords, tags, or properties and are discussed later in this manual.
To print a sparse tree, you can use the Emacs command
ps-print-buffer-with-faces
which does not print invisible parts of
the document. Or you can use the command C-c C-e C-v to
export only the visible part of the document and print the resulting
file.
下一页: Drawers, 上一页: Sparse Trees, 返回: Document Structure [目录][索引]
Within an entry of the outline tree, hand-formatted lists can provide additional structure. They also provide a way to create lists of checkboxes (see Checkboxes). Org supports editing such lists, and every exporter (see Exporting) can parse and format them.
Org knows ordered lists, unordered lists, and description lists.
Items belonging to the same list must have the same indentation on the first line. In particular, if an ordered list reaches number ‘10.’, then the 2-digit numbers must be written left-aligned with the other numbers in the list. An item ends before the next line that is less or equally indented than its bullet/number.
A list ends whenever every item has ended, which means before any line less or equally indented than items at top level. It also ends before two blank lines. In that case, all items are closed. Here is an example:
* Lord of the Rings My favorite scenes are (in this order) 1. The attack of the Rohirrim 2. Eowyn's fight with the witch king + this was already my favorite scene in the book + I really like Miranda Otto. 3. Peter Jackson being shot by Legolas - on DVD only He makes a really funny face when it happens. But in the end, no individual scenes matter but the film as a whole. Important actors in this film are: - Elijah Wood :: He plays Frodo - Sean Astin :: He plays Sam, Frodo's friend. I still remember him very well from his role as Mikey Walsh in /The Goonies/.
Org supports these lists by tuning filling and wrapping commands to deal with them correctly, and by exporting them properly (see Exporting). Since indentation is what governs the structure of these lists, many structural constructs like ‘#+BEGIN_’ blocks can be indented to signal that they belong to a particular item.
If you find that using a different bullet for a sub-list—than that
used for the current list-level—improves readability, customize the
variable org-list-demote-modify-bullet
. To get a greater difference
of indentation between items and theirs sub-items, customize
org-list-indent-offset
.
The following commands act on items when point is in the first line of
an item—the line with the bullet or number. Some of them imply the
application of automatic rules to keep list structure intact. If some
of these actions get in your way, configure org-list-automatic-rules
to disable them individually.
org-cycle
)Items can be folded just like headline levels. Normally this works
only if point is on a plain list item. For more details, see the
variable org-cycle-include-plain-lists
. If this variable is set
to integrate
, plain list items are treated like low-level
headlines. The level of an item is then given by the indentation of
the bullet/number. Items are always subordinate to real headlines,
however; the hierarchies remain completely separated. In a new item
with no text yet, the first TAB demotes the item to
become a child of the previous one. Subsequent TABs move
the item to meaningful levels in the list and eventually get it back
to its initial position.
org-insert-heading
)Insert new item at current level. With a prefix argument, force a new heading (see Structure Editing). If this command is used in the middle of an item, that item is split in two, and the second part becomes the new item13. If this command is executed before item’s body, the new item is created before the current one.
Insert a new item with a checkbox (see Checkboxes).
Jump to the previous/next item in the current list, but only if
org-support-shift-select
is off14. If not, you can still use
paragraph jumping commands like C-UP and
C-DOWN to quite similar effect.
Move the item including subitems up/down15, i.e., swap with previous/next item of same indentation. If the list is ordered, renumbering is automatic.
Decrease/increase the indentation of an item, leaving children alone.
Decrease/increase the indentation of the item, including subitems. Initially, the item tree is selected based on current indentation. When these commands are executed several times in direct succession, the initially selected region is used, even if the new indentation would imply a different hierarchy. To use the new hierarchy, break the command chain by moving point.
As a special case, using this command on the very first item of
a list moves the whole list. This behavior can be disabled by
configuring org-list-automatic-rules
. The global indentation of
a list has no influence on the text after the list.
If there is a checkbox (see Checkboxes) in the item line, toggle the state of the checkbox. In any case, verify bullets and indentation consistency in the whole list.
Cycle the entire list level through the different itemize/enumerate
bullets (‘-’, ‘+’, ‘*’, ‘1.’, ‘1)’) or a subset of them, depending
on org-plain-list-ordered-item-terminator
, the type of list, and
its indentation. With a numeric prefix argument N, select the Nth
bullet from this list. If there is an active region when calling
this, all lines are converted to list items. With a prefix
argument, the selected text is changed into a single item. If the
first line already was a list item, any item marker is removed from
the list. Finally, even without an active region, a normal line is
converted into a list item.
Turn a plain list item into a headline—so that it becomes a subheading at its location. See Structure Editing, for a detailed explanation.
Turn the whole plain list into a subtree of the current heading. Checkboxes (see Checkboxes) become ‘TODO’, respectively ‘DONE’, keywords when unchecked, respectively checked.
This command also cycles bullet styles when point is in on the
bullet or anywhere in an item line, details depending on
org-support-shift-select
.
Sort the plain list. Prompt for the sorting method: numerically, alphabetically, by time, or by custom function.
下一页: Blocks, 上一页: Plain Lists, 返回: Document Structure [目录][索引]
Sometimes you want to keep information associated with an entry, but you normally do not want to see it. For this, Org mode has drawers. They can contain anything but a headline and another drawer. Drawers look like this:
** This is a headline Still outside the drawer :DRAWERNAME: This is inside the drawer. :END: After the drawer.
You can interactively insert a drawer at point by calling
org-insert-drawer
, which is bound to C-c C-x d. With an
active region, this command puts the region inside the drawer. With
a prefix argument, this command calls org-insert-property-drawer
,
which creates a ‘PROPERTIES’ drawer right below the current headline.
Org mode uses this special drawer for storing properties (see
Properties and Columns). You cannot use it for anything else.
Completion over drawer keywords is also possible using M-TAB16.
Visibility cycling (see Visibility Cycling) on the headline hides and shows the entry, but keep the drawer collapsed to a single line. In order to look inside the drawer, you need to move point to the drawer line and press TAB there.
You can also arrange for state change notes (see Tracking TODO state changes) and clock times (see Clocking Work Time) to be stored in a ‘LOGBOOK’ drawer. If you want to store a quick note there, in a similar way to state changes, use
上一页: Drawers, 返回: Document Structure [目录][索引]
Org mode uses ‘#+BEGIN’ … ‘#+END’ blocks for various purposes from
including source code examples (see Literal Examples) to capturing
time logging information (see Clocking Work Time). These blocks can
be folded and unfolded by pressing TAB in the ‘#+BEGIN’
line. You can also get all blocks folded at startup by configuring
the variable org-hide-block-startup
or on a per-file basis by using
#+STARTUP: hideblocks #+STARTUP: nohideblocks
下一页: Hyperlinks, 上一页: Document Structure, 返回: Top [目录][索引]
Org comes with a fast and intuitive table editor. Spreadsheet-like calculations are supported using the Emacs Calc package (see (calc)GNU Emacs Calculator Manual).
• 内置表格编辑器: | 简单的表格。 | |
• 列宽和对其方式: | 废除自动设置。 | |
• 列组: | 分组以触发垂直线。 | |
• Orgtbl模式: | 表格编辑器作为次要模式。 | |
• 电子表格: | 具有电子表格功能的表格编辑器。 | |
• Org图表: | 从Org表格中生成图表格。 |
下一页: Column Width and Alignment, 返回: Tables [目录][索引]
Org makes it easy to format tables in plain ASCII. Any line with ‘|’ as the first non-whitespace character is considered part of a table. ‘|’ is also the column separator17. Moreover, a line starting with ‘|-’ is a horizontal rule. It separates rows explicitly. Rows before the first horizontal rule are header lines. A table might look like this:
| Name | Phone | Age | |-------+-------+-----| | Peter | 1234 | 17 | | Anna | 4321 | 25 |
A table is re-aligned automatically each time you press TAB, RET or C-c C-c inside the table. TAB also moves to the next field—RET to the next row—and creates new table rows at the end of the table or before horizontal lines. The indentation of the table is set by the first line. Horizontal rules are automatically expanded on every re-align to span the whole table width. So, to create the above table, you would only type
|Name|Phone|Age| |-
and then press TAB to align the table and start filling in fields. Even faster would be to type ‘|Name|Phone|Age’ followed by C-c RET.
When typing text into a field, Org treats DEL,
Backspace, and all character keys in a special way, so that
inserting and deleting avoids shifting other fields. Also, when
typing immediately after point was moved into a new field with
TAB, S-TAB or RET, the field is
automatically made blank. If this behavior is too unpredictable for
you, configure the option org-table-auto-blank-field
.
org-table-create-or-convert-from-region
)Convert the active region to table. If every line contains at least one TAB character, the function assumes that the material is tab separated. If every line contains a comma, comma-separated values (CSV) are assumed. If not, lines are split at whitespace into fields. You can use a prefix argument to force a specific separator: C-u forces CSV, C-u C-u forces TAB, C-u C-u C-u prompts for a regular expression to match the separator, and a numeric argument N indicates that at least N consecutive spaces, or alternatively a TAB will be the separator.
If there is no active region, this command creates an empty Org table. But it is easier just to start typing, like | N a m e | P h o n e | A g e RET | - TAB.
org-table-align
)Re-align the table without moving point.
org-table-next-field
)Re-align the table, move to the next field. Creates a new row if necessary.
org-table-blank-field
)Blank the field at point.
org-table-previous-field
)Re-align, move to previous field.
org-table-next-row
)Re-align the table and move down to next row. Creates a new row if necessary. At the beginning or end of a line, RET still inserts a new line, so it can be used to split a table.
org-table-beginning-of-field
)Move to beginning of the current table field, or on to the previous field.
org-table-end-of-field
)Move to end of the current table field, or on to the next field.
org-table-move-column-left
)Move the current column left.
org-table-move-column-right
)Move the current column right.
org-table-delete-column
)Kill the current column.
org-table-insert-column
)Insert a new column at point position. Move the recent column and all cells to the right of this column to the right.
org-table-move-row-up
)Move the current row up.
org-table-move-row-down
)Move the current row down.
org-table-kill-row
)Kill the current row or horizontal line.
org-table-move-cell-up
)Move cell up by swapping with adjacent cell.
org-table-move-cell-down
)Move cell down by swapping with adjacent cell.
org-table-move-cell-left
)Move cell left by swapping with adjacent cell.
org-table-move-cell-right
)Move cell right by swapping with adjacent cell.
org-table-insert-row
)Insert a new row above the current row. With a prefix argument, the line is created below the current one.
org-table-insert-hline
)Insert a horizontal line below current row. With a prefix argument, the line is created above the current line.
org-table-hline-and-move
)Insert a horizontal line below current row, and move point into the row below that line.
org-table-sort-lines
)Sort the table lines in the region. The position of point indicates the column to be used for sorting, and the range of lines is the range between the nearest horizontal separator lines, or the entire table. If point is before the first column, you are prompted for the sorting column. If there is an active region, the mark specifies the first line and the sorting column, while point should be in the last line to be included into the sorting. The command prompts for the sorting type, alphabetically, numerically, or by time. You can sort in normal or reverse order. You can also supply your own key extraction and comparison functions. When called with a prefix argument, alphabetic sorting is case-sensitive.
org-table-copy-region
)Copy a rectangular region from a table to a special clipboard. Point and mark determine edge fields of the rectangle. If there is no active region, copy just the current field. The process ignores horizontal separator lines.
org-table-cut-region
)Copy a rectangular region from a table to a special clipboard, and blank all fields in the rectangle. So this is the “cut” operation.
org-table-paste-rectangle
)Paste a rectangular region into a table. The upper left corner ends up in the current field. All involved fields are overwritten. If the rectangle does not fit into the present table, the table is enlarged as needed. The process ignores horizontal separator lines.
org-table-wrap-region
)Split the current field at point position and move the rest to the line below. If there is an active region, and both point and mark are in the same column, the text in the column is wrapped to minimum width for the given number of lines. A numeric prefix argument may be used to change the number of desired lines. If there is no region, but you specify a prefix argument, the current field is made blank, and the content is appended to the field above.
org-table-sum
)Sum the numbers in the current column, or in the rectangle defined by the active region. The result is shown in the echo area and can be inserted with C-y.
org-table-copy-down
)When current field is empty, copy from first non-empty field above. When not empty, copy current field down to next row and move point along with it.
Depending on the variable org-table-copy-increment
, integer and
time stamp field values, and fields prefixed or suffixed with
a whole number, can be incremented during copy. Also, a 0
prefix
argument temporarily disables the increment.
This key is also used by shift-selection and related modes (see Conflicts).
org-table-edit-field
)Edit the current field in a separate window. This is useful for fields that are not fully visible (see Column Width and Alignment). When called with a C-u prefix, just make the full field visible, so that it can be edited in place. When called with two C-u prefixes, make the editor window follow point through the table and always show the current field. The follow mode exits automatically when point leaves the table, or when you repeat this command with C-u C-u C-c `.
Import a file as a table. The table should be TAB or whitespace separated. Use, for example, to import a spreadsheet table or data from a database, because these programs generally can write TAB-separated text files. This command works by inserting the file into the buffer and then converting the region to a table. Any prefix argument is passed on to the converter, which uses it to determine the separator.
org-table-create-or-convert-from-region
)Tables can also be imported by pasting tabular text into the Org buffer, selecting the pasted text with C-x C-x and then using the C-c | command (see Creation and conversion).
Export the table, by default as a TAB-separated file. Use for data
exchange with, for example, spreadsheet or database programs. The
format used to export the file can be configured in the variable
org-table-export-default-format
. You may also use properties
‘TABLE_EXPORT_FILE’ and ‘TABLE_EXPORT_FORMAT’ to specify the file
name and the format for table export in a subtree. Org supports
quite general formats for exported tables. The exporter format is
the same as the format used by Orgtbl radio tables, see Translator functions, for a detailed description.
Turn on the display of the first data row of the table at point in
the window header line when this first row is not visible anymore in
the buffer. You can activate this minor mode by default by setting
the option org-table-header-line-p
to t
.
下一页: Column Groups, 上一页: Built-in Table Editor, 返回: Tables [目录][索引]
The width of columns is automatically determined by the table editor. The alignment of a column is determined automatically from the fraction of number-like versus non-number fields in the column.
Editing a field may modify alignment of the table. Moving
a contiguous row or column—i.e., using TAB or
RET—automatically re-aligns it. If you want to disable
this behavior, set org-table-automatic-realign
to nil
. In any
case, you can always align manually a table:
Setting the option org-startup-align-all-tables
re-aligns all tables
in a file upon visiting it. You can also set this option on
a per-file basis with:
#+STARTUP: align #+STARTUP: noalign
Sometimes a single field or a few fields need to carry more text, leading to inconveniently wide columns. Maybe you want to hide away several columns or display them with a fixed width, regardless of content, as shown in the following example.
|---+---------------------+--------| |---+-------…+…| | | <6> | | | | <6> …|…| | 1 | one | some | ----\ | 1 | one …|…| | 2 | two | boring | ----/ | 2 | two …|…| | 3 | This is a long text | column | | 3 | This i…|…| |---+---------------------+--------| |---+-------…+…|
To set the width of a column, one field anywhere in the column may contain just the string ‘<N>’ where N specifies the width as a number of characters. You control displayed width of columns with the following tools:
org-table-toggle-column-width
)Shrink or expand current column.
If a width cookie specifies a width W for the column, shrinking it displays the first W visible characters only. Otherwise, the column is shrunk to a single character.
When called before the first column or after the last one, ask for a list of column ranges to operate on.
org-table-shrink
)Shrink all columns with a column width. Expand the others.
org-table-expand
)Expand all columns.
To see the full text of a shrunk field, hold the mouse over it:
a tool-tip window then shows the full contents of the field.
Alternatively, C-h . (display-local-help
) reveals them,
too. For convenience, any change near the shrunk part of a column
expands it.
Setting the option org-startup-shrink-all-tables
shrinks all columns
containing a width cookie in a file the moment it is visited. You can
also set this option on a per-file basis with:
#+STARTUP: shrink
If you would like to overrule the automatic alignment of number-rich columns to the right and of string-rich columns to the left, you can use ‘<r>’, ‘<c>’ or ‘<l>’ in a similar fashion. You may also combine alignment and field width like this: ‘<r10>’.
Lines which only contain these formatting cookies are removed automatically upon exporting the document.
下一页: Orgtbl Mode, 上一页: Column Width and Alignment, 返回: Tables [目录][索引]
When Org exports tables, it does so by default without vertical lines because that is visually more satisfying in general. Occasionally however, vertical lines can be useful to structure a table into groups of columns, much like horizontal lines can do for groups of rows. In order to specify column groups, you can use a special row where the first field contains only ‘/’. The further fields can either contain ‘<’ to indicate that this column should start a group, ‘>’ to indicate the end of a column, or ‘<>’ (no space between ‘<’ and ‘>’) to make a column a group of its own. Upon export, boundaries between column groups are marked with vertical lines. Here is an example:
| N | N^2 | N^3 | N^4 | sqrt(n) | sqrt[4](N) | |---+-----+-----+-----+---------+------------| | / | < | | > | < | > | | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | | 2 | 4 | 8 | 16 | 1.4142 | 1.1892 | | 3 | 9 | 27 | 81 | 1.7321 | 1.3161 | |---+-----+-----+-----+---------+------------| #+TBLFM: $2=$1^2::$3=$1^3::$4=$1^4::$5=sqrt($1)::$6=sqrt(sqrt(($1)))
It is also sufficient to just insert the column group starters after every vertical line you would like to have:
| N | N^2 | N^3 | N^4 | sqrt(n) | sqrt[4](N) | |---+-----+-----+-----+---------+------------| | / | < | | | < | |
下一页: The Spreadsheet, 上一页: Column Groups, 返回: Tables [目录][索引]
If you like the intuitive way the Org table editor works, you might also want to use it in other modes like Text mode or Mail mode. The minor mode Orgtbl mode makes this possible. You can always toggle the mode with M-x orgtbl-mode. To turn it on by default, for example in Message mode, use
(add-hook 'message-mode-hook 'turn-on-orgtbl)
Furthermore, with some special setup, it is possible to maintain tables in arbitrary syntax with Orgtbl mode. For example, it is possible to construct LaTeX tables with the underlying ease and power of Orgtbl mode, including spreadsheet capabilities. For details, see Tables in Arbitrary Syntax.
下一页: Org Plot, 上一页: Orgtbl Mode, 返回: Tables [目录][索引]
The table editor makes use of the Emacs Calc package to implement spreadsheet-like capabilities. It can also evaluate Emacs Lisp forms to derive fields from other fields. While fully featured, Org’s implementation is not identical to other spreadsheets. For example, Org knows the concept of a column formula that will be applied to all non-header fields in a column without having to copy the formula to each relevant field. There is also a formula debugger, and a formula editor with features for highlighting fields in the table corresponding to the references at point in the formula, moving these references by arrow keys.
• 引用: | 如何引用另一个字段或范围。 | |
• 计算公式语法: | 使用Calc来计算东西。 | |
• Lisp的公式语法: | 用Emacs Lisp编写公式。 | |
• 时间与时长: | 如何计算时间与时长。 | |
• 字段和范围公式: | 特定(范围)字段的公式。 | |
• 列公式: | 公式对整列有效。 | |
•查找函数: | 用于搜索表格的查找函数。 | |
• 编辑调试公式: | 修正公式。 | |
• 更新表格: | 重新计算所有从属字段。 | |
• 高级功能: | 字段和列名,自动重新计算. |
下一页: Formula syntax for Calc, 返回: The Spreadsheet [目录][索引]
To compute fields in the table from other fields, formulas must reference other fields or ranges. In Org, fields can be referenced by name, by absolute coordinates, and by relative coordinates. To find out what the coordinates of a field are, press C-c ? in that field, or press C-c } to toggle the display of a grid.
Formulas can reference the value of another field in two ways. Like in any other spreadsheet, you may reference fields with a letter/number combination like ‘B3’, meaning the second field in the third row. However, Org prefers to use another, more general representation that looks like this:18
@ROW$COLUMN
Column specifications can be absolute like ‘$1’, ‘$2’, …, ‘$N’, or relative to the current column, i.e., the column of the field which is being computed, like ‘$+1’ or ‘$-2’. ‘$<’ and ‘$>’ are immutable references to the first and last column, respectively, and you can use ‘$>>>’ to indicate the third column from the right.
The row specification only counts data lines and ignores horizontal separator lines, or “hlines”. Like with columns, you can use absolute row numbers ‘@1’, ‘@2’, …, ‘@N’, and row numbers relative to the current row like ‘@+3’ or ‘@-1’. ‘@<’ and ‘@>’ are immutable references the first and last row in the table, respectively. You may also specify the row relative to one of the hlines: ‘@I’ refers to the first hline, ‘@II’ to the second, etc. ‘@-I’ refers to the first such line above the current line, ‘@+I’ to the first such line below the current line. You can also write ‘@III+2’ which is the second data line after the third hline in the table.
‘@0’ and ‘$0’ refer to the current row and column, respectively, i.e., to the row/column for the field being computed. Also, if you omit either the column or the row part of the reference, the current row/column is implied.
Org’s references with unsigned numbers are fixed references in the sense that if you use the same reference in the formula for two different fields, the same field is referenced each time. Org’s references with signed numbers are floating references because the same reference operator can reference different fields depending on the field being calculated by the formula.
Here are a few examples:
‘@2$3’ | 2nd row, 3rd column (same as ‘C2’) |
‘$5’ | column 5 in the current row (same as ‘E&’) |
‘@2’ | current column, row 2 |
‘@-1$-3’ | field one row up, three columns to the left |
‘@-I$2’ | field just under hline above current row, column 2 |
‘@>$5’ | field in the last row, in column 5 |
You may reference a rectangular range of fields by specifying two field references connected by two dots ‘..’. The ends are included in the range. If both fields are in the current row, you may simply use ‘$2..$7’, but if at least one field is in a different row, you need to use the general ‘@ROW$COLUMN’ format at least for the first field, i.e., the reference must start with ‘@’ in order to be interpreted correctly. Examples:
‘$1..$3’ | first three fields in the current row |
‘$P..$Q’ | range, using column names (see Advanced features) |
‘$<<<..$>>’ | start in third column, continue to the last but one |
‘@2$1..@4$3’ | nine fields between these two fields (same as ‘A2..C4’) |
‘@-1$-2..@-1’ | 3 fields in the row above, starting from 2 columns on the left |
‘@I..II’ | between first and second hline, short for ‘@I..@II’ |
Range references return a vector of values that can be fed into Calc vector functions. Empty fields in ranges are normally suppressed, so that the vector contains only the non-empty fields. For other options with the mode switches ‘E’, ‘N’ and examples, see Formula syntax for Calc.
One of the very first actions during evaluation of Calc formulas and
Lisp formulas is to substitute ‘@#’ and ‘$#’ in the formula with the
row or column number of the field where the current result will go to.
The traditional Lisp formula equivalents are org-table-current-dline
and org-table-current-column
. Examples:
Insert column number on odd rows, set field to empty on even rows.
Copy text or values of each row of column 1 of the table named FOO into column 2 of the current table.
Insert the doubled value of each column of row 1 of the table named FOO into row 3 of the current table.
For the second and third examples, table FOO must have at least as many rows or columns as the current table. Note that this is inefficient19 for large number of rows.
‘$name’ is interpreted as the name of a column, parameter or constant.
Constants are defined globally through the variable
org-table-formula-constants
, and locally—for the file—through
a line like this example:
#+CONSTANTS: c=299792458. pi=3.14 eps=2.4e-6
Also, properties (see Properties and Columns) can be used as constants in table formulas: for a property ‘Xyz’ use the name ‘$PROP_Xyz’, and the property will be searched in the current outline entry and in the hierarchy above it. If you have the ‘constants.el’ package, it will also be used to resolve constants, including natural constants like ‘$h’ for Planck’s constant, and units like ‘$km’ for kilometers20. Column names and parameters can be specified in special table lines. These are described below, see Advanced features. All names must start with a letter, and further consist of letters and numbers.
You may also reference constants, fields and ranges from a different table, either in the current file or even in a different file. The syntax is
remote(NAME,REF)
where NAME can be the name of a table in the current file as set by a ‘#+NAME:’ line before the table. It can also be the ID of an entry, even in a different file, and the reference then refers to the first table in that entry. REF is an absolute field or range reference as described above for example ‘@3$3’ or ‘$somename’, valid in the referenced table.
When NAME has the format ‘@ROW$COLUMN’, it is substituted with the name or ID found in this field of the current table. For example ‘remote($1, @@>$2)’ ⇒ ‘remote(year_2013, @@>$1)’. The format ‘B3’ is not supported because it can not be distinguished from a plain table name or ID.
下一页: Formula syntax for Lisp, 上一页: References, 返回: The Spreadsheet [目录][索引]
A formula can be any algebraic expression understood by the Emacs Calc
package. Note that Calc has the non-standard convention that ‘/’ has
lower precedence than ‘*’, so that ‘a/b*c’ is interpreted as
‘(a/(b*c))’. Before evaluation by calc-eval
(see (calc)Calling Calc from
Your Lisp Programs), variable substitution takes place according to
the rules described above.
The range vectors can be directly fed into the Calc vector functions
like vmean
and vsum
.
A formula can contain an optional mode string after a semicolon. This
string consists of flags to influence Calc and other modes during
execution. By default, Org uses the standard Calc modes (precision
12, angular units degrees, fraction and symbolic modes off). The
display format, however, has been changed to ‘(float 8)’ to keep
tables compact. The default settings can be configured using the
variable org-calc-default-modes
.
Set the internal Calc calculation precision to 20 digits.
Normal, scientific, engineering or fixed format of the result of Calc passed back to Org. Calc formatting is unlimited in precision as long as the Calc calculation precision is greater.
Degree and radian angle modes of Calc.
Fraction and symbolic modes of Calc.
Duration computations in Calc or Lisp, Durations and time values.
If and how to consider empty fields. Without ‘E’ empty fields in range references are suppressed so that the Calc vector or Lisp list contains only the non-empty fields. With ‘E’ the empty fields are kept. For empty fields in ranges or empty field references the value ‘nan’ (not a number) is used in Calc formulas and the empty string is used for Lisp formulas. Add ‘N’ to use 0 instead for both formula types. For the value of a field the mode ‘N’ has higher precedence than ‘E’.
Interpret all fields as numbers, use 0 for non-numbers. See the next section to see how this is essential for computations with Lisp formulas. In Calc formulas it is used only occasionally because there number strings are already interpreted as numbers without ‘N’.
Literal, for Lisp formulas only. See the next section.
Unless you use large integer numbers or high-precision calculation and
display for floating point numbers you may alternatively provide
a printf
format specifier to reformat the Calc result after it has
been passed back to Org instead of letting Calc already do the
formatting21. A few examples:
‘$1+$2’ | Sum of first and second field |
‘$1+$2;%.2f’ | Same, format result to two decimals |
‘exp($2)+exp($1)’ | Math functions can be used |
‘$0;%.1f’ | Reformat current cell to 1 decimal |
‘($3-32)*5/9’ | Degrees F → C conversion |
‘$c/$1/$cm’ | Hz → cm conversion, using ‘constants.el’ |
‘tan($1);Dp3s1’ | Compute in degrees, precision 3, display SCI 1 |
‘sin($1);Dp3%.1e’ | Same, but use printf specifier for display |
‘vmean($2..$7)’ | Compute column range mean, using vector function |
‘vmean($2..$7);EN’ | Same, but treat empty fields as 0 |
‘taylor($3,x=7,2)’ | Taylor series of $3, at x=7, second degree |
Calc also contains a complete set of logical operations (see (calc)Logical Operations). For example
‘"teen"’ if age ‘$1’ is less than 20, else the Org table result field is set to empty with the empty string.
Sum of the first two columns. When at least one of the input fields is empty the Org table result field is set to empty. ‘E’ is required to not convert empty fields to 0. ‘f-1’ is an optional Calc format string similar to ‘%.1f’ but leaves empty results empty.
Mean value of a range unless there is any empty field. Every field
in the range that is empty is replaced by ‘nan’ which lets ‘vmean’
result in ‘nan’. Then ‘typeof =’ 12= detects the ‘nan’ from vmean
and the Org table result field is set to empty. Use this when the
sample set is expected to never have missing values.
Mean value of a range with empty fields skipped. Every field in the range that is empty is skipped. When all fields in the range are empty the mean value is not defined and the Org table result field is set to empty. Use this when the sample set can have a variable size.
To complete the example before: Mean value of a range with empty fields counting as samples with value 0. Use this only when incomplete sample sets should be padded with 0 to the full size.
You can add your own Calc functions defined in Emacs Lisp with
defmath
and use them in formula syntax for Calc.
下一页: Durations and time values, 上一页: Formula syntax for Calc, 返回: The Spreadsheet [目录][索引]
It is also possible to write a formula in Emacs Lisp. This can be useful for string manipulation and control structures, if Calc’s functionality is not enough.
If a formula starts with a single-quote followed by an opening
parenthesis, then it is evaluated as a Lisp form. The evaluation
should return either a string or a number. Just as with Calc
formulas, you can specify modes and a printf
format after
a semicolon.
With Emacs Lisp forms, you need to be conscious about the way field references are interpolated into the form. By default, a reference is interpolated as a Lisp string (in double-quotes) containing the field. If you provide the ‘N’ mode switch, all referenced elements are numbers—non-number fields will be zero—and interpolated as Lisp numbers, without quotes. If you provide the ‘L’ flag, all fields are interpolated literally, without quotes. For example, if you want a reference to be interpreted as a string by the Lisp form, enclose the reference operator itself in double-quotes, like ‘"$3"’. Ranges are inserted as space-separated fields, so you can embed them in list or vector syntax.
Here are a few examples—note how the ‘N’ mode is used when we do computations in Lisp:
Swap the first two characters of the content of column 1.
Add columns 1 and 2, equivalent to Calc’s ‘$1+$2’.
Compute the sum of columns 1 to 4, like Calc’s ‘vsum($1..$4)’.
下一页: Field and range formulas, 上一页: Formula syntax for Lisp, 返回: The Spreadsheet [目录][索引]
If you want to compute time values use the ‘T’, ‘t’, or ‘U’ flag, either in Calc formulas or Elisp formulas:
| Task 1 | Task 2 | Total | |---------+----------+----------| | 2:12 | 1:47 | 03:59:00 | | 2:12 | 1:47 | 03:59 | | 3:02:20 | -2:07:00 | 0.92 | #+TBLFM: @2$3=$1+$2;T::@3$3=$1+$2;U::@4$3=$1+$2;t
Input duration values must be of the form ‘HH:MM[:SS]’, where seconds
are optional. With the ‘T’ flag, computed durations are displayed as
‘HH:MM:SS’ (see the first formula above). With the ‘U’ flag, seconds
are omitted so that the result is only ‘HH:MM’ (see second formula
above). Zero-padding of the hours field depends upon the value of the
variable org-table-duration-hour-zero-padding
.
With the ‘t’ flag, computed durations are displayed according to the
value of the option org-table-duration-custom-format
, which defaults
to hours
and displays the result as a fraction of hours (see the
third formula in the example above).
Negative duration values can be manipulated as well, and integers are considered as seconds in addition and subtraction.
下一页: Column formulas, 上一页: Durations and time values, 返回: The Spreadsheet [目录][索引]
To assign a formula to a particular field, type it directly into the field, preceded by ‘:=’, for example ‘vsum(@II..III)’. When you press TAB or RET or C-c C-c with point still in the field, the formula is stored as the formula for this field, evaluated, and the current field is replaced with the result.
Formulas are stored in a special ‘TBLFM’ keyword located directly below the table. If you type the equation in the fourth field of the third data line in the table, the formula looks like ‘@3$4=$1+$2’. When inserting/deleting/swapping column and rows with the appropriate commands, absolute references (but not relative ones) in stored formulas are modified in order to still reference the same field. To avoid this from happening, in particular in range references, anchor ranges at the table borders (using ‘@<’, ‘@>’, ‘$<’, ‘$>’), or at hlines using the ‘@I’ notation. Automatic adaptation of field references does not happen if you edit the table structure with normal editing commands—you must fix the formulas yourself.
Instead of typing an equation into the field, you may also use the following command
org-table-eval-formula
)Install a new formula for the current field. The command prompts for a formula with default taken from the ‘TBLFM’ keyword, applies it to the current field, and stores it.
The left-hand side of a formula can also be a special expression in order to assign the formula to a number of different fields. There is no keyboard shortcut to enter such range formulas. To add them, use the formula editor (see Editing and debugging formulas) or edit the ‘TBLFM’ keyword directly.
Column formula, valid for the entire column. This is so common that Org treats these formulas in a special way, see Column formulas.
Row formula, applies to all fields in the specified row. ‘@>=’ means the last row.
Range formula, applies to all fields in the given rectangular range. This can also be used to assign a formula to some but not all fields in a row.
Named field, see Advanced features.
下一页: Lookup functions, 上一页: Field and range formulas, 返回: The Spreadsheet [目录][索引]
When you assign a formula to a simple column reference like ‘$3=’, the same formula is used in all fields of that column, with the following very convenient exceptions: (i) If the table contains horizontal separator hlines with rows above and below, everything before the first such hline is considered part of the table header and is not modified by column formulas. Therefore a header is mandatory when you use column formulas and want to add hlines to group rows, like for example to separate a total row at the bottom from the summand rows above. (ii) Fields that already get a value from a field/range formula are left alone by column formulas. These conditions make column formulas very easy to use.
To assign a formula to a column, type it directly into any field in the column, preceded by an equal sign, like ‘=$1+$2’. When you press TAB or RET or C-c C-c with point still in the field, the formula is stored as the formula for the current column, evaluated and the current field replaced with the result. If the field contains only ‘=’, the previously stored formula for this column is used. For each column, Org only remembers the most recently used formula. In the ‘TBLFM’ keyword, column formulas look like ‘$4=$1+$2’. The left-hand side of a column formula can not be the name of column, it must be the numeric column reference or ‘$>’.
Instead of typing an equation into the field, you may also use the following command:
org-table-eval-formula
)Install a new formula for the current column and replace current field with the result of the formula. The command prompts for a formula, with default taken from the ‘TBLFM’ keyword, applies it to the current field and stores it. With a numeric prefix argument, e.g., C-5 C-c =, the command applies it to that many consecutive fields in the current column.
下一页: Editing and debugging formulas, 上一页: Column formulas, 返回: The Spreadsheet [目录][索引]
Org has three predefined Emacs Lisp functions for lookups in tables.
Searches for the first element S in list S-LIST for which
(PREDICATE VAL S)
is non-nil
; returns the value from the corresponding position in
list R-LIST. The default PREDICATE is
equal
. Note that the parameters VAL and S
are passed to PREDICATE in the same order as the
corresponding parameters are in the call to org-lookup-first
,
where VAL precedes S-LIST. If
R-LIST is nil
, the matching element S of
S-LIST is returned.
Similar to org-lookup-first
above, but searches for the last
element for which PREDICATE is non-nil
.
Similar to org-lookup-first
, but searches for all elements for
which PREDICATE is non-nil
, and returns all
corresponding values. This function can not be used by itself in
a formula, because it returns a list of values. However, powerful
lookups can be built when this function is combined with other Emacs
Lisp functions.
If the ranges used in these functions contain empty fields, the ‘E’ mode for the formula should usually be specified: otherwise empty fields are not included in S-LIST and/or R-LIST which can, for example, result in an incorrect mapping from an element of S-LIST to the corresponding element of R-LIST.
These three functions can be used to implement associative arrays, count matching cells, rank results, group data, etc. For practical examples see this tutorial on Worg.
下一页: Updating the table, 上一页: Lookup functions, 返回: The Spreadsheet [目录][索引]
You can edit individual formulas in the minibuffer or directly in the
field. Org can also prepare a special buffer with all active formulas
of a table. When offering a formula for editing, Org converts
references to the standard format (like ‘B3’ or ‘D&’) if possible. If
you prefer to only work with the internal format (like ‘@3$2’ or
‘$4’), configure the variable org-table-use-standard-references
.
org-table-eval-formula
)Edit the formula associated with the current column/field in the minibuffer. See Column formulas, and Field and range formulas.
org-table-eval-formula
)Re-insert the active formula (either a field formula, or a column formula) into the current field, so that you can edit it directly in the field. The advantage over editing in the minibuffer is that you can use the command C-c ?.
org-table-field-info
)While editing a formula in a table field, highlight the field(s) referenced by the reference at point position in the formula.
org-table-toggle-coordinate-overlays
)Toggle the display of row and column numbers for a table, using overlays. These are updated each time the table is aligned; you can force it with C-c C-c.
org-table-toggle-formula-debugger
)Toggle the formula debugger on and off. See below.
org-table-edit-formulas
)Edit all formulas for the current table in a special buffer, where the formulas are displayed one per line. If the current field has an active formula, point in the formula editor marks it. While inside the special buffer, Org automatically highlights any field or range reference at point position. You may edit, remove and add formulas, and use the following commands:
org-table-fedit-finish
)Exit the formula editor and store the modified formulas. With C-u prefix, also apply the new formulas to the entire table.
org-table-fedit-abort
)Exit the formula editor without installing changes.
org-table-fedit-toggle-ref-type
)Toggle all references in the formula editor between standard (like ‘B3’) and internal (like ‘@3$2’).
org-table-fedit-lisp-indent
)Pretty-print or indent Lisp formula at point. When in a line containing a Lisp formula, format the formula according to Emacs Lisp rules. Another TAB collapses the formula back again. In the open formula, TAB re-indents just like in Emacs Lisp mode.
lisp-complete-symbol
)Complete Lisp symbols, just like in Emacs Lisp mode.
Shift the reference at point. For example, if the reference is ‘B3’ and you press S-RIGHT, it becomes ‘C3’. This also works for relative references and for hline references.
org-table-fedit-line-up
)Move the test line for column formulas up in the Org buffer.
org-table-fedit-line-down
)Move the test line for column formulas down in the Org buffer.
org-table-fedit-scroll-up
)Scroll up the window displaying the table.
org-table-fedit-scroll-down
)Scroll down the window displaying the table.
Turn the coordinate grid in the table on and off.
Making a table field blank does not remove the formula associated with the field, because that is stored in a different line—the ‘TBLFM’ keyword line. During the next recalculation, the field will be filled again. To remove a formula from a field, you have to give an empty reply when prompted for the formula, or to edit the ‘TBLFM’ keyword.
You may edit the ‘TBLFM’ keyword directly and re-apply the changed equations with C-c C-c in that line or with the normal recalculation commands in the table.
You may apply the formula temporarily. This is useful when you want to switch the formula applied to the table. Place multiple ‘TBLFM’ keywords right after the table, and then press C-c C-c on the formula to apply. Here is an example:
| x | y | |---+---| | 1 | | | 2 | | #+TBLFM: $2=$1*1 #+TBLFM: $2=$1*2
Pressing C-c C-c in the line of ‘#+TBLFM: $2=$1*2’ yields:
| x | y | |---+---| | 1 | 2 | | 2 | 4 | #+TBLFM: $2=$1*1 #+TBLFM: $2=$1*2
If you recalculate this table, with C-u C-c *, for example, you get the following result from applying only the first ‘TBLFM’ keyword.
| x | y | |---+---| | 1 | 1 | | 2 | 2 | #+TBLFM: $2=$1*1 #+TBLFM: $2=$1*2
When the evaluation of a formula leads to an error, the field content becomes the string ‘#ERROR’. If you would like to see what is going on during variable substitution and calculation in order to find a bug, turn on formula debugging in the Tbl menu and repeat the calculation, for example by pressing C-u C-u C-c = RET in a field. Detailed information are displayed.
下一页: Advanced features, 上一页: Editing and debugging formulas, 返回: The Spreadsheet [目录][索引]
Recalculation of a table is normally not automatic, but needs to be triggered by a command. To make recalculation at least semi-automatic, see Advanced features.
In order to recalculate a line of a table or the entire table, use the following commands:
org-table-recalculate
)Recalculate the current row by first applying the stored column formulas from left to right, and all field/range formulas in the current row.
Recompute the entire table, line by line. Any lines before the first hline are left alone, assuming that these are part of the table header.
org-table-iterate
)Iterate the table by recomputing it until no further changes occur. This may be necessary if some computed fields use the value of other fields that are computed later in the calculation sequence.
Recompute all tables in the current buffer.
Iterate all tables in the current buffer, in order to converge table-to-table dependencies.
上一页: Updating the table, 返回: The Spreadsheet [目录][索引]
If you want the recalculation of fields to happen automatically, or if you want to be able to assign names22 to fields and columns, you need to reserve the first column of the table for special marking characters.
org-table-rotate-recalc-marks
)Rotate the calculation mark in first column through the states ‘#’, ‘*’, ‘!’, ‘$’. When there is an active region, change all marks in the region.
Here is an example of a table that collects exam results of students and makes use of these features:
|---+---------+--------+--------+--------+-------+------| | | Student | Prob 1 | Prob 2 | Prob 3 | Total | Note | |---+---------+--------+--------+--------+-------+------| | ! | | P1 | P2 | P3 | Tot | | | # | Maximum | 10 | 15 | 25 | 50 | 10.0 | | ^ | | m1 | m2 | m3 | mt | | |---+---------+--------+--------+--------+-------+------| | # | Peter | 10 | 8 | 23 | 41 | 8.2 | | # | Sam | 2 | 4 | 3 | 9 | 1.8 | |---+---------+--------+--------+--------+-------+------| | | Average | | | | 25.0 | | | ^ | | | | | at | | | $ | max=50 | | | | | | |---+---------+--------+--------+--------+-------+------| #+TBLFM: $6=vsum($P1..$P3)::$7=10*$Tot/$max;%.1f::$at=vmean(@-II..@-I);%.1f
Important: Please note that for these special tables, recalculating the table with C-u C-c * only affects rows that are marked ‘#’ or ‘*’, and fields that have a formula assigned to the field itself. The column formulas are not applied in rows with empty first field.
The marking characters have the following meaning:
The fields in this line define names for the columns, so that you may refer to a column as ‘$Tot’ instead of ‘$6’.
This row defines names for the fields above the row. With such a definition, any formula in the table may use ‘$m1’ to refer to the value ‘10’. Also, if you assign a formula to a names field, it is stored as ‘$name = ...’.
Similar to ‘^’, but defines names for the fields in the row below.
Fields in this row can define parameters for formulas. For example, if a field in a ‘$’ row contains ‘max=50’, then formulas in this table can refer to the value 50 using ‘$max’. Parameters work exactly like constants, only that they can be defined on a per-table basis.
Fields in this row are automatically recalculated when pressing TAB or RET or S-TAB in this row. Also, this row is selected for a global recalculation with C-u C-c *. Unmarked lines are left alone by this command.
Selects this line for global recalculation with C-u C-c *, but not for automatic recalculation. Use this when automatic recalculation slows down editing too much.
Do not export this line. Useful for lines that contain the narrowing ‘<N>’ markers or column group markers.
Finally, just to whet your appetite for what can be done with the fantastic Calc package, here is a table that computes the Taylor series of degree n at location x for a couple of functions.
|---+-------------+---+-----+--------------------------------------| | | Func | n | x | Result | |---+-------------+---+-----+--------------------------------------| | # | exp(x) | 1 | x | 1 + x | | # | exp(x) | 2 | x | 1 + x + x^2 / 2 | | # | exp(x) | 3 | x | 1 + x + x^2 / 2 + x^3 / 6 | | # | x^2+sqrt(x) | 2 | x=0 | x*(0.5 / 0) + x^2 (2 - 0.25 / 0) / 2 | | # | x^2+sqrt(x) | 2 | x=1 | 2 + 2.5 x - 2.5 + 0.875 (x - 1)^2 | | * | tan(x) | 3 | x | 0.0175 x + 1.77e-6 x^3 | |---+-------------+---+-----+--------------------------------------| #+TBLFM: $5=taylor($2,$4,$3);n3
上一页: The Spreadsheet, 返回: Tables [目录][索引]
Org Plot can produce graphs of information stored in Org tables, either graphically or in ASCII art.
Org Plot can produce 2D and 3D graphs of information stored in Org tables using Gnuplot and Gnuplot mode. To see this in action, ensure that you have both Gnuplot and Gnuplot mode installed on your system, then call C-c " g or M-x org-plot/gnuplot on the following table.
#+PLOT: title:"Citas" ind:1 deps:(3) type:2d with:histograms set:"yrange [0:]" | Sede | Max cites | H-index | |-----------+-----------+---------| | Chile | 257.72 | 21.39 | | Leeds | 165.77 | 19.68 | | Sao Paolo | 71.00 | 11.50 | | Stockholm | 134.19 | 14.33 | | Morelia | 257.56 | 17.67 |
Notice that Org Plot is smart enough to apply the table’s headers as labels. Further control over the labels, type, content, and appearance of plots can be exercised through the ‘PLOT’ keyword preceding a table. See below for a complete list of Org Plot options. For more information and examples see the Org Plot tutorial.
Specify any Gnuplot option to be set when graphing.
Specify the title of the plot.
Specify which column of the table to use as the ‘x’ axis.
Specify the columns to graph as a Lisp style list, surrounded by parentheses and separated by spaces for example ‘dep:(3 4)’ to graph the third and fourth columns. Defaults to graphing all other columns aside from the ‘ind’ column.
Specify whether the plot is ‘2d’, ‘3d’, or ‘grid’.
Specify a ‘with’ option to be inserted for every column being plotted, e.g., ‘lines’, ‘points’, ‘boxes’, ‘impulses’. Defaults to ‘lines’.
If you want to plot to a file, specify ‘"path/to/desired/output-file"’.
List of labels to be used for the ‘deps’. Defaults to the column headers if they exist.
Specify an entire line to be inserted in the Gnuplot script.
When plotting ‘3d’ or ‘grid’ types, set this to ‘t’ to graph a flat mapping rather than a ‘3d’ slope.
Specify format of Org mode timestamps as they will be parsed by Gnuplot. Defaults to ‘%Y-%m-%d-%H:%M:%S’.
If you want total control, you can specify a script file—place the file name between double-quotes—which will be used to plot. Before plotting, every instance of ‘$datafile’ in the specified script will be replaced with the path to the generated data file. Note: even if you set this option, you may still want to specify the plot type, as that can impact the content of the data file.
While point is on a column, typing C-c `` a or M-x orgtbl-ascii-plot create a new column containing an ASCII-art bars plot. The plot is implemented through a regular column formula. When the source column changes, the bar plot may be updated by refreshing the table, for example typing C-u C-c *.
| Sede | Max cites | | |---------------+-----------+--------------| | Chile | 257.72 | WWWWWWWWWWWW | | Leeds | 165.77 | WWWWWWWh | | Sao Paolo | 71.00 | WWW; | | Stockholm | 134.19 | WWWWWW: | | Morelia | 257.56 | WWWWWWWWWWWH | | Rochefourchat | 0.00 | | #+TBLFM: $3='(orgtbl-ascii-draw $2 0.0 257.72 12)
The formula is an Elisp call.
Draw an ASCII bar in a table.
VALUE is the value to plot.
MIN is the value displayed as an empty bar. MAX is the value filling all the WIDTH. Sources values outside this range are displayed as ‘too small’ or ‘too large’.
WIDTH is the number of characters of the bar plot. It defaults to ‘12’.
下一页: TODO Items, 上一页: Tables, 返回: Top [目录][索引]
Like HTML, Org provides support for links inside a file, external links to other files, Usenet articles, emails, and much more.
• 链接格式: | Org中链接的格式设置方式。 | |
• 内部链接: | 链接到当前文件中的其他位置。 | |
• 无线电目标: | 生成目标触发纯文本形式的链接。 | |
• 外部链接: | 指向互联网的类似URL的链接。 | |
• 处理链接: | 创建、插入和跟随。 | |
• 使用Org外部链接: | 从我的C源代码链接吗? | |
• 链接缩写: | 编写复杂链接的快捷方式。 | |
• 搜索选项: | 链接到特定位置。 | |
• 自定义搜索: | 当默认搜索不够用时。 |
下一页: Internal Links, 返回: Hyperlinks [目录][索引]
Org recognizes plain URIs, possibly wrapped within angle brackets23, and activate them as clickable links.
The general link format, however, looks like this:
[[LINK][DESCRIPTION]]
or alternatively
[[LINK]]
Some ‘\’, ‘[’ and ‘]’ characters in the LINK part need to be “escaped”, i.e., preceded by another ‘\’ character. More specifically, the following characters, and only them, must be escaped:
Functions inserting links (see Handling Links) properly escape
ambiguous characters. You only need to bother about the rules above
when inserting directly, or yanking, a URI within square brackets.
When in doubt, you may use the function org-link-escape
, which turns
a link string into its escaped form.
Once a link in the buffer is complete, with all brackets present, Org
changes the display so that ‘DESCRIPTION’ is displayed instead of
‘[[LINK][DESCRIPTION]]’ and ‘LINK’ is displayed instead of ‘[[LINK]]’.
Links are highlighted in the org-link
face, which, by default, is an
underlined face.
You can directly edit the visible part of a link. This can be either the LINK part, if there is no description, or the DESCRIPTION part otherwise. To also edit the invisible LINK part, use C-c C-l with point on the link (see Handling Links).
If you place point at the beginning or just behind the end of the displayed text and press BS, you remove the—invisible—bracket at that location24. This makes the link incomplete and the internals are again displayed as plain text. Inserting the missing bracket hides the link internals again. To show the internal structure of all links, use the menu: Org → Hyperlinks → Literal links.
下一页: Radio Targets, 上一页: Link Format, 返回: Hyperlinks [目录][索引]
A link that does not look like a URL—i.e., does not start with a known scheme or a file name—refers to the current document. You can follow it with C-c C-o when point is on the link, or with a mouse click (see Handling Links).
Org provides several refinements to internal navigation within a document. Most notably, a construct like ‘[[#my-custom-id]]’ specifically targets the entry with the ‘CUSTOM_ID’ property set to ‘my-custom-id’. Also, an internal link looking like ‘[[*Some section]]’ points to a headline with the name ‘Some section’25.
When the link does not belong to any of the cases above, Org looks for a dedicated target: the same string in double angular brackets, like ‘<<My Target>>’.
If no dedicated target exists, the link tries to match the exact name of an element within the buffer. Naming is done, unsurprisingly, with the ‘NAME’ keyword, which has to be put in the line before the element it refers to, as in the following example
#+NAME: My Target | a | table | |----+------------| | of | four cells |
Ultimately, if none of the above succeeds, Org searches for a headline
that is exactly the link text but may also include a TODO keyword and
tags, or initiates a plain text search, according to the value of
org-link-search-must-match-exact-headline
.
Note that you must make sure custom IDs, dedicated targets, and names are unique throughout the document. Org provides a linter to assist you in the process, if needed. See Org Syntax.
During export, internal links are used to mark objects and assign them a number. Marked objects are then referenced by links pointing to them. In particular, links without a description appear as the number assigned to the marked object26. In the following excerpt from an Org buffer
1. one item 2. <<target>>another item Here we refer to item [[target]].
The last sentence will appear as ‘Here we refer to item 2’ when exported.
In non-Org files, the search looks for the words in the link text. In the above example the search would be for ‘target’.
Following a link pushes a mark onto Org’s own mark ring. You can return to the previous position with C-c &. Using this command several times in direct succession goes back to positions recorded earlier.
下一页: External Links, 上一页: Internal Links, 返回: Hyperlinks [目录][索引]
Org can automatically turn any occurrences of certain target names in normal text into a link. So without explicitly creating a link, the text connects to the target radioing its position. Radio targets are enclosed by triple angular brackets. For example, a target ‘<<<My Target>>>’ causes each occurrence of ‘my target’ in normal text to become activated as a link. The Org file is scanned automatically for radio targets only when the file is first loaded into Emacs. To update the target list during editing, press C-c C-c with point on or at a target.
下一页: Handling Links, 上一页: Radio Targets, 返回: Hyperlinks [目录][索引]
Org supports links to files, websites, Usenet and email messages, BBDB database entries and links to both IRC conversations and their logs. External links are URL-like locators. They start with a short identifying string followed by a colon. There can be no space after the colon.
Here is the full set of built-in link types:
File links. File name may be remote, absolute, or relative.
Additionally, you can specify a line number, or a text search. In Org files, you may link to a headline name, a custom ID, or a code reference instead.
As a special case, “file” prefix may be omitted if the file name is complete, e.g., it starts with ‘./’, or ‘/’.
Same as file links but for files and folders attached to the current node (see Attachments). Attachment links are intended to behave exactly as file links but for files relative to the attachment directory.
Link to a BBDB record, with possible regexp completion.
Link to a document opened with DocView mode. You may specify a page number.
Link to an electronic resource, through its handle.
Execute an Elisp command upon activation.
Link to messages or folders from a given Emacs’ MUA.
Display documentation of a symbol in ‘*Help*’ buffer.
Web links.
Link to a specific headline by its ID property, in an Org file.
Link to an Info manual, or to a specific node.
Link to an IRC channel.
Link to message composition.
Usenet links.
Execute a shell command upon activation.
The following table illustrates the link types above, along with their options:
Link Type | Example |
---|---|
http | ‘http://staff.science.uva.nl/c.dominik/’ |
https | ‘https://orgmode.org/’ |
doi | ‘doi:10.1000/182’ |
file | ‘file:/home/dominik/images/jupiter.jpg’ |
‘/home/dominik/images/jupiter.jpg’ (same as above) | |
‘file:papers/last.pdf’ | |
‘./papers/last.pdf’ (same as above) | |
‘file:/ssh:me@some.where:papers/last.pdf’ (remote) | |
‘/ssh:me@some.where:papers/last.pdf’ (same as above) | |
‘file:sometextfile::NNN’ (jump to line number) | |
‘file:projects.org’ | |
‘file:projects.org::some words’ (text search)27 | |
‘file:projects.org::*task title’ (headline search) | |
‘file:projects.org::#custom-id’ (headline search) | |
attachment | ‘attachment:projects.org’ |
‘attachment:projects.org::some words’ (text search) | |
docview | ‘docview:papers/last.pdf::NNN’ |
id | ‘id:B7423F4D-2E8A-471B-8810-C40F074717E9’ |
news | ‘news:comp.emacs’ |
mailto | ‘mailto:adent@galaxy.net’ |
mhe | ‘mhe:folder’ (folder link) |
‘mhe:folder#id’ (message link) | |
rmail | ‘rmail:folder’ (folder link) |
‘rmail:folder#id’ (message link) | |
gnus | ‘gnus:group’ (group link) |
‘gnus:group#id’ (article link) | |
bbdb | ‘bbdb:R.*Stallman’ (record with regexp) |
irc | ‘irc:/irc.com/#emacs/bob’ |
help | ‘help:org-store-link’ |
info | ‘info:org#External links’ |
shell | ‘shell:ls *.org’ |
elisp | ‘elisp:(find-file "Elisp.org")’ (Elisp form to evaluate) |
‘elisp:org-agenda’ (interactive Elisp command) |
On top of these built-in link types, additional ones are available through the ‘contrib/’ directory (see Installation). For example, these links to VM or Wanderlust messages are available when you load the corresponding libraries from the ‘contrib/’ directory:
‘vm:folder’ | VM folder link |
‘vm:folder#id’ | VM message link |
‘vm://myself@some.where.org/folder#id’ | VM on remote machine |
‘vm-imap:account:folder’ | VM IMAP folder link |
‘vm-imap:account:folder#id’ | VM IMAP message link |
‘wl:folder’ | Wanderlust folder link |
‘wl:folder#id’ | Wanderlust message link |
For information on customizing Org to add new link types, see Adding Hyperlink Types.
A link should be enclosed in double brackets and may contain descriptive text to be displayed instead of the URL (see Link Format), for example:
[[http://www.gnu.org/software/emacs/][GNU Emacs]]
If the description is a file name or URL that points to an image, HTML export (see HTML Export) inlines the image as a clickable button. If there is no description at all and the link points to an image, that image is inlined into the exported HTML file.
Org also recognizes external links amid normal text and activates them as links. If spaces must be part of the link (for example in ‘bbdb:R.*Stallman’), or if you need to remove ambiguities about the end of the link, enclose the link in square or angular brackets.
下一页: Using Links Outside Org, 上一页: External Links, 返回: Hyperlinks [目录][索引]
Org provides methods to create a link in the correct syntax, to insert it into an Org file, and to follow the link.
The main function is org-store-link
, called with M-x org-store-link. Because of its importance, we suggest to bind it
to a widely available key (see Activation). It stores a link to the
current location. The link is stored for later insertion into an Org
buffer—see below. The kind of link that is created depends on the
current buffer:
For Org files, if there is a ‘<<target>>’ at point, the link points to the target. Otherwise it points to the current headline, which is also the description28.
If the headline has a ‘CUSTOM_ID’ property, store a link to this
custom ID. In addition or alternatively, depending on the value of
org-id-link-to-org-use-id
, create and/or use a globally unique
‘ID’ property for the link29. So using this command in Org
buffers potentially creates two links: a human-readable link from
the custom ID, and one that is globally unique and works even if the
entry is moved from file to file. Later, when inserting the link,
you need to decide which one to use.
Pretty much all Emacs mail clients are supported. The link points
to the current article, or, in some Gnus buffers, to the group. The
description is constructed according to the variable
org-link-email-description-format
. By default, it refers to the
addressee and the subject.
Here the link is the current URL, with the page title as the description.
Links created in a BBDB buffer point to the current entry.
For IRC links, if the variable org-irc-link-to-logs
is non-nil
,
create a ‘file’ style link to the relevant point in the logs for the
current conversation. Otherwise store an ‘irc’ style link to the
user/channel/server under the point.
For any other file, the link points to the file, with a search string (see Search Options) pointing to the contents of the current line. If there is an active region, the selected words form the basis of the search string. You can write custom Lisp functions to select the search string and perform the search for particular file types (see Custom Searches).
You can also define dedicated links to other files. See Adding Hyperlink Types.
When point is in an agenda view, the created link points to the entry referenced by the current line.
From an Org buffer, the following commands create, navigate or, more generally, act on links.
org-insert-link
)Insert a link30. This prompts for a link to be inserted into the buffer. You can just type a link, using text for an internal link, or one of the link type prefixes mentioned in the examples above. The link is inserted into the buffer, along with a descriptive text31. If some text was selected at this time, it becomes the default description.
All links stored during the current session are part of the history for this prompt, so you can access them with UP and DOWN (or M-p, M-n).
Completion with TAB helps you to insert valid link prefixes like ‘http’ or ‘ftp’, including the prefixes defined through link abbreviations (see Link Abbreviations). If you press RET after inserting only the prefix, Org offers specific completion support for some link types32. For example, if you type f i l e RET—alternative access: C-u C-c C-l, see below—Org offers file name completion, and after b b d b RET you can complete contact names.
When C-c C-l is called with a C-u prefix argument, insert a link to a file. You may use file name completion to select the name of the file. The path to the file is inserted relative to the directory of the current Org file, if the linked file is in the current directory or in a sub-directory of it, or if the path is written relative to the current directory using ‘../’. Otherwise an absolute path is used, if possible with ‘~/’ for your home directory. You can force an absolute path with two C-u prefixes.
When point is on an existing link, C-c C-l allows you to edit the link and description parts of the link.
org-open-at-point
)Open link at point. This launches a web browser for URL (using
browse-url-at-point
), run VM/MH-E/Wanderlust/Rmail/Gnus/BBDB for
the corresponding links, and execute the command in a shell link.
When point is on an internal link, this command runs the
corresponding search. When point is on the tags part of a headline,
it creates the corresponding tags view (see Matching tags and properties). If point is on a timestamp, it compiles the agenda for
that date. Furthermore, it visits text and remote files in ‘file’
links with Emacs and select a suitable application for local
non-text files. Classification of files is based on file extension
only. See option org-file-apps
. If you want to override the
default application and visit the file with Emacs, use
a C-u prefix. If you want to avoid opening in Emacs, use
a C-u C-u prefix.
If point is on a headline, but not on a link, offer all links in the
headline and entry text. If you want to setup the frame
configuration for following links, customize org-link-frame-setup
.
When org-return-follows-link
is set, RET also follows
the link at point.
On links, mouse-1 and mouse-2 opens the link just as C-c C-o does.
Like mouse-2, but force file links to be opened with Emacs, and internal links to be displayed in another window33.
org-mark-ring-push
)Push the current position onto the Org mark ring, to be able to return easily. Commands following an internal link do this automatically.
org-mark-ring-goto
)Jump back to a recorded position. A position is recorded by the commands following internal links, and by C-c %. Using this command several times in direct succession moves through a ring of previously recorded positions.
org-next-link
)org-previous-link
)Move forward/backward to the next link in the buffer. At the limit of the buffer, the search fails once, and then wraps around. The key bindings for this are really too long; you might want to bind this also to M-n and M-p.
(with-eval-after-load 'org (define-key org-mode-map (kbd "M-n") 'org-next-link) (define-key org-mode-map (kbd "M-p") 'org-previous-link))
下一页: Link Abbreviations, 上一页: Handling Links, 返回: Hyperlinks [目录][索引]
You can insert and follow links that have Org syntax not only in Org,
but in any Emacs buffer. For this, Org provides two functions:
org-insert-link-global
and org-open-at-point-global
.
You might want to bind them to globally available keys. See Activation for some advice.
下一页: Search Options, 上一页: Using Links Outside Org, 返回: Hyperlinks [目录][索引]
Long URL can be cumbersome to type, and often many similar links are needed in a document. For this you can use link abbreviations. An abbreviated link looks like this
[[linkword:tag][description]]
where the tag is optional. The linkword must be a word, starting
with a letter, followed by letters, numbers, ‘-’, and ‘_’.
Abbreviations are resolved according to the information in the
variable org-link-abbrev-alist
that relates the linkwords to
replacement text. Here is an example:
(setq org-link-abbrev-alist '(("bugzilla" . "http://10.1.2.9/bugzilla/show_bug.cgi?id=") ("url-to-ja" . "http://translate.google.fr/translate?sl=en&tl=ja&u=%h") ("google" . "http://www.google.com/search?q=") ("gmap" . "http://maps.google.com/maps?q=%s") ("omap" . "http://nominatim.openstreetmap.org/search?q=%s&polygon=1") ("ads" . "https://ui.adsabs.harvard.edu/search/q=%20author%3A\"%s\"")))
If the replacement text contains the string ‘%s’, it is replaced with the tag. Using ‘%h’ instead of ‘%s’ percent-encodes the tag (see the example above, where we need to encode the URL parameter). Using ‘%(my-function)’ passes the tag to a custom Lisp function, and replace it by the resulting string.
If the replacement text do not contain any specifier, it is simply appended to the string in order to create the link.
Instead of a string, you may also specify a Lisp function to create the link. Such a function will be called with the tag as the only argument.
With the above setting, you could link to a specific bug with ‘[[bugzilla:129]]’, search the web for ‘OrgMode’ with ‘[[google:OrgMode]]’, show the map location of the Free Software Foundation ‘[[gmap:51 Franklin Street, Boston]]’ or of Carsten office ‘[[omap:Science Park 904, Amsterdam, The Netherlands]]’ and find out what the Org author is doing besides Emacs hacking with ‘[[ads:Dominik,C]]’.
If you need special abbreviations just for a single Org buffer, you can define them in the file with
#+LINK: bugzilla http://10.1.2.9/bugzilla/show_bug.cgi?id= #+LINK: google http://www.google.com/search?q=%s
In-buffer completion (see Completion) can be used after ‘[’ to complete link abbreviations. You may also define a Lisp function that implements special (e.g., completion) support for inserting such a link with C-c C-l. Such a function should not accept any arguments, and should return the full link with a prefix. You can set the link completion function like this:
(org-link-set-parameter "type" :complete #'some-completion-function)
下一页: Custom Searches, 上一页: Link Abbreviations, 返回: Hyperlinks [目录][索引]
File links can contain additional information to make Emacs jump to a
particular location in the file when following a link. This can be a
line number or a search option after a double colon34. For
example, when the command org-store-link
creates a link (see
Handling Links) to a file, it encodes the words in the current line
as a search string that can be used to find this line back later when
following the link with C-c C-o.
Note that all search options apply for Attachment links in the same way that they apply for File links.
Here is the syntax of the different ways to attach a search to a file link, together with explanations for each:
[[file:~/code/main.c::255]] [[file:~/xx.org::My Target]] [[file:~/xx.org::*My Target]] [[file:~/xx.org::#my-custom-id]] [[file:~/xx.org::/regexp/]] [[attachment:main.c::255]]
Jump to line 255.
Search for a link target ‘<<My Target>>’, or do a text search for ‘my target’, similar to the search in internal links, see Internal Links. In HTML export (see HTML Export), such a file link becomes a HTML reference to the corresponding named anchor in the linked file.
In an Org file, restrict search to headlines.
Link to a heading with a ‘CUSTOM_ID’ property
Do a regular expression search for REGEXP. This uses the
Emacs command occur
to list all matches in a separate window. If
the target file is in Org mode, org-occur
is used to create
a sparse tree with the matches.
As a degenerate case, a file link with an empty file name can be used to search the current file. For example, ‘[[file:::find me]]’ does a search for ‘find me’ in the current file, just as ‘[[find me]]’ would.
上一页: Search Options, 返回: Hyperlinks [目录][索引]
The default mechanism for creating search strings and for doing the
actual search related to a file link may not work correctly in all
cases. For example, BibTeX database files have many entries like
year="1993"
which would not result in good search strings, because
the only unique identification for a BibTeX entry is the citation key.
If you come across such a problem, you can write custom functions to
set the right search string for a particular file type, and to do the
search for the string in the file. Using add-hook
, these functions
need to be added to the hook variables
org-create-file-search-functions
and
org-execute-file-search-functions
. See the docstring for these
variables for more information. Org actually uses this mechanism for
BibTeX database files, and you can use the corresponding code as an
implementation example. See the file ‘ol-bibtex.el’.
下一页: Tags, 上一页: Hyperlinks, 返回: Top [目录][索引]
Org mode does not maintain TODO lists as separate documents35. Instead, TODO items are an integral part of the notes file, because TODO items usually come up while taking notes! With Org mode, simply mark any entry in a tree as being a TODO item. In this way, information is not duplicated, and the entire context from which the TODO item emerged is always present.
Of course, this technique for managing TODO items scatters them throughout your notes file. Org mode compensates for this by providing methods to give you an overview of all the things that you have to do.
• TODO基础知识: | 标记和显示TODO条目。 | |
• TODO扩展: | 工作流和工作分配。 | |
• 进度日志记录: | 进度的日期和备注。 | |
• 优先级: | 有些事情比其他事情更重要。 | |
• 细分任务: | 将任务拆分成可管理的部分。 | |
• 复选框: | 勾选列表。 |
下一页: TODO Extensions, 返回: TODO Items [目录][索引]
Any headline becomes a TODO item when it starts with the word ‘TODO’, for example:
*** TODO Write letter to Sam Fortune
The most important commands to work with TODO entries are:
org-todo
)Rotate the TODO state of the current item among
,-> (unmarked) -> TODO -> DONE --. '--------------------------------'
If TODO keywords have fast access keys (see Fast access to TODO states), prompt for a TODO keyword through the fast selection
interface; this is the default behavior when
org-use-fast-todo-selection
is non-nil
.
The same state changing can also be done “remotely” from the agenda buffer with the t command key (see Agenda Commands).
Select the following/preceding TODO state, similar to cycling.
Useful mostly if more than two TODO states are possible (see
TODO Extensions). See also Conflicts, for a discussion of the interaction with
shift-selection. See also the variable
org-treat-S-cursor-todo-selection-as-state-change
.
org-show-todo-tree
)View TODO items in a sparse tree (see Sparse Trees). Folds the
entire buffer, but shows all TODO items—with not-DONE state—and
the headings hierarchy above them. With a prefix argument, or by
using C-c / T, search for a specific TODO. You are
prompted for the keyword, and you can also give a list of keywords
like ‘KWD1|KWD2|...’ to list entries that match any one of these
keywords. With a numeric prefix argument N, show the tree for the
Nth keyword in the variable org-todo-keywords
. With two prefix
arguments, find all TODO states, both un-done and done.
org-todo-list
)显示全局TODO列表。Collects the TODO items (with not-DONE states) from all agenda files (see Agenda Views) into a single buffer. The new buffer is in Org Agenda mode, which provides commands to examine and manipulate the TODO entries from the new buffer (see Agenda Commands). See Global TODO list, for more information.
org-insert-todo-heading
)Insert a new TODO entry below the current one.
Changing a TODO state can also trigger tag changes. See the docstring
of the option org-todo-state-tags-triggers
for details.
下一页: Progress Logging, 上一页: TODO Basics, 返回: TODO Items [目录][索引]
By default, marked TODO entries have one of only two states: TODO and
DONE. Org mode allows you to classify TODO items in more complex ways
with TODO keywords (stored in org-todo-keywords
). With special
setup, the TODO keyword system can work differently in different
files.
Note that tags are another way to classify headlines in general and TODO items in particular (see Tags).
• 工作流状态: | 从TODO到DONE的步骤。 | |
• TODO类型: | 我做这个,Fred休息。 | |
• 一个文件中有多个集合: | 把它们混合在一起,仍然能找到你的路。 | |
• 快速访问TODO状态: | 状态的单字母选择。 | |
• 每个文件的关键字: | 不同的文件,不同的要求。 | |
• TODO关键字的字符样式: | 状态的高亮显示。 | |
• TODO依赖关系: | 当一个任务需要等待其他任务时。 |
下一页: TODO types, 返回: TODO Extensions [目录][索引]
You can use TODO keywords to indicate different, possibly sequential states in the process of working on an item, for example36:
(setq org-todo-keywords '((sequence "TODO" "FEEDBACK" "VERIFY" "|" "DONE" "DELEGATED")))
The vertical bar separates the TODO keywords (states that need action) from the DONE states (which need no further action). If you do not provide the separator bar, the last state is used as the DONE state.
With this setup, the command C-c C-t cycles an entry from ‘TODO’ to ‘FEEDBACK’, then to ‘VERIFY’, and finally to ‘DONE’ and ‘DELEGATED’. You may also use a numeric prefix argument to quickly select a specific state. For example C-3 C-c C-t changes the state immediately to ‘VERIFY’. Or you can use S-RIGHT and S-LEFT to go forward and backward through the states. If you define many keywords, you can use in-buffer completion (see Completion) or a special one-key selection scheme (see Fast access to TODO states) to insert these words into the buffer. Changing a TODO state can be logged with a timestamp, see Tracking TODO state changes, for more information.
下一页: Multiple sets in one file, 上一页: Workflow states, 返回: TODO Extensions [目录][索引]
The second possibility is to use TODO keywords to indicate different types of action items. For example, you might want to indicate that items are for “work” or “home”. Or, when you work with several people on a single project, you might want to assign action items directly to persons, by using their names as TODO keywords. This type of functionality is actually much better served by using tags (see Tags), so the TODO implementation is kept just for backward compatibility.
Using TODO types, it would be set up like this:
(setq org-todo-keywords '((type "Fred" "Sara" "Lucy" "|" "DONE")))
In this case, different keywords do not indicate states, but rather different types. So the normal work flow would be to assign a task to a person, and later to mark it DONE. Org mode supports this style by adapting the workings of the command C-c C-t37. When used several times in succession, it still cycles through all names, in order to first select the right type for a task. But when you return to the item after some time and execute C-c C-t again, it will switch from any name directly to ‘DONE’. Use prefix arguments or completion to quickly select a specific name. You can also review the items of a specific TODO type in a sparse tree by using a numeric prefix to C-c / t. For example, to see all things Lucy has to do, you would use C-3 C-c / t. To collect Lucy’s items from all agenda files into a single buffer, you would use the numeric prefix argument as well when creating the global TODO list: C-3 M-x org-agenda t.
下一页: Fast access to TODO states, 上一页: TODO types, 返回: TODO Extensions [目录][索引]
Sometimes you may want to use different sets of TODO keywords in parallel. For example, you may want to have the basic TODO/DONE, but also a workflow for bug fixing, and a separate state indicating that an item has been canceled—so it is not DONE, but also does not require action. Your setup would then look like this:
(setq org-todo-keywords '((sequence "TODO" "|" "DONE") (sequence "REPORT" "BUG" "KNOWNCAUSE" "|" "FIXED") (sequence "|" "CANCELED")))
The keywords should all be different, this helps Org mode keep track of which subsequence should be used for a given entry. In this setup, C-c C-t only operates within a sub-sequence, so it switches from ‘DONE’ to (nothing) to ‘TODO’, and from ‘FIXED’ to (nothing) to ‘REPORT’. Therefore you need a mechanism to initially select the correct sequence. In addition to typing a keyword or using completion (see Completion), you may also apply the following commands:
These keys jump from one TODO sub-sequence to the next. In the above example, C-u C-u C-c C-t or C-S-RIGHT would jump from ‘TODO’ or ‘DONE’ to ‘REPORT’, and any of the words in the second row to ‘CANCELED’. Note that the C-S- key binding conflict with shift-selection (see Conflicts).
S-LEFT and S-RIGHT walk through all keywords from all sub-sequences, so for example S-RIGHT would switch from ‘DONE’ to ‘REPORT’ in the example above. For a discussion of the interaction with shift-selection, see Conflicts.
下一页: Per-file keywords, 上一页: Multiple sets in one file, 返回: TODO Extensions [目录][索引]
If you would like to quickly change an entry to an arbitrary TODO state instead of cycling through the states, you can set up keys for single-letter access to the states. This is done by adding the selection character after each keyword, in parentheses38. 例如:
(setq org-todo-keywords '((sequence "TODO(t)" "|" "DONE(d)") (sequence "REPORT(r)" "BUG(b)" "KNOWNCAUSE(k)" "|" "FIXED(f)") (sequence "|" "CANCELED(c)")))
If you then press C-c C-t followed by the selection key, the entry is switched to this state. SPC can be used to remove any TODO keyword from an entry39.
下一页: Faces for TODO keywords, 上一页: Fast access to TODO states, 返回: TODO Extensions [目录][索引]
It can be very useful to use different aspects of the TODO mechanism in different files. For file-local settings, you need to add special lines to the file which set the keywords and interpretation for that file only. For example, to set one of the two examples discussed above, you need one of the following lines, starting in column zero anywhere in the file:
#+TODO: TODO FEEDBACK VERIFY | DONE CANCELED
You may also write ‘#+SEQ_TODO’ to be explicit about the interpretation, but it means the same as ‘#+TODO’, or
#+TYP_TODO: Fred Sara Lucy Mike | DONE
A setup for using several sets in parallel would be:
#+TODO: TODO | DONE #+TODO: REPORT BUG KNOWNCAUSE | FIXED #+TODO: | CANCELED
To make sure you are using the correct keyword, type ‘#+’ into the buffer and then use M-TAB to complete it (see Completion).
Remember that the keywords after the vertical bar—or the last keyword if no bar is there—must always mean that the item is DONE, although you may use a different word. After changing one of these lines, use C-c C-c with point still in the line to make the changes known to Org mode40.
下一页: TODO dependencies, 上一页: Per-file keywords, 返回: TODO Extensions [目录][索引]
Org mode highlights TODO keywords with special faces: org-todo
for keywords indicating that an item still has to be acted upon, and org-done
for keywords indicating that an item is finished. If you are using more than two different states, you might want to use special faces for some of them. This can be done using the variable org-todo-keyword-faces
. 例如:
(setq org-todo-keyword-faces '(("TODO" . org-warning) ("STARTED" . "yellow") ("CANCELED" . (:foreground "blue" :weight bold))))
While using a list with face properties as shown for ‘CANCELED’
should work, this does not always seem to be the case. If
necessary, define a special face and use that. A string is
interpreted as a color. The variable org-faces-easy-properties
determines if that color is interpreted as a foreground or
a background color.
上一页: Faces for TODO keywords, 返回: TODO Extensions [目录][索引]
The structure of Org files—hierarchy and lists—makes it easy to
define TODO dependencies. Usually, a parent TODO task should not be
marked as done until all TODO subtasks, or children tasks, are marked
as done. Sometimes there is a logical sequence to (sub)tasks, so that
one subtask cannot be acted upon before all siblings above it have
been marked as done. If you customize the variable
org-enforce-todo-dependencies
, Org blocks entries from changing
state to DONE while they have TODO children that are not DONE.
Furthermore, if an entry has a property ‘ORDERED’, each of its TODO
children is blocked until all earlier siblings are marked as done.
Here is an example:
* TODO Blocked until (two) is done ** DONE one ** TODO two * Parent :PROPERTIES: :ORDERED: t :END: ** TODO a ** TODO b, needs to wait for (a) ** TODO c, needs to wait for (a) and (b)
You can ensure an entry is never blocked by using the ‘NOBLOCKING’ property (see Properties and Columns):
* This entry is never blocked :PROPERTIES: :NOBLOCKING: t :END:
org-toggle-ordered-property
)Toggle the ‘ORDERED’ property of the current entry. A property is
used for this behavior because this should be local to the current
entry, not inherited from entries above like a tag (see Tags).
However, if you would like to track the value of this property
with a tag for better visibility, customize the variable
org-track-ordered-property-with-tag
.
Change TODO state, regardless of any state blocking.
If you set the variable org-agenda-dim-blocked-tasks
, TODO entries
that cannot be marked as done because of unmarked children are shown
in a dimmed font or even made invisible in agenda views (see Agenda Views).
You can also block changes of TODO states by using checkboxes (see
Checkboxes). If you set the variable
org-enforce-todo-checkbox-dependencies
, an entry that has unchecked
checkboxes is blocked from switching to DONE.
If you need more complex dependency structures, for example dependencies between entries in different trees or files, check out the contributed module ‘org-depend.el’.
下一页: Priorities, 上一页: TODO Extensions, 返回: TODO Items [目录][索引]
To record a timestamp and a note when changing a TODO state, call the
command org-todo
with a prefix argument.
org-todo
)Prompt for a note and record a the time of the TODO state change. The note is inserted as a list item below the headline, but can also be placed into a drawer, see Tracking TODO state changes.
If you want to be more systematic, Org mode can automatically record a timestamp and optionally a note when you mark a TODO item as DONE, or even each time you change the state of a TODO item. This system is highly configurable, settings can be on a per-keyword basis and can be localized to a file or even a subtree. For information on how to clock working time for a task, see Clocking Work Time.
·关闭项: | 此条目是何时标记为完成的? | |
• 跟踪TODO状态更改: | 状态是什么时候更改的? | |
• 跟踪您的习惯: | 你一直坚持到什么程度? |
下一页: Tracking TODO state changes, 返回: Progress Logging [目录][索引]
The most basic automatic logging is to keep track of when a certain TODO item was marked as done. This can be achieved with41
(setq org-log-done 'time)
Then each time you turn an entry from a TODO (not-done) state into any
of the DONE states, a line ‘CLOSED: [timestamp]’ is inserted just
after the headline. If you turn the entry back into a TODO item
through further state cycling, that line is removed again. If you
turn the entry back to a non-TODO state (by pressing C-c C-t SPC for example), that line is also removed, unless you set
org-closed-keep-when-no-todo
to non-nil
. If you want to record
a note along with the timestamp, use42
(setq org-log-done 'note)
You are then prompted for a note, and that note is stored below the entry with a ‘Closing Note’ heading.
下一页: Tracking your habits, 上一页: Closing items, 返回: Progress Logging [目录][索引]
You might want to automatically keep track of when a state change
occurred and maybe take a note about this change. You can either
record just a timestamp, or a time-stamped note. These records are
inserted after the headline as an itemized list, newest first43.
When taking a lot of notes, you might want to get the notes out of the
way into a drawer (see Drawers). Customize the variable
org-log-into-drawer
to get this behavior—the recommended drawer
for this is called ‘LOGBOOK’44. You can also overrule the
setting of this variable for a subtree by setting a ‘LOG_INTO_DRAWER’
property.
Since it is normally too much to record a note for every state, Org mode expects configuration on a per-keyword basis for this. This is achieved by adding special markers ‘!’ (for a timestamp) or ‘@’ (for a note with timestamp) in parentheses after each keyword. For example, with the setting
(setq org-todo-keywords '((sequence "TODO(t)" "WAIT(w@/!)" "|" "DONE(d!)" "CANCELED(c@)")))
To record a timestamp without a note for TODO keywords configured with ‘@’, just type C-c C-c to enter a blank note when prompted.
You not only define global TODO keywords and fast access keys, but also request that a time is recorded when the entry is set to ‘DONE’, and that a note is recorded when switching to ‘WAIT’ or ‘CANCELED’45. The setting for ‘WAIT’ is even more special: the ‘!’ after the slash means that in addition to the note taken when entering the state, a timestamp should be recorded when leaving the ‘WAIT’ state, if and only if the target state does not configure logging for entering it. So it has no effect when switching from ‘WAIT’ to ‘DONE’, because ‘DONE’ is configured to record a timestamp only. But when switching from ‘WAIT’ back to ‘TODO’, the ‘/!’ in the ‘WAIT’ setting now triggers a timestamp even though ‘TODO’ has no logging configured.
You can use the exact same syntax for setting logging preferences local to a buffer:
#+TODO: TODO(t) WAIT(w@/!) | DONE(d!) CANCELED(c@)
In order to define logging settings that are local to a subtree or a single item, define a ‘LOGGING’ property in this entry. Any non-empty ‘LOGGING’ property resets all logging settings to nil
. You may then turn on logging for this specific tree using ‘STARTUP’ keywords like ‘lognotedone’ or ‘logrepeat’, as well as adding state specific settings like ‘TODO(!)’. 例如:
* TODO Log each state with only a time :PROPERTIES: :LOGGING: TODO(!) WAIT(!) DONE(!) CANCELED(!) :END: * TODO Only log when switching to WAIT, and when repeating :PROPERTIES: :LOGGING: WAIT(@) logrepeat :END: * TODO No logging at all :PROPERTIES: :LOGGING: nil :END:
上一页: Tracking TODO state changes, 返回: Progress Logging [目录][索引]
Org has the ability to track the consistency of a special category of
TODO, called “habits.” To use habits, you have to enable the habits
module by customizing the variable org-modules
.
A habit has the following properties:
To give you an idea of what the above rules look like in action, here’s an actual habit with some history:
** TODO Shave SCHEDULED: <2009-10-17 Sat .+2d/4d> :PROPERTIES: :STYLE: habit :LAST_REPEAT: [2009-10-19 Mon 00:36] :END: - State "DONE" from "TODO" [2009-10-15 Thu] - State "DONE" from "TODO" [2009-10-12 Mon] - State "DONE" from "TODO" [2009-10-10 Sat] - State "DONE" from "TODO" [2009-10-04 Sun] - State "DONE" from "TODO" [2009-10-02 Fri] - State "DONE" from "TODO" [2009-09-29 Tue] - State "DONE" from "TODO" [2009-09-25 Fri] - State "DONE" from "TODO" [2009-09-19 Sat] - State "DONE" from "TODO" [2009-09-16 Wed] - State "DONE" from "TODO" [2009-09-12 Sat]
What this habit says is: I want to shave at most every 2 days—given by the ‘SCHEDULED’ date and repeat interval—and at least every 4 days. If today is the 15th, then the habit first appears in the agenda (see Agenda Views) on Oct 17, after the minimum of 2 days has elapsed, and will appear overdue on Oct 19, after four days have elapsed.
What’s really useful about habits is that they are displayed along with a consistency graph, to show how consistent you’ve been at getting that task done in the past. This graph shows every day that the task was done over the past three weeks, with colors for each day. The colors used are:
If the task was not to be done yet on that day.
If the task could have been done on that day.
If the task was going to be overdue the next day.
If the task was overdue on that day.
In addition to coloring each day, the day is also marked with an asterisk if the task was actually done that day, and an exclamation mark to show where the current day falls in the graph.
There are several configuration variables that can be used to change the way habits are displayed in the agenda.
org-habit-graph-column
The buffer column at which the consistency graph should be drawn. This overwrites any text in that column, so it is a good idea to keep your habits’ titles brief and to the point.
org-habit-preceding-days
The amount of history, in days before today, to appear in consistency graphs.
org-habit-following-days
The number of days after today that appear in consistency graphs.
org-habit-show-habits-only-for-today
If non-nil
, only show habits in today’s agenda view. The default
value is t
. Pressing C-u K in the agenda toggles this
variable.
Lastly, pressing K in the agenda buffer causes habits to temporarily be disabled and do not appear at all. Press K again to bring them back. They are also subject to tag filtering, if you have habits which should only be done in certain contexts, for example.
下一页: Breaking Down Tasks, 上一页: Progress Logging, 返回: TODO Items [目录][索引]
If you use Org mode extensively, you may end up with enough TODO items that it starts to make sense to prioritize them. Prioritizing can be done by placing a priority cookie into the headline of a TODO item right after the TODO keyword, like this:
*** TODO [#A] Write letter to Sam Fortune
By default, Org mode supports three priorities: ‘A’, ‘B’, and ‘C’.
‘A’ is the highest priority. An entry without a cookie is treated as
equivalent if it had priority ‘B’. Priorities make a difference only
for sorting in the agenda (see Weekly/daily agenda). Outside the
agenda, they have no inherent meaning to Org mode. The cookies are
displayed with the face defined by the variable org-priority-faces
,
which can be customized.
You can also use numeric values for priorities, such as
*** TODO [#1] Write letter to Sam Fortune
When using numeric priorities, you need to set org-priority-highest
,
org-priority-lowest
and org-priority-default
to integers, which
must all be strictly inferior to 65.
Priorities can be attached to any outline node; they do not need to be TODO items.
org-priority
)Set the priority of the current headline. The command prompts for a priority character ‘A’, ‘B’ or ‘C’. When you press SPC instead, the priority cookie, if one is set, is removed from the headline. The priorities can also be changed “remotely” from the agenda buffer with the , command (see Agenda Commands).
org-priority-up
)org-priority-down
)Increase/decrease the priority of the current headline46. Note that these keys are also used to modify timestamps (see Creating Timestamps). See also Conflicts, for a discussion of the interaction with shift-selection.
You can change the range of allowed priorities by setting the
variables org-priority-highest
, org-priority-lowest
, and
org-priority-default
. For an individual buffer, you may set these
values (highest, lowest, default) like this (please make sure that the
highest priority is earlier in the alphabet than the lowest priority):
#+PRIORITIES: A C B
Or, using numeric values:
#+PRIORITIES: 1 10 5
下一页: Checkboxes, 上一页: Priorities, 返回: TODO Items [目录][索引]
It is often advisable to break down large tasks into smaller, manageable subtasks. You can do this by creating an outline tree below a TODO item, with detailed subtasks on the tree47. To keep an overview of the fraction of subtasks that have already been marked as done, insert either ‘[/]’ or ‘[%]’ anywhere in the headline. These cookies are updated each time the TODO status of a child changes, or when pressing C-c C-c on the cookie. 例如:
* Organize Party [33%] ** TODO Call people [1/2] *** TODO Peter *** DONE Sarah ** TODO Buy food ** DONE Talk to neighbor
If a heading has both checkboxes and TODO children below it, the meaning of the statistics cookie become ambiguous. Set the property ‘COOKIE_DATA’ to either ‘checkbox’ or ‘todo’ to resolve this issue.
If you would like to have the statistics cookie count any TODO entries
in the subtree (not just direct children), configure the variable
org-hierarchical-todo-statistics
. To do this for a single subtree,
include the word ‘recursive’ into the value of the ‘COOKIE_DATA’
property.
* Parent capturing statistics [2/20] :PROPERTIES: :COOKIE_DATA: todo recursive :END:
If you would like a TODO entry to automatically change to DONE when all children are done, you can use the following setup:
(defun org-summary-todo (n-done n-not-done) "Switch entry to DONE when all subentries are done, to TODO otherwise." (let (org-log-done org-log-states) ; turn off logging (org-todo (if (= n-not-done 0) "DONE" "TODO")))) (add-hook 'org-after-todo-statistics-hook 'org-summary-todo)
Another possibility is the use of checkboxes to identify (a hierarchy of) a large number of subtasks (see Checkboxes).
上一页: Breaking Down Tasks, 返回: TODO Items [目录][索引]
Every item in a plain list48 (see Plain Lists) can be made into a checkbox by starting it with the string ‘[ ]’. This feature is similar to TODO items (see TODO Items), but is more lightweight. Checkboxes are not included into the global TODO list, so they are often great to split a task into a number of simple steps. Or you can use them in a shopping list.
Here is an example of a checkbox list.
* TODO Organize party [2/4] - [-] call people [1/3] - [ ] Peter - [X] Sarah - [ ] Sam - [X] order food - [ ] think about what music to play - [X] talk to the neighbors
Checkboxes work hierarchically, so if a checkbox item has children that are checkboxes, toggling one of the children checkboxes makes the parent checkbox reflect if none, some, or all of the children are checked.
The ‘[2/4]’ and ‘[1/3]’ in the first and second line are cookies indicating how many checkboxes present in this entry have been checked off, and the total number of checkboxes present. This can give you an idea on how many checkboxes remain, even without opening a folded entry. The cookies can be placed into a headline or into (the first line of) a plain list item. Each cookie covers checkboxes of direct children structurally below the headline/item on which the cookie appears49. You have to insert the cookie yourself by typing either ‘[/]’ or ‘[%]’. With ‘[/]’ you get an ‘n out of m’ result, as in the examples above. With ‘[%]’ you get information about the percentage of checkboxes checked (in the above example, this would be ‘[50%]’ and ‘[33%]’, respectively). In a headline, a cookie can count either checkboxes below the heading or TODO states of children, and it displays whatever was changed last. Set the property ‘COOKIE_DATA’ to either ‘checkbox’ or ‘todo’ to resolve this issue.
If the current outline node has an ‘ORDERED’ property, checkboxes must be checked off in sequence, and an error is thrown if you try to check off a box while there are unchecked boxes above it.
The following commands work with checkboxes:
org-toggle-checkbox
)Toggle checkbox status or—with prefix argument—checkbox presence at point. With a single prefix argument, add an empty checkbox or remove the current one50. With a double prefix argument, set it to ‘[-]’, which is considered to be an intermediate state.
org-toggle-checkbox
)Toggle checkbox status or—with prefix argument—checkbox presence at point. With double prefix argument, set it to ‘[-]’, which is considered to be an intermediate state.
org-toggle-radio-button
)Toggle checkbox status by using the checkbox of the item at point as a radio button: when the checkbox is turned on, all other checkboxes on the same level will be turned off. With a universal prefix argument, toggle the presence of the checkbox. With a double prefix argument, set it to ‘[-]’.
C-c C-c can be told to consider checkboxes as radio buttons by setting ‘#+ATTR_ORG: :radio t’ right before the list or by calling M-x org-list-checkbox-radio-mode to activate this minor mode.
org-insert-todo-heading
)Insert a new item with a checkbox. This works only if point is already in a plain list item (see Plain Lists).
org-toggle-ordered-property
)Toggle the ‘ORDERED’ property of the entry, to toggle if checkboxes
must be checked off in sequence. A property is used for this
behavior because this should be local to the current entry, not
inherited like a tag. However, if you would like to track the
value of this property with a tag for better visibility, customize
org-track-ordered-property-with-tag
.
org-update-statistics-cookies
)Update the statistics cookie in the current outline entry. When called with a C-u prefix, update the entire file. Checkbox statistic cookies are updated automatically if you toggle checkboxes with C-c C-c and make new ones with M-S-RET. TODO statistics cookies update when changing TODO states. If you delete boxes/entries or add/change them by hand, use this command to get things back into sync.
下一页: Properties and Columns, 上一页: TODO Items, 返回: Top [目录][索引]
实现交叉关联信息的标注和上下文的一个很好的方法是将标签分配给标题。Org mode对标签有广泛的支持。
每个标题都可以包含一个标签列表;它们出现在标题的末尾。标签是包含字母、数字、“_”和“@”的普通单词。标签必须前后各有一个冒号,例如,“:work:”。可以指定几个标签,如“:work:ururent:”。默认情况下,标签以粗体显示,颜色与标题相同。您可以使用变量org-tag-faces
为特定标签指定特殊的字符样式,方法与为TODO关键字指定的方式大致相同(请参阅为TODO关键字设置字符样式)。
• 标签继承: | 标签使用大纲的树形结构。 | |
• 设置标签: | 如何为标题分配标签。 | |
• 标签层次: | 创建标签的层次结构。 | |
• 标签搜索: | 搜索标签的组合。 |
标签利用大纲树的层次结构。如果标题具有某个标签,则所有子标题也会继承该标签。例如,在列表中
* Meeting with the French group :work: ** Summary by Frank :boss:notes: *** TODO Prepare slides for him :action:
最后一个标题将具有标签“work”、“boss”、“notes”和“action”,即使最后一个标题没有用这些标签显式标签。您还可以设置文件中的所有条目都应该继承的标签,就像这些标签是在围绕整个文件的假设级别0中定义的一样。使用这样的行51
#+FILETAGS: :Peter:Boss:Secret:
要将标签继承限制为特定标签,或将其完全关闭,请使用变量org-use-tag-inheritation
和org-tag-exclude-from-heritation
。
如果在打开标记继承的情况下在标签搜索期间匹配标题,则同一树中的所有子级别(对于简单匹配表单)也会匹配52。然后,匹配的列表可能会变得非常长。如果您只希望看到子树优先的标签匹配,请配置变量org-tag-Match-list-subblelevel
(不推荐)。
当议程搜索尝试匹配标签
或标签-待办事项
议程类型中的标签时,标签继承是相关的。在其他议程类型中,org-use-tag-inheritance
的设置无效。不过,您可能希望在议程中正确设置标签,以便标记过滤可以很好地处理继承的标签。设置org-agenda-use-tag-inheritance
来控制这一点:默认值包括所有议程类型,但是将其设置为nil
可以真正加快议程生成的速度。
只需在缓冲区中的标题末尾键入标签即可。冒号之后,M-TAB提供标签的补全。还有一个用于插入标签的特殊命令:
org-set-tags-command
)为当前标题输入新标签。组织模式提供完成或特殊的单键界面来设置标签,如下所示。按RET后,将插入标签并与org-tag-column
对齐。当使用C-u前缀调用时,当前缓冲区中的所有标签都与该列对齐,这只是为了让事情看起来更好看。标签在升级、降级和待办事项状态更改后自动重新对齐(请参阅TODO基础知识)。
org-set-tags-command
)当光标位于标题中时,其作用与C-c C-q相同。
Org支持基于标签列表的标签插入。默认情况下,此列表是动态构建的,包含缓冲区53中当前使用的所有标签。您还可以使用变量org-tag-ist
全局指定标签的硬列表。最后,您可以使用“TAGS”关键字为给定文件设置默认标签,如
#+TAGS: @work @home @tennisclub #+TAGS: laptop car pc sailboat
如果您已使用变量org-tag-ist
全局定义了首选的标签集,但希望在特定文件中使用动态标签列表,请向该文件添加空的“TAGS”关键字:
#+TAGS:
除了由“TAGS”关键字在每个文件基础上定义的标签之外,如果您有希望在每个文件中使用的首选标签集,则可以使用变量org-tag-persistent-alist
指定标签列表。您可以通过将“STARTUP”关键字添加到该文件来逐个文件关闭此功能:
#+STARTUP: noptag
默认情况下,Org mode使用标准的迷你缓冲区完成功能来输入标签。但是,它还实现了另一种更快的标签选择方法,称为快速标记选择。这使您只需按一次键即可选择和取消选择标签。要使其正常工作,您应该为大多数常用的标签分配唯一的字母。您可以通过在Emacs init文件中配置变量org-tag-ist
来全局执行此操作。例如,您可能会发现需要用“@home”标记不同文件中的许多项目。在这种情况下,您可以设置如下内容:
(setq org-tag-alist '(("@work" . ?w) ("@home" . ?h) ("laptop" . ?l)))
如果标签仅与您正在处理的文件相关,则可以将“TAGS”关键字设置为:
#+TAGS: @work(w) @home(h) @tennisclub(t) laptop(l) pc(p)
标签界面在启动窗口中显示可用标签。如果要在特定标签后开始新行,请在标签列表中插入“\n”
#+TAGS: @work(w) @home(h) @tennisclub(t) \n laptop(l) pc(p)
或者将它们写成两行:
#+TAGS: @work(w) @home(h) @tennisclub(t) #+TAGS: laptop(l) pc(p)
还可以使用大括号将互斥的标记组合在一起,如在以下内容中所示:
#+TAGS: { @work(w) @home(h) @tennisclub(t) } laptop(l) pc(p)
您指示最多应选择“@work”、“@home”和“@tennisClub”中的一个。允许多个这样的组。
不要忘记将光标放在这些行中的一行上按C-c-c以激活任何更改。
要在变量org-tag-ist
中设置这些互斥的组,必须使用虚拟标签:startgroup
和:endgroup
,而不是大括号。同样,您可以使用:newline
来指示换行符。前面的示例将通过以下配置进行全局设置:
(setq org-tag-alist '((:startgroup . nil) ("@work" . ?w) ("@home" . ?h) ("@tennisclub" . ?t) (:endgroup . nil) ("laptop" . ?l) ("pc" . ?p)))
如果至少有一个标签有选择键,则按C-c C-c会自动显示一个特殊界面,其中列出继承的标签、当前标题的标签以及具有相应键的所有有效标签的列表54。
按分配给标签的键可以在当前行的标签列表中添加或删除它们。选择一组互斥标签中的标签将关闭该组中的任何其他标签。
在此界面中,您还可以使用以下专用键:
在迷你缓冲区中输入标签,即使该标签不在预定义列表中也是如此。您可以补全缓冲区中存在的所有标记。您还可以添加几个标记:只需用逗号分隔它们。
清除此行的所有标记。
接受修改后的集合。
在不安装更改的情况下中止。
如果q未分配给标记,它将像C-g一样中止。
关闭互斥标记组。使用此选项(作为例外)从这样的组中分配多个标记。
在下一次更改后切换自动退出(见下文)。如果您使用的是专家模式,则第一个C-c将显示选择窗口。
此方法允许您使用很少的键将标签分配给标题。使用上面的设置,您可以清除当前标签,并仅使用以下键设置‘@home’、‘Laptop’和‘pc’标记:C-c-cSPCh l pRET。从“@home”切换到“@work”将使用C-c C-c wRET或使用C-c w进行切换。可以使用C-c-cTABs a r a hret添加非预定义标签arah’。
如果您发现大多数情况下只需要按一次键来修改标签列表,那么可以设置变量org-fast-tag-election-single-key
。然后,您不必再按RET退出快速标签选择-它在第一次更改后退出。如果您偶尔需要更多键,请按C-c关闭当前标签选择过程的自动退出(实际上:使用C-c-c C-c而不是C-c C-c开始选择)。如果将变量设置为值expert
,则甚至不会显示用于单键标签选择的特殊窗口,只有当您额外按C-c时才会出现该窗口。
下一页: Tag Searches, 上一页: Setting Tags, 返回: Tags [目录][索引]
Tags can be defined in hierarchies. A tag can be defined as a group tag for a set of other tags. The group tag can be seen as the “broader term” for its set of tags. Defining multiple group tags and nesting them creates a tag hierarchy.
One use-case is to create a taxonomy of terms (tags) that can be used to classify nodes in a document or set of documents.
When you search for a group tag, it return matches for all members in the group and its subgroups. In an agenda view, filtering by a group tag displays or hide headlines tagged with at least one of the members of the group or any of its subgroups. This makes tag searches and filters even more flexible.
You can set group tags by using brackets and inserting a colon between the group tag and its related tags—beware that all whitespaces are mandatory so that Org can parse this line correctly:
#+TAGS: [ GTD : Control Persp ]
In this example, ‘GTD’ is the group tag and it is related to two other tags: ‘Control’, ‘Persp’. Defining ‘Control’ and ‘Persp’ as group tags creates a hierarchy of tags:
#+TAGS: [ Control : Context Task ] #+TAGS: [ Persp : Vision Goal AOF Project ]
That can conceptually be seen as a hierarchy of tags:
You can use the :startgrouptag
, :grouptags
and :endgrouptag
keyword directly when setting org-tag-alist
directly:
(setq org-tag-alist '((:startgrouptag) ("GTD") (:grouptags) ("Control") ("Persp") (:endgrouptag) (:startgrouptag) ("Control") (:grouptags) ("Context") ("Task") (:endgrouptag)))
The tags in a group can be mutually exclusive if using the same group syntax as is used for grouping mutually exclusive tags together; using curly brackets.
#+TAGS: { Context : @Home @Work @Call }
When setting org-tag-alist
you can use :startgroup
and :endgroup
instead of :startgrouptag
and :endgrouptag
to make the tags
mutually exclusive.
Furthermore, the members of a group tag can also be regular expressions, creating the possibility of a more dynamic and rule-based tag structure. The regular expressions in the group must be specified within curly brackets. Here is an expanded example:
#+TAGS: [ Vision : {V@.+} ] #+TAGS: [ Goal : {G@.+} ] #+TAGS: [ AOF : {AOF@.+} ] #+TAGS: [ Project : {P@.+} ]
Searching for the tag ‘Project’ now lists all tags also including regular expression matches for ‘P@.+’, and similarly for tag searches on ‘Vision’, ‘Goal’ and ‘AOF’. For example, this would work well for a project tagged with a common project-identifier, e.g., ‘P@2014_OrgTags’.
If you want to ignore group tags temporarily, toggle group tags
support with org-toggle-tags-groups
, bound to C-c C-x q.
If you want to disable tag groups completely, set org-group-tags
to
nil
.
上一页: Tag Hierarchy, 返回: Tags [目录][索引]
Once a system of tags has been set up, it can be used to collect related information into special lists.
org-match-sparse-tree
)Create a sparse tree with all headlines matching a tags search. With a C-u prefix argument, ignore headlines that are not a TODO line.
org-tags-view
)Create a global list of tag matches from all agenda files. See Matching tags and properties.
org-tags-view
).Create a global list of tag matches from all agenda files, but check
only TODO items and force checking subitems (see the option
org-tags-match-list-sublevels
).
These commands all prompt for a match string which allows basic Boolean logic like ‘+boss+urgent-project1’, to find entries with tags ‘boss’ and ‘urgent’, but not ‘project1’, or ‘Kathy|Sally’ to find entries which are tagged, like ‘Kathy’ or ‘Sally’. The full syntax of the search string is rich and allows also matching against TODO keywords, entry levels and properties. For a complete description with many examples, see Matching tags and properties.
下一页: Dates and Times, 上一页: Tags, 返回: Top [目录][索引]
A property is a key-value pair associated with an entry. Properties can be set so they are associated with a single entry, with every entry in a tree, or with the whole buffer.
There are two main applications for properties in Org mode. First, properties are like tags, but with a value. Imagine maintaining a file where you document bugs and plan releases for a piece of software. Instead of using tags like ‘release_1’, ‘release_2’, you can use a property, say ‘Release’, that in different subtrees has different values, such as ‘1.0’ or ‘2.0’. Second, you can use properties to implement (very basic) database capabilities in an Org buffer. Imagine keeping track of your music CDs, where properties could be things such as the album, artist, date of release, number of tracks, and so on.
Properties can be conveniently edited and viewed in column view (see Column View).
• 属性语法: | 属性的拼写方式。 | |
• 特殊属性: | 访问其他Org模式功能。 | |
• 属性搜索: | 匹配属性值。 | |
• 属性继承: | 把值从树上向下传递。 | |
• 列视图: | 表格查看和编辑。 |
下一页: Special Properties, 返回: Properties and Columns [目录][索引]
Properties are key–value pairs. When they are associated with a single entry or with a tree they need to be inserted into a special drawer (see Drawers) with the name ‘PROPERTIES’, which has to be located right below a headline, and its planning line (see Deadlines and Scheduling) when applicable. Each property is specified on a single line, with the key—surrounded by colons—first, and the value after it. Keys are case-insensitive. Here is an example:
* CD collection ** Classic *** Goldberg Variations :PROPERTIES: :Title: Goldberg Variations :Composer: J.S. Bach :Artist: Glenn Gould :Publisher: Deutsche Grammophon :NDisks: 1 :END:
Depending on the value of org-use-property-inheritance
, a property
set this way is associated either with a single entry, or with the
sub-tree defined by the entry, see Property Inheritance.
You may define the allowed values for a particular property ‘Xyz’ by setting a property ‘Xyz_ALL’. This special property is inherited, so if you set it in a level 1 entry, it applies to the entire tree. When allowed values are defined, setting the corresponding property becomes easier and is less prone to typing errors. For the example with the CD collection, we can pre-define publishers and the number of disks in a box like this:
* CD collection :PROPERTIES: :NDisks_ALL: 1 2 3 4 :Publisher_ALL: "Deutsche Grammophon" Philips EMI :END:
Properties can be inserted on buffer level. That means they apply before the first headline and can be inherited by all entries in a file. Property blocks defined before first headline needs to be located at the top of the buffer, allowing only comments above.
Properties can also be defined using lines like:
#+PROPERTY: NDisks_ALL 1 2 3 4
If you want to add to the value of an existing property, append a ‘+’ to the property name. The following results in the property ‘var’ having the value ‘foo=1 bar=2’.
#+PROPERTY: var foo=1 #+PROPERTY: var+ bar=2
It is also possible to add to the values of inherited properties. The following results in the ‘Genres’ property having the value ‘Classic Baroque’ under the ‘Goldberg Variations’ subtree.
* CD collection ** Classic :PROPERTIES: :Genres: Classic :END: *** Goldberg Variations :PROPERTIES: :Title: Goldberg Variations :Composer: J.S. Bach :Artist: Glenn Gould :Publisher: Deutsche Grammophon :NDisks: 1 :Genres+: Baroque :END:
Note that a property can only have one entry per drawer.
Property values set with the global variable org-global-properties
can be inherited by all entries in all Org files.
The following commands help to work with properties:
pcomplete
)After an initial colon in a line, complete property keys. All keys used in the current file are offered as possible completions.
org-set-property
)Set a property. This prompts for a property name and a value. If necessary, the property drawer is created as well.
Insert a property drawer into the current entry. The drawer is inserted early in the entry, but after the lines with planning information like deadlines. If before first headline the drawer is inserted at the top of the drawer after any potential comments.
org-property-action
)With point in a property drawer, this executes property commands.
org-set-property
)Set a property in the current entry. Both the property and the value can be inserted using completion.
org-property-next-allowed-values
)org-property-previous-allowed-value
)Switch property at point to the next/previous allowed value.
org-delete-property
)Remove a property from the current entry.
org-delete-property-globally
)Globally remove a property, from all entries in the current file.
org-compute-property-at-point
)Compute the property at point, using the operator and scope from the nearest column format definition.
下一页: Property Searches, 上一页: Property Syntax, 返回: Properties and Columns [目录][索引]
Special properties provide an alternative access method to Org mode features, like the TODO state or the priority of an entry, discussed in the previous chapters. This interface exists so that you can include these states in a column view (see Column View), or to use them in queries. The following property names are special and should not be used as keys in the properties drawer:
‘ALLTAGS’ | All tags, including inherited ones. |
‘BLOCKED’ | t if task is currently blocked by children or siblings. |
‘CATEGORY’ | The category of an entry. |
‘CLOCKSUM’ | The sum of CLOCK intervals in the subtree. org-clock-sum |
must be run first to compute the values in the current buffer. | |
‘CLOCKSUM_T’ | The sum of CLOCK intervals in the subtree for today. |
org-clock-sum-today must be run first to compute the | |
values in the current buffer. | |
‘CLOSED’ | When was this entry closed? |
‘DEADLINE’ | The deadline timestamp. |
‘FILE’ | The filename the entry is located in. |
‘ITEM’ | The headline of the entry. |
‘PRIORITY’ | The priority of the entry, a string with a single letter. |
‘SCHEDULED’ | The scheduling timestamp. |
‘TAGS’ | The tags defined directly in the headline. |
‘TIMESTAMP’ | The first keyword-less timestamp in the entry. |
‘TIMESTAMP_IA’ | The first inactive timestamp in the entry. |
‘TODO’ | The TODO keyword of the entry. |
下一页: Property Inheritance, 上一页: Special Properties, 返回: Properties and Columns [目录][索引]
To create sparse trees and special lists with selection based on properties, the same commands are used as for tag searches (see Tag Searches).
org-match-sparse-tree
)Create a sparse tree with all matching entries. With a C-u prefix argument, ignore headlines that are not a TODO line.
org-tags-view
)Create a global list of tag/property matches from all agenda files.
org-tags-view
).Create a global list of tag matches from all agenda files, but check
only TODO items and force checking of subitems (see the option
org-tags-match-list-sublevels
).
The syntax for the search string is described in Matching tags and properties.
There is also a special command for creating sparse trees based on a single property:
Create a sparse tree based on the value of a property. This first prompts for the name of a property, and then for a value. A sparse tree is created with all entries that define this property with the given value. If you enclose the value in curly braces, it is interpreted as a regular expression and matched against the property values.
下一页: Column View, 上一页: Property Searches, 返回: Properties and Columns [目录][索引]
The outline structure of Org documents lends itself to an inheritance
model of properties: if the parent in a tree has a certain property,
the children can inherit this property. Org mode does not turn this
on by default, because it can slow down property searches
significantly and is often not needed. However, if you find
inheritance useful, you can turn it on by setting the variable
org-use-property-inheritance
. It may be set to t
to make all
properties inherited from the parent, to a list of properties that
should be inherited, or to a regular expression that matches inherited
properties. If a property has the value nil
, this is interpreted as
an explicit un-define of the property, so that inheritance search
stops at this value and returns nil
.
Org mode has a few properties for which inheritance is hard-coded, at least for the special applications for which they are used:
COLUMNS
The ‘COLUMNS’ property defines the format of column view (see Column View). It is inherited in the sense that the level where a ‘COLUMNS’ property is defined is used as the starting point for a column view table, independently of the location in the subtree from where columns view is turned on.
CATEGORY
For agenda view, a category set through a ‘CATEGORY’ property applies to the entire subtree.
ARCHIVE
For archiving, the ‘ARCHIVE’ property may define the archive location for the entire subtree (see Moving subtrees).
LOGGING
The ‘LOGGING’ property may define logging settings for an entry or a subtree (see Tracking TODO state changes).
上一页: Property Inheritance, 返回: Properties and Columns [目录][索引]
A great way to view and edit properties in an outline tree is column view. In column view, each outline node is turned into a table row. Columns in this table provide access to properties of the entries. Org mode implements columns by overlaying a tabular structure over the headline of each item. While the headlines have been turned into a table row, you can still change the visibility of the outline tree. For example, you get a compact table by switching to “contents” view—S-TAB S-TAB, or simply c while column view is active—but you can still open, read, and edit the entry below each headline. Or, you can switch to column view after executing a sparse tree command and in this way get a table only for the selected items. Column view also works in agenda buffers (see Agenda Views) where queries have collected selected items, possibly from a number of files.
• 列定义: | COLUMNS格式属性。 | |
• 使用列视图: | 如何创建和使用列视图。 | |
• 捕获列视图: | 列视图的动态块。 |
下一页: Using column view, 返回: Column View [目录][索引]
Setting up a column view first requires defining the columns. This is done by defining a column format line.
• 列定义范围: | 哪里定义了,哪里有效? | |
• 列属性: | 列的外观和内容。 |
下一页: Column attributes, 返回: Defining columns [目录][索引]
To specify a format that only applies to a specific tree, add a ‘COLUMNS’ property to the top node of that tree, for example:
** Top node for columns view :PROPERTIES: :COLUMNS: %25ITEM %TAGS %PRIORITY %TODO :END:
A ‘COLUMNS’ property within a property drawer before first headline will apply to the entire file. As an addition to property drawers, keywords can also be defined for an entire file using a line like:
#+COLUMNS: %25ITEM %TAGS %PRIORITY %TODO
If a ‘COLUMNS’ property is present in an entry, it defines columns for the entry itself, and for the entire subtree below it. Since the column definition is part of the hierarchical structure of the document, you can define columns on level 1 that are general enough for all sublevels, and more specific columns further down, when you edit a deeper part of the tree.
上一页: Scope of column definitions, 返回: Defining columns [目录][索引]
A column definition sets the attributes of a column. The general definition looks like this:
%[WIDTH]PROPERTY[(TITLE)][{SUMMARY-TYPE}]
Except for the percent sign and the property name, all items are optional. The individual parts have the following meaning:
An integer specifying the width of the column in characters. If omitted, the width is determined automatically.
The property that should be edited in this column. Special properties representing meta data are allowed here as well (see Special Properties).
The header text for the column. If omitted, the property name is used.
The summary type. If specified, the column values for parent nodes are computed from the children55.
Supported summary types are:
‘+’ | Sum numbers in this column. |
‘+;%.1f’ | Like ‘+’, but format result with ‘%.1f’. |
‘$’ | Currency, short for ‘+;%.2f’. |
‘min’ | Smallest number in column. |
‘max’ | Largest number. |
‘mean’ | Arithmetic mean of numbers. |
‘X’ | Checkbox status, ‘[X]’ if all children are ‘[X]’. |
‘X/’ | Checkbox status, ‘[n/m]’. |
‘X%’ | Checkbox status, ‘[n%]’. |
‘:’ | Sum times, HH:MM, plain numbers are minutes. |
‘:min’ | Smallest time value in column. |
‘:max’ | Largest time value. |
‘:mean’ | Arithmetic mean of time values. |
‘@min’ | Minimum age56 (in days/hours/mins/seconds). |
‘@max’ | Maximum age (in days/hours/mins/seconds). |
‘@mean’ | Arithmetic mean of ages (in days/hours/mins/seconds). |
‘est+’ | Add low-high estimates. |
You can also define custom summary types by setting
org-columns-summary-types
.
The ‘est+’ summary type requires further explanation. It is used for combining estimates, expressed as low-high ranges. For example, instead of estimating a particular task will take 5 days, you might estimate it as 5–6 days if you’re fairly confident you know how much work is required, or 1–10 days if you do not really know what needs to be done. Both ranges average at 5.5 days, but the first represents a more predictable delivery.
When combining a set of such estimates, simply adding the lows and highs produces an unrealistically wide result. Instead, ‘est+’ adds the statistical mean and variance of the subtasks, generating a final estimate from the sum. For example, suppose you had ten tasks, each of which was estimated at 0.5 to 2 days of work. Straight addition produces an estimate of 5 to 20 days, representing what to expect if everything goes either extremely well or extremely poorly. In contrast, ‘est+’ estimates the full job more realistically, at 10–15 days.
Here is an example for a complete columns definition, along with allowed values57.
:COLUMNS: %25ITEM %9Approved(Approved?){X} %Owner %11Status \ %10Time_Estimate{:} %CLOCKSUM %CLOCKSUM_T :Owner_ALL: Tammy Mark Karl Lisa Don :Status_ALL: "In progress" "Not started yet" "Finished" "" :Approved_ALL: "[ ]" "[X]"
The first column, ‘%25ITEM’, means the first 25 characters of the item itself, i.e., of the headline. You probably always should start the column definition with the ‘ITEM’ specifier. The other specifiers create columns ‘Owner’ with a list of names as allowed values, for ‘Status’ with four different possible values, and for a checkbox field ‘Approved’. When no width is given after the ‘%’ character, the column is exactly as wide as it needs to be in order to fully display all values. The ‘Approved’ column does have a modified title (‘Approved?’, with a question mark). Summaries are created for the ‘Time_Estimate’ column by adding time duration expressions like HH:MM, and for the ‘Approved’ column, by providing an ‘[X]’ status if all children have been checked. The ‘CLOCKSUM’ and ‘CLOCKSUM_T’ columns are special, they lists the sums of CLOCK intervals in the subtree, either for all clocks or just for today.
下一页: Capturing column view, 上一页: Defining columns, 返回: Column View [目录][索引]
org-columns
)Turn on column view. If point is before the first headline in the
file, column view is turned on for the entire file, using the
‘#+COLUMNS’ definition. If point is somewhere inside the outline,
this command searches the hierarchy, up from point, for a ‘COLUMNS’
property that defines a format. When one is found, the column view
table is established for the tree starting at the entry that
contains the ‘COLUMNS’ property. If no such property is found, the
format is taken from the ‘#+COLUMNS’ line or from the variable
org-columns-default-format
, and column view is established for the
current entry and its subtree.
org-columns-redo
)Recreate the column view, to include recent changes made in the buffer.
org-columns-quit
)Exit column view.
Move through the column view from field to field.
Directly select the Nth allowed value, 0 selects the 10th value.
org-columns-next-allowed-value
)org-columns-previous-allowed-value
)Switch to the next/previous allowed value of the field. For this, you have to have specified allowed values for a property.
org-columns-edit-value
)Edit the property at point. For the special properties, this invokes the same interface that you normally use to change that property. For example, the tag completion or fast selection interface pops up when editing a ‘TAGS’ property.
org-columns-toggle-or-columns-quit
)When there is a checkbox at point, toggle it. Else exit column view.
org-columns-show-value
)View the full value of this property. This is useful if the width of the column is smaller than that of the value.
org-columns-edit-allowed
)Edit the list of allowed values for this property. If the list is found in the hierarchy, the modified values is stored there. If no list is found, the new value is stored in the first entry that is part of the current column view.
org-columns-narrow
)org-columns-widen
)Make the column narrower/wider by one character.
org-columns-new
)Insert a new column, to the left of the current column.
org-columns-delete
)Delete the current column.
上一页: Using column view, 返回: Column View [目录][索引]
Since column view is just an overlay over a buffer, it cannot be exported or printed directly. If you want to capture a column view, use a ‘columnview’ dynamic block (see Dynamic Blocks). The frame of this block looks like this:
* The column view #+BEGIN: columnview :hlines 1 :id "label" #+END:
This dynamic block has the following parameters:
This is the most important parameter. Column view is a feature that is often localized to a certain (sub)tree, and the capture block might be at a different location in the file. To identify the tree whose view to capture, you can use four values:
Use the tree in which the capture block is located.
Make a global view, including all headings in the file.
Run column view at the top of the FILENAME file.
Call column view in the tree that has an ‘ID’ property with the value LABEL. You can use M-x org-id-copy to create a globally unique ID for the current entry and copy it to the kill-ring.
When set to a string, use this as a tags/property match filter to
select only a subset of the headlines in the scope set by the :id
parameter.
When t
, insert an hline after every line. When a number N, insert
an hline before each headline with level <= N
.
When non-nil
, force column groups to get vertical lines.
When set to a number, do not capture entries below this level.
When non-nil
, skip rows where the only non-empty specifier of
the column view is ‘ITEM’.
List of tags to exclude from column view table: entries with these tags will be excluded from the column view.
When non-nil
, indent each ‘ITEM’ field according to its level.
Specify a column attribute (see Column attributes) for the dynamic block.
The following commands insert or update the dynamic block:
org-columns-insert-dblock
Insert a dynamic block capturing a column view. Prompt for the scope or ID of the view.
This command can be invoked by calling
org-dynamic-block-insert-dblock
(C-c C-x x) and
selecting “columnview” (see Dynamic Blocks).
org-dblock-update
)Update dynamic block at point. point needs to be in the ‘#+BEGIN’ line of the dynamic block.
org-update-all-dblocks
)Update all dynamic blocks (see Dynamic Blocks). This is useful if you have several clock table blocks, column-capturing blocks or other dynamic blocks in a buffer.
You can add formulas to the column view table and you may add plotting instructions in front of the table—these survive an update of the block. If there is a ‘TBLFM’ keyword after the table, the table is recalculated automatically after an update.
An alternative way to capture and process property values into a table is provided by Eric Schulte’s ‘org-collector.el’, which is a contributed package58. It provides a general API to collect properties from entries in a certain scope, and arbitrary Lisp expressions to process these values before inserting them into a table or a dynamic block.
下一页: Refiling and Archiving, 上一页: Properties and Columns, 返回: Top [目录][索引]
To assist project planning, TODO items can be labeled with a date and/or a time. The specially formatted string carrying the date and time information is called a timestamp in Org mode. This may be a little confusing because timestamp is often used as indicating when something was created or last changed. However, in Org mode this term is used in a much wider sense.
• 时间戳: | 为树的枝干条目分配时间。 | |
• 创建时间戳: | 用于插入时间戳的命令。 | |
• 截止日期和日程安排: | 计划你的工作。 | |
• 工作时间计时: | 跟踪您在一项任务上花费的时间。 | |
• 工作量估算: | 计划会提高工作成果。 | |
• 计时器: | 带运行计时器的笔记。 |
下一页: Creating Timestamps, 返回: Dates and Times [目录][索引]
A timestamp is a specification of a date (possibly with a time or a range of times) in a special format, either ‘<2003-09-16 Tue>’ or ‘<2003-09-16 Tue 09:39>’ or ‘<2003-09-16 Tue 12:00-12:30>’59. A timestamp can appear anywhere in the headline or body of an Org tree entry. Its presence causes entries to be shown on specific dates in the agenda (see Weekly/daily agenda). We distinguish:
A simple timestamp just assigns a date/time to an item. This is just like writing down an appointment or event in a paper agenda. In the agenda display, the headline of an entry associated with a plain timestamp is shown exactly on that date.
* Meet Peter at the movies <2006-11-01 Wed 19:15> * Discussion on climate change <2006-11-02 Thu 20:00-22:00>
A timestamp may contain a repeater interval, indicating that it applies not only on the given date, but again and again after a certain interval of N days (d), weeks (w), months (m), or years (y). The following shows up in the agenda every Wednesday:
* Pick up Sam at school <2007-05-16 Wed 12:30 +1w>
For more complex date specifications, Org mode supports using the special expression diary entries implemented in the Emacs Calendar package60. For example, with optional time:
* 22:00-23:00 The nerd meeting on every 2nd Thursday of the month <%%(diary-float t 4 2)>
Two timestamps connected by ‘--’ denote a range. The headline is shown on the first and last day of the range, and on any dates that are displayed and fall in the range. Here is an example:
** Meeting in Amsterdam <2004-08-23 Mon>--<2004-08-26 Thu>
Just like a plain timestamp, but with square brackets instead of angular ones. These timestamps are inactive in the sense that they do not trigger an entry to show up in the agenda.
* Gillian comes late for the fifth time [2006-11-01 Wed]
下一页: Deadlines and Scheduling, 上一页: Timestamps, 返回: Dates and Times [目录][索引]
For Org mode to recognize timestamps, they need to be in the specific format. All commands listed below produce timestamps in the correct format.
org-time-stamp
)Prompt for a date and insert a corresponding timestamp. When point is at an existing timestamp in the buffer, the command is used to modify this timestamp instead of inserting a new one. When this command is used twice in succession, a time range is inserted.
When called with a prefix argument, use the alternative format which
contains date and time. The default time can be rounded to
multiples of 5 minutes. See the option
org-time-stamp-rounding-minutes
.
With two prefix arguments, insert an active timestamp with the current time without prompting.
org-time-stamp-inactive
)Like C-c ., but insert an inactive timestamp that does not cause an agenda entry.
Normalize timestamp, insert or fix day name if missing or wrong.
org-date-from-calendar
)Insert a timestamp corresponding to point date in the calendar.
org-goto-calendar
)Access the Emacs calendar for the current date. If there is a timestamp in the current line, go to the corresponding date instead.
org-open-at-point
)Access the agenda for the date given by the timestamp or -range at point (see Weekly/daily agenda).
org-timestamp-down-day
)org-timestamp-up-day
)Change date at point by one day. These key bindings conflict with shift-selection and related modes (see Conflicts).
org-timestamp-up
)org-timestamp-down
)On the beginning or enclosing bracket of a timestamp, change its type. Within a timestamp, change the item under point. Point can be on a year, month, day, hour or minute. When the timestamp contains a time range like ‘15:30-16:30’, modifying the first time also shifts the second, shifting the time block with constant length. To change the length, modify the second time. Note that if point is in a headline and not at a timestamp, these same keys modify the priority of an item (see Priorities). The key bindings also conflict with shift-selection and related modes (see Conflicts).
org-evaluate-time-range
)Evaluate a time range by computing the difference between start and end. With a prefix argument, insert result after the time range (in a table: into the following column).
• 日期/时间提示: | Org模式如何帮助您输入日期和时间。 | |
• 自定义时间格式: | 让日期看起来不一样。 |
下一页: Custom time format, 返回: Creating Timestamps [目录][索引]
When Org mode prompts for a date/time, the default is shown in default date/time format, and the prompt therefore seems to ask for a specific format. But it in fact accepts date/time information in a variety of formats. Generally, the information should start at the beginning of the string. Org mode finds whatever information is in there and derives anything you have not specified from the default date and time. The default is usually the current date and time, but when modifying an existing timestamp, or when entering the second stamp of a range, it is taken from the stamp in the buffer. When filling in information, Org mode assumes that most of the time you want to enter a date in the future: if you omit the month/year and the given day/month is before today, it assumes that you mean a future date61. If the date has been automatically shifted into the future, the time prompt shows this with ‘(=>F)’.
For example, let’s assume that today is June 13, 2006. Here is how various inputs are interpreted, the items filled in by Org mode are in bold.
‘3-2-5’ | ⇒ 2003-02-05 |
‘2/5/3’ | ⇒ 2003-02-05 |
‘14’ | ⇒ 2006-06-14 |
‘12’ | ⇒ 2006-07-12 |
‘2/5’ | ⇒ 2007-02-05 |
‘Fri’ | ⇒ nearest Friday (default date or later) |
‘sep 15’ | ⇒ 2006-09-15 |
‘feb 15’ | ⇒ 2007-02-15 |
‘sep 12 9’ | ⇒ 2009-09-12 |
‘12:45’ | ⇒ 2006-06-13 12:45 |
‘22 sept 0:34’ | ⇒ 2006-09-22 0:34 |
‘w4’ | ⇒ ISO week for of the current year 2006 |
‘2012 w4 fri’ | ⇒ Friday of ISO week 4 in 2012 |
‘2012-w04-5’ | ⇒ Same as above |
Furthermore you can specify a relative date by giving, as the first thing in the input: a plus/minus sign, a number and a letter—‘d’, ‘w’, ‘m’ or ‘y’—to indicate change in days, weeks, months, or years. With a single plus or minus, the date is always relative to today. With a double plus or minus, it is relative to the default date. If instead of a single letter, you use the abbreviation of day name, the date is the Nth such day, e.g.:
‘+0’ | ⇒ today |
‘.’ | ⇒ today |
‘+4d’ | ⇒ four days from today |
‘+4’ | ⇒ same as +4d |
‘+2w’ | ⇒ two weeks from today |
‘++5’ | ⇒ five days from default date |
‘+2tue’ | ⇒ second Tuesday from now |
The function understands English month and weekday abbreviations. If
you want to use un-abbreviated names and/or other languages, configure
the variables parse-time-months
and parse-time-weekdays
.
Not all dates can be represented in a given Emacs implementation. By
default Org mode forces dates into the compatibility range 1970–2037
which works on all Emacs implementations. If you want to use dates
outside of this range, read the docstring of the variable
org-read-date-force-compatible-dates
.
You can specify a time range by giving start and end times or by giving a start time and a duration (in HH:MM format). Use one or two dash(es) as the separator in the former case and use ‘+’ as the separator in the latter case, e.g.:
‘11am-1:15pm’ | ⇒ 11:00-13:15 |
‘11am--1:15pm’ | ⇒ same as above |
‘11am+2:15’ | ⇒ same as above |
Parallel to the minibuffer prompt, a calendar is popped up62. When you exit the date prompt, either by clicking on a date in the calendar, or by pressing RET, the date selected in the calendar is combined with the information entered at the prompt. You can control the calendar fully from the minibuffer:
RET | Choose date at point in calendar. |
鼠标左键 | Select date by clicking on it. |
S-RIGHT | One day forward. |
S-LEFT | One day backward. |
S-DOWN | One week forward. |
S-UP | One week backward. |
M-S-RIGHT | One month forward. |
M-S-LEFT | One month backward. |
> | Scroll calendar forward by one month. |
< | Scroll calendar backward by one month. |
M-v | Scroll calendar forward by 3 months. |
C-v | Scroll calendar backward by 3 months. |
C-. | Select today’s date63 |
The actions of the date/time prompt may seem complex, but I assure you they will grow on you, and you will start getting annoyed by pretty much any other way of entering a date/time out there. To help you understand what is going on, the current interpretation of your input is displayed live in the minibuffer64.
上一页: The date/time prompt, 返回: Creating Timestamps [目录][索引]
Org mode uses the standard ISO notation for dates and times as it is
defined in ISO 8601. If you cannot get used to this and require
another representation of date and time to keep you happy, you can get
it by customizing the variables org-display-custom-times
and
org-time-stamp-custom-formats
.
org-toggle-time-stamp-overlays
)Toggle the display of custom formats for dates and times.
Org mode needs the default format for scanning, so the custom date/time format does not replace the default format. Instead, it is put over the default format using text properties. This has the following consequences:
下一页: Clocking Work Time, 上一页: Creating Timestamps, 返回: Dates and Times [目录][索引]
A timestamp may be preceded by special keywords to facilitate planning. Both the timestamp and the keyword have to be positioned immediately after the task they refer to.
Meaning: the task—most likely a TODO item, though not necessarily—is supposed to be finished on that date.
On the deadline date, the task is listed in the agenda. In
addition, the agenda for today carries a warning about the
approaching or missed deadline, starting org-deadline-warning-days
before the due date, and continuing until the entry is marked as
done. An example:
*** TODO write article about the Earth for the Guide DEADLINE: <2004-02-29 Sun> The editor in charge is [[bbdb:Ford Prefect]]
You can specify a different lead time for warnings for a specific
deadlines using the following syntax. Here is an example with
a warning period of 5 days ‘DEADLINE: <2004-02-29 Sun -5d>’. This
warning is deactivated if the task gets scheduled and you set
org-agenda-skip-deadline-prewarning-if-scheduled
to t
.
Meaning: you are planning to start working on that task on the given date.
The headline is listed under the given date65. In addition, a reminder that the scheduled date has passed is present in the compilation for today, until the entry is marked as done, i.e., the task is automatically forwarded until completed.
*** TODO Call Trillian for a date on New Years Eve. SCHEDULED: <2004-12-25 Sat>
If you want to delay the display of this task in the agenda, use
‘SCHEDULED: <2004-12-25 Sat -2d>’: the task is still scheduled on
the 25th but will appear two days later. In case the task contains
a repeater, the delay is considered to affect all occurrences; if
you want the delay to only affect the first scheduled occurrence of
the task, use ‘--2d’ instead. See org-scheduled-delay-days
and
org-agenda-skip-scheduled-delay-if-deadline
for details on how to
control this globally or per agenda.
Important: Scheduling an item in Org mode should not be understood in the same way that we understand scheduling a meeting. Setting a date for a meeting is just a simple appointment, you should mark this entry with a simple plain timestamp, to get this item shown on the date where it applies. This is a frequent misunderstanding by Org users. In Org mode, scheduling means setting a date when you want to start working on an action item.
You may use timestamps with repeaters in scheduling and deadline entries. Org mode issues early and late warnings based on the assumption that the timestamp represents the nearest instance of the repeater. However, the use of diary expression entries like
<%%(diary-float t 42)>
in scheduling and deadline timestamps is limited. Org mode does not know enough about the internals of each function to issue early and late warnings. However, it shows the item on each day where the expression entry matches.
• 插入截止日期/日程安排: | 计划项。 | |
• 重复任务: | 一次又一次出现的项目。 |
下一页: Repeated tasks, 返回: Deadlines and Scheduling [目录][索引]
The following commands allow you to quickly insert a deadline or to schedule an item:66
org-deadline
)Insert ‘DEADLINE’ keyword along with a stamp. The insertion happens
in the line directly following the headline. Remove any ‘CLOSED’
timestamp . When called with a prefix argument, also remove any
existing deadline from the entry. Depending on the variable
org-log-redeadline
, take a note when changing an existing
deadline67.
org-schedule
)Insert ‘SCHEDULED’ keyword along with a stamp. The insertion
happens in the line directly following the headline. Remove any
‘CLOSED’ timestamp. When called with a prefix argument, also remove
the scheduling date from the entry. Depending on the variable
org-log-reschedule
, take a note when changing an existing
scheduling time68.
org-check-deadlines
)Create a sparse tree with all deadlines that are either past-due, or
which will become due within org-deadline-warning-days
. With
C-u prefix, show all deadlines in the file. With
a numeric prefix, check that many days. For example, C-1 C-c / d shows all deadlines due tomorrow.
org-check-before-date
)Sparse tree for deadlines and scheduled items before a given date.
org-check-after-date
)Sparse tree for deadlines and scheduled items after a given date.
Note that org-schedule
and org-deadline
supports setting the date
by indicating a relative time e.g., ‘+1d’ sets the date to the next
day after today, and ‘--1w’ sets the date to the previous week before
any current timestamp.
上一页: Inserting deadline/schedule, 返回: Deadlines and Scheduling [目录][索引]
有些任务需要一遍又一遍地重复。Org mode为了组织这样的任务,使通过在 ‘DEADLINE’, ‘SCHEDULED’,或普通时间戳69 上使用被称为复读机的功能。在以下示例中:
** TODO Pay the rent DEADLINE: <2005-10-01 Sat +1m>
“+1m”是一个复读机;预期的解释是任务的截止日期为“<2005-10-01>”,并从该时间开始每(一个)月重复一次。您可以通过使用“y”、“w”、“m”、“d”和“h”字母来创建每年、每月、每周、每天和每小时间隔的复读机。如果在截止日期输入中既需要复读机,又需要特殊的提醒天数,则应先有中继器,最后才有提醒天数
DEADLINE: <2005-10-01 Sat +1m -3d>
截止日期和日程安排在过期时会在议程中生成条目,因此,一旦您这样做了,就能够将此类条目标记为已完成,这一点很重要。当你把‘DEADLINE’或‘SCHEDULED’标记为TODO关键字 ‘DONE’时,它不再在议程中生成条目。然而,这样做的问题是,重复条目的下一个实例也将不会处于正在进行的状态。Org mode通过以下方式处理此问题:当您尝试使用C-c C-t将这样的条目标记为完成时,它将重复时间戳的基准日期移位一个复读机间隔,并立即将条目状态设置回TODO70。在上面的示例中,将状态设置为“DONE”实际上会切换日期,如下所示:
** TODO Pay the rent DEADLINE: <2005-11-01 Tue +1m>
要使用复读机将任务标记为已完成,请使用C--1C-c C-t,即org-todo
携带数字前缀参数‘-1’。
截止日期下面会添加一条时间戳71,以记录您在此截止日期的上一个实例中实际操作的情况。
由于更改了基准日期,在检查过去日期时,此条目在议程中不再可见,但所有将来的实例都将可见。
对于“+1m”,日期转换始终正好是一个月。因此,如果你已经三个月没有付房租了,标记这个条目仍然是一个逾期的最后期限。根据任务的不同,这可能不是处理它的最佳方式。例如,如果你有3个星期忘了给你父亲打电话,那么一天给他打3次电话来弥补是没有意义的。最后,还有一些任务,比如更换电池,它们应该始终在您上次操作之后的特定时间重复执行。对于这些任务,Org mode具有特殊的复读机“++”和“.+”。例如:
** TODO Call Father DEADLINE: <2008-02-10 Sun ++1w> 将此标记为DONE会将日期至少移动一周, 并且尽可能的把时间戳放到未来。 然而,它将停留在星期天,即使您在周六就打电话并标记了它。 ** TODO Empty kitchen trash DEADLINE: <2008-02-08 Fri 20:00 ++1d> 如果将此标记为DONE,则日期至少会移动一天, 并且尽可能的把时间戳放到未来。 由于时间戳记中有时间,因此如果您在20:00之前完成任务, 则将来的下一个截止日期将是今天的日期。 ** TODO Check the batteries in the smoke detectors DEADLINE: <2005-11-01 Tue .+1m> 将此标记为DONE会将日期移至今天之后的一个月。 ** TODO Wash my hands DEADLINE: <2019-04-05 08:00 Sun .+1h> 如果将此标记为DONE,则日期将恰好从现在起移至一个小时后。
对于某些特定任务,您可能同时拥有日程安排和截止日期信息。如果仅为日程安排信息设置复读机,您可能希望在截止日期之后忽略复读机。如果是这样,请将变量org-agenda-skip-scheduled-if-deadline-is-shown
设置为repeat-after-deadline
。然而,一旦任务完成,任何没有复读机的日程安排信息都不再相关,因此在重复任务时将其删除。如果希望在同一时间间隔后同时重复日程安排和截止日期信息,请为这两个时间戳设置相同的复读机。
使用复读机的另一种选择是创建任务子树的多个副本,每个副本中的日期都会被移动。命令C-c C-x c就是为此创建的;结构编辑中介绍了该命令。
下一页: Effort Estimates, 上一页: Deadlines and Scheduling, 返回: Dates and Times [目录][索引]
Org mode allows you to clock the time you spend on specific tasks in a project. When you start working on an item, you can start the clock. When you stop working on that task, or when you mark the task done, the clock is stopped and the corresponding time interval is recorded. It also computes the total time spent on each subtree72 of a project. And it remembers a history or tasks recently clocked, so that you can jump quickly between a number of tasks absorbing your time.
To save the clock history across Emacs sessions, use:
(setq org-clock-persist 'history) (org-clock-persistence-insinuate)
When you clock into a new task after resuming Emacs, the incomplete clock73 is retrieved (see Resolving idle time (1)) and you are prompted about what to do with it.
• 计时命令: | 启动和停止计时。 | |
• 计时表格: | 详细的报告。 | |
• 解决空闲时间: | 在你空闲的时候解决时间问题。 |
下一页: The clock table, 返回: Clocking Work Time [目录][索引]
org-clock-in
)Start the clock on the current item (clock-in). This inserts the
‘CLOCK’ keyword together with a timestamp. If this is not the first
clocking of this item, the multiple ‘CLOCK’ lines are wrapped into
a ‘LOGBOOK’ drawer (see also the variable org-clock-into-drawer
).
You can also overrule the setting of this variable for a subtree by
setting a ‘CLOCK_INTO_DRAWER’ or ‘LOG_INTO_DRAWER’ property. When
called with a C-u prefix argument, select the task from
a list of recently clocked tasks. With two C-u C-u
prefixes, clock into the task at point and mark it as the default
task; the default task is always be available with letter
d when selecting a clocking task. With three C-u C-u C-u prefixes, force continuous clocking by starting the
clock when the last clock stopped.
While the clock is running, Org shows the current clocking time in
the mode line, along with the title of the task. The clock time
shown is all time ever clocked for this task and its children. If
the task has an effort estimate (see Effort Estimates), the mode
line displays the current clocking time against it74. If the
task is a repeating one (see Repeated tasks), show only the time
since the last reset of the task75. You can exercise more
control over show time with the ‘CLOCK_MODELINE_TOTAL’ property. It
may have the values ‘current’ to show only the current clocking
instance, ‘today’ to show all time clocked on this tasks today—see
also the variable org-extend-today-until
, all
to include all
time, or auto
which is the default76. Clicking with
mouse-1 onto the mode line entry pops up a menu with
clocking options.
org-clock-out
)Stop the clock (clock-out). This inserts another timestamp at the
same location where the clock was last started. It also directly
computes the resulting time in inserts it after the time range as
‘=>HH:MM’. See the variable org-log-note-clock-out
for the
possibility to record an additional note together with the clock-out
timestamp77.
org-clock-in-last
)Re-clock the last clocked task. With one C-u prefix argument, select the task from the clock history. With two C-u prefixes, force continuous clocking by starting the clock when the last clock stopped.
org-clock-modify-effort-estimate
)Update the effort estimate for the current clock task.
org-evaluate-time-range
)Recompute the time interval after changing one of the timestamps. This is only necessary if you edit the timestamps directly. If you change them with S-<cursor> keys, the update is automatic.
org-clock-timestamps-up
)org-clock-timestamps-down
)On CLOCK log lines, increase/decrease both timestamps so that the clock duration keeps the same value.
org-timestamp-up
)org-timestamp-down
)On ‘CLOCK’ log lines, increase/decrease the timestamp at point and the one of the previous, or the next, clock timestamp by the same duration. For example, if you hit S-M-UP to increase a clocked-out timestamp by five minutes, then the clocked-in timestamp of the next clock is increased by five minutes.
org-todo
)Changing the TODO state of an item to DONE automatically stops the clock if it is running in this same item.
org-clock-cancel
)Cancel the current clock. This is useful if a clock was started by mistake, or if you ended up working on something else.
org-clock-goto
)Jump to the headline of the currently clocked in task. With a C-u prefix argument, select the target task from a list of recently clocked tasks.
org-clock-display
)Display time summaries for each subtree in the current buffer. This
puts overlays at the end of each headline, showing the total time
recorded under that heading, including the time of any subheadings.
You can use visibility cycling to study the tree, but the overlays
disappear when you change the buffer (see variable
org-remove-highlights-with-change
) or press C-c C-c.
The l key may be used in the agenda (see Weekly/daily agenda) to show which tasks have been worked on or closed during a day.
Important: note that both org-clock-out
and org-clock-in-last
can have a global keybinding and do not modify the window disposition.
下一页: Resolving idle time, 上一页: Clocking commands, 返回: Clocking Work Time [目录][索引]
Org mode can produce quite complex reports based on the time clocking information. Such a report is called a clock table, because it is formatted as one or several Org tables.
org-clock-report
Insert or update a clock table. When called with a prefix argument, jump to the first clock table in the current document and update it. The clock table includes archived trees.
This command can be invoked by calling
org-dynamic-block-insert-dblock
(C-c C-x x) and
selecting “clocktable” (see Dynamic Blocks).
org-dblock-update
)Update dynamic block at point. Point needs to be in the ‘BEGIN’ line of the dynamic block.
Update all dynamic blocks (see Dynamic Blocks). This is useful if you have several clock table blocks in a buffer.
org-clocktable-try-shift
)Shift the current ‘:block’ interval and update the table. Point needs to be in the ‘#+BEGIN: clocktable’ line for this command. If ‘:block’ is ‘today’, it is shifted to ‘today-1’, etc.
Here is an example of the frame for a clock table as it is inserted
into the buffer by org-clock-report
:
#+BEGIN: clocktable :maxlevel 2 :emphasize nil :scope file #+END: clocktable
The ‘#+BEGIN’ line contains options to define the scope, structure,
and formatting of the report. Defaults for all these options can be
configured in the variable org-clocktable-defaults
.
First there are options that determine which clock entries are to be selected:
Maximum level depth to which times are listed in the table. Clocks at deeper levels are summed into the upper level.
The scope to consider. This can be any of the following:
‘nil’ | the current buffer or narrowed region |
‘file’ | the full current buffer |
‘subtree’ | the subtree where the clocktable is located |
‘treeN’ | the surrounding level N tree, for example ‘tree3’ |
‘tree’ | the surrounding level 1 tree |
‘agenda’ | all agenda files |
‘("file" ...)’ | scan these files |
‘FUNCTION’ | scan files returned by calling FUNCTION with no argument |
‘file-with-archives’ | current file and its archives |
‘agenda-with-archives’ | all agenda files, including archives |
The time block to consider. This block is specified either absolutely, or relative to the current time and may be any of these formats:
‘2007-12-31’ | New year eve 2007 |
‘2007-12’ | December 2007 |
‘2007-W50’ | ISO-week 50 in 2007 |
‘2007-Q2’ | 2nd quarter in 2007 |
‘2007’ | the year 2007 |
‘today’, ‘yesterday’, ‘today-N’ | a relative day |
‘thisweek’, ‘lastweek’, ‘thisweek-N’ | a relative week |
‘thismonth’, ‘lastmonth’, ‘thismonth-N’ | a relative month |
‘thisyear’, ‘lastyear’, ‘thisyear-N’ | a relative year |
‘untilnow’78 | all clocked time ever |
When this option is not set, Org falls back to the value in
org-clock-display-default-range
, which defaults to the current
year.
Use S-LEFT or S-RIGHT to shift the time interval.
A time string specifying when to start considering times. Relative times like ‘"<-2w>"’ can also be used. See Matching tags and properties for relative time syntax.
A time string specifying when to stop considering times. Relative times like ‘"<now>"’ can also be used. See Matching tags and properties for relative time syntax.
The starting day of the week. The default is 1 for Monday.
The starting day of the month. The default is 1 for the first.
Set to ‘day’, ‘week’, ‘semimonth’, ‘month’, or ‘year’ to split the table into chunks. To use this, either ‘:block’, or ‘:tstart’ and ‘:tend’ are required.
When non-nil
, do not show steps that have zero time.
When non-nil
, do not show table sections from files which did not
contribute.
A tags match to select entries that should contribute. See Matching tags and properties for the match syntax.
Then there are options that determine the formatting of the table.
There options are interpreted by the function
org-clocktable-write-default
, but you can specify your own function
using the ‘:formatter’ parameter.
When non-nil
, emphasize level one and level two items.
Language79 to use for descriptive cells like “Task”.
Link the item headlines in the table to their origins.
An integer to limit the width of the headline column in the Org table. If you write it like ‘50!’, then the headline is also shortened in export.
Indent each headline field according to its level.
Hide the file column when multiple files are used to produce the table.
Number of columns to be used for times. If this is smaller than ‘:maxlevel’, lower levels are lumped into one column.
Should a level number column be included?
A cons cell containing the column to sort and a sorting type. E.g., ‘:sort (1 . ?a)’ sorts the first column alphabetically.
Abbreviation for ‘:level nil :indent t :narrow 40! :tcolumns 1’. All are overwritten except if there is an explicit ‘:narrow’.
A timestamp for the entry, when available. Look for ‘SCHEDULED’, ‘DEADLINE’, ‘TIMESTAMP’ and ‘TIMESTAMP_IA’ special properties (see Special Properties), in this order.
When this flag is non-nil
, show the headline’s tags.
List of properties shown in the table. Each property gets its own column.
When this flag is non-nil
, the values for ‘:properties’ are
inherited.
Content of a ‘TBLFM’ keyword to be added and evaluated. As a special case, ‘:formula %’ adds a column with % time. If you do not specify a formula here, any existing formula below the clock table survives updates and is evaluated.
A function to format clock data and insert it into the buffer.
To get a clock summary of the current level 1 tree, for the current day, you could write:
#+BEGIN: clocktable :maxlevel 2 :block today :scope tree1 :link t #+END: clocktable
To use a specific time range you could write80
#+BEGIN: clocktable :tstart "<2006-08-10 Thu 10:00>" :tend "<2006-08-10 Thu 12:00>" #+END: clocktable
A range starting a week ago and ending right now could be written as
#+BEGIN: clocktable :tstart "<-1w>" :tend "<now>" #+END: clocktable
A summary of the current subtree with % times would be
#+BEGIN: clocktable :scope subtree :link t :formula % #+END: clocktable
A horizontally compact representation of everything clocked during last week would be
#+BEGIN: clocktable :scope agenda :block lastweek :compact t #+END: clocktable
上一页: The clock table, 返回: Clocking Work Time [目录][索引]
If you clock in on a work item, and then walk away from your computer—perhaps to take a phone call—you often need to “resolve” the time you were away by either subtracting it from the current clock, or applying it to another one.
By customizing the variable org-clock-idle-time
to some integer,
such as 10 or 15, Emacs can alert you when you get back to your
computer after being idle for that many minutes81, and ask what
you want to do with the idle time. There will be a question waiting
for you when you get back, indicating how much idle time has passed
constantly updated with the current amount, as well as a set of
choices to correct the discrepancy:
To keep some or all of the minutes and stay clocked in, press k. Org asks how many of the minutes to keep. Press RET to keep them all, effectively changing nothing, or enter a number to keep that many minutes.
If you use the shift key and press K, it keeps however many minutes you request and then immediately clock out of that task. If you keep all of the minutes, this is the same as just clocking out of the current task.
To keep none of the minutes, use s to subtract all the away time from the clock, and then check back in from the moment you returned.
To keep none of the minutes and just clock out at the start of the away time, use the shift key and press S. Remember that using shift always leave you clocked out, no matter which option you choose.
To cancel the clock altogether, use C. Note that if instead of canceling you subtract the away time, and the resulting clock amount is less than a minute, the clock is still canceled rather than cluttering up the log with an empty entry.
What if you subtracted those away minutes from the current clock, and now want to apply them to a new clock? Simply clock in to any task immediately after the subtraction. Org will notice that you have subtracted time “on the books”, so to speak, and will ask if you want to apply those minutes to the next task you clock in on.
There is one other instance when this clock resolution magic occurs. Say you were clocked in and hacking away, and suddenly your cat chased a mouse who scared a hamster that crashed into your UPS’s power button! You suddenly lose all your buffers, but thanks to auto-save you still have your recent Org mode changes, including your last clock in.
If you restart Emacs and clock into any task, Org will notice that you have a dangling clock which was never clocked out from your last session. Using that clock’s starting time as the beginning of the unaccounted-for period, Org will ask how you want to resolve that time. The logic and behavior is identical to dealing with away time due to idleness; it is just happening due to a recovery event rather than a set amount of idle time.
You can also check all the files visited by your Org agenda for dangling clocks at any time using M-x org-resolve-clocks RET (or C-c C-x C-z).
You may want to start clocking from the time when you clocked out the
previous task. To enable this systematically, set
org-clock-continuously
to non-nil
. Each time you clock in, Org
retrieves the clock-out time of the last clocked entry for this
session, and start the new clock from there.
If you only want this from time to time, use three universal prefix
arguments with org-clock-in
and two C-u C-u with
org-clock-in-last
.
When you often forget to clock out before being idle and you don’t
want to manually set the clocking time to take into account, you can
set org-clock-auto-clockout-timer
to a number of seconds and add
‘(org-clock-auto-clockout-insinuate)’ to your ‘.emacs’ file.
When the clock is running and Emacs is idle for more than this number of seconds, the clock will be clocked out automatically.
Use ‘M-x org-clock-toggle-auto-clockout RET’ to temporarily turn this on or off.
下一页: Timers, 上一页: Clocking Work Time, 返回: Dates and Times [目录][索引]
If you want to plan your work in a very detailed way, or if you need to produce offers with quotations of the estimated work effort, you may want to assign effort estimates to entries. If you are also clocking your work, you may later want to compare the planned effort with the actual working time, a great way to improve planning estimates.
Effort estimates are stored in a special property ‘EFFORT’. Multiple formats are supported, such as ‘3:12’, ‘1:23:45’, or ‘1d3h5min’; see the file ‘org-duration.el’ for more detailed information about the format.
You can set the effort for an entry with the following commands:
org-set-effort
)Set the effort estimate for the current entry. With a prefix argument, set it to the next allowed value—see below. This command is also accessible from the agenda with the e key.
org-clock-modify-effort-estimate
)Modify the effort estimate of the item currently being clocked.
Clearly the best way to work with effort estimates is through column view (see Column View). You should start by setting up discrete values for effort estimates, and a ‘COLUMNS’ format that displays these values together with clock sums—if you want to clock your time. For a specific buffer you can use:
#+PROPERTY: Effort_ALL 0 0:10 0:30 1:00 2:00 3:00 4:00 5:00 6:00 7:00 #+COLUMNS: %40ITEM(Task) %17Effort(Estimated Effort){:} %CLOCKSUM
or, even better, you can set up these values globally by customizing
the variables org-global-properties
and
org-columns-default-format
. In particular if you want to use this
setup also in the agenda, a global setup may be advised.
The way to assign estimates to individual items is then to switch to column mode, and to use S-RIGHT and S-LEFT to change the value. The values you enter are immediately summed up in the hierarchy. In the column next to it, any clocked time is displayed.
If you switch to column view in the daily/weekly agenda, the effort
column summarizes the estimated work effort for each day82, and
you can use this to find space in your schedule. To get an overview
of the entire part of the day that is committed, you can set the
option org-agenda-columns-add-appointments-to-effort-sum
. The
appointments on a day that take place over a specified time interval
are then also added to the load estimate of the day.
Effort estimates can be used in secondary agenda filtering that is triggered with the / key in the agenda (see Agenda Commands). If you have these estimates defined consistently, two or three key presses narrow down the list to stuff that fits into an available time slot.
上一页: Effort Estimates, 返回: Dates and Times [目录][索引]
Org provides two types of timers. There is a relative timer that counts up, which can be useful when taking notes during, for example, a meeting or a video viewing. There is also a countdown timer.
The relative and countdown are started with separate commands.
org-timer-start
)Start or reset the relative timer. By default, the timer is set to 0. When called with a C-u prefix, prompt the user for a starting offset. If there is a timer string at point, this is taken as the default, providing a convenient way to restart taking notes after a break in the process. When called with a double prefix argument C-u C-u, change all timer strings in the active region by a certain amount. This can be used to fix timer strings if the timer was not started at exactly the right moment.
org-timer-set-timer
)Start a countdown timer. The user is prompted for a duration.
org-timer-default-timer
sets the default countdown value. Giving
a numeric prefix argument overrides this default value. This
command is available as ; in agenda buffers.
Once started, relative and countdown timers are controlled with the same commands.
org-timer
)Insert a relative time into the buffer. The first time you use this, the timer starts. Using a prefix argument restarts it.
org-timer-item
)Insert a description list item with the current relative time. With a prefix argument, first reset the timer to 0.
org-insert-heading
)Once the timer list is started, you can also use M-RET to insert new timer items.
org-timer-pause-or-continue
)Pause the timer, or continue it if it is already paused.
org-timer-stop
)Stop the timer. After this, you can only start a new timer, not continue the old one. This command also removes the timer from the mode line.
当信息进入系统后,可能需要四处移动。Org为此提供了转接,拷贝和归档命令。转接和拷贝有助于移动和复制大纲。归档有助于保持系统的紧凑和快速。
• 转接和拷贝: | 移动/拷贝一棵节点树到另外一个地方。 | |
• 归档: | 完成后的节点怎么处理。 |
当查看捕获的数据时,您可能需要重新归档或将某些记录复制到其他列表中,例如复制到一个项目中。剪切,找到正确的位置,然后粘贴笔记。这样做很麻烦。为了简化此过程,可以使用以下特殊命令:
org-refile
)转接该位置上的记录或区域。此命令提供了可能的位置来转接该条记录,并让您选择一个完整的位置。该项(或该区域中的所有项)作为子项转接在目标标题下方。是作为第一个还是最后一个子项,取决于org-reverse-note-order
。
默认情况下,当前缓冲区中的所有一级标题均被视为目标,但是您可以在多个文件中使用更复杂的定义。详情请查阅org-refile-targets
变量。如果您想通过类似文件路径的大纲路径补全来选择位置,请查阅 org-refile-use-outline-path
和org-outline-path-complete-in-steps
变量。如果您希望能够创建一个新的父节点用于转接,请检查变量org-refile-allow-creating-parent-nodes
。当变量org-log-refile
83被设置时,无论何时转接笔记,都会记录时间戳或注释。
使用转接界面跳转到标题。
org-refile-goto-last-stored
)跳转到org-refile
命令上一次移动的位置。
转接到当前正在计时的节点的子项。
转接并在当前位置保留。另请参见org-refile-keep
将其设置为默认行为,并请注意,这可能导致重复的" ID"属性。
org-refile-cache-clear
)清理目标缓存可以通过设置org-refile-use-cache
来打开转接目标的缓存要使命令能看到新的可可选择目标,必须使用此命令清除缓存。
org-refile-copy
)复制的过程与转接一样,只是不删除原始笔记。
上一页: Refile and Copy, 返回: Refiling and Archiving [目录][索引]
When a project represented by a (sub)tree is finished, you may want to move the tree out of the way and to stop it from contributing to the agenda. Archiving is important to keep your working files compact and global searches like the construction of agenda views fast.
org-archive-subtree-default
)Archive the current entry using the command specified in the
variable org-archive-default-command
.
• 移动节点子树: | 移动一棵节点树到一个归档文件中。 | |
• 内部归档: | 关闭一棵节点树,但是依旧保留在文件中。 |
下一页: Internal archiving, 返回: Archiving [目录][索引]
The most common archiving action is to move a project tree to another file, the archive file.
org-archive-subtree
)Archive the subtree starting at point position to the location given
by org-archive-location
.
Check if any direct children of the current headline could be moved to the archive. To do this, check each subtree for open TODO entries. If none is found, the command offers to move it to the archive location. If point is not on a headline when this command is invoked, check level 1 trees.
As above, but check subtree for timestamps instead of TODO entries. The command offers to archive the subtree if it does contain a timestamp, and that timestamp is in the past.
The default archive location is a file in the same directory as the
current file, with the name derived by appending ‘_archive’ to the
current file name. You can also choose what heading to file archived
items under, with the possibility to add them to a datetree in a file.
For information and examples on how to specify the file and the
heading, see the documentation string of the variable
org-archive-location
.
There is also an in-buffer option for setting this variable, for example:
#+ARCHIVE: %s_done::
If you would like to have a special archive location for a single entry or a (sub)tree, give the entry an ‘ARCHIVE’ property with the location as the value (see Properties and Columns).
When a subtree is moved, it receives a number of special properties
that record context information like the file from where the entry
came, its outline path the archiving time etc. Configure the variable
org-archive-save-context-info
to adjust the amount of information
added.
When org-archive-subtree-save-file-p
is non-nil
, save the target
archive buffer.
上一页: Moving subtrees, 返回: Archiving [目录][索引]
If you want to just switch off—for agenda views—certain subtrees without moving them to a different file, you can use the ‘ARCHIVE’ tag.
A headline that is marked with the ‘ARCHIVE’ tag (see Tags) stays at its location in the outline tree, but behaves in the following way:
org-cycle-open-archived-trees
. Also normal outline commands, like
outline-show-all
, open archived subtrees.
org-sparse-tree-open-archived-trees
.
org-agenda-skip-archived-trees
, in which case these trees are
always included. In the agenda you can press v a to get
archives temporarily included.
org-export-with-archived-trees
.
org-columns-skip-archived-trees
is configured to nil
.
The following commands help manage the ‘ARCHIVE’ tag:
org-toggle-archive-tag
)Toggle the archive tag for the current headline. When the tag is set, the headline changes to a shadowed face, and the subtree below it is hidden.
Check if any direct children of the current headline should be archived. To do this, check each subtree for open TODO entries. If none is found, the command offers to set the ‘ARCHIVE’ tag for the child. If point is not on a headline when this command is invoked, check the level 1 trees.
org-force-cycle-archived
)Cycle a tree even if it is tagged with ‘ARCHIVE’.
org-archive-to-archive-sibling
)Move the current entry to the Archive Sibling. This is a sibling of the entry with the heading ‘Archive’ and the archive tag. The entry becomes a child of that sibling and in this way retains a lot of its original context, including inherited tags and approximate position in the outline.
下一页: Agenda Views, 上一页: Refiling and Archiving, 返回: Top [目录][索引]
An important part of any organization system is the ability to quickly capture new ideas and tasks, and to associate reference material with them. Org does this using a process called capture. It also can store files related to a task (attachments) in a special directory. Finally, it can parse RSS feeds for information. To learn how to let external programs (for example a web browser) trigger Org to capture material, see Protocols.
• 捕获: | 捕捉新的东西。 | |
• 附件: | 将文件附加到大纲。 | |
• RSS订阅: | 从RSS订阅获取输入。 |
下一页: Attachments, 返回: Capture and Attachments [目录][索引]
Capture lets you quickly store notes with little interruption of your work flow. Org’s method for capturing new items is heavily inspired by John Wiegley’s excellent Remember package.
• 设置捕获: | 将存储笔记的位置。 | |
• 使用捕获: | 调用和终止捕获的命令。 | |
• 捕获模板: | 针对不同的笔记类型定义大纲。 |
下一页: Using capture, 返回: Capture [目录][索引]
The following customization sets a default target file for notes.
(setq org-default-notes-file (concat org-directory "/notes.org"))
You may also define a global key for capturing new material (see Activation).
下一页: Capture templates, 上一页: Setting up capture, 返回: Capture [目录][索引]
org-capture
)Display the capture templates menu. If you have templates defined (see Capture templates), it offers these templates for selection or use a new Org outline node as the default template. It inserts the template into the target file and switch to an indirect buffer narrowed to this new node. You may then insert the information you want.
org-capture-finalize
)Once you have finished entering information into the capture buffer, C-c C-c returns you to the window configuration before the capture process, so that you can resume your work without further distraction. When called with a prefix argument, finalize and then jump to the captured item.
org-capture-refile
)Finalize the capture process by refiling the note to a different
place (see Refile and Copy). Please realize that this is a normal
refiling command that will be executed—so point position at the
moment you run this command is important. If you have inserted
a tree with a parent and children, first move point back to the
parent. Any prefix argument given to this command is passed on to
the org-refile
command.
org-capture-kill
)Abort the capture process and return to the previous state.
You can also call org-capture
in a special way from the agenda,
using the k c key combination. With this access, any
timestamps inserted by the selected capture template defaults to the
date at point in the agenda, rather than to the current date.
To find the locations of the last stored capture, use org-capture
with prefix commands:
Visit the target location of a capture template. You get to select the template in the usual way.
Visit the last stored capture item in its buffer.
You can also jump to the bookmark org-capture-last-stored
, which is
automatically created unless you set org-capture-bookmark
to nil
.
To insert the capture at point in an Org buffer, call org-capture
with a C-0 prefix argument.
上一页: Using capture, 返回: Capture [目录][索引]
You can use templates for different types of capture items, and for different target locations. The easiest way to create such templates is through the customize interface.
Before we give the formal description of template definitions, let’s look at an example. Say you would like to use one template to create general TODO entries, and you want to put these entries under the heading ‘Tasks’ in your file ‘~/org/gtd.org’. Also, a date tree in the file ‘journal.org’ should capture journal entries. A possible configuration would look like:
(setq org-capture-templates '(("t" "Todo" entry (file+headline "~/org/gtd.org" "Tasks") "* TODO %?\n %i\n %a") ("j" "Journal" entry (file+datetree "~/org/journal.org") "* %?\nEntered on %U\n %i\n %a")))
If you then press t from the capture menu, Org will prepare the template for you like this:
* TODO [[file:LINK TO WHERE YOU INITIATED CAPTURE]]
During expansion of the template, ‘%a’ has been replaced by a link to the location from where you called the capture command. This can be extremely useful for deriving tasks from emails, for example. You fill in the task definition, press C-c C-c and Org returns you to the same place where you started the capture process.
To define special keys to capture to a particular template without going through the interactive template selection, you can create your key binding like this:
(define-key global-map (kbd "C-c x") (lambda () (interactive) (org-capture nil "x")))
• 模板元素: | 完整的模板条目需要什么。 | |
• 模板扩容: | 填写有关时间和上下文的信息。 | |
• 上下文中的模板的使用: | 仅在特定上下文中显示模板。 |
下一页: Template expansion, 返回: Capture templates [目录][索引]
Now lets look at the elements of a template definition. Each entry in
org-capture-templates
is a list with the following items:
The keys that selects the template, as a string, characters only, for example ‘"a"’, for a template to be selected with a single key, or ‘"bt"’ for selection with two keys. When using several keys, keys using the same prefix key must be sequential in the list and preceded by a 2-element entry explaining the prefix key, for example:
("b" "Templates for marking stuff to buy")
If you do not define a template for the C key, this key opens the Customize buffer for this complex variable.
A short string describing the template, shown during selection.
The type of entry, a symbol. Valid values are:
entry
An Org mode node, with a headline. Will be filed as the child of the target entry or as a top-level entry. The target file should be an Org file.
item
A plain list item, placed in the first plain list at the target location. Again the target file should be an Org file.
checkitem
A checkbox item. This only differs from the plain list item by the default template.
table-line
A new line in the first table at the target location. Where
exactly the line will be inserted depends on the properties
:prepend
and :table-line-pos
(see below).
plain
Text to be inserted as it is.
Specification of where the captured item should be placed. In Org
files, targets usually define a node. Entries will become children
of this node. Other types will be added to the table or list in the
body of this node. Most target specifications contain a file name.
If that file name is the empty string, it defaults to
org-default-notes-file
. A file can also be given as a variable or
as a function called with no argument. When an absolute path is not
specified for a target, it is taken as relative to org-directory
.
Valid values are:
Text will be placed at the beginning or end of that file.
Filing as child of this entry, or in the body of the entry.
Fast configuration if the target heading is unique in the file.
For non-unique headings, the full path is safer.
Use a regular expression to position point.
This target84 creates a heading in a date tree85 for
today’s date. If the optional outline path is given, the tree
will be built under the node it is pointing to, instead of at top
level. Check out the :time-prompt
and :tree-type
properties
below for additional options.
A function to find the right location in the file.
File to the entry that is currently being clocked.
Most general way: write your own function which both visits the file and moves point to the right location.
The template for creating the capture item. If you leave this empty, an appropriate default template will be used. Otherwise this is a string with escape codes, which will be replaced depending on time and context of the capture call. You may also get this template string from a file86, or dynamically, from a function using either syntax:
(file "/path/to/template-file") (function FUNCTION-RETURNING-THE-TEMPLATE)
The rest of the entry is a property list of additional options. Recognized properties are:
:prepend
Normally new captured information will be appended at the target location (last child, last table line, last list item, …). Setting this property changes that.
:immediate-finish
When set, do not offer to edit the information, just file it away immediately. This makes sense if the template only needs information that can be added automatically.
:jump-to-captured
When set, jump to the captured entry when finished.
:empty-lines
Set this to the number of lines to insert before and after the new item. Default 0, and the only other common value is 1.
:empty-lines-after
Set this to the number of lines that should be inserted after the
new item. Overrides :empty-lines
for the number of lines
inserted after.
:empty-lines-before
Set this to the number of lines that should be inserted before the
new item. Overrides :empty-lines
for the number lines inserted
before.
:clock-in
Start the clock in this item.
:clock-keep
Keep the clock running when filing the captured entry.
:clock-resume
If starting the capture interrupted a clock, restart that clock
when finished with the capture. Note that :clock-keep
has
precedence over :clock-resume
. When setting both to non-nil
,
the current clock will run and the previous one will not be
resumed.
:time-prompt
Prompt for a date/time to be used for date/week trees and when
filling the template. Without this property, capture uses the
current date and time. Even if this property has not been set,
you can force the same behavior by calling org-capture
with
a C-1 prefix argument.
:tree-type
Use week
to make a week tree instead of the month-day tree,
i.e., place the headings for each day under a heading with the
current ISO week. Use @code{month} to group entries by month
only. Default is to group entries by day.
:unnarrowed
Do not narrow the target buffer, simply show the full buffer. Default is to narrow it so that you only see the new material.
:table-line-pos
Specification of the location in the table where the new line should be inserted. It should be a string like ‘II-3’ meaning that the new line should become the third line before the second horizontal separator line.
:kill-buffer
If the target file was not yet visited when capture was invoked, kill the buffer again after capture is completed.
:no-save
Do not save the target file after finishing the capture.
下一页: Templates in contexts, 上一页: Template elements, 返回: Capture templates [目录][索引]
In the template itself, special “%-escapes”87 allow dynamic insertion of content. The templates are expanded in the order given here:
Insert the contents of the file given by FILE.
Evaluate Elisp expression EXP and replace it with the result. The EXP form must return a string. Only placeholders pre-existing within the template, or introduced with ‘%[file]’, are expanded this way. Since this happens after expanding non-interactive “%-escapes”, those can be used to fill the expression.
The result of format-time-string on the FORMAT specification.
Timestamp, date only.
Timestamp, with date and time.
Like ‘%t’, ‘%T’ above, but inactive timestamps.
Initial content, the region when capture is called while the region is active. If there is text before ‘%i’ on the same line, such as indentation, and ‘%i’ is not inside a ‘%(exp)’ form, that prefix is added before every line in the inserted text.
Annotation, normally the link created with org-store-link
.
Like ‘%a’, but prompt for the description part.
Like ‘%a’, but only insert the literal link.
Current kill ring head.
Content of the X clipboard.
Title of the currently clocked task.
Link to the currently clocked task.
User name (taken from user-full-name
).
File visited by current buffer when org-capture was called.
Full path of the file or directory visited by current buffer.
Specific information for certain link types, see below.
Prompt for tags, with completion on tags in target file.
Prompt for tags, with completion all tags in all agenda files.
Like ‘%t’, but prompt for date. Similarly ‘%^T’, ‘%^u’, ‘%^U’. You may define a prompt like ‘%^{Birthday}t’.
Interactive selection of which kill or clip to use.
Like ‘%^C’, but insert as link.
Prompt the user for a value for property PROP.
Prompt the user for a string and replace this sequence with it. You may specify a default value and a completion table with ‘%^{prompt|default|completion2|completion3...}’. The arrow keys access a prompt-specific history.
Insert the text entered at the Nth ‘%^{PROMPT}’, where N is a number, starting from 1.
After completing the template, position point here.
For specific link types, the following keywords are defined88:
Link type | Available keywords |
---|---|
bbdb | ‘%:name’, ‘%:company’ |
irc | ‘%:server’, ‘%:port’, ‘%:nick’ |
mh, rmail | ‘%:type’, ‘%:subject’, ‘%:message-id’ |
‘%:from’, ‘%:fromname’, ‘%:fromaddress’ | |
‘%:to’, ‘%:toname’, ‘%:toaddress’ | |
‘%:date’ (message date header field) | |
‘%:date-timestamp’ (date as active timestamp) | |
‘%:date-timestamp-inactive’ (date as inactive timestamp) | |
‘%:fromto’ (either “to NAME” or “from NAME”)89 | |
gnus | ‘%:group’, for messages also all email fields |
w3, w3m | ‘%:url’ |
info | ‘%:file’, ‘%:node’ |
calendar | ‘%:date’ |
org-protocol | ‘%:link’, ‘%:description’, ‘%:annotation’ |
上一页: Template expansion, 返回: Capture templates [目录][索引]
To control whether a capture template should be accessible from
a specific context, you can customize
org-capture-templates-contexts
. Let’s say, for example, that you
have a capture template “p” for storing Gnus emails containing
patches. Then you would configure this option like this:
(setq org-capture-templates-contexts '(("p" (in-mode . "message-mode"))))
You can also tell that the command key p should refer to another template. In that case, add this command key like this:
(setq org-capture-templates-contexts '(("p" "q" (in-mode . "message-mode"))))
See the docstring of the variable for more information.
下一页: RSS Feeds, 上一页: Capture, 返回: Capture and Attachments [目录][索引]
It is often useful to associate reference material with an outline node. Small chunks of plain text can simply be stored in the subtree of a project. Hyperlinks (see Hyperlinks) can establish associations with files that live elsewhere on a local, or even remote, computer, like emails or source code files belonging to a project.
Another method is attachments, which are files located in a directory belonging to an outline node. Org uses directories either named by a unique ID of each entry, or by a ‘DIR’ property.
• 附件默认值和调度程序: | 如何访问附件命令 | |
• 附件选项: | 配置附件系统 | |
• 附件链接: | 附件的超链接访问 | |
• Git自动版本控制: | 所有东西都安全地存放起来 | |
• 从Dired添加附件: | 使用Dired选择附件 |
下一页: Attachment options, 返回: Attachments [目录][索引]
By default, Org attach uses ID properties when adding attachments to outline nodes. This makes working with attachments fully automated. There is no decision needed for folder-name or location. ID-based directories are by default located in the ‘data/’ directory, which lives in the same directory where your Org file lives90.
When attachments are made using org-attach
a default tag ‘ATTACH’ is
added to the node that gets the attachments.
For more control over the setup, see Attachment options.
The following commands deal with attachments:
org-attach
)The dispatcher for commands related to the attachment system. After these keys, a list of commands is displayed and you must press an additional key to select a command:
org-attach-attach
)Select a file and move it into the task’s attachment directory.
The file is copied, moved, or linked, depending on
org-attach-method
. Note that hard links are not supported on
all systems.
Attach a file using the copy/move/link method. Note that hard links are not supported on all systems.
org-attach-buffer
)Select a buffer and save it as a file in the task’s attachment directory.
org-attach-new
)Create a new attachment as an Emacs buffer.
org-attach-sync
)Synchronize the current task with its attachment directory, in case you added attachments yourself.
org-attach-open
)Open current task’s attachment. If there is more than one, prompt
for a file name first. Opening follows the rules set by
org-file-apps
. For more details, see the information on
following hyperlinks (see Handling Links).
org-attach-open-in-emacs
)Also open the attachment, but force opening the file in Emacs.
org-attach-reveal
)Open the current task’s attachment directory.
org-attach-reveal-in-emacs
)Also open the directory, but force using Dired in Emacs.
org-attach-delete-one
)Select and delete a single attachment.
org-attach-delete-all
)Delete all of a task’s attachments. A safer way is to open the directory in Dired and delete from there.
org-attach-set-directory
)Set a specific directory as the entry’s attachment directory. This works by putting the directory path into the ‘DIR’ property.
org-attach-unset-directory
)Remove the attachment directory. This command removes the ‘DIR’ property and asks the user to either move content inside that folder, if an ‘ID’ property is set, delete the content, or to leave the attachment directory as is but no longer attached to the outline node.
下一页: Attachment links, 上一页: Attachment defaults and dispatcher, 返回: Attachments [目录][索引]
There are a couple of options for attachments that are worth mentioning.
org-attach-id-dir
The directory where attachments are stored when ‘ID’ is used as method.
org-attach-dir-relative
When setting the ‘DIR’ property on a node using C-c C-a s
(org-attach-set-directory
), absolute links are entered by default.
This option changes that to relative links.
org-attach-use-inheritance
By default folders attached to an outline node are inherited from
parents according to org-use-property-inheritance
. If one instead
want to set inheritance specifically for Org attach that can be done
using org-attach-use-inheritance
. Inheriting documents through
the node hierarchy makes a lot of sense in most cases. Especially
when using attachment links (see Attachment links). The following
example shows one use case for attachment inheritance:
* Chapter A ... :PROPERTIES: :DIR: Chapter A/ :END: ** Introduction Some text #+NAME: Image 1 [[attachment:image 1.jpg]]
Without inheritance one would not be able to resolve the link to ‘image 1.jpg’, since the link is inside a sub-heading to ‘Chapter A’.
Inheritance works the same way for both ‘ID’ and ‘DIR’ property. If both properties are defined on the same headline then ‘DIR’ takes precedence. This is also true if inheritance is enabled. If ‘DIR’ is inherited from a parent node in the outline, that property still takes precedence over an ‘ID’ property defined on the node itself.
org-attach-method
When attaching files using the dispatcher C-c C-a it
defaults to copying files. The behavior can be changed by
customizing org-attach-method
. Options are Copy, Move/Rename,
Hard link or Symbolic link.
org-attach-preferred-new-method
This customization lets you choose the default way to attach to
nodes without existing ‘ID’ and ‘DIR’ property. It defaults to id
but can also be set to dir
, ask
or nil
.
org-attach-archive-delete
Configure this to determine if attachments should be deleted or not when a subtree that has attachments is archived.
org-attach-auto-tag
When attaching files to a heading it will be assigned a tag according to what is set here.
org-attach-id-to-path-function-list
When ‘ID’ is used for attachments, the ID is parsed into a part of a
directory-path. See org-attach-id-uuid-folder-format
for the
default function. Define a new one and add it as first element in
org-attach-id-to-path-function-list
if you want the folder
structure in any other way. All functions in this list will be
tried when resolving existing ID’s into paths, to maintain backward
compatibility with existing folders in your system.
org-attach-store-link-p
Stores a link to the file that is being attached. The link is
stored in org-stored-links
for later insertion with C-c C-l (see Handling Links). Depending on what option is set in
org-attach-store-link-p
, the link is stored to either the original
location as a file link, the attachment location as an attachment
link or to the attachment location as a file link.
org-attach-commands
List of all commands used in the attach dispatcher.
org-attach-expert
Do not show the splash buffer with the attach dispatcher when
org-attach-expert
is set to non-nil
.
See customization group ‘Org Attach’ if you want to change the default settings.
下一页: Automatic version-control with Git, 上一页: Attachment options, 返回: Attachments [目录][索引]
Attached files and folders can be referenced using attachment links. This makes it easy to refer to the material added to an outline node. Especially if it was attached using the unique ID of the entry!
* TODO Some task :PROPERTIES: :ID: 95d50008-c12e-479f-a4f2-cc0238205319 :END: See attached document for more information: [[attachment:info.org]]
See External Links for more information about these links.
下一页: Attach from Dired, 上一页: Attachment links, 返回: Attachments [目录][索引]
If the directory attached to an outline node is a Git repository, Org can be configured to automatically commit changes to that repository when it sees them.
To make Org mode take care of versioning of attachments for you, add the following to your Emacs config:
(require 'org-attach-git)
上一页: Automatic version-control with Git, 返回: Attachments [目录][索引]
It is possible to attach files to a subtree from a Dired buffer. To
use this feature, have one window in Dired mode containing the file(s)
to be attached and another window with point in the subtree that shall
get the attachments. In the Dired window, with point on a file,
M-x org-attach-dired-to-subtree attaches the file to the
subtree using the attachment method set by variable
org-attach-method
. When files are marked in the Dired window then
all marked files get attached.
Add the following lines to the Emacs init file to have C-c C-x a attach files in Dired buffers.
(add-hook 'dired-mode-hook (lambda () (define-key dired-mode-map (kbd "C-c C-x a") #'org-attach-dired-to-subtree)))
The following code shows how to bind the previous command with a specific attachment method.
(add-hook 'dired-mode-hook (lambda () (define-key dired-mode-map (kbd "C-c C-x c") (lambda () (interactive) (let ((org-attach-method 'cp)) (call-interactively #'org-attach-dired-to-subtree))))))
上一页: Attachments, 返回: Capture and Attachments [目录][索引]
Org can add and change entries based on information found in RSS feeds
and Atom feeds. You could use this to make a task out of each new
podcast in a podcast feed. Or you could use a phone-based
note-creating service on the web to import tasks into Org. To access
feeds, configure the variable org-feed-alist
. The docstring of this
variable has detailed information. With the following
(setq org-feed-alist '(("Slashdot" "http://rss.slashdot.org/Slashdot/slashdot" "~/txt/org/feeds.org" "Slashdot Entries")))
new items from the feed provided by ‘rss.slashdot.org’ result in new entries in the file ‘~/org/feeds.org’ under the heading ‘Slashdot Entries’, whenever the following command is used:
org-feed-update-all
)Collect items from the feeds configured in org-feed-alist
and act
upon them.
org-feed-goto-inbox
)Prompt for a feed name and go to the inbox configured for this feed.
Under the same headline, Org creates a drawer ‘FEEDSTATUS’ in which it stores information about the status of items in the feed, to avoid adding the same item several times.
For more information, including how to read atom feeds, see
‘org-feed.el’ and the docstring of org-feed-alist
.
下一页: Markup for Rich Contents, 上一页: Capture and Attachments, 返回: Top [目录][索引]
由于 Org-mode 的工作方式,代办事项、定时事项和带标签的标题会散落在一个甚至几个文件中。你如果要查看所有未完成的行动事项,或者某些特定日期的重要事件,那么必须要有一种方式来有组织地收集、分类和展示这些信息。
Org 可以根据各种条件来选择符合条件的事项,并在一个新的缓冲区中显示它们。Org 提供了六种不同的浏览视图。
检索出来的信息会显示在一个特殊的agenda buffer中。这个 agenda buffer 是只读的,但是它提供了一些命令来访问和编辑原文件的相应内容。
默认情况下,agenda buffer 会忽略被注释(详见行注释)和归档(详见内部归档)的条目。可以通过设置org-agenda-skip-comment-trees
和org-agenda-skip-archived-trees
为nil
来取消忽略。
变量org-agenda-window-setup
控制agenda buffer的显示方式,变量org-agenda-restore-windows-after-quit
决定在退出agenda后是否恢复之前的窗口配置状态。
• 议程文件: | 从哪些文件中搜索提供给agenda展示的信息 | |
议程• 议程调度程序: | 议程视图快捷键 | |
• 内置议程视图: | 开箱即用的功能有哪些? | |
• 展示和排序: | 议程事项的显示方式。 | |
• 议程命令: | 远程编辑原Org文件。 | |
• 自定义议程视图: | 定义自定义搜索内容和显示视图。 | |
• 导出议程视图: | 将视图写入文件。 | |
• 议程列视图: | 对收集到的条目使用列视图。 |
下一页: Agenda Dispatcher, 返回: Agenda Views [目录][索引]
议程缓冲区显示的信息通常来自agenda file, 所谓agenda files 指的是变量org-agenda-files
中的文件91。如果变量org-agenda-files为一个文件目录,则该目录下所有‘.org’文件都为agenda files。
因此,即使你只使用一个org文件,也需要把该文件列入变量`org-agenda-files`中92。你可以自定义org-agenda-file
变量,但是修改它最简单的方法是通过如下命令:
org-agenda-file-to-front
)将当前文件加入变量org-agenda files。当前文件会被添加在变量列表的首位。如果该文件已经在列表中,那么就会将它移动到首位。通过输入前缀参数,可以将所选文件添加/移动到列表尾部。
org-remove-file
)将当前文件从agenda files中移除。
org-cycle-agenda-files
)按照agenda文件列表(org-agenda-files)的顺序,依次浏览所有文件。
使用类似iswitchb的界面来在各org buffer之间切换.
org-switchb会列出当前agenda文件列表中的所有org文件,你可以用该菜单访问这些org文件。
如果你想使agenda临时包括不在org-agenda-files里的文件、或是仅包括org-agenda-files里的单独某个文件,甚至是某个文件里的某个子树,你可以通过以下几种方式来完成:通过单个议程命令──在议程调度器(详见 议程调度器)里按一次或几次<,如果想要较长时间内agenda的范围,可以使用以下命令:
org-agenda-set-restriction-lock
)将agenda的范围限制在当前的子树中。如果已经限制在光标处的子树,那么就会移除限制。使用该命令时,如果附带了前缀参数,或是光标置于第一个标题之前,genda的范围被限制为整个这个文件。此限制将一直有效,直到使用C-c C-x >删除,或通过在议程调度器中键入<或>。如果在设置范围限制时有一个窗口在显示议程视图,那么新的限制会立刻生效。
org-agenda-remove-restriction-lock
)移除由C-c C-x创建的范围限制。
若你启用了speedbar,则在speedbar frame中还能使用以下命令:
org-speedbar-set-agenda-restriction
)将agenda的范围限制在光标所在处的项──可以是org文件,也可以是文件里的子树。如果此处已经有限制,那么会移除它。如果在设置范围限制时有一个窗口在显示议程视图,那么新的限制会立刻生效。
org-agenda-remove-restriction-lock
)移除agenda的范围限制
下一页: Built-in Agenda Views, 上一页: Agenda Files, 返回: Agenda Views [目录][索引]
各种议程视图都是通过一个调度程序创建的,其可以通过输入M-x org-agenda来显示,此外,更好的方式是将其绑定到一个全局快捷键上(详见激活该命令会显示一个菜单界面,在该界面输入不同的字母会执行不同的命令。议程调度程序提供了以下一些默认命令:
创建类似一个类似日历风格的议程视图(详见每周/每日 议程视图)。
创建一个列表,其包含所有的TODO事项(详见全局TODO列表)
创建一个列表,其包含所有匹配给定表达式的标题(headlines)(详见匹配标签和属性)
创建一个列表,其包含匹配/不匹配某关键字表达式/正则表达式的事项。
对所有议程文件和列在org-agenda-text-search-extra-files
里的文件内容进行正则查找。该查找通过命令multi-occur
来实现。使用前缀参数可以定义每次查找匹配多少行,默认为1行。
创建一个列表,其包含所有停滞的项目(详见停滞的项目)。
可以通过设置变量org-stuck-projects来自定义停滞的项目和查找方式(详见停滞的项目)。
限定接下来调用的议程视图的显示范围为当前buffer如果当前buffer使用了聚焦命令(org-narrow-to-subtree),那么只会限制议程视图的显示范围为聚焦的部分。按下<后,您仍需要再按下一个字符来选择要执行的命令。
如果有active region,则该命令限制接下来agenda视图的显示范围为该region. 否则,限制agenda视图的范围为当前的subtree按下<<后,您仍需要再按下一个字符来选择要执行的命令。
开启/关闭粘滞议程视图默认情况下,Org只会维持一个议程buffer,为使显示的内容都是最新状态,当你更改议程视图使,其内容都会自动更新。如果您经常在议程视图间切换,但是不能忍受其更新时间,那么您可以打开粘滞议程buffer(设置变量org-agenda-sticky
使其默认打开)。通过打开粘滞议程模式,议程调度程序只会在不同议程视图间切换而不会自动更新内容,你需要通过按r或g来手动更新议程视图的内容。通过org-toggle-stick-agenda
命令,您可以随时切换粘滞议程视图。
您可以定义自己的搜索命令,并像默认命令一样,可以通过议程调度程序来执行相应命令。自定义命令有很多功能,你可以创建一个自定义的议程buffer,其包含许多不同的模块,如每周议程、所有的TODO事项和一些匹配特定标签的标题。详见自定义议程视图
下一页: Presentation and Sorting, 上一页: Agenda Dispatcher, 返回: Agenda Views [目录][索引]
In this section we describe the built-in views.
• 每周/每日议程: | 包含当前任务的日历页。 | |
• 全局TODO列表: | 所有未完成的行动项目。 | |
• 匹配标签和属性: | 具有微调搜索功能的结构化信息。 | |
• 搜索视图: | 通过搜索文本查找条目。 | |
• 停滞的项目: | 查找您需要审阅的项目。 |
下一页: Global TODO list, 返回: Built-in Agenda Views [目录][索引]
每周/每日议程的目的是充当纸质议程的页面,显示当前一周或一天的所有任务。
org-agenda-list
)从Org文件列表中编译本周的议程。议程显示了每天的条目。使用数字前缀参数95-就像C-u 2 1M-x org-Agenda a一样,您可以设置要显示的天数。
议程中显示的默认天数由变量org-agenda-span
设置。此变量可以设置为您希望在议程中默认看到的任意天数,也可以设置为范围名称,例如日
、周
、月
或年
。对于每周议程,默认情况下从上个星期一开始(请参阅org-agenda-start-on-weekday
)。您还可以使用日期转换设置开始日期:‘(setq org-Agenda-start-day “+10d”)’从今天开始10天后开始将来的议程。
例如,从议程缓冲区进行远程编辑意味着您可以从议程缓冲区更改截止日期和约会日期。议程命令中列出了议程缓冲区中可用的命令。
Emacs包含了Edward M. Reingold的日历和日记。该日历显示一个三个月的日历,其中包含来自不同国家和文化的假期。这本日记可以让你记录周年纪念日、农历相位、日出/日落、定期约会(每周、每月)等等。从这个意义上说,它与Org有很强的互补性。将来自Org的输出与日记相结合非常有用。
要将Emacs日记中的条目包含到Org mode的议程中,您只需自定义变量
(setq org-agenda-include-diary t)
在那之后,一切都会自动发生。所有日记条目(包括节假日、周年纪念等)都包含在由Org mode创建的议程缓冲区中。SPC, TAB和 RET可以从议程缓冲区跳转到日记文件,以便编辑现有的日记条目。为当前日期插入新条目的I命令在议程缓冲区中起作用,S、M和C分别用于显示日出/日落时间、显示月相和转换为其他日历。c可用于在日历和议程之间来回切换。
如果仅将日记用于表达式条目和节假日,则不使用上述设置,而是将条目复制甚至移动到Org文件中会更快。Org mode计算日记样式的表达式条目,并且计算速度更快,因为第一次创建日记显示没有开销。请注意,表达式条目必须从左边距开始,前面不允许有空格,如Org文件的以下片段所示:96
* Holidays :PROPERTIES: :CATEGORY: Holiday :END: %%(org-calendar-holiday) ; special function for holiday names * Birthdays :PROPERTIES: :CATEGORY: Ann :END: %%(org-anniversary 1956 5 14) Arthur Dent is %d years old %%(org-anniversary 1869 10 2) Mahatma Gandhi would be %d years old
If you are using the Insidious Big Brother Database to store your contacts, you very likely prefer to store anniversaries in BBDB rather than in a separate Org or diary file. Org支持这一点,并可以将BBDB周年纪念作为议程的一部分。您只需将以下内容添加到您的一个议程文件中:
* Anniversaries :PROPERTIES: :CATEGORY: Anniv :END: %%(org-bbdb-anniversaries)
然后,您可以继续为BBDB记录定义周年纪念。基本上,您需要一个名为“纪念日”的字段用于BBDB记录,该字段包含格式为“YYYY-MM-DD”或“MM-DD”的日期,后跟一个空格和周年纪念的类别(“生日”、“婚礼”或格式字符串)。如果省略该类,则默认为“生日”。以下是几个示例,文件‘ol-bbdb.el’的标头包含更详细的信息。
1973-06-22 06-22 1955-08-02 wedding 2008-04-14 %s released version 6.01 of Org mode, %d years ago
在更改BBDB之后,或者对于Emacs会话期间的第一次议程显示,由于Org使用周年纪念更新其散列,因此议程显示会出现短暂延迟。然而,从那时起,事情将变得非常快,实际上比Org或日记文件中的‘%%(diary-anniversary)’条目的长列表要快得多。
如果你想看看即将到来的周年纪念日,并预告一下,你可以用以下几点来代替:
* Anniversaries :PROPERTIES: :CATEGORY: Anniv :END: %%(org-bbdb-anniversaries-future 3)
这将给你三天的警告:在周年纪念日和前两天。The argument is optional: if omitted, it defaults to 7.
Org can interact with Emacs appointments notification facility. To
add the appointments of your agenda files, use the command
org-agenda-to-appt
. This command lets you filter through the list
of your appointments and add only those belonging to a specific
category or matching a regular expression. It also reads
a ‘APPT_WARNTIME’ property which overrides the value of
appt-message-warning-time
for this appointment. See the docstring
for details.
下一页: Matching tags and properties, 上一页: Weekly/daily agenda, 返回: Built-in Agenda Views [目录][索引]
全局TODO列表会将所有未完成的TODO事项整合在一起显示。
org-todo-list
)显示全局TODO列表。该命令会从全部议程文件中收集TODO事项,并将其显示在一个buffer中(详见议程视图)默认情况下,该命令会列出所有状态不是“DONE”的事项。该buffer的主模式为Agenda mode,因此在该buffer中,许多命令可以直接检查和操作TODO事项(详见议程命令)。
org-todo-list
)类似M-x org-agenda t,但支持选择符合特定关键字的TODO事项。您也可以通过在输入M-x org-agenda t时增加一个前缀参数来达到相同的效果。该前缀参数即为您要筛选的关键字。在输入完M-x org-agenda T后,Org会提示你输入一个关键字,您也可以在多个关键字间加“|“来输入多个关键字。如果输入该命令时输入来一个数字前缀n,那么则会选择变量org-todo-keywords
中第n个关键字进行筛选。
在议程buffer中按r会刷新议程视图,您也可以通过一个前缀参数n筛选第n个TODO关键字,如3 r. 如果您经常要搜索某个TODO关键字,您可以写一个自定义命令来进行搜索(详见议程调度程序)
通过标签搜索也能匹配特定的TODO关键字(详见标签搜索)
在议程buffer可以远程编辑TODO事项,这意味着您按一次键就可以改变某TODO事项的状态。议程相关命令中提供了在议程buffer中的可用命令。
一般来说,全局TODO列表只是简单的展示所有带有TODO关键字的大纲标题。这个列表可能会很长。有两种方法可以使其更加简洁紧凑。
org-agenda-todo-ignore-scheduled
来剔除部分或所有定期事项,设置变量org-agenda-todo-ignore-deadlines
来剔除部分或所有带有截止日期的事项,设置变量org-agenda-todo-ignore-timestamp
来剔除部分或所有含有除DEADLINE和SCHEDULED之外时间戳的事项,设置变量org-agenda-todo-ignore-with-date
来剔除所有含有至少一个时间戳的事项。
org-agenda-todo-list-sublevels
来实现。
下一页: Search view, 上一页: Global TODO list, 返回: Built-in Agenda Views [目录][索引]
如果议程文件中的headline带有标签(详见标签)和属性(详见属性和列视图),则你可以根据这些元数据作为匹配条件来筛选事项. 这里使用的匹配规则语法与创建sparse tree(C-c / m)时使用的语法是一样的。
org-tags-view
)筛选所有匹配给定标签的TODO标题。该命令会提示你输入筛选条件,该条件可使用布尔表达式,如“+word+urgent-withboss”或"work | home"(详见 标签)。如果您经常需要搜索某个特定的标签,您可以自定义一个命令专门进行搜索(详见 议程调度程序)。
org-tags-view
).该命令和m类似,但是只会选择标记为TODO的标题,并且强制检查子项。(详见变量org-tags-match-list-sublevels
)您如果想要在搜索结果中剔除含有 Scheduled和Deadline 的事项,请参见org-agenda-tags-todo-honor-ignore-options
. 同时匹配TODO关键字和标签也是可行的,详见标签搜索。
要了解tags list视图中的可用命令,请参见议程视图中的命令。
搜索过程可以使用布尔运算符. `&`表示`与`,`|`表示`或`. `&`的优先级要高于`|`,目前不能用使用括号. 搜索过程中的每一匹配项可以是一个标签,一条匹配某个标签的正则,或是一条型如`PROPERTY OPERATOR VALUE`的表达式。 每个匹配项之前可以附加前缀,'-'表示不匹配,'+'表示匹配。在有使用'+'或'-'时,'&'是可选的。下面是一些搜索标签的例子,
搜索带有work标签的标题,但是会剔除同时带有boss标签的标题。
选择带有work或laptop标签的标题。
和前者类似,但是要带有laptop标签的标题同时带有night标签。
除了使用标签搜索,您也可以用带有大括号的正则表达式来筛选。举个例子,work+{^boss.*}匹配所有带有:work:标签和任意以boss开头的标签。
对标签组中标签(详见标签层级)的检索会自动扩展为正则表达式。举个例子,如果work是一个标签组:work:lab:conf里的标签,那么搜索work时会同时搜索{\(?:work\|lab\|conf\)},搜索-work时会搜索所有不包含在标签组({\(?:work\|lab\|conf\)})中的标签的标题。
You may also test for properties (see Properties and Columns) at the
same time as matching tags. The properties may be real properties, or
special properties that represent other metadata (see Special Properties). For example, the property ‘TODO’ represents the TODO
keyword of the entry. Or, the property ‘LEVEL’ represents the level
of an entry. So searching ‘+LEVEL=3+boss-TODO="DONE"’ lists all level
three headlines that have the tag ‘boss’ and are not marked with the
TODO keyword ‘DONE’. In buffers with org-odd-levels-only
set,
‘LEVEL’ does not count the number of stars, but ‘LEVEL=2’ corresponds
to 3 stars etc.
Here are more examples:
Select ‘work’-tagged TODO lines with the specific TODO keyword ‘WAITING’.
Waiting tasks both at work and at home.
When matching properties, a number of different operators can be used to test the value of a property. Here is a complex example:
+work-boss+PRIORITY="A"+Coffee="unlimited"+Effort<2 +With={Sarah|Denny}+SCHEDULED>="<2008-10-11>"
The type of comparison depends on how the comparison value is written:
So the search string in the example finds entries tagged ‘work’ but not ‘boss’, which also have a priority value ‘A’, a ‘Coffee’ property with the value ‘unlimited’, an ‘EFFORT’ property that is numerically smaller than 2, a ‘With’ property that is matched by the regular expression ‘Sarah|Denny’, and that are scheduled on or after October 11, 2008.
You can configure Org mode to use property inheritance during a search, but beware that this can slow down searches considerably. See Property Inheritance, for details.
For backward compatibility, and also for typing speed, there is also a different way to test TODO states in a search. For this, terminate the tags/property part of the search string (which may include several terms connected with ‘|’) with a ‘/’ and then specify a Boolean expression just for TODO keywords. The syntax is then similar to that for tags, but should be applied with care: for example, a positive selection on several TODO keywords cannot meaningfully be combined with boolean AND. However, negative selection combined with AND can be meaningful. To make sure that only lines are checked that actually have any TODO keyword (resulting in a speed-up), use M-x org-agenda M, or equivalently start the TODO part after the slash with ‘!’. Using M-x org-agenda M or ‘/!’ does not match TODO keywords in a DONE state. Examples:
Same as ‘work+TODO="WAITING"’.
Select ‘work’-tagged TODO lines that are neither ‘WAITING’ nor ‘NEXT’.
Select ‘work’-tagged TODO lines that are either ‘WAITING’ or ‘NEXT’.
下一页: Stuck projects, 上一页: Matching tags and properties, 返回: Built-in Agenda Views [目录][索引]
This agenda view is a general text search facility for Org mode entries. It is particularly useful to find notes.
org-search-view
)This is a special search that lets you select entries by matching a substring or specific words using a boolean logic.
For example, the search string ‘computer equipment’ matches entries that contain ‘computer equipment’ as a substring, even if the two words are separated by more space or a line break.
Search view can also search for specific keywords in the entry, using
Boolean logic. The search string ‘+computer
+wifi -ethernet -{8\.11[bg]}’ matches note entries that contain the
keywords ‘computer’ and ‘wifi’, but not the keyword ‘ethernet’, and
which are also not matched by the regular expression ‘8\.11[bg]’,
meaning to exclude both ‘8.11b’ and ‘8.11g’. The first ‘+’ is
necessary to turn on boolean search, other ‘+’ characters are
optional. For more details, see the docstring of the command
org-search-view
.
You can incrementally and conveniently adjust a boolean search from the agenda search view with the following keys
[ | Add a positive search word |
] | Add a negative search word |
{ | Add a positive regular expression |
} | Add a negative regular expression |
Note that in addition to the agenda files, this command also searches
the files listed in org-agenda-text-search-extra-files
.
上一页: Search view, 返回: Built-in Agenda Views [目录][索引]
If you are following a system like David Allen’s GTD to organize your work, one of the “duties” you have is a regular review to make sure that all projects move along. A stuck project is a project that has no defined next actions, so it never shows up in the TODO lists Org mode produces. During the review, you need to identify such projects and define next actions for them.
org-agenda-list-stuck-projects
)List projects that are stuck.
Customize the variable org-stuck-projects
to define what a stuck
project is and how to find it.
You almost certainly need to configure this view before it works for you. The built-in default assumes that all your projects are level-2 headlines, and that a project is not stuck if it has at least one entry marked with a TODO keyword ‘TODO’ or ‘NEXT’ or ‘NEXTACTION’.
Let’s assume that you, in your own way of using Org mode, identify projects with a tag ‘:PROJECT:’, and that you use a TODO keyword ‘MAYBE’ to indicate a project that should not be considered yet. Let’s further assume that the TODO keyword ‘DONE’ marks finished projects, and that ‘NEXT’ and ‘TODO’ indicate next actions. The tag ‘:@shop:’ indicates shopping and is a next action even without the NEXT tag. Finally, if the project contains the special word ‘IGNORE’ anywhere, it should not be listed either. In this case you would start by identifying eligible projects with a tags/TODO match (see Tag Searches) ‘+PROJECT/-MAYBE-DONE’, and then check for ‘TODO’, ‘NEXT’, ‘@shop’, and ‘IGNORE’ in the subtree to identify projects that are not stuck. The correct customization for this is:
(setq org-stuck-projects '("+PROJECT/-MAYBE-DONE" ("NEXT" "TODO") ("@shop") "\\<IGNORE\\>"))
Note that if a project is identified as non-stuck, the subtree of this entry is searched for stuck projects.
下一页: Agenda Commands, 上一页: Built-in Agenda Views, 返回: Agenda Views [目录][索引]
Before displaying items in an agenda view, Org mode visually prepares
the items and sorts them. Each item occupies a single line. The line
starts with a prefix that contains the category (see Categories)
of the item and other important information. You can customize in
which column tags are displayed through org-agenda-tags-column
. You
can also customize the prefix using the option
org-agenda-prefix-format
. This prefix is followed by a cleaned-up
version of the outline headline associated with the item.
• 分类: | 并不是所有的任务都是相等的。 | |
• 时间格式规范: | 议事日程怎么知道时间。 | |
• 议程项排序: | 事物的秩序。 | |
• 过滤/限制议程项数量: | 动态缩小议程规模。 |
下一页: Time-of-day specifications, 返回: Presentation and Sorting [目录][索引]
The category is a broad label assigned to each agenda item. By default, the category is simply derived from the file name, but you can also specify it with a special line in the buffer, like this:
#+CATEGORY: Thesis
If you would like to have a special category for a single entry or a (sub)tree, give the entry a ‘CATEGORY’ property with the special category you want to apply as the value.
The display in the agenda buffer looks best if the category is not
longer than 10 characters. You can set up icons for category by
customizing the org-agenda-category-icon-alist
variable.
下一页: Sorting of agenda items, 上一页: Categories, 返回: Presentation and Sorting [目录][索引]
Org mode checks each agenda item for a time-of-day specification. The time can be part of the timestamp that triggered inclusion into the agenda, for example
<2005-05-10 Tue 19:00>
Time ranges can be specified with two timestamps:
<2005-05-10 Tue 20:30>--<2005-05-10 Tue 22:15>
In the headline of the entry itself, a time(range)—like ‘12:45’ or a ‘8:30-1pm’—may also appear as plain text97.
If the agenda integrates the Emacs diary (see Weekly/daily agenda), time specifications in diary entries are recognized as well.
For agenda display, Org mode extracts the time and displays it in a standard 24 hour format as part of the prefix. The example times in the previous paragraphs would end up in the agenda like this:
8:30-13:00 Arthur Dent lies in front of the bulldozer 12:45...... Ford Prefect arrives and takes Arthur to the pub 19:00...... The Vogon reads his poem 20:30-22:15 Marvin escorts the Hitchhikers to the bridge
If the agenda is in single-day mode, or for the display of today, the timed entries are embedded in a time grid, like
8:00...... ------------------ 8:30-13:00 Arthur Dent lies in front of the bulldozer 10:00...... ------------------ 12:00...... ------------------ 12:45...... Ford Prefect arrives and takes Arthur to the pub 14:00...... ------------------ 16:00...... ------------------ 18:00...... ------------------ 19:00...... The Vogon reads his poem 20:00...... ------------------ 20:30-22:15 Marvin escorts the Hitchhikers to the bridge
The time grid can be turned on and off with the variable
org-agenda-use-time-grid
, and can be configured with
org-agenda-time-grid
.
下一页: Filtering/limiting agenda items, 上一页: Time-of-day specifications, 返回: Presentation and Sorting [目录][索引]
Before being inserted into a view, the items are sorted. How this is done depends on the type of view.
org-agenda-files
.
Within each category, items are sorted by priority (see
Priorities), which is composed of the base priority (2000 for
priority ‘A’, 1000 for ‘B’, and 0 for ‘C’), plus additional
increments for overdue scheduled or deadline items.
Sorting can be customized using the variable
org-agenda-sorting-strategy
, and may also include criteria based on
the estimated effort of an entry (see Effort Estimates).
上一页: Sorting of agenda items, 返回: Presentation and Sorting [目录][索引]
Agenda built-in or custom commands are statically defined. Agenda filters and limits allow to flexibly narrow down the list of agenda entries.
Filters only change the visibility of items, are very fast and are mostly used interactively98. You can switch quickly between different filters without having to recreate the agenda. Limits on the other hand take effect before the agenda buffer is populated, so they are mostly useful when defined as local variables within custom agenda commands.
The general filtering command is org-agenda-filter
, bound to
/. Before we introduce it, we describe commands for
individual filter types. All filtering commands handle prefix
arguments in the same way: A single C-u prefix negates the
filter, so it removes lines selected by the filter. A double prefix
adds the new filter condition to the one(s) already in place, so
filter elements are accumulated.
org-agenda-filter-by-tag
)Filter the agenda view with respect to a tag. You are prompted for a tag selection letter; SPC means any tag at all. Pressing TAB at that prompt offers completion to select a tag, including any tags that do not have a selection character. The command then hides all entries that do not contain or inherit this tag. Pressing + or - at the prompt switches between filtering for and against the next tag. To clear the filter, press \ twice (once to call the command again, and once at the prompt).
org-agenda-filter-by-category
)Filter by category of the line at point, and show only entries with this category. When called with a prefix argument, hide all entries with the category at point. To clear the filter, call this command again by pressing <.
org-agenda-filter-by-regexp
)Filter the agenda view by a regular expression: only show agenda entries matching the regular expression the user entered. To clear the filter, call the command again by pressing =.
org-agenda-filter-by-effort
)Filter the agenda view with respect to effort estimates, so select tasks that take the right amount of time. You first need to set up a list of efforts globally, for example
(setq org-global-properties '(("Effort_ALL". "0 0:10 0:30 1:00 2:00 3:00 4:00")))
You can then filter for an effort by first typing an operator, one
of <, > and =, and then the
one-digit index of an effort estimate in your array of allowed
values, where 0 means the 10th value. The filter then
restricts to entries with effort smaller-or-equal, equal, or
larger-or-equal than the selected value. For application of the
operator, entries without a defined effort are treated according to
the value of org-sort-agenda-noeffort-is-high
. To clear the
filter, press _ twice (once to call the command again,
and once at the first prompt).
org-agenda-filter-by-top-headline
)Filter the current agenda view and only display items that fall under the same top-level headline as the current entry. To clear the filter, call this command again by pressing ^.
org-agenda-filter
)This is the unified interface to four of the five filter methods described above. At the prompt, specify different filter elements in a single string, with full completion support. 例如,
+work-John+<0:10-/plot/
selects entries with category ‘work’ and effort estimates below 10 minutes, and deselects entries with tag ‘John’ or matching the regexp ‘plot’. You can leave ‘+’ out if that does not lead to ambiguities. The sequence of elements is arbitrary. The filter syntax assumes that there is no overlap between categories and tags. Otherwise, tags take priority. If you reply to the prompt with the empty string, all filtering is removed. If a filter is specified, it replaces all current filters. But if you call the command with a double prefix argument, or if you add an additional ‘+’ (e.g., ‘++work’) to the front of the string, the new filter elements are added to the active ones. A single prefix argument applies the entire filter in a negative sense.
org-agenda-filter-remove-all
)Remove all filters in the current agenda view.
If the variable org-agenda-auto-exclude-function
is set to
a user-defined function, that function can select tags that should be
used as a tag filter when requested. The function will be called with
lower-case versions of all tags represented in the current view. The
function should return ‘"-tag"’ if the filter should remove
entries with that tag, ‘"+tag"’ if only entries with this tag should
be kept, or ‘nil’ if that tag is irrelevant. For example, let’s say
you use a ‘Net’ tag to identify tasks which need network access, an
‘Errand’ tag for errands in town, and a ‘Call’ tag for making phone
calls. You could auto-exclude these tags based on the availability of
the Internet, and outside of business hours, with something like this:
(defun my-auto-exclude-fn (tag) (when (cond ((string= tag "net") (/= 0 (call-process "/sbin/ping" nil nil nil "-c1" "-q" "-t1" "mail.gnu.org"))) ((member tag '("errand" "call")) (let ((hr (nth 2 (decode-time)))) (or (< hr 8) (> hr 21))))) (concat "-" tag))) (setq org-agenda-auto-exclude-function #'my-auto-exclude-fn)
You can apply this self-adapting filter by using a triple prefix
argument to org-agenda-filter
, i.e. press C-u C-u C-u /,
or by pressing RET in org-agenda-filter-by-tag
.
Here is a list of options that you can set, either globally, or locally in your custom agenda views (see Custom Agenda Views).
org-agenda-max-entries
Limit the number of entries.
org-agenda-max-effort
Limit the duration of accumulated efforts (as minutes).
org-agenda-max-todos
Limit the number of entries with TODO keywords.
org-agenda-max-tags
Limit the number of tagged entries.
When set to a positive integer, each option excludes entries from
other categories: for example, ‘(setq org-agenda-max-effort 100)’
limits the agenda to 100 minutes of effort and exclude any entry that
has no effort property. If you want to include entries with no effort
property, use a negative value for org-agenda-max-effort
. One
useful setup is to use org-agenda-max-entries
locally in a custom
command. For example, this custom command displays the next five
entries with a ‘NEXT’ TODO keyword.
(setq org-agenda-custom-commands '(("n" todo "NEXT" ((org-agenda-max-entries 5)))))
Once you mark one of these five entry as DONE, rebuilding the agenda will again the next five entries again, including the first entry that was excluded so far.
You can also dynamically set temporary limits, which are lost when rebuilding the agenda:
下一页: Custom Agenda Views, 上一页: Presentation and Sorting, 返回: Agenda Views [目录][索引]
Entries in the agenda buffer are linked back to the Org file or diary file where they originate. You are not allowed to edit the agenda buffer itself, but commands are provided to show and jump to the original entry location, and to edit the Org files “remotely” from the agenda buffer. In this way, all information is stored only once, removing the risk that your agenda and note files may diverge.
Some commands can be executed with mouse clicks on agenda lines. For the other commands, point needs to be in the desired line.
org-agenda-next-line
)Next line (same as DOWN and C-n).
org-agenda-previous-line
)Previous line (same as UP and C-p).
org-agenda-show-and-scroll-up
)Display the original location of the item in another window. With a prefix argument, make sure that drawers stay folded.
org-agenda-recenter
)Display original location and recenter that window.
org-agenda-goto
)Go to the original location of the item in another window.
org-agenda-switch-to
)Go to the original location of the item and delete other windows.
org-agenda-follow-mode
)Toggle Follow mode. In Follow mode, as you move point through the
agenda buffer, the other window always shows the corresponding
location in the Org file. The initial setting for this mode in new
agenda buffers can be set with the variable
org-agenda-start-with-follow-mode
.
org-agenda-tree-to-indirect-buffer
)Display the entire subtree of the current item in an indirect buffer. With a numeric prefix argument N, go up to level N and then take that tree. If N is negative, go up that many levels. With a C-u prefix, do not remove the previously used indirect buffer.
org-agenda-open-link
)Follow a link in the entry. This offers a selection of any links in the text belonging to the referenced Org node. If there is only one link, follow it without a selection prompt.
Interactively select another agenda view and append it to the current view.
Delete other windows.
org-agenda-day-view
)Switch to day view. When switching to day view, this setting becomes the default for subsequent agenda refreshes. A numeric prefix argument may be used to jump directly to a specific day of the year. For example, 32 d jumps to February 1st. When setting day view, a year may be encoded in the prefix argument as well. For example, 200712 d jumps to January 12, 2007. If such a year specification has only one or two digits, it is expanded into one of the 30 next years or the last 69 years.
org-agenda-week-view
)Switch to week view. When switching week view, this setting becomes the default for subsequent agenda refreshes. A numeric prefix argument may be used to jump directly to a specific day of the ISO week. For example 9 w to ISO week number 9. When setting week view, a year may be encoded in the prefix argument as well. For example, 200712 w jumps to week 12 in 2007. If such a year specification has only one or two digits, it is expanded into one of the 30 next years or the last 69 years.
org-agenda-month-view
)Switch to month view. Because month views are slow to create, they do not become the default for subsequent agenda refreshes. A numeric prefix argument may be used to jump directly to a specific day of the month. When setting month view, a year may be encoded in the prefix argument as well. For example, 200712 m jumps to December, 2007. If such a year specification has only one or two digits, it is expanded into one of the 30 next years or the last 69 years.
org-agenda-year-view
)Switch to year view. Because year views are slow to create, they do not become the default for subsequent agenda refreshes. A numeric prefix argument may be used to jump directly to a specific day of the year.
org-agenda-reset-view
)Reset the current view to org-agenda-span
.
org-agenda-later
)Go forward in time to display the span following the current one. For example, if the display covers a week, switch to the following week. With a prefix argument, repeat that many times.
org-agenda-earlier
)Go backward in time to display earlier dates.
org-agenda-goto-today
)Go to today.
org-agenda-goto-date
)Prompt for a date and go there.
org-agenda-clock-goto
)Go to the currently clocked-in task in the agenda buffer.
org-agenda-toggle-diary
)Toggle the inclusion of diary entries. See Weekly/daily agenda.
org-agenda-log-mode
)Toggle Logbook mode. In Logbook mode, entries that were marked as
done while logging was on (see the variable org-log-done
) are
shown in the agenda, as are entries that have been clocked on that
day. You can configure the entry types that should be included in
log mode using the variable org-agenda-log-mode-items
. When
called with a C-u prefix argument, show all possible
logbook entries, including state changes. When called with two
prefix arguments C-u C-u, show only logging information,
nothing else. v L is equivalent to C-u v l.
org-agenda-manipulate-query-add
)Include inactive timestamps into the current view. Only for weekly/daily agenda.
org-agenda-archives-mode
)Toggle Archives mode. In Archives mode, trees that are archived (see Internal archiving) are also scanned when producing the agenda. To exit archives mode, press v a again.
Toggle Archives mode. Include all archive files as well.
org-agenda-clockreport-mode
)Toggle Clockreport mode. In Clockreport mode, the daily/weekly
agenda always shows a table with the clocked times for the time span
and file scope covered by the current agenda view. The initial
setting for this mode in new agenda buffers can be set with the
variable org-agenda-start-with-clockreport-mode
. By using
a prefix argument when toggling this mode (i.e., C-u R),
the clock table does not show contributions from entries that are
hidden by agenda filtering99. See also the variable
org-clock-report-include-clocking-task
.
Show overlapping clock entries, clocking gaps, and other clocking
problems in the current agenda range. You can then visit clocking
lines and fix them manually. See the variable
org-agenda-clock-consistency-checks
for information on how to
customize the definition of what constituted a clocking problem. To
return to normal agenda display, press l to exit Logbook
mode.
org-agenda-entry-text-mode
)Toggle entry text mode. In entry text mode, a number of lines from
the Org outline node referenced by an agenda line are displayed
below the line. The maximum number of lines is given by the
variable org-agenda-entry-text-maxlines
. Calling this command
with a numeric prefix argument temporarily modifies that number to
the prefix value.
org-agenda-toggle-time-grid
)Toggle the time grid on and off. See also the variables
org-agenda-use-time-grid
and org-agenda-time-grid
.
org-agenda-redo
)Recreate the agenda buffer, for example to reflect the changes after modification of the timestamps of items with S-LEFT and S-RIGHT. When the buffer is the global TODO list, a prefix argument is interpreted to create a selective list for a specific TODO keyword.
org-save-all-org-buffers
)Save all Org buffers in the current Emacs session, and also the locations of IDs.
org-agenda-columns
)Invoke column view (see Column View) in the agenda buffer. The
column view format is taken from the entry at point, or, if there is
no entry at point, from the first entry in the agenda view. So
whatever the format for that entry would be in the original buffer
(taken from a property, from a ‘COLUMNS’ keyword, or from the
default variable org-columns-default-format
) is used in the
agenda.
org-agenda-remove-restriction-lock
)Remove the restriction lock on the agenda, if it is currently restricted to a file or subtree (see Agenda Files).
org-agenda-drag-line-backward
)Drag the line at point backward one line. With a numeric prefix argument, drag backward by that many lines.
Moving agenda lines does not persist after an agenda refresh and does not modify the contributing Org files.
org-agenda-drag-line-forward
)Drag the line at point forward one line. With a numeric prefix argument, drag forward by that many lines.
数字参数。
org-agenda-undo
)Undo a change due to a remote editing command. The change is undone both in the agenda buffer and in the remote buffer.
org-agenda-todo
)Change the TODO state of the item, both in the agenda and in the
original Org file. A prefix arg is passed through to the org-todo
command, so for example a C-u prefix are will trigger
taking a note to document the state change.
org-agenda-todo-nextset
)Switch to the next set of TODO keywords.
org-agenda-todo-previousset
Switch to the previous set of TODO keywords.
org-agenda-kill
)Delete the current agenda item along with the entire subtree
belonging to it in the original Org file. If the text to be deleted
remotely is longer than one line, the kill needs to be confirmed by
the user. See variable org-agenda-confirm-kill
.
org-agenda-refile
)Refile the entry at point.
org-agenda-archive-default-with-confirmation
)Archive the subtree corresponding to the entry at point using the
default archiving command set in org-archive-default-command
.
When using the a key, confirmation is required.
org-agenda-toggle-archive-tag
)Toggle the archive tag (see Internal archiving) for the current headline.
org-agenda-archive-to-archive-sibling
)Move the subtree corresponding to the current entry to its archive sibling.
org-agenda-archive
)Archive the subtree corresponding to the current headline. This means the entry is moved to the configured archive location, most likely a different file.
org-agenda-show-tags
)Show all tags associated with the current item. This is useful if
you have turned off org-agenda-show-inherited-tags
, but still want
to see all tags of a headline occasionally.
org-agenda-set-tags
)Set tags for the current headline. If there is an active region in the agenda, change a tag for all headings in the region.
org-agenda-priority
)Set the priority for the current item. Org mode prompts for the priority character. If you reply with SPC, the priority cookie is removed from the entry.
org-agenda-priority-up
)Increase the priority of the current item. The priority is changed in the original buffer, but the agenda is not resorted. Use the r key for this.
org-agenda-priority-down
)Decrease the priority of the current item.
org-agenda-add-note
)Add a note to the entry. This note is recorded, and then filed to
the same location where state change notes are put. Depending on
org-log-into-drawer
, this may be inside a drawer.
org-attach
)Dispatcher for all command related to attachments.
org-agenda-schedule
)Schedule this item. With a prefix argument, remove the scheduling timestamp
org-agenda-deadline
)Set a deadline for this item. With a prefix argument, remove the deadline.
org-agenda-do-date-later
)Change the timestamp associated with the current line by one day into the future. If the date is in the past, the first call to this command moves it to today. With a numeric prefix argument, change it by that many days. For example, 3 6 5 S-RIGHT changes it by a year. With a C-u prefix, change the time by one hour. If you immediately repeat the command, it will continue to change hours even without the prefix argument. With a double C-u C-u prefix, do the same for changing minutes. The stamp is changed in the original Org file, but the change is not directly reflected in the agenda buffer. Use r or g to update the buffer.
org-agenda-do-date-earlier
)Change the timestamp associated with the current line by one day into the past.
org-agenda-date-prompt
)Change the timestamp associated with the current line. The key > has been chosen, because it is the same as S-. on my keyboard.
org-agenda-clock-in
)Start the clock on the current item. If a clock is running already, it is stopped first.
org-agenda-clock-out
)Stop the previously started clock.
org-agenda-clock-cancel
)Cancel the currently running clock.
org-agenda-clock-goto
)Jump to the running clock in another window.
org-agenda-capture
)Like org-capture
, but use the date at point as the default date
for the capture template. See org-capture-use-agenda-date
to make
this the default behavior of org-capture
.
org-agenda-bulk-mark
)Mark the entry at point for bulk action. If there is an active region in the agenda, mark the entries in the region. With numeric prefix argument, mark that many successive entries.
org-agenda-bulk-mark-all
)Mark all visible agenda entries for bulk action.
org-agenda-bulk-unmark
)Unmark entry for bulk action.
org-agenda-bulk-remove-all-marks
)Unmark all marked entries for bulk action.
org-agenda-bulk-toggle
)Toggle mark of the entry at point for bulk action.
org-agenda-bulk-toggle-all
)Toggle mark of every entry for bulk action.
org-agenda-bulk-mark-regexp
)Mark entries matching a regular expression for bulk action.
org-agenda-bulk-action
)Bulk action: act on all marked entries in the agenda. This prompts
for another key to select the action to be applied. The prefix
argument to B is passed through to the s and
d commands, to bulk-remove these special timestamps. By
default, marks are removed after the bulk. If you want them to
persist, set org-agenda-bulk-persistent-marks
to t
or hit
p at the prompt.
Toggle persistent marks.
Archive all selected entries.
Archive entries by moving them to their respective archive siblings.
Change TODO state. This prompts for a single TODO keyword and changes the state of all selected entries, bypassing blocking and suppressing logging notes—but not timestamps.
Add a tag to all selected entries.
Remove a tag from all selected entries.
Schedule all items to a new date. To shift existing schedule dates by a fixed number of days, use something starting with double plus at the prompt, for example ‘++8d’ or ‘++2w’.
Set deadline to a specific date.
Prompt for a single refile target and move all entries. The entries are no longer in the agenda; refresh (g) to bring them back.
Reschedule randomly into the coming N days. N is prompted for. With a prefix argument (C-u B S), scatter only across weekdays.
Apply a function100 to marked entries. For example, the function below sets the ‘CATEGORY’ property of the entries to ‘web’.
(defun set-category () (interactive "P") (let ((marker (or (org-get-at-bol 'org-hd-marker) (org-agenda-error)))) (org-with-point-at marker (org-back-to-heading t) (org-set-property "CATEGORY" "web"))))
org-agenda-goto-calendar
)Open the Emacs calendar and go to the date at point in the agenda.
org-calendar-goto-agenda
)When in the calendar, compute and show the Org agenda for the date at point.
org-agenda-diary-entry
)Insert a new entry into the diary, using the date at point and (for block entries) the date at the mark. This adds to the Emacs diary file101, in a way similar to the i command in the calendar. The diary file pops up in another window, where you can add the entry.
If you configure org-agenda-diary-file
to point to an Org file,
Org creates entries in that file instead. Most entries are stored
in a date-based outline tree that will later make it easy to archive
appointments from previous months/years. The tree is built under an
entry with a ‘DATE_TREE’ property, or else with years as top-level
entries. Emacs prompts you for the entry text—if you specify it,
the entry is created in org-agenda-diary-file
without further
interaction. If you directly press RET at the prompt
without typing text, the target file is shown in another window for
you to finish the entry there. See also the k r command.
org-agenda-phases-of-moon
)Show the phases of the moon for the three months around current date.
org-agenda-sunrise-sunset
)Show sunrise and sunset times. The geographical location must be set with calendar variables, see the documentation for the Emacs calendar.
org-agenda-convert-date
)Convert the date at point into many other cultural and historic calendars.
org-agenda-holidays
)Show holidays for three months around point date.
org-agenda-quit
)Quit agenda, remove the agenda buffer.
org-agenda-exit
)Exit agenda, remove the agenda buffer and all buffers loaded by Emacs for the compilation of the agenda. Buffers created by the user to visit Org files are not removed.
下一页: Exporting Agenda Views, 上一页: Agenda Commands, 返回: Agenda Views [目录][索引]
Custom agenda commands serve two purposes: to store and quickly access frequently used TODO and tags searches, and to create special composite agenda buffers. Custom agenda commands are accessible through the dispatcher (see Agenda Dispatcher), just like the default commands.
• 存储搜索条件: | 打字一次,经常使用。 | |
• "挡路"议程: | 你需要的所有东西都放在一个缓冲区里。 | |
• 设置选项: | 改变规则。 |
下一页: Block agenda, 返回: Custom Agenda Views [目录][索引]
The first application of custom searches is the definition of keyboard shortcuts for frequently used searches, either creating an agenda buffer, or a sparse tree (the latter covering of course only the current buffer).
Custom commands are configured in the variable
org-agenda-custom-commands
. You can customize this variable, for
example by pressing C from the agenda dispatcher (see Agenda Dispatcher). You can also directly set it with Emacs Lisp in
the Emacs init file. The following example contains all valid agenda
views:
(setq org-agenda-custom-commands '(("x" agenda) ("y" agenda*) ("w" todo "WAITING") ("W" todo-tree "WAITING") ("u" tags "+boss-urgent") ("v" tags-todo "+boss-urgent") ("U" tags-tree "+boss-urgent") ("f" occur-tree "\\<FIXME\\>") ("h" . "HOME+Name tags searches") ;description for "h" prefix ("hl" tags "+home+Lisa") ("hp" tags "+home+Peter") ("hk" tags "+home+Kim")))
The initial string in each entry defines the keys you have to press after the dispatcher command in order to access the command. Usually this is just a single character, but if you have many similar commands, you can also define two-letter combinations where the first character is the same in several combinations and serves as a prefix key102. The second parameter is the search type, followed by the string or regular expression to be used for the matching. The example above will therefore define:
as a global search for agenda entries planned103 this week/day.
as the same search, but only for entries with an hour specification like ‘[h]h:mm’—think of them as appointments.
as a global search for TODO entries with ‘WAITING’ as the TODO keyword.
as the same search, but only in the current buffer and displaying the results as a sparse tree.
as a global tags search for headlines tagged ‘boss’ but not ‘urgent’.
The same search, but limiting it to headlines that are also TODO items.
as the same search, but only in the current buffer and displaying the result as a sparse tree.
to create a sparse tree (again, current buffer only) with all entries containing the word ‘FIXME’.
as a prefix command for a ‘HOME’ tags search where you have to press an additional key (l, p or k) to select a name (Lisa, Peter, or Kim) as additional tag to match.
Note that *-tree
agenda views need to be called from an Org buffer
as they operate on the current buffer only.
下一页: Setting options, 上一页: Storing searches, 返回: Custom Agenda Views [目录][索引]
Another possibility is the construction of agenda views that comprise
the results of several commands, each of which creates a block in
the agenda buffer. The available commands include agenda
for the
daily or weekly agenda (as created with a) , alltodo
for
the global TODO list (as constructed with t), stuck
for
the list of stuck projects (as obtained with #) and the
matching commands discussed above: todo
, tags
, and tags-todo
.
Here are two examples:
(setq org-agenda-custom-commands '(("h" "Agenda and Home-related tasks" ((agenda "") (tags-todo "home") (tags "garden"))) ("o" "Agenda and Office-related tasks" ((agenda "") (tags-todo "work") (tags "office")))))
This defines h to create a multi-block view for stuff you need to attend to at home. The resulting agenda buffer contains your agenda for the current week, all TODO items that carry the tag ‘home’, and also all lines tagged with ‘garden’. Finally the command o provides a similar view for office tasks.
上一页: Block agenda, 返回: Custom Agenda Views [目录][索引]
Org mode contains a number of variables regulating agenda construction and display. The global variables define the behavior for all agenda commands, including the custom commands. However, if you want to change some settings just for a single custom view, you can do so. Setting options requires inserting a list of variable names and values at the right spot in org-agenda-custom-commands
. 例如:
(setq org-agenda-custom-commands '(("w" todo "WAITING" ((org-agenda-sorting-strategy '(priority-down)) (org-agenda-prefix-format " Mixed: "))) ("U" tags-tree "+boss-urgent" ((org-show-context-detail 'minimal))) ("N" search "" ((org-agenda-files '("~org/notes.org")) (org-agenda-text-search-extra-files nil)))))
Now the w command sorts the collected entries only by priority, and the prefix format is modified to just say ‘Mixed:’ instead of giving the category of the entry. The sparse tags tree of U now turns out ultra-compact, because neither the headline hierarchy above the match, nor the headline following the match are shown. The command N does a text search limited to only a single file.
For command sets creating a block agenda, org-agenda-custom-commands
has two separate spots for setting options. You can add options that
should be valid for just a single command in the set, and options that
should be valid for all commands in the set. The former are just
added to the command entry; the latter must come after the list of
command entries. Going back to the block agenda example (see Block agenda), let’s change the sorting strategy for the h
commands to priority-down
, but let’s sort the results for ‘garden’
tags query in the opposite order, priority-up
. This would look like
this:
(setq org-agenda-custom-commands '(("h" "Agenda and Home-related tasks" ((agenda) (tags-todo "home") (tags "garden" ((org-agenda-sorting-strategy '(priority-up))))) ((org-agenda-sorting-strategy '(priority-down)))) ("o" "Agenda and Office-related tasks" ((agenda) (tags-todo "work") (tags "office")))))
As you see, the values and parentheses setting is a little complex. When in doubt, use the customize interface to set this variable—it fully supports its structure. Just one caveat: when setting options in this interface, the values are just Lisp expressions. So if the value is a string, you need to add the double-quotes around the value yourself.
To control whether an agenda command should be accessible from
a specific context, you can customize
org-agenda-custom-commands-contexts
. Let’s say for example that you
have an agenda command o displaying a view that you only
need when reading emails. Then you would configure this option like
this:
(setq org-agenda-custom-commands-contexts '(("o" (in-mode . "message-mode"))))
You can also tell that the command key o should refer to another command key r. In that case, add this command key like this:
(setq org-agenda-custom-commands-contexts '(("o" "r" (in-mode . "message-mode"))))
See the docstring of the variable for more information.
下一页: Agenda Column View, 上一页: Custom Agenda Views, 返回: Agenda Views [目录][索引]
If you are away from your computer, it can be very useful to have a printed version of some agenda views to carry around. Org mode can export custom agenda views as plain text, HTML104, Postscript, PDF105, and iCalendar files. If you want to do this only occasionally, use the following command:
If you need to export certain agenda views frequently, you can associate any custom agenda command with a list of output file names106. Here is an example that first defines custom commands for the agenda and the global TODO list, together with a number of files to which to export them. Then we define two block agenda commands and specify file names for them as well. File names can be relative to the current working directory, or absolute.
(setq org-agenda-custom-commands '(("X" agenda "" nil ("agenda.html" "agenda.ps")) ("Y" alltodo "" nil ("todo.html" "todo.txt" "todo.ps")) ("h" "Agenda and Home-related tasks" ((agenda "") (tags-todo "home") (tags "garden")) nil ("~/views/home.html")) ("o" "Agenda and Office-related tasks" ((agenda) (tags-todo "work") (tags "office")) nil ("~/views/office.ps" "~/calendars/office.ics"))))
The extension of the file name determines the type of export. If it
is ‘.html’, Org mode uses the htmlize package to convert the buffer to
HTML and save it to this file name. If the extension is ‘.ps’,
ps-print-buffer-with-faces
is used to produce Postscript output. If
the extension is ‘.ics’, iCalendar export is run export over all files
that were used to construct the agenda, and limit the export to
entries listed in the agenda. Any other extension produces a plain
ASCII file.
The export files are not created when you use one of those commands interactively because this might use too much overhead. Instead, there is a special command to produce all specified files in one step:
org-store-agenda-views
)Export all agenda views that have export file names associated with them.
You can use the options section of the custom agenda commands to also set options for the export commands. 例如:
(setq org-agenda-custom-commands '(("X" agenda "" ((ps-number-of-columns 2) (ps-landscape-mode t) (org-agenda-prefix-format " [ ] ") (org-agenda-with-colors nil) (org-agenda-remove-tags t)) ("theagenda.ps"))))
This command sets two options for the Postscript exporter, to make it
print in two columns in landscape format—the resulting page can be
cut in two and then used in a paper agenda. The remaining settings
modify the agenda prefix to omit category and scheduling information,
and instead include a checkbox to check off items. We also remove the
tags to make the lines compact, and we do not want to use colors for
the black-and-white printer. Settings specified in
org-agenda-exporter-settings
also apply, e.g.,
(setq org-agenda-exporter-settings '((ps-number-of-columns 2) (ps-landscape-mode t) (org-agenda-add-entry-text-maxlines 5) (htmlize-output-type 'css)))
but the settings in org-agenda-custom-commands
take precedence.
From the command line you may also use:
emacs -eval (org-batch-store-agenda-views) -kill
or, if you need to modify some parameters107
emacs -eval '(org-batch-store-agenda-views \ org-agenda-span (quote month) \ org-agenda-start-day "2007-11-01" \ org-agenda-include-diary nil \ org-agenda-files (quote ("~/org/project.org")))' \ -kill
which creates the agenda views restricted to the file ‘~/org/project.org’, without diary entries and with a 30-day extent.
You can also extract agenda information in a way that allows further processing by other programs. See Extracting Agenda Information, for more information.
上一页: Exporting Agenda Views, 返回: Agenda Views [目录][索引]
Column view (see Column View) is normally used to view and edit properties embedded in the hierarchical structure of an Org file. It can be quite useful to use column view also from the agenda, where entries are collected by certain criteria.
To understand how to use this properly, it is important to realize that the entries in the agenda are no longer in their proper outline environment. This causes the following issues:
org-overriding-columns-format
is currently set, and if so, takes
the format from there. You should set this variable only in the
local settings section of a custom agenda command (see Custom Agenda Views) to make it valid for that specific agenda view. If
no such binding exists, it checks, in sequence,
org-columns-default-format-for-agenda
, the format associated with
the first item in the agenda (through a property or a ‘#+COLUMNS’
setting in that buffer) and finally org-columns-default-format
.
It is important to realize that the agenda may show the same entry twice—for example as scheduled and as a deadline—and it may show two entries from the same hierarchy (for example a parent and its child). In these cases, the summation in the agenda leads to incorrect results because some values count double.
下一页: Exporting, 上一页: Agenda Views, 返回: Top [目录][索引]
Org is primarily about organizing and searching through your plain-text notes. However, it also provides a lightweight yet robust markup language for rich text formatting and more. For instance, you may want to center or emphasize text. Or you may need to insert a formula or image in your writing. Org offers syntax for all of this and more. Used in conjunction with the export framework (see Exporting), you can author beautiful documents in Org—like the fine manual you are currently reading.
• 段落: | 文本的基本单位。 | |
• 强调和等宽: | 粗体、斜体等。 | |
• 下标和上标: | 升降文本的简单语法。 | |
• 特殊符号: | 希腊字母和其他符号。 | |
• 嵌入式LaTeX: | LaTeX可在Org文档内自由使用。 | |
• 字面示例: | 具有特殊格式的源代码示例。 | |
• 图片: | 显示图像。 | |
• 标题: | 描述表格、图像. | |
• 水平尺: | 排成一条线。 | |
• 创建脚注: | 编辑并阅读脚注。 |
下一页: Emphasis and Monospace, 返回: Markup for Rich Contents [目录][索引]
Paragraphs are separated by at least one empty line. If you need to enforce a line break within a paragraph, use ‘\\’ at the end of a line.
To preserve the line breaks, indentation and blank lines in a region, but otherwise use normal formatting, you can use this construct, which can also be used to format poetry.
#+BEGIN_VERSE Great clouds overhead Tiny black birds rise and fall Snow covers Emacs ---AlexSchroeder #+END_VERSE
When quoting a passage from another document, it is customary to format this as a paragraph that is indented on both the left and the right margin. You can include quotations in Org documents like this:
#+BEGIN_QUOTE Everything should be made as simple as possible, but not any simpler ---Albert Einstein #+END_QUOTE
If you would like to center some text, do it like this:
#+BEGIN_CENTER Everything should be made as simple as possible, \\ but not any simpler #+END_CENTER
下一页: Subscripts and Superscripts, 上一页: Paragraphs, 返回: Markup for Rich Contents [目录][索引]
You can make words ‘*bold*’, ‘/italic/’, ‘_underlined_’, ‘=verbatim=’ and ‘~code~’, and, if you must, ‘+strike-through+’. Text in the code and verbatim string is not processed for Org specific syntax; it is exported verbatim.
To turn off fontification for marked up text, you can set
org-fontify-emphasized-text
to nil
. To narrow down the list of
available markup syntax, you can customize org-emphasis-alist
.
下一页: Special Symbols, 上一页: Emphasis and Monospace, 返回: Markup for Rich Contents [目录][索引]
‘^’ and ‘_’ are used to indicate super- and subscripts. To increase the readability of ASCII text, it is not necessary, but OK, to surround multi-character sub- and superscripts with curly braces. For example
The radius of the sun is R_sun = 6.96 x 10^8 m. On the other hand, the radius of Alpha Centauri is R_{Alpha Centauri} = 1.28 x R_{sun}.
If you write a text where the underscore is often used in a different
context, Org’s convention to always interpret these as subscripts can
get in your way. Configure the variable org-use-sub-superscripts
to
change this convention. For example, when setting this variable to
{}
, ‘a_b’ is not interpreted as a subscript, but ‘a_{b}’ is.
You can set org-use-sub-superscripts
in a file using the export
option ‘^:’ (see Export Settings). For example, ‘#+OPTIONS: ^:{}’
sets org-use-sub-superscripts
to {}
and limits super- and
subscripts to the curly bracket notation.
You can also toggle the visual display of super- and subscripts:
Set both org-pretty-entities
and
org-pretty-entities-include-sub-superscripts
to t
to start with
super- and subscripts visually interpreted as specified by the
option org-use-sub-superscripts
.
下一页: Embedded LaTeX, 上一页: Subscripts and Superscripts, 返回: Markup for Rich Contents [目录][索引]
You can use LaTeX-like syntax to insert special symbols—named entities—like ‘\alpha’ to indicate the Greek letter, or ‘\to’ to indicate an arrow. Completion for these symbols is available, just type ‘\’ and maybe a few letters, and press M-TAB to see possible completions. If you need such a symbol inside a word, terminate it with a pair of curly brackets. For example
Pro tip: Given a circle \Gamma of diameter d, the length of its circumference is \pi{}d.
A large number of entities is provided, with names taken from both
HTML and LaTeX; you can comfortably browse the complete list from
a dedicated buffer using the command org-entities-help
. It is also
possible to provide your own special symbols in the variable
org-entities-user
.
During export, these symbols are transformed into the native format of the exporter back-end. Strings like ‘\alpha’ are exported as ‘α’ in the HTML output, and as ‘\(\alpha\)’ in the LaTeX output. Similarly, ‘\nbsp’ becomes ‘ ’ in HTML and ‘~’ in LaTeX.
If you would like to see entities displayed as UTF-8 characters, use the following command108:
org-toggle-pretty-entities
)Toggle display of entities as UTF-8 characters. This does not change the buffer content which remains plain ASCII, but it overlays the UTF-8 character for display purposes only.
In addition to regular entities defined above, Org exports in a special way109 the following commonly used character combinations: ‘\-’ is treated as a shy hyphen, ‘--’ and ‘---’ are converted into dashes, and ‘...’ becomes a compact set of dots.
下一页: Literal Examples, 上一页: Special Symbols, 返回: Markup for Rich Contents [目录][索引]
Plain ASCII is normally sufficient for almost all note taking. Exceptions include scientific notes, which often require mathematical symbols and the occasional formula. LaTeX110 is widely used to typeset scientific documents. Org mode supports embedding LaTeX code into its files, because many academics are used to writing and reading LaTeX source code, and because it can be readily processed to produce pretty output for a number of export back-ends.
• LaTeX片段: | 复杂的公式变得简单。 | |
• 预览LaTeX片段: | 这个片段会是什么样子呢? | |
• CDLaTeX模式: | 加快公式输入速度。 |
下一页: Previewing LaTeX fragments, 返回: Embedded LaTeX [目录][索引]
Org mode can contain LaTeX math fragments, and it supports ways to process these for several export back-ends. When exporting to LaTeX, the code is left as it is. When exporting to HTML, Org can use either MathJax (see Math formatting in HTML export) or transcode the math into images (see Previewing LaTeX fragments).
LaTeX fragments do not need any special marking at all. The following snippets are identified as LaTeX source code:
例如:
\begin{equation} % arbitrary environments, x=\sqrt{b} % even tables, figures \end{equation} % etc If $a^2=b$ and \( b=2 \), then the solution must be either $$ a=+\sqrt{2} $$ or \[ a=-\sqrt{2} \].
LaTeX processing can be configured with the variable
org-export-with-latex
. The default setting is t
which means
MathJax for HTML, and no processing for ASCII and LaTeX back-ends.
You can also set this variable on a per-file basis using one of these
lines:
‘#+OPTIONS: tex:t’ | Do the right thing automatically (MathJax) |
‘#+OPTIONS: tex:nil’ | Do not process LaTeX fragments at all |
‘#+OPTIONS: tex:verbatim’ | Verbatim export, for jsMath or so |
下一页: CDLaTeX mode, 上一页: LaTeX fragments, 返回: Embedded LaTeX [目录][索引]
If you have a working LaTeX installation and ‘dvipng’, ‘dvisvgm’ or ‘convert’ installed112, LaTeX fragments can be processed to produce images of the typeset expressions to be used for inclusion while exporting to HTML (see LaTeX fragments), or for inline previewing within Org mode.
You can customize the variables org-format-latex-options
and
org-format-latex-header
to influence some aspects of the preview.
In particular, the :scale
(and for HTML export, :html-scale
)
property of the former can be used to adjust the size of the preview
images.
org-latex-preview
)Produce a preview image of the LaTeX fragment at point and overlay it over the source code. If there is no fragment at point, process all fragments in the current entry—between two headlines.
When called with a single prefix argument, clear all images in the current entry. Two prefix arguments produce a preview image for all fragments in the buffer, while three of them clear all the images in that buffer.
You can turn on the previewing of all LaTeX fragments in a file with
#+STARTUP: latexpreview
To disable it, simply use
#+STARTUP: nolatexpreview
上一页: Previewing LaTeX fragments, 返回: Embedded LaTeX [目录][索引]
CDLaTeX mode is a minor mode that is normally used in combination with a major LaTeX mode like AUCTeX in order to speed-up insertion of environments and math templates. Inside Org mode, you can make use of some of the features of CDLaTeX mode. You need to install ‘cdlatex.el’ and ‘texmathp.el’ (the latter comes also with AUCTeX) using MELPA with the Emacs packaging system or alternatively from https://staff.fnwi.uva.nl/c.dominik/Tools/cdlatex/. Do not use CDLaTeX mode itself under Org mode, but use the special version Org CDLaTeX minor mode that comes as part of Org. Turn it on for the current buffer with M-x org-cdlatex-mode, or for all Org files with
(add-hook 'org-mode-hook 'turn-on-org-cdlatex)
When this mode is enabled, the following features are present (for more details see the documentation of CDLaTeX mode):
Insert an environment template.
The TAB key expands the template if point is inside a LaTeX fragment113. For example, TAB expands ‘fr’ to ‘\frac{}{}’ and position point correctly inside the first brace. Another TAB gets you into the second brace.
Even outside fragments, TAB expands environment abbreviations at the beginning of a line. For example, if you write ‘equ’ at the beginning of a line and press TAB, this abbreviation is expanded to an ‘equation’ environment. To get a list of all abbreviations, type M-x cdlatex-command-help.
Pressing _ and ^ inside a LaTeX fragment
inserts these characters together with a pair of braces. If you use
TAB to move out of the braces, and if the braces surround
only a single character or macro, they are removed again (depending
on the variable cdlatex-simplify-sub-super-scripts
).
Pressing the backquote followed by a character inserts math macros, also outside LaTeX fragments. If you wait more than 1.5 seconds after the backquote, a help window pops up.
Pressing the single-quote followed by another character modifies the symbol before point with an accent or a font. If you wait more than 1.5 seconds after the single-quote, a help window pops up. Character modification works only inside LaTeX fragments; outside the quote is normal.
下一页: Images, 上一页: Embedded LaTeX, 返回: Markup for Rich Contents [目录][索引]
You can include literal examples that should not be subjected to markup. Such examples are typeset in monospace, so this is well suited for source code and similar examples.
#+BEGIN_EXAMPLE Some example from a text file. #+END_EXAMPLE
There is one limitation, however. You must insert a comma right before lines starting with either ‘*’, ‘,*’, ‘#+’ or ‘,#+’, as those may be interpreted as outlines nodes or some other special syntax. Org transparently strips these additional commas whenever it accesses the contents of the block.
#+BEGIN_EXAMPLE ,* I am no real headline #+END_EXAMPLE
For simplicity when using small examples, you can also start the example lines with a colon followed by a space. There may also be additional whitespace before the colon:
Here is an example : Some example from a text file.
If the example is source code from a programming language, or any other text that can be marked up by Font Lock in Emacs, you can ask for the example to look like the fontified Emacs buffer114. This is done with the code block, where you also need to specify the name of the major mode that should be used to fontify the example115, see Structure Templates for shortcuts to easily insert code blocks.
#+BEGIN_SRC emacs-lisp (defun org-xor (a b) "Exclusive or." (if a (not b) b)) #+END_SRC
Both in ‘example’ and in ‘src’ snippets, you can add a ‘-n’ switch to the end of the ‘#+BEGIN’ line, to get the lines of the example numbered. The ‘-n’ takes an optional numeric argument specifying the starting line number of the block. If you use a ‘+n’ switch, the numbering from the previous numbered snippet is continued in the current one. The ‘+n’ switch can also take a numeric argument. This adds the value of the argument to the last line of the previous block to determine the starting line number.
#+BEGIN_SRC emacs-lisp -n 20 ;; This exports with line number 20. (message "This is line 21") #+END_SRC #+BEGIN_SRC emacs-lisp +n 10 ;; This is listed as line 31. (message "This is line 32") #+END_SRC
In literal examples, Org interprets strings like ‘(ref:name)’ as labels, and use them as targets for special hyperlinks like ‘[[(name)]]’—i.e., the reference name enclosed in single parenthesis. In HTML, hovering the mouse over such a link remote-highlights the corresponding code line, which is kind of cool.
You can also add a ‘-r’ switch which removes the labels from the source code116. With the ‘-n’ switch, links to these references are labeled by the line numbers from the code listing. Otherwise links use the labels with no parentheses. Here is an example:
#+BEGIN_SRC emacs-lisp -n -r (save-excursion (ref:sc) (goto-char (point-min)) (ref:jump) #+END_SRC In line [[(sc)]] we remember the current position. [[(jump)][Line (jump)]] jumps to point-min.
Source code and examples may be indented in order to align nicely with the surrounding text, and in particular with plain list structure (see Plain Lists). By default, Org only retains the relative indentation between lines, e.g., when exporting the contents of the block. However, you can use the ‘-i’ switch to also preserve the global indentation, if it does matter. See Editing Source Code.
If the syntax for the label format conflicts with the language syntax, use a ‘-l’ switch to change the format, for example
#+BEGIN_SRC pascal -n -r -l "((%s))"
See also the variable org-coderef-label-format
.
HTML export also allows examples to be published as text areas (see Text areas in HTML export).
Because the ‘#+BEGIN’ … ‘#+END’ patterns need to be added so often, a shortcut is provided (see Structure Templates).
org-edit-special
)Edit the source code example at point in its native mode. This works by switching to a temporary buffer with the source code. You need to exit by pressing C-c ' again. The edited version then replaces the old version in the Org buffer. Fixed-width regions—where each line starts with a colon followed by a space—are edited using Artist mode117 to allow creating ASCII drawings easily. Using this command in an empty line creates a new fixed-width region.
Calling org-store-link
(see Handling Links) while editing a source
code example in a temporary buffer created with C-c '
prompts for a label. Make sure that it is unique in the current
buffer, and insert it with the proper formatting like ‘(ref:label)’ at
the end of the current line. Then the label is stored as a link
‘(label)’, for retrieval with C-c C-l.
下一页: Captions, 上一页: Literal Examples, 返回: Markup for Rich Contents [目录][索引]
An image is a link to an image file118 that does not have a description part, for example
./img/cat.jpg
If you wish to define a caption for the image (see Captions) and maybe a label for internal cross references (see Internal Links), make sure that the link is on a line by itself and precede it with ‘CAPTION’ and ‘NAME’ keywords as follows:
#+CAPTION: This is the caption for the next figure link (or table) #+NAME: fig:SED-HR4049 [[./img/a.jpg]]
Such images can be displayed within the buffer with the following command:
org-toggle-inline-images
)Toggle the inline display of linked images. When called with
a prefix argument, also display images that do have a link
description. You can ask for inline images to be displayed at
startup by configuring the variable
org-startup-with-inline-images
119.
下一页: Horizontal Rules, 上一页: Images, 返回: Markup for Rich Contents [目录][索引]
You can assign a caption to a specific part of a document by inserting a ‘CAPTION’ keyword immediately before it:
#+CAPTION: This is the caption for the next table (or link) | ... | ... | |-----+-----|
Optionally, the caption can take the form:
#+CAPTION[Short caption]: Longer caption.
Even though images and tables are prominent examples of captioned structures, the same caption mechanism can apply to many others—e.g., LaTeX equations, source code blocks. Depending on the export back-end, those may or may not be handled.
下一页: Creating Footnotes, 上一页: Captions, 返回: Markup for Rich Contents [目录][索引]
A line consisting of only dashes, and at least 5 of them, is exported as a horizontal line.
上一页: Horizontal Rules, 返回: Markup for Rich Contents [目录][索引]
A footnote is started by a footnote marker in square brackets in column 0, no indentation allowed. It ends at the next footnote definition, headline, or after two consecutive empty lines. The footnote reference is simply the marker in square brackets, inside text. Markers always start with ‘fn:’. 例如:
The Org homepage[fn:1] now looks a lot better than it used to. ... [fn:1] The link is: https://orgmode.org
Org mode extends the number-based syntax to named footnotes and optional inline definition. Here are the valid references:
A named footnote reference, where NAME is a unique label word, or, for simplicity of automatic creation, a number.
An anonymous footnote where the definition is given directly at the reference point.
An inline definition of a footnote, which also specifies a name for the note. Since Org allows multiple references to the same note, you can then use ‘[fn:NAME]’ to create additional references.
Footnote labels can be created automatically, or you can create names
yourself. This is handled by the variable org-footnote-auto-label
and its corresponding ‘STARTUP’ keywords. See the docstring of that
variable for details.
The following command handles footnotes:
The footnote action command.
When point is on a footnote reference, jump to the definition. When it is at a definition, jump to the—first—reference.
Otherwise, create a new footnote. Depending on the variable
org-footnote-define-inline
120, the definition is placed right
into the text as part of the reference, or separately into the
location determined by the variable org-footnote-section
.
When this command is called with a prefix argument, a menu of additional options is offered:
s | Sort the footnote definitions by reference sequence. |
r | Renumber the simple ‘fn:N’ footnotes. |
S | Short for first r, then s action. |
n | Rename all footnotes into a ‘fn:1’ … ‘fn:n’ sequence. |
d | Delete the footnote at point, including definition and references. |
Depending on the variable org-footnote-auto-adjust
121,
renumbering and sorting footnotes can be automatic after each
insertion or deletion.
If point is on a footnote reference, jump to the definition. If it is at the definition, jump back to the reference. When called at a footnote location with a prefix argument, offer the same menu as C-c C-x f.
Footnote labels are also links to the corresponding definition or reference, and you can use the usual commands to follow these links.
下一页: Publishing, 上一页: Markup for Rich Contents, 返回: Top [目录][索引]
At some point you might want to print your notes, publish them on the web, or share them with people not using Org. Org can convert and export documents to a variety of other formats while retaining as much structure (see Document Structure) and markup (see Markup for Rich Contents) as possible.
The libraries responsible for translating Org files to other formats are called back-ends. Org ships with support for the following back-ends:
Users can install libraries for additional formats from the Emacs
packaging system. For easy discovery, these packages have a common
naming scheme: ox-NAME
, where NAME is a format. For
example, ox-koma-letter
for koma-letter back-end. More libraries
can be found in the ‘contrib/’ directory (see Installation).
Org only loads back-ends for the following formats by default: ASCII,
HTML, iCalendar, LaTeX, and ODT. Additional back-ends can be loaded
in either of two ways: by configuring the org-export-backends
variable, or by requiring libraries in the Emacs init file. For
example, to load the Markdown back-end, add this to your Emacs config:
(require 'ox-md)
• 导出调度程序: | 主界面。 | |
• 导出设置: | 通用导出设置。 | |
• 目录: | 是否需要目录和目录的位置。 | |
• 包括文件: | 将其他文件包括到文档中。 | |
• 宏置换: | 使用宏来创建模板。 | |
• 注释行: | 不会导出的内容。 | |
• ASCII/Latin-1/UTF-8导出: | 使用指定编码导出到纯文本文件。 | |
• Beamer导出: | 制作演示文稿和幻灯片。 | |
• HTML导出: | 导出到HTML。 | |
• LaTeX导出: | 导出为LaTeX并处理为PDF。 | |
• Markdown导出: | 导出到Markdown。 | |
• OpenDocument文本导出: | 导出到OpenDocument文本。 | |
• Org导出: | 导出到Org。 | |
• Texinfo导出: | 导出到Texinfo: | |
• iCalendar导出: | 导出到iCalendar。 | |
• 其他内置后端: | 导出到手册页。 | |
• 高级导出配置: | 微调导出产出。 | |
• 导出外部缓冲区: | 使用Org语法创建表格和列表。 |
下一页: Export Settings, 返回: Exporting [目录][索引]
The export dispatcher is the main interface for Org’s exports. A hierarchical menu presents the currently configured export formats. Options are shown as easy toggle switches on the same screen.
Org also has a minimal prompt interface for the export dispatcher.
When the variable org-export-dispatch-use-expert-ui
is set to
a non-nil
value, Org prompts in the minibuffer. To switch back to
the hierarchical menu, press ?.
org-export
)Invokes the export dispatcher interface. The options show default settings. The C-u prefix argument preserves options from the previous export, including any sub-tree selections.
Org exports the entire buffer by default. If the Org buffer has an active region, then Org exports just that region.
Within the dispatcher interface, the following key combinations can further alter what is exported, and how.
Toggle asynchronous export. Asynchronous export uses an external Emacs process with a specially configured initialization file to complete the exporting process in the background, without tying-up Emacs. This is particularly useful when exporting long documents.
Output from an asynchronous export is saved on the export stack. To view this stack, call the export dispatcher with a double C-u prefix argument. If already in the export dispatcher menu, & displays the stack.
You can make asynchronous export the default by setting
org-export-in-background
.
You can set the initialization file used by the background process
by setting org-export-async-init-file
.
Toggle body-only export. Useful for excluding headers and footers in the export. Affects only those back-end formats that have sections like ‘<head>...</head>’ in HTML.
Toggle sub-tree export. When turned on, Org exports only the sub-tree starting from point position at the time the export dispatcher was invoked. Org uses the top heading of this sub-tree as the document’s title. If point is not on a heading, Org uses the nearest enclosing header. If point is in the document preamble, Org signals an error and aborts export.
To make sub-tree export the default, customize the variable
org-export-initial-scope
.
Toggle visible-only export. This is useful for exporting only certain parts of an Org document by adjusting the visibility of particular headings.
下一页: Table of Contents, 上一页: The Export Dispatcher, 返回: Exporting [目录][索引]
Export options can be set: globally with variables; for an individual file by making variables buffer-local with in-buffer settings (see In-buffer Settings); by setting individual keywords or specifying them in compact form with the ‘OPTIONS’ keyword; or for a tree by setting properties (see Properties and Columns). Options set at a specific level override options set at a more general level.
In-buffer settings may appear anywhere in the file, either directly or indirectly through a file included using ‘#+SETUPFILE: filename or URL’ syntax. Option keyword sets tailored to a particular back-end can be inserted from the export dispatcher (see The Export Dispatcher) using the ‘Insert template’ command by pressing #. To insert keywords individually, a good way to make sure the keyword is correct is to type ‘#+’ and then to use M-TAB122 for completion.
The export keywords available for every back-end, and their equivalent global variables, include:
The document author (user-full-name
).
Entity responsible for output generation
(org-export-creator-string
).
A date or a time-stamp123.
The email address (user-mail-address
).
Language to use for translating certain strings
(org-export-default-language
). With ‘#+LANGUAGE: fr’, for
example, Org translates ‘Table of contents’ to the French ‘Table des
matières’124.
The default value is ‘("export")’. When a tree is tagged with
‘export’ (org-export-select-tags
), Org selects that tree and its
sub-trees for export. Org excludes trees with ‘noexport’ tags, see
below. When selectively exporting files with ‘export’ tags set, Org
does not export any text that appears before the first headline.
The default value is ‘("noexport")’. When a tree is tagged with
‘noexport’ (org-export-exclude-tags
), Org excludes that tree and
its sub-trees from export. Entries tagged with ‘noexport’ are
unconditionally excluded from the export, even if they have an
‘export’ tag. Even if a sub-tree is not exported, Org executes any
code blocks contained there.
Org displays this title. For long titles, use multiple ‘#+TITLE’ lines.
The name of the output file to be generated. Otherwise, Org generates the file name based on the buffer name and the extension based on the back-end format.
The ‘OPTIONS’ keyword is a compact form. To configure multiple options, use several ‘OPTIONS’ lines. ‘OPTIONS’ recognizes the following arguments.
'
Toggle smart quotes (org-export-with-smart-quotes
). Depending on
the language used, when activated, Org treats pairs of double quotes
as primary quotes, pairs of single quotes as secondary quotes, and
single quote marks as apostrophes.
*
Toggle emphasized text (org-export-with-emphasize
).
-
Toggle conversion of special strings
(org-export-with-special-strings
).
:
Toggle fixed-width sections (org-export-with-fixed-width
).
<
Toggle inclusion of time/date active/inactive stamps
(org-export-with-timestamps
).
\n
Toggles whether to preserve line breaks
(org-export-preserve-breaks
).
^
Toggle TeX-like syntax for sub- and superscripts. If you write
‘^:{}’, ‘a_{b}’ is interpreted, but the simple ‘a_b’ is left as it
is (org-export-with-sub-superscripts
).
arch
Configure how archived trees are exported. When set to headline
,
the export process skips the contents and processes only the
headlines (org-export-with-archived-trees
).
author
Toggle inclusion of author name into exported file
(org-export-with-author
).
broken-links
Toggles if Org should continue exporting upon finding a broken
internal link. When set to mark
, Org clearly marks the problem
link in the output (org-export-with-broken-links
).
c
Toggle inclusion of ‘CLOCK’ keywords (org-export-with-clocks
).
creator
Toggle inclusion of creator information in the exported file
(org-export-with-creator
).
d
Toggles inclusion of drawers, or list of drawers to include, or list
of drawers to exclude (org-export-with-drawers
).
date
Toggle inclusion of a date into exported file
(org-export-with-date
).
e
Toggle inclusion of entities (org-export-with-entities
).
email
Toggle inclusion of the author’s e-mail into exported file
(org-export-with-email
).
f
Toggle the inclusion of footnotes (org-export-with-footnotes
).
H
Set the number of headline levels for export
(org-export-headline-levels
). Below that level, headlines are
treated differently. In most back-ends, they become list items.
inline
Toggle inclusion of inlinetasks (org-export-with-inlinetasks
).
num
Toggle section-numbers (org-export-with-section-numbers
). When
set to number N, Org numbers only those headlines at level N or
above. Set ‘UNNUMBERED’ property to non-nil
to disable numbering
of heading and subheadings entirely. Moreover, when the value is
‘notoc’ the headline, and all its children, do not appear in the
table of contents either (see Table of Contents).
p
Toggle export of planning information (org-export-with-planning
).
“Planning information” comes from lines located right after the
headline and contain any combination of these cookies: ‘SCHEDULED’,
‘DEADLINE’, or ‘CLOSED’.
pri
Toggle inclusion of priority cookies
(org-export-with-priority
).
prop
Toggle inclusion of property drawers, or list the properties to
include (org-export-with-properties
).
stat
Toggle inclusion of statistics cookies
(org-export-with-statistics-cookies
).
tags
Toggle inclusion of tags, may also be not-in-toc
(org-export-with-tags
).
tasks
Toggle inclusion of tasks (TODO items); or nil
to remove all
tasks; or todo
to remove done tasks; or list the keywords to keep
(org-export-with-tasks
).
tex
nil
does not export; t
exports; verbatim
keeps everything in
verbatim (org-export-with-latex
).
timestamp
Toggle inclusion of the creation time in the exported file
(org-export-time-stamp-file
).
title
Toggle inclusion of title (org-export-with-title
).
toc
Toggle inclusion of the table of contents, or set the level limit
(org-export-with-toc
).
todo
Toggle inclusion of TODO keywords into exported text
(org-export-with-todo-keywords
).
|
Toggle inclusion of tables (org-export-with-tables
).
When exporting sub-trees, special node properties can override the above keywords. These properties have an ‘EXPORT_’ prefix. For example, ‘DATE’ becomes, ‘EXPORT_DATE’ when used for a specific sub-tree. Except for ‘SETUPFILE’, all other keywords listed above have an ‘EXPORT_’ equivalent.
If org-export-allow-bind-keywords
is non-nil
, Emacs variables can
become buffer-local during export by using the ‘BIND’ keyword. Its
syntax is ‘#+BIND: variable value’. This is particularly useful for
in-buffer settings that cannot be changed using keywords.
下一页: Include Files, 上一页: Export Settings, 返回: Exporting [目录][索引]
The table of contents includes all headlines in the document. Its
depth is therefore the same as the headline levels in the file. If
you need to use a different depth, or turn it off entirely, set the
org-export-with-toc
variable accordingly. You can achieve the same
on a per file basis, using the following ‘toc’ item in ‘OPTIONS’
keyword:
#+OPTIONS: toc:2 (only include two levels in TOC) #+OPTIONS: toc:nil (no default TOC at all)
Org includes both numbered and unnumbered headlines in the table of contents125. If you need to exclude an unnumbered headline, along with all its children, set the ‘UNNUMBERED’ property to ‘notoc’ value.
* Subtree not numbered, not in table of contents either :PROPERTIES: :UNNUMBERED: notoc :END:
Org normally inserts the table of contents directly before the first
headline of the file. To move the table of contents to a different
location, first turn off the default with org-export-with-toc
variable or with ‘#+OPTIONS: toc:nil’. Then insert ‘#+TOC: headlines
N’ at the desired location(s).
#+OPTIONS: toc:nil ... #+TOC: headlines 2
To adjust the table of contents depth for a specific section of the Org document, append an additional ‘local’ parameter. This parameter becomes a relative depth for the current level. The following example inserts a local table of contents, with direct children only.
* Section #+TOC: headlines 1 local
Note that for this feature to work properly in LaTeX export, the Org
file requires the inclusion of the titletoc package. Because of
compatibility issues, titletoc has to be loaded before hyperref.
Customize the org-latex-default-packages-alist
variable.
The following example inserts a table of contents that links to the children of the specified target.
* Target :PROPERTIES: :CUSTOM_ID: TargetSection :END: ** Heading A ** Heading B * Another section #+TOC: headlines 1 :target #TargetSection
The ‘:target’ attribute is supported in HTML, Markdown, ODT, and ASCII export.
Use the ‘TOC’ keyword to generate list of tables—respectively, all listings—with captions.
#+TOC: listings #+TOC: tables
Normally Org uses the headline for its entry in the table of contents. But with ‘ALT_TITLE’ property, a different entry can be specified for the table of contents.
下一页: Macro Replacement, 上一页: Table of Contents, 返回: Exporting [目录][索引]
During export, you can include the content of another file. For example, to include your ‘.emacs’ file, you could use:
#+INCLUDE: "~/.emacs" src emacs-lisp
The first parameter is the file name to include. The optional second parameter specifies the block type: ‘example’, ‘export’ or ‘src’. The optional third parameter specifies the source code language to use for formatting the contents. This is relevant to both ‘export’ and ‘src’ block types.
If an included file is specified as having a markup language, Org neither checks for valid syntax nor changes the contents in any way. For example and source blocks, Org code-escapes the contents before inclusion.
If an included file is not specified as having any markup language, Org assumes it be in Org format and proceeds as usual with a few exceptions. Org makes the footnote labels (see Creating Footnotes) in the included file local to that file. The contents of the included file belong to the same structure—headline, item—containing the ‘INCLUDE’ keyword. In particular, headlines within the file become children of the current section. That behavior can be changed by providing an additional keyword parameter, ‘:minlevel’. It shifts the headlines in the included file to become the lowest level. For example, this syntax makes the included file a sibling of the current top-level headline:
#+INCLUDE: "~/my-book/chapter2.org" :minlevel 1
Inclusion of only portions of files are specified using ranges parameter with ‘:lines’ keyword. The line at the upper end of the range will not be included. The start and/or the end of the range may be omitted to use the obvious defaults.
‘#+INCLUDE: "~/.emacs" :lines "5-10"’ | Include lines 5 to 10, 10 excluded |
‘#+INCLUDE: "~/.emacs" :lines "-10"’ | Include lines 1 to 10, 10 excluded |
‘#+INCLUDE: "~/.emacs" :lines "10-"’ | Include lines from 10 to EOF |
Inclusions may specify a file-link to extract an object matched by
org-link-search
126 (see Search Options). The
ranges for ‘:lines’ keyword are relative to the requested element.
Therefore,
#+INCLUDE: "./paper.org::*conclusion" :lines 1-20
includes the first 20 lines of the headline named ‘conclusion’.
To extract only the contents of the matched object, set
‘:only-contents’ property to non-nil
. This omits any planning lines
or property drawers. For example, to include the body of the heading
with the custom ID ‘theory’, you can use
#+INCLUDE: "./paper.org::#theory" :only-contents t
The following command allows navigating to the included document:
下一页: Comment Lines, 上一页: Include Files, 返回: Exporting [目录][索引]
Macros replace text snippets during export. Macros are defined
globally in org-export-global-macros
, or document-wise with the
following syntax:
#+MACRO: name replacement text; $1, $2 are arguments
which can be referenced using ‘{{{name(arg1, arg2)}}}’127. For example
#+MACRO: poem Rose is $1, violet's $2. Life's ordered: Org assists you. {{{poem(red,blue)}}}
becomes
Rose is red, violet's blue. Life's ordered: Org assists you.
As a special case, Org parses any replacement text starting with ‘(eval’ as an Emacs Lisp expression and evaluates it accordingly. Within such templates, arguments become strings. Thus, the following macro
#+MACRO: gnustamp (eval (concat "GNU/" (capitalize $1)))
turns ‘{{{gnustamp(linux)}}}’ into ‘GNU/Linux’ during export.
Org recognizes macro references in following Org markup areas: paragraphs, headlines, verse blocks, tables cells and lists. Org also recognizes macro references in keywords, such as ‘CAPTION’, ‘TITLE’, ‘AUTHOR’, ‘DATE’, and for some back-end specific export options.
Org comes with following pre-defined macros:
The ‘keyword’ macro collects all values from NAME keywords throughout the buffer, separated with white space. ‘title’, ‘author’ and ‘email’ macros are shortcuts for, respectively, ‘{{{keyword(TITLE)}}}’, ‘{{{keyword(AUTHOR)}}}’ and ‘{{{keyword(EMAIL)}}}’.
This macro refers to the ‘DATE’ keyword. FORMAT is an
optional argument to the ‘date’ macro that is used only if ‘DATE’ is
a single timestamp. FORMAT should be a format string
understood by format-time-string
.
These macros refer to the document’s date and time of export and
date and time of modification. FORMAT is a string
understood by format-time-string
. If the second argument to the
modification-time
macro is non-nil
, Org uses ‘vc.el’ to retrieve
the document’s modification time from the version control system.
Otherwise Org reads the file attributes.
This macro refers to the filename of the exported file.
This macro returns the value of property PROPERTY-NAME in the current entry. If SEARCH-OPTION (see Search Options) refers to a remote entry, use it instead.
This macro implements custom counters by returning the number of times the macro has been expanded so far while exporting the buffer. You can create more than one counter using different NAME values. If ACTION is ‘-’, previous value of the counter is held, i.e., the specified counter is not incremented. If the value is a number, the specified counter is set to that value. If it is any other non-empty string, the specified counter is reset to 1. You may leave NAME empty to reset the default counter.
Moreover, inline source blocks (see Structure of Code Blocks) use the special ‘results’ macro to mark their output. As such, you are advised against re-defining it, unless you know what you are doing.
The surrounding brackets can be made invisible by setting
org-hide-macro-markers
to a non-nil
value.
Org expands macros at the very beginning of the export process.
下一页: ASCII/Latin-1/UTF-8 export, 上一页: Macro Replacement, 返回: Exporting [目录][索引]
Lines starting with zero or more whitespace characters followed by one ‘#’ and a whitespace are treated as comments and, as such, are not exported.
Likewise, regions surrounded by ‘#+BEGIN_COMMENT’ … ‘#+END_COMMENT’ are not exported.
Finally, a ‘COMMENT’ keyword at the beginning of an entry, but after any other keyword or priority cookie, comments out the entire subtree. In this case, the subtree is not exported and no code block within it is executed either128. The command below helps changing the comment status of a headline.
下一页: Beamer Export, 上一页: Comment Lines, 返回: Exporting [目录][索引]
ASCII export produces an output file containing only plain ASCII characters. This is the simplest and most direct text output. It does not contain any Org markup. Latin-1 and UTF-8 export use additional characters and symbols available in these encoding standards. All three of these export formats offer the most basic of text output for maximum portability.
On export, Org fills and justifies text according to the text width
set in org-ascii-text-width
.
Org exports links using a footnote-like style where the descriptive
part is in the text and the link is in a note before the next heading.
See the variable org-ascii-links-to-notes
for details.
org-ascii-export-to-ascii
)Export as an ASCII file with a ‘.txt’ extension. For ‘myfile.org’, Org exports to ‘myfile.txt’, overwriting without warning. For ‘myfile.txt’, Org exports to ‘myfile.txt.txt’ in order to prevent data loss.
org-ascii-export-to-ascii
)Export to a temporary buffer. Does not create a file.
The ASCII export back-end has one extra keyword for customizing ASCII output. Setting this keyword works similar to the general options (see Export Settings).
The document subtitle. For long subtitles, use multiple ‘#+SUBTITLE’ lines in the Org file. Org prints them on one continuous line, wrapping into multiple lines if necessary.
Org converts the first three outline levels into headlines for ASCII export. The remaining levels are turned into lists. To change this cut-off point where levels become lists, see Export Settings.
To insert text within the Org file by the ASCII back-end, use one the following constructs, inline, keyword, or export block:
Inline text @@ascii:and additional text@@ within a paragraph. #+ASCII: Some text #+BEGIN_EXPORT ascii Org exports text in this block only when using ASCII back-end. #+END_EXPORT
ASCII back-end recognizes only one attribute, ‘:width’, which specifies the width of a horizontal rule in number of characters. The keyword and syntax for specifying widths is:
#+ATTR_ASCII: :width 10 -----
Besides ‘#+BEGIN_CENTER’ blocks (see Paragraphs), ASCII back-end has these two left and right justification blocks:
#+BEGIN_JUSTIFYLEFT It's just a jump to the left... #+END_JUSTIFYLEFT #+BEGIN_JUSTIFYRIGHT ...and then a step to the right. #+END_JUSTIFYRIGHT
下一页: HTML Export, 上一页: ASCII/Latin-1/UTF-8 export, 返回: Exporting [目录][索引]
Org uses Beamer export to convert an Org file tree structure into high-quality interactive slides for presentations. Beamer is a LaTeX document class for creating presentations in PDF, HTML, and other popular display formats.
• Beamer导出命令: | 用于创建Beamer文档。 | |
• Beamer特定导出设置: | 用于自定义Beamer导出。 | |
• Beamer中的帧和块: | 用来创作光束幻灯片。 | |
• Beamer特定语法: | 在Org文档中使用。 | |
• 编辑支持: | 编辑支持。 | |
• Beamer示例: | 完整的演示文稿。 |
下一页: Beamer specific export settings, 返回: Beamer Export [目录][索引]
org-beamer-export-to-latex
)Export as LaTeX file with a ‘.tex’ extension. For ‘myfile.org’, Org exports to ‘myfile.tex’, overwriting without warning.
org-beamer-export-as-latex
)Export to a temporary buffer. Does not create a file.
org-beamer-export-to-pdf
)Export as LaTeX file and then convert it to PDF format.
Export as LaTeX file, convert it to PDF format, and then open the PDF file.
下一页: Frames and Blocks in Beamer, 上一页: Beamer export commands, 返回: Beamer Export [目录][索引]
Beamer export back-end has several additional keywords for customizing Beamer output. These keywords work similar to the general options settings (see Export Settings).
The Beamer layout theme (org-beamer-theme
). Use square brackets for options. 例如:
#+BEAMER_THEME: Rochester [height=20pt]
The Beamer font theme.
The Beamer inner theme.
The Beamer outer theme.
Arbitrary lines inserted in the preamble, just before the ‘hyperref’ settings.
The document description. For long descriptions, use multiple
‘DESCRIPTION’ keywords. By default, ‘hyperref’ inserts
‘DESCRIPTION’ as metadata. Use org-latex-hyperref-template
to
configure document metadata. Use org-latex-title-command
to
configure typesetting of description as part of front matter.
The keywords for defining the contents of the document. Use
multiple ‘KEYWORDS’ lines if necessary. By default, ‘hyperref’
inserts ‘KEYWORDS’ as metadata. Use org-latex-hyperref-template
to configure document metadata. Use org-latex-title-command
to
configure typesetting of keywords as part of front matter.
Document’s subtitle. For typesetting, use
org-beamer-subtitle-format
string. Use
org-latex-hyperref-template
to configure document metadata. Use
org-latex-title-command
to configure typesetting of subtitle as
part of front matter.
下一页: Beamer specific syntax, 上一页: Beamer specific export settings, 返回: Beamer Export [目录][索引]
Org transforms heading levels into Beamer’s sectioning elements, frames and blocks. Any Org tree with a not-too-deep-level nesting should in principle be exportable as a Beamer presentation.
org-beamer-frame-level
or ‘H’ value in a ‘OPTIONS’ line
(see Export Settings).
Org overrides headlines to frames conversion for the current tree of
an Org file if it encounters the ‘BEAMER_ENV’ property set to
‘frame’ or ‘fullframe’. Org ignores whatever
org-beamer-frame-level
happens to be for that headline level in
the Org tree. In Beamer terminology, a full frame is a frame
without its title.
org-beamer-environments-default
. To add more values, see
org-beamer-environments-extra
.
When ‘ignoreheading’ is set, Org export ignores the entry’s headline but not its content. This is useful for inserting content between frames. It is also useful for properly closing a ‘column’ environment. @end itemize
When ‘BEAMER_ACT’ is set for a headline, Org export translates that headline as an overlay or action specification. When enclosed in square brackets, Org export makes the overlay specification a default. Use ‘BEAMER_OPT’ to set any options applicable to the current Beamer frame or block. The Beamer export back-end wraps with appropriate angular or square brackets. It also adds the ‘fragile’ option for any code that may require a verbatim block.
To create a column on the Beamer slide, use the ‘BEAMER_COL’ property for its headline in the Org file. Set the value of ‘BEAMER_COL’ to a decimal number representing the fraction of the total text width. Beamer export uses this value to set the column’s width and fills the column with the contents of the Org entry. If the Org entry has no specific environment defined, Beamer export ignores the heading. If the Org entry has a defined environment, Beamer export uses the heading as title. Behind the scenes, Beamer export automatically handles LaTeX column separations for contiguous headlines. To manually adjust them for any unique configurations needs, use the ‘BEAMER_ENV’ property.
下一页: Editing support, 上一页: Frames and Blocks in Beamer, 返回: Beamer Export [目录][索引]
Since Org’s Beamer export back-end is an extension of the LaTeX back-end, it recognizes other LaTeX specific syntax—for example, ‘#+LATEX:’ or ‘#+ATTR_LATEX:’. See LaTeX Export, for details.
Beamer export wraps the table of contents generated with ‘toc:t’ ‘OPTION’ keyword in a ‘frame’ environment. Beamer export does not wrap the table of contents generated with ‘TOC’ keyword (see Table of Contents). Use square brackets for specifying options.
#+TOC: headlines [currentsection]
Insert Beamer-specific code using the following constructs:
#+BEAMER: \pause #+BEGIN_EXPORT beamer Only Beamer export back-end exports this. #+END_BEAMER Text @@beamer:some code@@ within a paragraph.
Inline constructs, such as the last one above, are useful for adding
overlay specifications to objects with bold
, item
, link
,
radio-target
and target
types. Enclose the value in angular
brackets and place the specification at the beginning of the object as
shown in this example:
A *@@beamer:<2->@@useful* feature
Beamer export recognizes the ‘ATTR_BEAMER’ keyword with the following attributes from Beamer configurations: ‘:environment’ for changing local Beamer environment, ‘:overlay’ for specifying Beamer overlays in angular or square brackets, and ‘:options’ for inserting optional arguments.
#+ATTR_BEAMER: :environment nonindentlist - item 1, not indented - item 2, not indented - item 3, not indented
#+ATTR_BEAMER: :overlay <+-> - item 1 - item 2
#+ATTR_BEAMER: :options [Lagrange] Let $G$ be a finite group, and let $H$ be a subgroup of $G$. Then the order of $H$ divides the order of $G$.
下一页: A Beamer example, 上一页: Beamer specific syntax, 返回: Beamer Export [目录][索引]
Org Beamer mode is a special minor mode for faster editing of Beamer documents.
#+STARTUP: beamer
org-beamer-select-environment
)Org Beamer mode provides this key for quicker selections in Beamer normal environments, and for selecting the ‘BEAMER_COL’ property.
上一页: Editing support, 返回: Beamer Export [目录][索引]
Here is an example of an Org document ready for Beamer export.
#+TITLE: Example Presentation #+AUTHOR: Carsten Dominik #+OPTIONS: H:2 toc:t num:t #+LATEX_CLASS: beamer #+LATEX_CLASS_OPTIONS: [presentation] #+BEAMER_THEME: Madrid #+COLUMNS: %45ITEM %10BEAMER_ENV(Env) %10BEAMER_ACT(Act) %4BEAMER_COL(Col) * This is the first structural section ** Frame 1 *** Thanks to Eric Fraga :B_block: :PROPERTIES: :BEAMER_COL: 0.48 :BEAMER_ENV: block :END: for the first viable Beamer setup in Org *** Thanks to everyone else :B_block: :PROPERTIES: :BEAMER_COL: 0.48 :BEAMER_ACT: <2-> :BEAMER_ENV: block :END: for contributing to the discussion **** This will be formatted as a beamer note :B_note: :PROPERTIES: :BEAMER_env: note :END: ** Frame 2 (where we will not use columns) *** Request Please test this stuff!
下一页: LaTeX Export, 上一页: Beamer Export, 返回: Exporting [目录][索引]
Org mode contains an HTML exporter with extensive HTML formatting compatible with XHTML 1.0 strict standard.
• HTML导出命令: | 调用HTML导出。 | |
• HTML特定导出设置: | HTML导出的设置。 | |
• HTML文档类型: | 导出各种(X)种HTML风格。 | |
• HTML前导和后导: | 插入前导和后导。 | |
• 引用HTML标签: | 在Org文件中使用直接HTML。 | |
• HTML导出中的标题: | 设置标题格式。 | |
• HTML导出中的链接: | 插入链接并设置其格式。 | |
• HTML导出中的表格: | 如何修改表格的格式。 | |
• HTML导出中的图像: | 如何将图形插入到HTML输出中。 | |
• HTML导出中的数学格式设置: | 网上也有漂亮的数学作品。 | |
• HTML导出中的文本域: | 展示示例的另一种方式。 | |
• CSS支持: | 更改输出的外观。 | |
• JavaScript支持: | Web浏览器中的信息和折叠。 |
下一页: HTML specific export settings, 返回: HTML Export [目录][索引]
org-html-export-to-html
)Export as HTML file with a ‘.html’ extension. For ‘myfile.org’, Org exports to ‘myfile.html’, overwriting without warning. {{{kbd{C-c C-e h o)}}} exports to HTML and opens it in a web browser.
org-html-export-as-html
)Exports to a temporary buffer. Does not create a file.
下一页: HTML doctypes, 上一页: HTML export commands, 返回: HTML Export [目录][索引]
HTML export has a number of keywords, similar to the general options settings described in Export Settings.
This is the document’s description, which the HTML exporter inserts it as a HTML meta tag in the HTML file. For long descriptions, use multiple ‘DESCRIPTION’ lines. The exporter takes care of wrapping the lines properly.
Specify the document type, for example: HTML5 (org-html-doctype
).
Specify the HTML container, such as ‘div’, for wrapping sections and
elements (org-html-container-element
).
The URL for home link (org-html-link-home
).
The URL for the up link of exported HTML pages (org-html-link-up
).
Options for MathJax (org-html-mathjax-options
). MathJax is used
to typeset LaTeX math in HTML documents. See Math formatting in HTML export, for an example.
Arbitrary lines for appending to the HTML document’s head
(org-html-head
).
More arbitrary lines for appending to the HTML document’s head
(org-html-head-extra
).
Keywords to describe the document’s content. HTML exporter inserts these keywords as HTML meta tags. For long keywords, use multiple ‘KEYWORDS’ lines.
Arbitrary lines for appending to the preamble; HTML exporter appends when transcoding LaTeX fragments to images (see Math formatting in HTML export).
The document’s subtitle. HTML exporter formats subtitle if document type is ‘HTML5’ and the CSS has a ‘subtitle’ class.
Some of these keywords are explained in more detail in the following sections of the manual.
下一页: HTML preamble and postamble, 上一页: HTML specific export settings, 返回: HTML Export [目录][索引]
Org can export to various (X)HTML flavors.
Set the org-html-doctype
variable for different (X)HTML variants.
Depending on the variant, the HTML exporter adjusts the syntax of HTML
conversion accordingly. Org includes the following ready-made
variants:
"html4-strict"
"html4-transitional"
"html4-frameset"
"xhtml-strict"
"xhtml-transitional"
"xhtml-frameset"
"xhtml-11"
"html5"
"xhtml5"
See the variable org-html-doctype-alist
for details. The default is
"xhtml-strict"
.
Org’s HTML exporter does not by default enable new block elements
introduced with the HTML5 standard. To enable them, set
org-html-html5-fancy
to non-nil
. Or use an ‘OPTIONS’ line in the
file to set ‘html5-fancy’.
HTML5 documents can now have arbitrary ‘#+BEGIN’ … ‘#+END’ blocks. 例如:
#+BEGIN_aside Lorem ipsum #+END_aside
exports to:
<aside> <p>Lorem ipsum</p> </aside>
while this:
#+ATTR_HTML: :controls controls :width 350 #+BEGIN_video #+HTML: <source src="movie.mp4" type="video/mp4"> #+HTML: <source src="movie.ogg" type="video/ogg"> Your browser does not support the video tag. #+END_video
exports to:
<video controls="controls" width="350"> <source src="movie.mp4" type="video/mp4"> <source src="movie.ogg" type="video/ogg"> <p>Your browser does not support the video tag.</p> </video>
When special blocks do not have a corresponding HTML5 element, the
HTML exporter reverts to standard translation (see
org-html-html5-elements
). For example, ‘#+BEGIN_lederhosen’ exports
to <div class="lederhosen">
.
Special blocks cannot have headlines. For the HTML exporter to wrap
the headline and its contents in <section>
or <article>
tags, set
the ‘HTML_CONTAINER’ property for the headline.
下一页: Quoting HTML tags, 上一页: HTML doctypes, 返回: HTML Export [目录][索引]
The HTML exporter has delineations for preamble and postamble. The
default value for org-html-preamble
is t
, which makes the HTML
exporter insert the preamble. See the variable
org-html-preamble-format
for the format string.
Set org-html-preamble
to a string to override the default format
string. If the string is a function, the HTML exporter expects the
function to return a string upon execution. The HTML exporter inserts
this string in the preamble. The HTML exporter does not insert
a preamble if org-html-preamble
is set nil
.
The default value for org-html-postamble
is auto
, which makes the
HTML exporter build a postamble from looking up author’s name, email
address, creator’s name, and date. Set org-html-postamble
to t
to
insert the postamble in the format specified in the
org-html-postamble-format
variable. The HTML exporter does not
insert a postamble if org-html-postamble
is set to nil
.
下一页: Headlines in HTML export, 上一页: HTML preamble and postamble, 返回: HTML Export [目录][索引]
The HTML export back-end transforms ‘<’ and ‘>’ to ‘<’ and ‘>’. To include raw HTML code in the Org file so the HTML export back-end can insert that HTML code in the output, use this inline syntax: ‘@@html:...@@’. 例如:
@@html:<b>@@bold text@@html:</b>@@
For larger raw HTML code blocks, use these HTML export code blocks:
#+HTML: Literal HTML code for export #+BEGIN_EXPORT html All lines between these markers are exported literally #+END_EXPORT
下一页: Links in HTML export, 上一页: Quoting HTML tags, 返回: HTML Export [目录][索引]
Headlines are exported to ‘<h1>’, ‘<h2>’, etc. Each headline gets the ‘id’ attribute from ‘CUSTOM_ID’ property, or a unique generated value, see Internal Links.
When org-html-self-link-headlines
is set to a non-nil
value, the
text of the headlines is also wrapped in ‘<a>’ tags. These tags have
a ‘href’ attribute making the headlines link to themselves.
下一页: Tables in HTML export, 上一页: Headlines in HTML export, 返回: HTML Export [目录][索引]
The HTML export back-end transforms Org’s internal links (see Internal Links) to equivalent HTML links in the output. The back-end similarly handles Org’s automatic links created by radio targets (see Radio Targets) similarly. For Org links to external files, the back-end transforms the links to relative paths.
For Org links to other ‘.org’ files, the back-end automatically
changes the file extension to ‘.html’ and makes file paths relative.
If the ‘.org’ files have an equivalent ‘.html’ version at the same
location, then the converted links should work without any further
manual intervention. However, to disable this automatic path
translation, set org-html-link-org-files-as-html
to nil
. When
disabled, the HTML export back-end substitutes the ID-based links in
the HTML output. For more about linking files when publishing to
a directory, see Publishing links.
Org files can also have special directives to the HTML export
back-end. For example, by using ‘#+ATTR_HTML’ lines to specify new
format attributes to <a>
or <img>
tags. This example shows
changing the link’s title and style:
#+ATTR_HTML: :title The Org mode homepage :style color:red; [[https://orgmode.org]]
下一页: Images in HTML export, 上一页: Links in HTML export, 返回: HTML Export [目录][索引]
The HTML export back-end uses org-html-table-default-attributes
when
exporting Org tables to HTML. By default, the exporter does not draw
frames and cell borders. To change for this for a table, use the
following lines before the table in the Org file:
#+CAPTION: This is a table with lines around and between cells #+ATTR_HTML: :border 2 :rules all :frame border
The HTML export back-end preserves column groupings in Org tables (see Column Groups) when exporting to HTML.
Additional options for customizing tables for HTML export.
org-html-table-align-individual-fields
Non-nil
attaches style attributes for alignment to each table
field.
org-html-table-caption-above
Non-nil
places caption string at the beginning of the table.
org-html-table-data-tags
Opening and ending tags for table data fields.
org-html-table-default-attributes
Default attributes and values for table tags.
org-html-table-header-tags
Opening and ending tags for table’s header fields.
org-html-table-row-tags
Opening and ending tags for table rows.
org-html-table-use-header-tags-for-first-column
Non-nil
formats column one in tables with header tags.
下一页: Math formatting in HTML export, 上一页: Tables in HTML export, 返回: HTML Export [目录][索引]
The HTML export back-end has features to convert Org image links to HTML inline images and HTML clickable image links.
When the link in the Org file has no description, the HTML export
back-end by default in-lines that image. For example:
‘[[file:myimg.jpg]]’ is in-lined, while ‘[[file:myimg.jpg][the image]]’ links to the text,
‘the image’. For more details, see the variable
org-html-inline-images
.
On the other hand, if the description part of the Org link is itself another link, such as ‘file:’ or ‘http:’ URL pointing to an image, the HTML export back-end in-lines this image and links to the main image. This Org syntax enables the back-end to link low-resolution thumbnail to the high-resolution version of the image, as shown in this example:
[[file:highres.jpg][file:thumb.jpg]]
To change attributes of in-lined images, use ‘#+ATTR_HTML’ lines in
the Org file. This example shows realignment to right, and adds alt
and title
attributes in support of text viewers and modern web
accessibility standards.
#+CAPTION: A black cat stalking a spider #+ATTR_HTML: :alt cat/spider image :title Action! :align right [[./img/a.jpg]]
The HTML export back-end copies the ‘http’ links from the Org file as-is.
下一页: Text areas in HTML export, 上一页: Images in HTML export, 返回: HTML Export [目录][索引]
LaTeX math snippets (see LaTeX fragments) can be displayed in two
different ways on HTML pages. The default is to use the MathJax,
which should work out of the box with Org130131. Some MathJax
display options can be configured via org-html-mathjax-options
, or
in the buffer. For example, with the following settings,
#+HTML_MATHJAX: align: left indent: 5em tagside: left font: Neo-Euler #+HTML_MATHJAX: cancel.js noErrors.js
equation labels are displayed on the left margin and equations are five em from the left margin. In addition, it loads the two MathJax extensions ‘cancel.js’ and ‘noErrors.js’132.
See the docstring of org-html-mathjax-options
for all supported
variables. The MathJax template can be configure via
org-html-mathjax-template
.
If you prefer, you can also request that LaTeX fragments are processed into small images that will be inserted into the browser page. Before the availability of MathJax, this was the default method for Org files. This method requires that the dvipng program, dvisvgm or ImageMagick suite is available on your system. You can still get this processing with
#+OPTIONS: tex:dvipng
#+OPTIONS: tex:dvisvgm
或者
#+OPTIONS: tex:imagemagick
下一页: CSS support, 上一页: Math formatting in HTML export, 返回: HTML Export [目录][索引]
Before Org mode’s Babel, one popular approach to publishing code in HTML was by using ‘:textarea’. The advantage of this approach was that copying and pasting was built into browsers with simple JavaScript commands. Even editing before pasting was made simple.
The HTML export back-end can create such text areas. It requires an ‘#+ATTR_HTML’ line as shown in the example below with the ‘:textarea’ option. This must be followed by either an example or a source code block. Other Org block types do not honor the ‘:textarea’ option.
By default, the HTML export back-end creates a text area 80 characters wide and height just enough to fit the content. Override these defaults with ‘:width’ and ‘:height’ options on the ‘#+ATTR_HTML’ line.
#+ATTR_HTML: :textarea t :width 40 #+BEGIN_EXAMPLE (defun org-xor (a b) "Exclusive or." (if a (not b) b)) #+END_EXAMPLE
下一页: JavaScript support, 上一页: Text areas in HTML export, 返回: HTML Export [目录][索引]
You can modify the CSS style definitions for the exported file. The HTML exporter assigns the following special CSS classes133 to appropriate parts of the document—your style specifications may change these, in addition to any of the standard classes like for headlines, tables, etc.
p.author | author information, including email |
p.date | publishing date |
p.creator | creator info, about org mode version |
.title | document title |
.subtitle | document subtitle |
.todo | TODO keywords, all not-done states |
.done | the DONE keywords, all states that count as done |
.WAITING | each TODO keyword also uses a class named after itself |
.timestamp | timestamp |
.timestamp-kwd | keyword associated with a timestamp, like ‘SCHEDULED’ |
.timestamp-wrapper | span around keyword plus timestamp |
.tag | tag in a headline |
._HOME | each tag uses itself as a class, “@” replaced by “_” |
.target | target for links |
.linenr | the line number in a code example |
.code-highlighted | for highlighting referenced code lines |
div.outline-N | div for outline level N (headline plus text) |
div.outline-text-N | extra div for text at outline level N |
.section-number-N | section number in headlines, different for each level |
.figure-number | label like “Figure 1:” |
.table-number | label like “Table 1:” |
.listing-number | label like “Listing 1:” |
div.figure | how to format an in-lined image |
pre.src | formatted source code |
pre.example | normal example |
p.verse | verse paragraph |
div.footnotes | footnote section headline |
p.footnote | footnote definition paragraph, containing a footnote |
.footref | a footnote reference number (always a <sup>) |
.footnum | footnote number in footnote definition (always <sup>) |
.org-svg | default class for a linked ‘.svg’ image |
The HTML export back-end includes a compact default style in each exported HTML file. To override the default style with another style, use these keywords in the Org file. They will replace the global defaults the HTML exporter uses.
#+HTML_HEAD: <link rel="stylesheet" type="text/css" href="style1.css" /> #+HTML_HEAD_EXTRA: <link rel="alternate stylesheet" type="text/css" href="style2.css" />
To just turn off the default style, customize
org-html-head-include-default-style
variable, or use this option
line in the Org file.
#+OPTIONS: html-style:nil
For longer style definitions, either use several ‘HTML_HEAD’ and
‘HTML_HEAD_EXTRA’ keywords, or use <style> ... </style>
blocks
around them. Both of these approaches can avoid referring to an
external file.
In order to add styles to a sub-tree, use the ‘HTML_CONTAINER_CLASS’ property to assign a class to the tree. In order to specify CSS styles for a particular headline, you can use the ID specified in a ‘CUSTOM_ID’ property. You can also assign a specific class to a headline with the ‘HTML_HEADLINE_CLASS’ property.
Never change the org-html-style-default
constant. Instead use other
simpler ways of customizing as described above.
上一页: CSS support, 返回: HTML Export [目录][索引]
Sebastian Rose has written a JavaScript program especially designed to allow two different ways of viewing HTML files created with Org. One is an Info-like mode where each section is displayed separately and navigation can be done with the n and p keys, and some other keys as well, press ? for an overview of the available keys. The second one has a folding view, much like Org provides inside Emacs. The script is available at https://orgmode.org/org-info.js and the documentation at https://orgmode.org/worg/code/org-info-js/. The script is hosted on https://orgmode.org, but for reliability, prefer installing it on your own web server.
To use this program, just add this line to the Org file:
#+INFOJS_OPT: view:info toc:nil
The HTML header now has the code needed to automatically invoke the script. For setting options, use the syntax from the above line for options described below:
The path to the script. The default is to grab the script from https://orgmode.org/org-info.js, but you might want to have a local copy and use a path like ‘../scripts/org-info.js’.
Initial view when the website is first shown. Possible values are:
‘info’ | Info-like interface with one section per page |
‘overview’ | Folding interface, initially showing only top-level |
‘content’ | Folding interface, starting with all headlines visible |
‘showall’ | Folding interface, all headlines and text visible |
Maximum headline level still considered as an independent section
for info and folding modes. The default is taken from
org-export-headline-levels
, i.e., the ‘H’ switch in ‘OPTIONS’. If
this is smaller than in org-export-headline-levels
, each
info/folding section can still contain child headlines.
Should the table of contents initially be visible? Even when ‘nil’, you can always get to the “toc” with i.
The depth of the table of contents. The defaults are taken from the
variables org-export-headline-levels
and org-export-with-toc
.
Does the CSS of the page specify a fixed position for the “toc”? If yes, the toc is displayed as a section.
Should there be short contents (children) in each section? Make this ‘above’ if the section should be above initial text.
Headings are highlighted when the mouse is over them. Should be ‘underline’ (default) or a background color like ‘#cccccc’.
Should view-toggle buttons be everywhere? When ‘nil’ (the default), only one such button is present.
You can choose default values for these options by customizing the
variable org-infojs-options
. If you always want to apply the script
to your pages, configure the variable org-export-html-use-infojs
.
下一页: Markdown Export, 上一页: HTML Export, 返回: Exporting [目录][索引]
The LaTeX export back-end can handle complex documents, incorporate standard or custom LaTeX document classes, generate documents using alternate LaTeX engines, and produce fully linked PDF files with indexes, bibliographies, and tables of contents, destined for interactive online viewing or high-quality print publication.
While the details are covered in-depth in this section, here are some
quick references to variables for the impatient: for engines, see
org-latex-compiler
; for build sequences, see
org-latex-pdf-process
; for packages, see
org-latex-default-packages-alist
and org-latex-packages-alist
.
An important note about the LaTeX export back-end: it is sensitive to blank lines in the Org document. That’s because LaTeX itself depends on blank lines to tell apart syntactical elements, such as paragraphs.
• LaTeX/PDF导出命令: | 用于生成LaTeX和PDF文档。 | |
• 特定于LaTeX的导出设置: | 这是这个LaTeX后端独有的。 | |
• LaTeX标题和分段: | 设置导出文件结构。 | |
• 引用LaTeX代码: | 包含字面LaTeX代码。 | |
• LaTeX导出中的表格: | 将表格导出到LaTeX的选项。 | |
• LaTeX导出中的图像: | 如何将图形插入到LaTeX输出中。 | |
• LaTeX导出中的普通列表: | 特定于列表的属性。 | |
• LaTeX导出中的源码快: | 特定于源代码块的属性。 | |
• LaTeX导出中的示例块: | 特定于样例块的属性。 | |
• LaTeX导出中的特殊块: | 特定于特殊块的属性。 | |
• LaTeX导出中的横向规则: | 特定于水平尺的属性。 |
下一页: LaTeX specific export settings, 返回: LaTeX Export [目录][索引]
org-latex-export-to-latex
)Export to a LaTeX file with a ‘.tex’ extension. For ‘myfile.org’, Org exports to ‘myfile.tex’, overwriting without warning.
org-latex-export-as-latex
)Export to a temporary buffer. Do not create a file.
org-latex-export-to-pdf
)Export as LaTeX file and convert it to PDF file.
Export as LaTeX file and convert it to PDF, then open the PDF using the default viewer.
Convert the region to LaTeX under the assumption that it was in Org mode syntax before. This is a global command that can be invoked in any buffer.
The LaTeX export back-end can use any of these LaTeX engines:
‘pdflatex’, ‘xelatex’, and ‘lualatex’. These engines compile LaTeX
files with different compilers, packages, and output options. The
LaTeX export back-end finds the compiler version to use from
org-latex-compiler
variable or the ‘#+LATEX_COMPILER’ keyword in the
Org file. See the docstring for the
org-latex-default-packages-alist
for loading packages with certain
compilers. Also see org-latex-bibtex-compiler
to set the
bibliography compiler134.
下一页: LaTeX header and sectioning, 上一页: LaTeX/PDF export commands, 返回: LaTeX Export [目录][索引]
The LaTeX export back-end has several additional keywords for customizing LaTeX output. Setting these keywords works similar to the general options (see Export Settings).
The document’s description. The description along with author name,
keywords, and related file metadata are inserted in the output file
by the hyperref package. See org-latex-hyperref-template
for
customizing metadata items. See org-latex-title-command
for
typesetting description into the document’s front matter. Use
multiple ‘DESCRIPTION’ keywords for long descriptions.
In order to be effective, the ‘babel’ or ‘polyglossia’
packages—according to the LaTeX compiler used—must be loaded
with the appropriate language as argument. This can be accomplished
by modifying the org-latex-packages-alist
variable, e.g., with the
following snippet:
(add-to-list 'org-latex-packages-alist '("AUTO" "babel" t ("pdflatex"))) (add-to-list 'org-latex-packages-alist '("AUTO" "polyglossia" t ("xelatex" "lualatex")))
This is LaTeX document class, such as article, report, book,
and so on, which contain predefined preamble and headline level
mapping that the LaTeX export back-end needs. The back-end reads
the default class name from the org-latex-default-class
variable.
Org has article as the default class. A valid default class must
be an element of org-latex-classes
.
Options the LaTeX export back-end uses when calling the LaTeX document class.
The compiler, such as ‘pdflatex’, ‘xelatex’, ‘lualatex’, for
producing the PDF. See org-latex-compiler
.
Arbitrary lines to add to the document’s preamble, before the
hyperref settings. See org-latex-classes
for adjusting the
structure and order of the LaTeX headers.
The keywords for the document. The description along with author
name, keywords, and related file metadata are inserted in the output
file by the hyperref package. See org-latex-hyperref-template
for
customizing metadata items. See org-latex-title-command
for
typesetting description into the document’s front matter. Use
multiple ‘KEYWORDS’ lines if necessary.
The document’s subtitle. It is typeset as per
org-latex-subtitle-format
. If org-latex-subtitle-separate
is
non-nil
, it is typed outside of the \title
macro. See
org-latex-hyperref-template
for customizing metadata items. See
org-latex-title-command
for typesetting description into the
document’s front matter.
The following sections have further details.
下一页: Quoting LaTeX code, 上一页: LaTeX specific export settings, 返回: LaTeX Export [目录][索引]
The LaTeX export back-end converts the first three of Org’s outline levels into LaTeX headlines. The remaining Org levels are exported as lists. To change this globally for the cut-off point between levels and lists, (see Export Settings).
By default, the LaTeX export back-end uses the article class.
To change the default class globally, edit org-latex-default-class
.
To change the default class locally in an Org file, add option lines
‘#+LATEX_CLASS: myclass’. To change the default class for just a part
of the Org file, set a sub-tree property, ‘EXPORT_LATEX_CLASS’. The
class name entered here must be valid member of org-latex-classes
.
This variable defines a header template for each class into which the
exporter splices the values of org-latex-default-packages-alist
and
org-latex-packages-alist
. Use the same three variables to define
custom sectioning or custom classes.
The LaTeX export back-end sends the ‘LATEX_CLASS_OPTIONS’ keyword and
‘EXPORT_LATEX_CLASS_OPTIONS’ property as options to the LaTeX
\documentclass
macro. The options and the syntax for specifying
them, including enclosing them in square brackets, follow LaTeX
conventions.
#+LATEX_CLASS_OPTIONS: [a4paper,11pt,twoside,twocolumn]
The LaTeX export back-end appends values from ‘LATEX_HEADER’ and
‘LATEX_HEADER_EXTRA’ keywords to the LaTeX header. The docstring for
org-latex-classes
explains in more detail. Also note that LaTeX
export back-end does not append ‘LATEX_HEADER_EXTRA’ to the header
when previewing LaTeX snippets (see Previewing LaTeX fragments).
A sample Org file with the above headers:
#+LATEX_CLASS: article #+LATEX_CLASS_OPTIONS: [a4paper] #+LATEX_HEADER: \usepackage{xyz} * Headline 1 some text * Headline 2 some more text
下一页: Tables in LaTeX export, 上一页: LaTeX header and sectioning, 返回: LaTeX Export [目录][索引]
The LaTeX export back-end can insert any arbitrary LaTeX code, see Embedded LaTeX. There are three ways to embed such code in the Org file and they all use different quoting syntax.
Inserting in-line quoted with @ symbols:
Code embedded in-line @@latex:any arbitrary LaTeX code@@ in a paragraph.
Inserting as one or more keyword lines in the Org file:
#+LATEX: any arbitrary LaTeX code
Inserting as an export block in the Org file, where the back-end exports any code between begin and end markers:
#+BEGIN_EXPORT latex any arbitrary LaTeX code #+END_EXPORT
下一页: Images in LaTeX export, 上一页: Quoting LaTeX code, 返回: LaTeX Export [目录][索引]
The LaTeX export back-end can pass several LaTeX attributes for table contents and layout. Besides specifying a label (see Internal Links) and a caption (see Captions), the other valid LaTeX attributes include:
The LaTeX export back-end wraps the table differently depending on the mode for accurate rendering of math symbols. Mode is either ‘table’, ‘math’, ‘inline-math’ or ‘verbatim’.
For ‘math’ or ‘inline-math’ mode, LaTeX export back-end wraps the
table in a math environment, but every cell in it is exported as-is.
The LaTeX export back-end determines the default mode from
org-latex-default-table-mode
. The LaTeX export back-end merges
contiguous tables in the same mode into a single environment.
Set the default LaTeX table environment for the LaTeX export
back-end to use when exporting Org tables. Common LaTeX table
environments are provided by these packages: tabularx, longtable,
array, tabu, and bmatrix. For packages, such as tabularx and tabu,
or any newer replacements, include them in the
org-latex-packages-alist
variable so the LaTeX export back-end can
insert the appropriate load package headers in the converted LaTeX
file. Look in the docstring for the org-latex-packages-alist
variable for configuring these packages for LaTeX snippet previews,
if any.
Use ‘CAPTION’ keyword to set a simple caption for a table (see Captions). For custom captions, use ‘:caption’ attribute, which accepts raw LaTeX code. ‘:caption’ value overrides ‘CAPTION’ value.
The table environments by default are not floats in LaTeX. To make them floating objects use ‘:float’ with one of the following options: ‘sideways’, ‘multicolumn’, ‘t’, and ‘nil’.
LaTeX floats can also have additional layout ‘:placement’ attributes. These are the usual ‘[h t b p ! H]’ permissions specified in square brackets. Note that for ‘:float sideways’ tables, the LaTeX export back-end ignores ‘:placement’ attributes.
The LaTeX export back-end uses these attributes for regular tables to set their alignments, fonts, and widths.
When ‘:spread’ is non-nil
, the LaTeX export back-end spreads or
shrinks the table by the ‘:width’ for tabu and longtabu
environments. ‘:spread’ has no effect if ‘:width’ is not set.
All three commands are toggles. ‘:booktabs’ brings in modern
typesetting enhancements to regular tables. The booktabs package
has to be loaded through org-latex-packages-alist
. ‘:center’ is
for centering the table. ‘:rmlines’ removes all but the very first
horizontal line made of ASCII characters from “table.el” tables
only.
The LaTeX export back-end inserts ‘:math-prefix’ string value in a math environment before the table. The LaTeX export back-end inserts ‘:math-suffix’ string value in a math environment after the table. The LaTeX export back-end inserts ‘:math-arguments’ string value between the macro name and the table’s contents. ‘:math-arguments’ comes in use for matrix macros that require more than one argument, such as ‘qbordermatrix’.
LaTeX table attributes help formatting tables for a wide range of situations, such as matrix product or spanning multiple pages:
#+ATTR_LATEX: :environment longtable :align l|lp{3cm}r|l | ... | ... | | ... | ... | #+ATTR_LATEX: :mode math :environment bmatrix :math-suffix \times | a | b | | c | d | #+ATTR_LATEX: :mode math :environment bmatrix | 1 | 2 | | 3 | 4 |
Set the caption with the LaTeX command ‘\bicaption{HeadingA}{HeadingB}’:
#+ATTR_LATEX: :caption \bicaption{HeadingA}{HeadingB} | ... | ... | | ... | ... |
下一页: Plain lists in LaTeX export, 上一页: Tables in LaTeX export, 返回: LaTeX Export [目录][索引]
The LaTeX export back-end processes image links in Org files that do
not have descriptions, such as these links ‘[[file:img.jpg]]’ or
‘[[./img.jpg]]’, as direct image insertions in the final PDF output. In
the PDF, they are no longer links but actual images embedded on the
page. The LaTeX export back-end uses ‘\includegraphics’ macro to
insert the image. But for TikZ (http://sourceforge.net/projects/pgf/)
images, the back-end uses an \input
macro wrapped within
a tikzpicture
environment.
For specifying image ‘:width’, ‘:height’, ‘:scale’ and other ‘:options’, use this syntax:
#+ATTR_LATEX: :width 5cm :options angle=90 [[./img/sed-hr4049.pdf]]
A ‘:scale’ attribute overrides both ‘:width’ and ‘:height’ attributes.
For custom commands for captions, use the ‘:caption’ attribute. It overrides the default ‘#+CAPTION’ value:
#+ATTR_LATEX: :caption \bicaption{HeadingA}{HeadingB} [[./img/sed-hr4049.pdf]]
When captions follow the method as described in Captions, the LaTeX export back-end wraps the picture in a floating ‘figure’ environment. To float an image without specifying a caption, set the ‘:float’ attribute to one of the following:
For a standard ‘figure’ environment; used by default whenever an image has a caption.
To span the image across multiple columns of a page; the back-end wraps the image in a ‘figure*’ environment.
For text to flow around the image on the right; the figure occupies the left half of the page.
For a new page with the image sideways, rotated ninety degrees, in a ‘sidewaysfigure’ environment; overrides ‘:placement’ setting.
To avoid a ‘:float’ even if using a caption.
Use the ‘placement’ attribute to modify a floating environment’s placement.
#+ATTR_LATEX: :float wrap :width 0.38\textwidth :placement {r}{0.4\textwidth} [[./img/hst.png]]
The LaTeX export back-end centers all images by default. Setting
‘:center’ to ‘nil’ disables centering. To disable centering globally,
set org-latex-images-centered
to ‘t’.
Set the ‘:comment-include’ attribute to non-nil
value for the LaTeX
export back-end to comment out the ‘\includegraphics’ macro.
下一页: Source blocks in LaTeX export, 上一页: Images in LaTeX export, 返回: LaTeX Export [目录][索引]
The LaTeX export back-end accepts the ‘environment’ and ‘options’ attributes for plain lists. Both attributes work together for customizing lists, as shown in the examples:
#+LATEX_HEADER: \usepackage[inline]{enumitem} Some ways to say "Hello": #+ATTR_LATEX: :environment itemize* #+ATTR_LATEX: :options [label={}, itemjoin={,}, itemjoin*={, and}] - Hola - Bonjour - Guten Tag.
Since LaTeX supports only four levels of nesting for lists, use an external package, such as ‘enumitem’ in LaTeX, for levels deeper than four:
#+LATEX_HEADER: \usepackage{enumitem} #+LATEX_HEADER: \renewlist{itemize}{itemize}{9} #+LATEX_HEADER: \setlist[itemize]{label=$\circ$} - One - Two - Three - Four - Five
下一页: Example blocks in LaTeX export, 上一页: Plain lists in LaTeX export, 返回: LaTeX Export [目录][索引]
The LaTeX export back-end can make source code blocks into floating objects through the attributes ‘:float’ and ‘:options’. For ‘:float’:
Makes a source block float; by default floats any source block with a caption.
Spans the source block across multiple columns of a page.
Avoids a ‘:float’ even if using a caption; useful for source code blocks that may not fit on a page.
#+ATTR_LATEX: :float nil #+BEGIN_SRC emacs-lisp Lisp code that may not fit in a single page. #+END_SRC
The LaTeX export back-end passes string values in ‘:options’ to LaTeX packages for customization of that specific source block. In the example below, the ‘:options’ are set for Minted. Minted is a source code highlighting LaTeX package with many configurable options.
#+ATTR_LATEX: :options commentstyle=\bfseries #+BEGIN_SRC emacs-lisp (defun Fib (n) (if (< n 2) n (+ (Fib (- n 1)) (Fib (- n 2))))) #+END_SRC
To apply similar configuration options for all source blocks in
a file, use the org-latex-listings-options
and
org-latex-minted-options
variables.
下一页: Special blocks in LaTeX export, 上一页: Source blocks in LaTeX export, 返回: LaTeX Export [目录][索引]
The LaTeX export back-end wraps the contents of example blocks in a ‘verbatim’ environment. To change this behavior to use another environment globally, specify an appropriate export filter (see Advanced Export Configuration). To change this behavior to use another environment for each block, use the ‘:environment’ parameter to specify a custom environment.
#+ATTR_LATEX: :environment myverbatim #+BEGIN_EXAMPLE This sentence is false. #+END_EXAMPLE
下一页: Horizontal rules in LaTeX export, 上一页: Example blocks in LaTeX export, 返回: LaTeX Export [目录][索引]
For other special blocks in the Org file, the LaTeX export back-end makes a special environment of the same name. The back-end also takes ‘:options’, if any, and appends as-is to that environment’s opening string. 例如:
#+BEGIN_abstract We demonstrate how to solve the Syracuse problem. #+END_abstract #+ATTR_LATEX: :options [Proof of important theorem] #+BEGIN_proof ... Therefore, any even number greater than 2 is the sum of two primes. #+END_proof
exports to
\begin{abstract} We demonstrate how to solve the Syracuse problem. \end{abstract} \begin{proof}[Proof of important theorem] ... Therefore, any even number greater than 2 is the sum of two primes. \end{proof}
If you need to insert a specific caption command, use ‘:caption’ attribute. It overrides standard ‘CAPTION’ value, if any. 例如:
#+ATTR_LATEX: :caption \MyCaption{HeadingA} #+BEGIN_proof ... #+END_proof
上一页: Special blocks in LaTeX export, 返回: LaTeX Export [目录][索引]
The LaTeX export back-end converts horizontal rules by the specified ‘:width’ and ‘:thickness’ attributes. 例如:
#+ATTR_LATEX: :width .6\textwidth :thickness 0.8pt -----
下一页: OpenDocument Text Export, 上一页: LaTeX Export, 返回: Exporting [目录][索引]
The Markdown export back-end, “md”, converts an Org file to Markdown format, as defined at http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/.
Since it is built on top of the HTML back-end (see HTML Export), it converts every Org construct not defined in Markdown syntax, such as tables, to HTML.
org-md-export-to-markdown
)Export to a text file with Markdown syntax. For ‘myfile.org’, Org exports to ‘myfile.md’, overwritten without warning.
org-md-export-as-markdown
)Export to a temporary buffer. Does not create a file.
Export as a text file with Markdown syntax, then open it.
Based on org-md-headline-style
, Markdown export can generate
headlines of both atx and setext types. atx limits headline
levels to two whereas setext limits headline levels to six. Beyond
these limits, the export back-end converts headlines to lists. To set
a limit to a level before the absolute limit (see Export Settings).
下一页: Org Export, 上一页: Markdown Export, 返回: Exporting [目录][索引]
The ODT export back-end handles creating of OpenDocument Text (ODT) format. Documents created by this exporter use the OpenDocument-v1.2 specification135 and are compatible with LibreOffice 3.4.
• ODT导出的前提条件: | 所需的包。 | |
• ODT导出命令: | 调用导出。 | |
• ODT特定导出设置: | 配置选项。 | |
• 扩展ODT导出: | 制作DOC、PDF文件。 | |
• 应用自定义样式: | 设置输出样式。 | |
• ODT导出中的链接: | 处理和格式化链接。 | |
• ODT导出中的表格: | Org表格转换。 | |
• ODT导出中的图片: | 插入图像。 | |
• ODT导出中的数学格式: | 格式化LaTeX片段。 | |
• ODT导出中的标签和标题: | 渲染对象。 | |
• ODT导出中的文字示例: | 源代码和示例块。 | |
• ODT导出中的高级主题: | 适用于高级用户。 |
下一页: ODT export commands, 返回: OpenDocument Text Export [目录][索引]
The ODT export back-end relies on the zip program to create the final compressed ODT output. Check if ‘zip’ is locally available and executable. Without it, export cannot finish.
下一页: ODT specific export settings, 上一页: Pre-requisites for ODT export, 返回: OpenDocument Text Export [目录][索引]
org-export-to-odt
)Export as OpenDocument Text file.
If org-odt-preferred-output-format
is specified, the ODT export
back-end automatically converts the exported file to that format.
For ‘myfile.org’, Org exports to ‘myfile.odt’, overwriting without warning. The ODT export back-end exports a region only if a region was active.
If the selected region is a single tree, the ODT export back-end makes the tree head the document title. Incidentally, C-c @ selects the current sub-tree. If the tree head entry has, or inherits, an ‘EXPORT_FILE_NAME’ property, the ODT export back-end uses that for file name.
Export as an OpenDocument Text file and open the resulting file.
If org-export-odt-preferred-output-format
is specified, open the
converted file instead. See Automatically exporting to other formats.
下一页: Extending ODT export, 上一页: ODT export commands, 返回: OpenDocument Text Export [目录][索引]
The ODT export back-end has several additional keywords for customizing ODT output. Setting these keywords works similar to the general options (see Export Settings).
This is the document’s description, which the ODT export back-end inserts as document metadata. For long descriptions, use multiple lines, prefixed with ‘DESCRIPTION’.
The keywords for the document. The ODT export back-end inserts the description along with author name, keywords, and related file metadata as metadata in the output file. Use multiple ‘KEYWORDS’ if necessary.
The ODT export back-end uses the org-odt-styles-file
by default.
See Applying custom styles for details.
The document subtitle.
下一页: Applying custom styles, 上一页: ODT specific export settings, 返回: OpenDocument Text Export [目录][索引]
The ODT export back-end can produce documents in other formats besides ODT using a specialized ODT converter process. Its common interface works with popular converters to produce formats such as ‘doc’, or convert a document from one format, say ‘csv’, to another format, say ‘xls’.
Customize org-odt-convert-process
variable to point to ‘unoconv’,
which is the ODT’s preferred converter. Working installations of
LibreOffice would already have ‘unoconv’ installed. Alternatively,
other converters may be substituted here. See Configuring a document converter.
If ODT format is just an intermediate step to get to other formats,
such as ‘doc’, ‘docx’, ‘rtf’, or ‘pdf’, etc., then extend the ODT
export back-end to directly produce that format. Specify the final
format in the org-odt-preferred-output-format
variable. This is one
way to extend (see ODT export commands).
The Org export back-end is made to be inter-operable with a wide range of text document format converters. Newer generation converters, such as LibreOffice and Pandoc, can handle hundreds of formats at once. Org provides a consistent interaction with whatever converter is installed. Here are some generic commands:
Convert an existing document from one format to another. With a prefix argument, opens the newly produced file.
下一页: Links in ODT export, 上一页: Extending ODT export, 返回: OpenDocument Text Export [目录][索引]
The ODT export back-end comes with many OpenDocument styles (see Working with OpenDocument style files). To expand or further customize these built-in style sheets, either edit the style sheets directly or generate them using an application such as LibreOffice. The example here shows creating a style using LibreOffice.
#+OPTIONS: H:10 num:t
org-odt-styles-file
and point it to the
newly created file. For additional configuration options, see
Overriding factory styles.
To apply an ODT style to a particular file, use the ‘ODT_STYLES_FILE’ keyword as shown in the example below:
#+ODT_STYLES_FILE: "/path/to/example.ott"
或者
#+ODT_STYLES_FILE: ("/path/to/file.ott" ("styles.xml" "image/hdr.png"))
The ODT export back-end relies on many templates and style names. Using third-party styles and templates can lead to mismatches. Templates derived from built in ODT templates and styles seem to have fewer problems.
下一页: Tables in ODT export, 上一页: Applying custom styles, 返回: OpenDocument Text Export [目录][索引]
ODT exporter creates native cross-references for internal links. It creates Internet-style links for all other links.
A link with no description and pointing to a regular, un-itemized, outline heading is replaced with a cross-reference and section number of the heading.
A ‘\ref{label}’-style reference to an image, table etc., is replaced with a cross-reference and sequence number of the labeled entity. See Labels and captions in ODT export.
下一页: Images in ODT export, 上一页: Links in ODT export, 返回: OpenDocument Text Export [目录][索引]
The ODT export back-end handles native Org mode tables (see Tables) and simple ‘table.el’ tables. Complex ‘table.el’ tables having column or row spans are not supported. Such tables are stripped from the exported document.
By default, the ODT export back-end exports a table with top and bottom frames and with ruled lines separating row and column groups (see Column Groups). All tables are typeset to occupy the same width. The ODT export back-end honors any table alignments and relative widths for columns (see Column Width and Alignment).
Note that the ODT export back-end interprets column widths as weighted ratios, the default weight being 1.
Specifying ‘:rel-width’ property on an ‘ATTR_ODT’ line controls the width of the table. 例如:
#+ATTR_ODT: :rel-width 50 | Area/Month | Jan | Feb | Mar | Sum | |---------------+-------+-------+-------+-------| | / | < | | | < | | <l13> | <r5> | <r5> | <r5> | <r6> | | North America | 1 | 21 | 926 | 948 | | Middle East | 6 | 75 | 844 | 925 | | Asia Pacific | 9 | 27 | 790 | 826 | |---------------+-------+-------+-------+-------| | Sum | 16 | 123 | 2560 | 2699 |
On export, the above table takes 50% of text width area. The exporter sizes the columns in the ratio: 13:5:5:5:6. The first column is left-aligned and rest of the columns, right-aligned. Vertical rules separate the header and the last column. Horizontal rules separate the header and the last row.
For even more customization, create custom table styles and associate them with a table using the ‘ATTR_ODT’ keyword. See Customizing tables in ODT export.
下一页: Math formatting in ODT export, 上一页: Tables in ODT export, 返回: OpenDocument Text Export [目录][索引]
The ODT export back-end processes image links in Org files that do not have descriptions, such as these links ‘[[file:img.jpg]]’ or ‘[[./img.jpg]]’, as direct image insertions in the final output. Either of these examples works:
[[file:img.png]]
[[./img.png]]
For clickable images, provide a link whose description is another link to an image file. For example, to embed an image ‘org-mode-unicorn.png’ which when clicked jumps to https://orgmode.org website, do the following
[[https://orgmode.org][./org-mode-unicorn.png]]
Control the size and scale of the embedded images with the ‘ATTR_ODT’ attribute.
The ODT export back-end starts with establishing the size of the image
in the final document. The dimensions of this size are measured in
centimeters. The back-end then queries the image file for its
dimensions measured in pixels. For this measurement, the back-end
relies on ImageMagick’s identify program or Emacs create-image
and
image-size
API. ImageMagick is the preferred choice for large file
sizes or frequent batch operations. The back-end then converts the
pixel dimensions using org-odt-pixels-per-inch
into the familiar 72
dpi or 96 dpi. The default value for this is in
display-pixels-per-inch
, which can be tweaked for better results
based on the capabilities of the output device. Here are some common
image scaling operations:
To embed ‘img.png’ as a 10 cm x 10 cm image, do the following:
#+ATTR_ODT: :width 10 :height 10 [[./img.png]]
To embed ‘img.png’ at half its size, do the following:
#+ATTR_ODT: :scale 0.5 [[./img.png]]
To embed ‘img.png’ with a width of 10 cm while retaining the original height:width ratio, do the following:
#+ATTR_ODT: :width 10 [[./img.png]]
To embed ‘img.png’ with a height of 10 cm while retaining the original height:width ratio, do the following:
#+ATTR_ODT: :height 10 [[./img.png]]
The ODT export back-end can anchor images to ‘as-char’, ‘paragraph’, or ‘page’. Set the preferred anchor using the ‘:anchor’ property of the ‘ATTR_ODT’ line.
To create an image that is anchored to a page:
#+ATTR_ODT: :anchor page [[./img.png]]
下一页: Labels and captions in ODT export, 上一页: Images in ODT export, 返回: OpenDocument Text Export [目录][索引]
The ODT exporter has special support for handling math.
• LaTeX数学片段: | 以LaTeX格式嵌入。 | |
• MathML和OpenDocument公式文件: | 以本机格式嵌入。 |
LaTeX math snippets (see LaTeX fragments) can be embedded in the ODT document in one of the following ways:
Add this line to the Org file. This option is activated on a per-file basis.
#+OPTIONS: tex:t
With this option, LaTeX fragments are first converted into MathML fragments using an external LaTeX-to-MathML converter program. The resulting MathML fragments are then embedded as an OpenDocument Formula in the exported document.
You can specify the LaTeX-to-MathML converter by customizing the
variables org-latex-to-mathml-convert-command
and
org-latex-to-mathml-jar-file
.
If you prefer to use MathToWeb136 as your converter, you can configure the above variables as shown below.
(setq org-latex-to-mathml-convert-command "java -jar %j -unicode -force -df %o %I" org-latex-to-mathml-jar-file "/path/to/mathtoweb.jar")
or, to use LaTeXML137 instead,
(setq org-latex-to-mathml-convert-command "latexmlmath \"%i\" --presentationmathml=%o")
To quickly verify the reliability of the LaTeX-to-MathML converter, use the following commands:
Convert a LaTeX math snippet to an OpenDocument formula (‘.odf’) file.
Convert a LaTeX math snippet to an OpenDocument formula (‘.odf’) file and open the formula file with the system-registered application.
Add this line to the Org file. This option is activated on a per-file basis.
#+OPTIONS: tex:dvipng
#+OPTIONS: tex:dvisvgm
或者
#+OPTIONS: tex:imagemagick
Under this option, LaTeX fragments are processed into PNG or SVG images and the resulting images are embedded in the exported document. This method requires dvipng program, dvisvgm or ImageMagick programs.
上一页: LaTeX math snippets, 返回: Math formatting in ODT export [目录][索引]
When embedding LaTeX math snippets in ODT documents is not reliable, there is one more option to try. Embed an equation by linking to its MathML (‘.mml’) source or its OpenDocument formula (‘.odf’) file as shown below:
[[./equation.mml]]
或者
[[./equation.odf]]
下一页: Literal examples in ODT export, 上一页: Math formatting in ODT export, 返回: OpenDocument Text Export [目录][索引]
ODT format handles labeling and captioning of objects based on their types. Inline images, tables, LaTeX fragments, and Math formulas are numbered and captioned separately. Each object also gets a unique sequence number based on its order of first appearance in the Org file. Each category has its own sequence. A caption is just a label applied to these objects.
#+CAPTION: Bell curve #+NAME: fig:SED-HR4049 [[./img/a.png]]
When rendered, it may show as follows in the exported document:
Figure 2: Bell curve
To modify the category component of the caption, customize the option
org-odt-category-map-alist
. For example, to tag embedded images
with the string “Illustration” instead of the default string “Figure”,
use the following setting:
(setq org-odt-category-map-alist '(("__Figure__" "Illustration" "value" "Figure" org-odt--enumerable-image-p)))
With the above modification, the previous example changes to:
Illustration 2: Bell curve
下一页: Advanced topics in ODT export, 上一页: Labels and captions in ODT export, 返回: OpenDocument Text Export [目录][索引]
The ODT export back-end supports literal examples (see Literal Examples) with full fontification. Internally, the ODT export back-end relies on ‘htmlfontify.el’ to generate the style definitions needed for fancy listings. The auto-generated styles get ‘OrgSrc’ prefix and inherit colors from the faces used by Emacs Font Lock library for that source language.
For custom fontification styles, customize the
org-odt-create-custom-styles-for-srcblocks
option.
To turn off fontification of literal examples, customize the
org-odt-fontify-srcblocks
option.
上一页: Literal examples in ODT export, 返回: OpenDocument Text Export [目录][索引]
The ODT export back-end has extensive features useful for power users and frequent uses of ODT formats.
The ODT export back-end works with popular converters with little or no extra configuration. See Extending ODT export. The following is for unsupported converters or tweaking existing defaults.
Add the name of the converter to the org-odt-convert-processes
variable. Note that it also requires how the converter is invoked
on the command line. See the variable’s docstring for details.
Specify which formats the converter can handle by customizing the
variable org-odt-convert-capabilities
. Use the entry for the
default values in this variable for configuring the new converter.
Also see its docstring for details.
Select the newly added converter as the preferred one by customizing
the option org-odt-convert-process
.
This section explores the internals of the ODT exporter; the means by which it produces styled documents; the use of automatic and custom OpenDocument styles.
The ODT exporter relies on two files for generating its output. These
files are bundled with the distribution under the directory pointed to
by the variable org-odt-styles-dir
. The two files are:
This file contributes to the ‘styles.xml’ file of the final ODT document. This file gets modified for the following purposes:
This file contributes to the ‘content.xml’ file of the final ODT document. The contents of the Org outline are inserted between the ‘<office:text>’ … ‘</office:text>’ elements of this file.
Apart from serving as a template file for the final ‘content.xml’, the file serves the following purposes:
The following two variables control the location from where the ODT exporter picks up the custom styles and content template files. Customize these variables to override the factory styles used by the exporter.
org-odt-styles-file
The ODT export back-end uses the file pointed to by this variable, such as ‘styles.xml’, for the final output. It can take one of the following values:
Use this file instead of the default ‘styles.xml’
Use the ‘styles.xml’ contained in the specified OpenDocument Text or Template file
Use the ‘styles.xml’ contained in the specified OpenDocument Text or Template file. Additionally extract the specified member files and embed those within the final ODT document.
Use this option if the ‘styles.xml’ file references additional files like header and footer images.
nil
Use the default ‘styles.xml’.
org-odt-content-template-file
Use this variable to specify the blank ‘content.xml’ used in the final output.
The ODT export back-end can read embedded raw OpenDocument XML from the Org file. Such direct formatting is useful for one-off instances.
Enclose OpenDocument syntax in ‘@@odt:...@@’ for inline markup. For example, to highlight a region of text do the following:
@@odt:<text:span text:style-name="Highlight">This is highlighted text</text:span>@@. But this is regular text.
Hint: To see the above example in action, edit the ‘styles.xml’ (see Factory styles) and add a custom Highlight style as shown below:
<style:style style:name="Highlight" style:family="text"> <style:text-properties fo:background-color="#ff0000"/> </style:style>
The ODT export back-end can read one-liner options with ‘#+ODT:’ in the Org file. For example, to force a page break:
#+ODT: <text:p text:style-name="PageBreak"/>
Hint: To see the above example in action, edit your ‘styles.xml’ (see Factory styles) and add a custom ‘PageBreak’ style as shown below.
<style:style style:name="PageBreak" style:family="paragraph" style:parent-style-name="Text_20_body"> <style:paragraph-properties fo:break-before="page"/> </style:style>
The ODT export back-end can also read ODT export blocks for OpenDocument XML. Such blocks use the ‘#+BEGIN_EXPORT odt’ … ‘#+END_EXPORT’ constructs.
For example, to create a one-off paragraph that uses bold text, do the following:
#+BEGIN_EXPORT odt <text:p text:style-name="Text_20_body_20_bold"> This paragraph is specially formatted and uses bold text. </text:p> #+END_EXPORT
Override the default table format by specifying a custom table style with the ‘#+ATTR_ODT’ line. For a discussion on default formatting of tables, see Tables in ODT export.
This feature closely mimics the way table templates are defined in the OpenDocument-v1.2 specification138.
For quick preview of this feature, install the settings below and export the table that follows:
(setq org-export-odt-table-styles (append org-export-odt-table-styles '(("TableWithHeaderRowAndColumn" "Custom" ((use-first-row-styles . t) (use-first-column-styles . t))) ("TableWithFirstRowandLastRow" "Custom" ((use-first-row-styles . t) (use-last-row-styles . t))))))
#+ATTR_ODT: :style TableWithHeaderRowAndColumn | Name | Phone | Age | | Peter | 1234 | 17 | | Anna | 4321 | 25 |
The example above used ‘Custom’ template and installed two table styles ‘TableWithHeaderRowAndColumn’ and ‘TableWithFirstRowandLastRow’. Important: The OpenDocument styles needed for producing the above template were pre-defined. They are available in the section marked ‘Custom Table Template’ in ‘OrgOdtContentTemplate.xml’ (see Factory styles). For adding new templates, define new styles there.
To use this feature proceed as follows:
A table template is set of ‘table-cell’ and ‘paragraph’ styles for each of the following table cell categories:
The names for the above styles must be chosen based on the name of the table template using a well-defined convention.
The naming convention is better illustrated with an example. For a table template with the name ‘Custom’, the needed style names are listed in the following table.
Cell type | Cell style | Paragraph style |
---|---|---|
Body | ‘CustomTableCell’ | ‘CustomTableParagraph’ |
First column | ‘CustomFirstColumnTableCell’ | ‘CustomFirstColumnTableParagraph’ |
Last column | ‘CustomLastColumnTableCell’ | ‘CustomLastColumnTableParagraph’ |
First row | ‘CustomFirstRowTableCell’ | ‘CustomFirstRowTableParagraph’ |
Last row | ‘CustomLastRowTableCell’ | ‘CustomLastRowTableParagraph’ |
Even row | ‘CustomEvenRowTableCell’ | ‘CustomEvenRowTableParagraph’ |
Odd row | ‘CustomOddRowTableCell’ | ‘CustomOddRowTableParagraph’ |
Even column | ‘CustomEvenColumnTableCell’ | ‘CustomEvenColumnTableParagraph’ |
Odd column | ‘CustomOddColumnTableCell’ | ‘CustomOddColumnTableParagraph’ |
To create a table template with the name ‘Custom’, define the above styles in the ‘<office:automatic-styles>’ … ‘</office:automatic-styles>’ element of the content template file (see Factory styles).
To define a table style, create an entry for the style in the
variable org-odt-table-styles
and specify the following:
For example, the entry below defines two different table styles ‘TableWithHeaderRowAndColumn’ and ‘TableWithFirstRowandLastRow’ based on the same template ‘Custom’. The styles achieve their intended effect by selectively activating the individual cell styles in that template.
(setq org-export-odt-table-styles (append org-export-odt-table-styles '(("TableWithHeaderRowAndColumn" "Custom" ((use-first-row-styles . t) (use-first-column-styles . t))) ("TableWithFirstRowandLastRow" "Custom" ((use-first-row-styles . t) (use-last-row-styles . t))))))
To do this, specify the table style created in step (2) as part of the ‘ATTR_ODT’ line as shown below.
#+ATTR_ODT: :style TableWithHeaderRowAndColumn | Name | Phone | Age | | Peter | 1234 | 17 | | Anna | 4321 | 25 |
Sometimes ODT format files may not open due to ‘.odt’ file corruption. To verify if such a file is corrupt, validate it against the OpenDocument Relax NG Compact (RNC) syntax schema. But first the ‘.odt’ files have to be decompressed using ‘zip’. Note that ‘.odt’ files are ZIP archives: (emacs)File Archives. The contents of ODT files are in XML. For general help with validation—and schema-sensitive editing—of XML files: (nxml-mode)Introduction.
Customize org-odt-schema-dir
to point to a directory with
OpenDocument RNC files and the needed schema-locating rules. The ODT
export back-end takes care of updating the
rng-schema-locating-files
.
下一页: Texinfo Export, 上一页: OpenDocument Text Export, 返回: Exporting [目录][索引]
org export back-end creates a normalized version of the Org document in current buffer. The exporter evaluates Babel code (see Evaluating Code Blocks) and removes content specific to other back-ends.
org-org-export-to-org
)Export as an Org file with a ‘.org’ extension. For ‘myfile.org’, Org exports to ‘myfile.org.org’, overwriting without warning.
Export to an Org file, then open it.
下一页: iCalendar Export, 上一页: Org Export, 返回: Exporting [目录][索引]
• Texinfo导出命令: | 调用命令。 | |
• 特定于Texinfo的导出设置: | 环境设置。 | |
• Texinfo文件标头: | 生成标题。 | |
• Texinfo标题和版权页: | 创建引言页面。 | |
• 信息目录文件: | 在信息文件层次结构中安装手册。 | |
• 标题和分段结构: | 构建文档结构。 | |
• 索引: | 创建索引。 | |
• 引用Texinfo代码: | 包含字面Texinfo代码 | |
• Texinfo导出中的普通列表: | 列出属性。 | |
• Texinfo导出中的表格: | 表格属性。 | |
• Texinfo导出中的图像: | 图像属性。 | |
• Texinfo导出中的引用: | 引用块属性。 | |
• Texinfo导出中的特殊块: | 特殊块属性。 | |
• 一个Texinfo示例: | 处理Org到Texinfo的导出 |
下一页: Texinfo specific export settings, 返回: Texinfo Export [目录][索引]
org-texinfo-export-to-texinfo
)Export as a Texinfo file with ‘.texi’ extension. For ‘myfile.org’, Org exports to ‘myfile.texi’, overwriting without warning.
org-texinfo-export-to-info
)Export to Texinfo format first and then process it to make an Info
file. To generate other formats, such as DocBook, customize the
org-texinfo-info-process
variable.
下一页: Texinfo file header, 上一页: Texinfo export commands, 返回: Texinfo Export [目录][索引]
The Texinfo export back-end has several additional keywords for customizing Texinfo output. Setting these keywords works similar to the general options (see Export Settings).
The document subtitle.
Additional authors for the document.
The Texinfo filename.
The default document class (org-texinfo-default-class
), which must
be a member of org-texinfo-classes
.
Arbitrary lines inserted at the end of the header.
Arbitrary lines inserted after the end of the header.
The directory category of the document.
The directory title of the document.
The directory description of the document.
The printed title of the document.
下一页: Texinfo title and copyright page, 上一页: Texinfo specific export settings, 返回: Texinfo Export [目录][索引]
After creating the header for a Texinfo file, the Texinfo back-end automatically generates a name and destination path for the Info file. To override this default with a more sensible path and name, specify the ‘TEXINFO_FILENAME’ keyword.
Along with the output’s file name, the Texinfo header also contains
language details (see Export Settings) and encoding system as set in
the org-texinfo-coding-system
variable. Insert ‘TEXINFO_HEADER’
keywords for each additional command in the header, for example:
#+TEXINFO_HEADER: @synindex
Instead of repeatedly installing the same set of commands, define
a class in org-texinfo-classes
once, and then activate it in the
document by setting the ‘TEXINFO_CLASS’ keyword to that class.
下一页: Info directory file, 上一页: Texinfo file header, 返回: Texinfo Export [目录][索引]
The default template for hard copy output has a title page with ‘TITLE’ and ‘AUTHOR’ keywords (see Export Settings). To replace the regular title with something different for the printed version, use the ‘TEXINFO_PRINTED_TITLE’ and ‘SUBTITLE’ keywords. Both expect raw Texinfo code for setting their values.
If one ‘AUTHOR’ line is not sufficient, add multiple ‘SUBAUTHOR’ keywords. They have to be set in raw Texinfo code.
#+AUTHOR: Jane Smith #+SUBAUTHOR: John Doe #+TEXINFO_PRINTED_TITLE: This Long Title@@inlinefmt{tex,@*} Is Broken in @TeX{}
Copying material is defined in a dedicated headline with a non-nil
‘COPYING’ property. The back-end inserts the contents within
a ‘@copying’ command at the beginning of the document. The heading
itself does not appear in the structure of the document.
Copyright information is printed on the back of the title page.
* Legalese :PROPERTIES: :COPYING: t :END: This is a short example of a complete Texinfo file, version 1.0. 版权所有©2016自由软件基金会
下一页: Headings and sectioning structure, 上一页: Texinfo title and copyright page, 返回: Texinfo Export [目录][索引]
The end result of the Texinfo export process is the creation of an Info file. This Info file’s metadata has variables for category, title, and description: ‘TEXINFO_DIR_CATEGORY’, ‘TEXINFO_DIR_TITLE’, and ‘TEXINFO_DIR_DESC’ keywords that establish where in the Info hierarchy the file fits.
Here is an example that writes to the Info directory file:
#+TEXINFO_DIR_CATEGORY: Emacs #+TEXINFO_DIR_TITLE: Org Mode: (org) #+TEXINFO_DIR_DESC: Outline-based notes management and organizer
下一页: Indices, 上一页: Info directory file, 返回: Texinfo Export [目录][索引]
The Texinfo export back-end uses a pre-defined scheme to convert Org
headlines to equivalent Texinfo structuring commands. A scheme like
this maps top-level headlines to numbered chapters tagged as
@chapter
and lower-level headlines to unnumbered chapters tagged as
@unnumbered
. To override such mappings to introduce @part
or
other Texinfo structuring commands, define a new class in
org-texinfo-classes
. Activate the new class with the
‘TEXINFO_CLASS’ keyword. When no new class is defined and activated,
the Texinfo export back-end defaults to the
org-texinfo-default-class
.
If an Org headline’s level has no associated Texinfo structuring command, or is below a certain threshold (see Export Settings), then the Texinfo export back-end makes it into a list item.
The Texinfo export back-end makes any headline with a non-nil
‘APPENDIX’ property into an appendix. This happens independent of the
Org headline level or the ‘TEXINFO_CLASS’ keyword.
The Texinfo export back-end creates a menu entry after the Org headline for each regular sectioning structure. To override this with a shorter menu entry, use the ‘ALT_TITLE’ property (see Table of Contents). Texinfo menu entries also have an option for a longer ‘DESCRIPTION’ property. Here’s an example that uses both to override the default menu entry:
* Controlling Screen Display :PROPERTIES: :ALT_TITLE: Display :DESCRIPTION: Controlling Screen Display :END:
The text before the first headline belongs to the Top node, i.e., the node in which a reader enters an Info manual. As such, it is expected not to appear in printed output generated from the ‘.texi’ file. See (texinfo)The Top Node, for more information.
下一页: Quoting Texinfo code, 上一页: Headings and sectioning structure, 返回: Texinfo Export [目录][索引]
The Texinfo export back-end recognizes these indexing keywords if used in the Org file: ‘CINDEX’, ‘FINDEX’, ‘KINDEX’, ‘PINDEX’, ‘TINDEX’ and ‘VINDEX’. Write their value as verbatim Texinfo code; in particular, ‘{’, ‘}’ and ‘@’ characters need to be escaped with ‘@’ if they do not belong to a Texinfo command.
#+CINDEX: Defining indexing entries
For the back-end to generate an index entry for a headline, set the ‘INDEX’ property to ‘cp’ or ‘vr’. These abbreviations come from Texinfo that stand for concept index and variable index. The Texinfo manual has abbreviations for all other kinds of indexes. The back-end exports the headline as an unnumbered chapter or section command, and then inserts the index after its contents.
* Concept Index :PROPERTIES: :INDEX: cp :END:
下一页: Plain lists in Texinfo export, 上一页: Indices, 返回: Texinfo Export [目录][索引]
Use any of the following three methods to insert or escape raw Texinfo code:
Richard @@texinfo:@sc{@@Stallman@@texinfo:}@@ commence' GNU. #+TEXINFO: @need800 This paragraph is preceded by... #+BEGIN_EXPORT texinfo @auindex Johnson, Mark @auindex Lakoff, George #+END_EXPORT
下一页: Tables in Texinfo export, 上一页: Quoting Texinfo code, 返回: Texinfo Export [目录][索引]
The Texinfo export back-end by default converts description lists in the Org file using the default command ‘@table’, which results in a table with two columns. To change this behavior, set ‘:table-type’ attribute to either ‘ftable’ or ‘vtable’ value. For more information, see (texinfo)Two-column Tables.
The Texinfo export back-end by default also applies a text highlight
based on the defaults stored in org-texinfo-table-default-markup
.
To override the default highlight command, specify another one with
the ‘:indic’ attribute.
Org syntax is limited to one entry per list item. Nevertheless, the Texinfo export back-end can split that entry according to any text provided through the ‘:sep’ attribute. Each part then becomes a new entry in the first column of the table.
The following example illustrates all the attributes above:
#+ATTR_TEXINFO: :table-type vtable :sep , :indic asis - foo, bar :: This is the common text for variables foo and bar.
becomes
@vtable @asis @item foo @itemx bar This is the common text for variables foo and bar. @end table
Ordered lists are numbered when exported to Texinfo format. Such numbering obeys any counter (see Plain Lists) in the first item of the list. The ‘:enum’ attribute also let you start the list at a specific number, or switch to a lettered list, as illustrated here
#+ATTR_TEXINFO: :enum A 1. Alpha 2. Bravo 3. Charlie
下一页: Images in Texinfo export, 上一页: Plain lists in Texinfo export, 返回: Texinfo Export [目录][索引]
When exporting tables, the Texinfo export back-end uses the widest cell width in each column. To override this and instead specify as fractions of line length, use the ‘:columns’ attribute. See example below.
#+ATTR_TEXINFO: :columns .5 .5 | a cell | another cell |
下一页: Quotations in Texinfo export, 上一页: Tables in Texinfo export, 返回: Texinfo Export [目录][索引]
Insert a file link to the image in the Org file, and the Texinfo export back-end inserts the image. These links must have the usual supported image extensions and no descriptions. To scale the image, use ‘:width’ and ‘:height’ attributes. For alternate text, use ‘:alt’ and specify the text using Texinfo code, as shown in the example:
#+ATTR_TEXINFO: :width 1in :alt Alternate @i{text} [[ridt.pdf]]
下一页: Special blocks in Texinfo export, 上一页: Images in Texinfo export, 返回: Texinfo Export [目录][索引]
You can write the text of a quotation within a quote block (see Paragraphs). You may also emphasize some text at the beginning of the quotation with the ‘:tag’ attribute.
#+ATTR_TEXINFO: :tag Warning #+BEGIN_QUOTE Striking your thumb with a hammer may cause severe pain and discomfort. #+END_QUOTE
To specify the author of the quotation, use the ‘:author’ attribute.
#+ATTR_TEXINFO: :author King Arthur #+BEGIN_QUOTE The Lady of the Lake, her arm clad in the purest shimmering samite, held aloft Excalibur from the bosom of the water, signifying by divine providence that I, Arthur, was to carry Excalibur. That is why I am your king. #+END_QUOTE
下一页: A Texinfo example, 上一页: Quotations in Texinfo export, 返回: Texinfo Export [目录][索引]
The Texinfo export back-end converts special blocks to commands with the same name. It also adds any ‘:options’ attributes to the end of the command, as shown in this example:
#+ATTR_TEXINFO: :options org-org-export-to-org ... #+BEGIN_defun A somewhat obsessive function name. #+END_defun
becomes
@defun org-org-export-to-org ... A somewhat obsessive function name. @end defun
上一页: Special blocks in Texinfo export, 返回: Texinfo Export [目录][索引]
Here is a more detailed example Org file. See (texinfo)GNU Sample Texts for an equivalent example using Texinfo code.
#+TITLE: GNU Sample {{{version}}} #+SUBTITLE: for version {{{version}}}, {{{updated}}} #+AUTHOR: A.U. Thor #+EMAIL: bug-sample@gnu.org #+OPTIONS: ':t toc:t author:t email:t #+LANGUAGE: en #+MACRO: version 2.0 #+MACRO: updated last updated 4 March 2014 #+TEXINFO_FILENAME: sample.info #+TEXINFO_HEADER: @syncodeindex pg cp #+TEXINFO_DIR_CATEGORY: Texinfo documentation system #+TEXINFO_DIR_TITLE: sample: (sample) #+TEXINFO_DIR_DESC: Invoking sample #+TEXINFO_PRINTED_TITLE: GNU Sample This manual is for GNU Sample (version {{{version}}}, {{{updated}}}). * Copying :PROPERTIES: :COPYING: t :END: This manual is for GNU Sample (version {{{version}}}, {{{updated}}}), which is an example in the Texinfo documentation. 版权所有©2016自由软件基金会 #+BEGIN_QUOTE Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the section entitled "GNU Free Documentation License". #+END_QUOTE * Invoking sample #+PINDEX: sample #+CINDEX: invoking @command{sample} This is a sample manual. There is no sample program to invoke, but if there were, you could see its basic usage and command line options here. * GNU Free Documentation License :PROPERTIES: :APPENDIX: t :END: #+INCLUDE: fdl.org * Index :PROPERTIES: :INDEX: cp :END:
下一页: Other Built-in Back-ends, 上一页: Texinfo Export, 返回: Exporting [目录][索引]
A large part of Org mode’s interoperability success is its ability to easily export to or import from external applications. The iCalendar export back-end takes calendar data from Org files and exports to the standard iCalendar format.
The iCalendar export back-end can also incorporate TODO entries based
on the configuration of the org-icalendar-include-todo
variable.
The back-end exports plain timestamps as ‘VEVENT’, TODO items as
‘VTODO’, and also create events from deadlines that are in non-TODO
items. The back-end uses the deadlines and scheduling dates in Org
TODO items for setting the start and due dates for the iCalendar TODO
entry. Consult the org-icalendar-use-deadline
and
org-icalendar-use-scheduled
variables for more details.
For tags on the headline, the iCalendar export back-end makes them
into iCalendar categories. To tweak the inheritance of tags and TODO
states, configure the variable org-icalendar-categories
. To assign
clock alarms based on time, configure the org-icalendar-alarm-time
variable.
The iCalendar format standard requires globally unique identifier—or
UID—for each entry. The iCalendar export back-end creates UIDs
during export. To save a copy of the UID in the Org file set the
variable org-icalendar-store-UID
. The back-end looks for the ‘ID’
property of the entry for re-using the same UID for subsequent
exports.
Since a single Org entry can result in multiple iCalendar entries—timestamp, deadline, scheduled item, or TODO item—Org adds prefixes to the UID, depending on which part of the Org entry triggered the creation of the iCalendar entry. Prefixing ensures UIDs remains unique, yet enable synchronization programs trace the connections.
org-icalendar-export-to-ics
)Create iCalendar entries from the current Org buffer and store them in the same directory, using a file extension ‘.ics’.
org-icalendar-export-agenda-files
)Create iCalendar entries from Org files in org-agenda-files
and
store in a separate iCalendar file for each Org file.
org-icalendar-combine-agenda-files
)Create a combined iCalendar file from Org files in
org-agenda-files
and write it to
org-icalendar-combined-agenda-file
file name.
The iCalendar export back-end includes ‘SUMMARY’, ‘DESCRIPTION’,
‘LOCATION’, ‘TIMEZONE’ and ‘CLASS’ properties from the Org entries
when exporting. To force the back-end to inherit the ‘LOCATION’,
‘TIMEZONE’ and ‘CLASS’ properties, configure the
org-use-property-inheritance
variable.
When Org entries do not have ‘SUMMARY’, ‘DESCRIPTION’, ‘LOCATION’ and
‘CLASS’ properties, the iCalendar export back-end derives the summary
from the headline, and derives the description from the body of the
Org item. The org-icalendar-include-body
variable limits the
maximum number of characters of the content are turned into its
description.
The ‘TIMEZONE’ property can be used to specify a per-entry time zone, and is applied to any entry with timestamp information. Time zones should be specified as per the IANA time zone database format, e.g., ‘Asia/Almaty’. Alternately, the property value can be ‘UTC’, to force UTC time for this entry only.
The ‘CLASS’ property can be used to specify a per-entry visibility class or access restrictions, and is applied to any entry with class information. The iCalendar standard defines three visibility classes:
The entry is publicly visible (this is the default).
Only a limited group of clients get access to the event.
The entry can be retrieved only by its owner.
The server should treat unknown class properties the same as ‘PRIVATE’.
Exporting to iCalendar format depends in large part on the capabilities of the destination application. Some are more lenient than others. Consult the Org mode FAQ for advice on specific applications.
下一页: Advanced Export Configuration, 上一页: iCalendar Export, 返回: Exporting [目录][索引]
Other export back-ends included with Org are:
To activate such back-ends, either customize org-export-backends
or
load directly with ‘(require 'ox-man)’. On successful load, the
back-end adds new keys in the export dispatcher (see The Export Dispatcher).
Follow the comment section of such files, for example, ‘ox-man.el’, for usage and configuration details.
下一页: Export in Foreign Buffers, 上一页: Other Built-in Back-ends, 返回: Exporting [目录][索引]
The export process executes two hooks before the actual exporting
begins. The first hook, org-export-before-processing-hook
, runs
before any expansions of macros, Babel code, and include keywords in
the buffer. The second hook, org-export-before-parsing-hook
, runs
before the buffer is parsed.
Functions added to these hooks are called with a single argument: the export back-end actually used, as a symbol. You may use them for heavy duty structural modifications of the document. For example, you can remove every headline in the buffer during export like this:
(defun my-headline-removal (backend) "Remove all headlines in the current buffer. BACKEND is the export back-end being used, as a symbol." (org-map-entries (lambda () (delete-region (point) (line-beginning-position 2))))) (add-hook 'org-export-before-parsing-hook 'my-headline-removal)
Filters are lists of functions to be applied to certain parts for a given back-end. The output from the first function in the filter is passed on to the next function in the filter. The final output is the output from the final function in the filter.
The Org export process has many filter sets applicable to different
types of objects, plain text, parse trees, export options, and final
output formats. The filters are named after the element type or
object type: org-export-filter-TYPE-functions
, where TYPE
is the type targeted by the filter. Valid types are:
body | bold | babel-call |
center-block | clock | code |
diary-sexp | drawer | dynamic-block |
entity | example-block | export-block |
export-snippet | final-output | fixed-width |
footnote-definition | footnote-reference | headline |
horizontal-rule | inline-babel-call | inline-src-block |
inlinetask | italic | item |
keyword | latex-environment | latex-fragment |
line-break | link | node-property |
options | paragraph | parse-tree |
plain-list | plain-text | planning |
property-drawer | quote-block | radio-target |
section | special-block | src-block |
statistics-cookie | strike-through | subscript |
superscript | table | table-cell |
table-row | target | timestamp |
underline | verbatim | verse-block |
Here is an example filter that replaces non-breaking spaces
in the
Org buffer with ‘~’ for the LaTeX back-end.
(defun my-latex-filter-nobreaks (text backend info) "Ensure \" \" are properly handled in LaTeX export." (when (org-export-derived-backend-p backend 'latex) (replace-regexp-in-string " " "~" text))) (add-to-list 'org-export-filter-plain-text-functions 'my-latex-filter-nobreaks)
A filter requires three arguments: the code to be transformed, the
name of the back-end, and some optional information about the export
process. The third argument can be safely ignored. Note the use of
org-export-derived-backend-p
predicate that tests for latex
back-end or any other back-end, such as beamer, derived from
latex.
The Org export can filter not just for back-ends, but also for specific files through the ‘BIND’ keyword. Here is an example with two filters; one removes brackets from time stamps, and the other removes strike-through text. The filter functions are defined in a code block in the same Org file, which is a handy location for debugging.
#+BIND: org-export-filter-timestamp-functions (tmp-f-timestamp) #+BIND: org-export-filter-strike-through-functions (tmp-f-strike-through) #+BEGIN_SRC emacs-lisp :exports results :results none (defun tmp-f-timestamp (s backend info) (replace-regexp-in-string "&[lg]t;\\|[][]" "" s)) (defun tmp-f-strike-through (s backend info) "") #+END_SRC
Some parts of the conversion process can be extended for certain elements so as to introduce a new or revised translation. That is how the HTML export back-end was extended to handle Markdown format. The extensions work seamlessly so any aspect of filtering not done by the extended back-end is handled by the original back-end. Of all the export customization in Org, extending is very powerful as it operates at the parser level.
For this example, make the ascii back-end display the language used
in a source code block. Also make it display only when some attribute
is non-nil
, like the following:
#+ATTR_ASCII: :language t
Then extend ASCII back-end with a custom “my-ascii” back-end.
(defun my-ascii-src-block (src-block contents info) "Transcode a SRC-BLOCK element from Org to ASCII. CONTENTS is nil. INFO is a plist used as a communication channel." (if (not (org-export-read-attribute :attr_ascii src-block :language)) (org-export-with-backend 'ascii src-block contents info) (concat (format ",--[ %s ]--\n%s`----" (org-element-property :language src-block) (replace-regexp-in-string "^" "| " (org-element-normalize-string (org-export-format-code-default src-block info))))))) (org-export-define-derived-backend 'my-ascii 'ascii :translate-alist '((src-block . my-ascii-src-block)))
The my-ascii-src-block
function looks at the attribute above the
current element. If not true, hands over to ascii back-end. If
true, which it is in this example, it creates a box around the code
and leaves room for the inserting a string for language. The last
form creates the new back-end that springs to action only when
translating src-block
type elements.
To use the newly defined back-end, evaluate the following from an Org buffer:
(org-export-to-buffer 'my-ascii "*Org MY-ASCII Export*")
Further steps to consider would be an interactive function, self-installing an item in the export dispatcher menu, and other user-friendly improvements.
上一页: Advanced Export Configuration, 返回: Exporting [目录][索引]
The export back-ends in Org often include commands to convert selected regions. A convenient feature of this in-place conversion is that the exported output replaces the original source. Here are such functions:
org-ascii-convert-region-to-ascii
Convert the selected region into ASCII.
org-ascii-convert-region-to-utf8
Convert the selected region into UTF-8.
org-html-convert-region-to-html
Convert the selected region into HTML.
org-latex-convert-region-to-latex
Convert the selected region into LaTeX.
org-texinfo-convert-region-to-texinfo
Convert the selected region into Texinfo.
org-md-convert-region-to-md
Convert the selected region into Markdown.
In-place conversions are particularly handy for quick conversion of tables and lists in foreign buffers. For example, in an HTML buffer, write a list in Org syntax, select it, and convert it to HTML with M-x org-html-convert-region-to-html.
• 裸HTML: | 导出不带CSS、Javascript等的HTML。 |
If you want to output a minimal HTML file, with no CSS, no Javascript, no preamble or postamble, here are the variable you would need to set:
(setq org-html-head "" org-html-head-extra "" org-html-head-include-default-style nil org-html-head-include-scripts nil org-html-preamble nil org-html-postamble nil org-html-use-infojs nil)
下一页: Working with Source Code, 上一页: Exporting, 返回: Top [目录][索引]
Org includes a publishing management system that allows you to configure automatic HTML conversion of projects composed of interlinked Org files. You can also configure Org to automatically upload your exported HTML pages and related attachments, such as images and source code files, to a web server.
You can also use Org to convert files into PDF, or even combine HTML and PDF conversion so that files are available in both formats on the server.
Publishing has been contributed to Org by David O’Toole.
• 配置: | 定义项目。 | |
• 上传文件: | 如何将文件上传到服务器。 | |
• 示例配置: | 示例项目。 | |
• 触发发布: | 发布命令。 |
下一页: Uploading Files, 返回: Publishing [目录][索引]
Publishing needs significant configuration to specify files, destination and many other properties of a project.
• 项目列表: | 重要的配置变量。 | |
• 源和目标: | 从这里到那里。 | |
• 选择文件: | 哪些文件是项目的一部分? | |
• 发布操作: | 设置进行发布的函数。 | |
• 发布选项: | 调整HTML/LaTeX导出。 | |
• 发布链接: | 哪些链接在发布后仍然有效? | |
• 站点地图: | 生成所有页面的列表。 | |
• 生成索引: | 跨页的索引。 |
下一页: Sources and destinations, 返回: Configuration [目录][索引]
org-Publish-project-ist
Publishing is configured almost entirely through setting the value of
one variable, called org-publish-project-alist
. Each element of the
list configures one project, and may be in one of the two following
forms:
("project-name" :property value :property value ...)
i.e., a well-formed property list with alternating keys and values, or:
("project-name" :components ("project-name" "project-name" ...))
In both cases, projects are configured by specifying property values.
A project defines the set of files that are to be published, as well
as the publishing configuration to use when publishing those files.
When a project takes the second form listed above, the individual
members of the :components
property are taken to be sub-projects,
which group together files requiring different publishing options.
When you publish such a “meta-project”, all the components are also
published, in the sequence given.
下一页: Selecting files, 上一页: Project alist, 返回: Configuration [目录][索引]
Most properties are optional, but some should always be set. In particular, Org needs to know where to look for source files, and where to put published files.
:base-directory
Directory containing publishing source files.
:publishing-directory
Directory where output files are published. You can directly publish to a webserver using a file name syntax appropriate for the Emacs tramp package. Or you can publish to a local directory and use external tools to upload your website (see Uploading Files).
:preparation-function
Function or list of functions to be called before starting the publishing process, for example, to run ‘make’ for updating files to be published. Each preparation function is called with a single argument, the project property list.
:completion-function
Function or list of functions called after finishing the publishing process, for example, to change permissions of the resulting files. Each completion function is called with a single argument, the project property list.
下一页: Publishing action, 上一页: Sources and destinations, 返回: Configuration [目录][索引]
By default, all files with extension ‘.org’ in the base directory are considered part of the project. This can be modified by setting the following properties
:base-extension
Extension—without the dot—of source files. This actually is
a regular expression. Set this to the symbol any
if you want to
get all files in :base-directory
, even without extension.
:exclude
Regular expression to match file names that should not be published, even though they have been selected on the basis of their extension.
:include
List of files to be included regardless of :base-extension
and
:exclude
.
:recursive
Non-nil
means, check base-directory recursively for files to
publish.
下一页: Publishing options, 上一页: Selecting files, 返回: Configuration [目录][索引]
Publishing means that a file is copied to the destination directory
and possibly transformed in the process. The default transformation
is to export Org files as HTML files, and this is done by the function
org-publish-org-to-html
which calls the HTML exporter (see HTML Export). But you can also publish your content as PDF files using
org-publish-org-to-pdf
, or as ASCII, Texinfo, etc., using the
corresponding functions.
If you want to publish the Org file as an ‘.org’ file but with
archived, commented, and tag-excluded trees removed, use
org-publish-org-to-org
. This produces ‘file.org’ and put it in the
publishing directory. If you want a htmlized version of this file,
set the parameter :htmlized-source
to t
. It produces
‘file.org.html’ in the publishing directory141.
Other files like images only need to be copied to the publishing
destination; for this you can use org-publish-attachment
. For
non-Org files, you always need to specify the publishing function:
:publishing-function
Function executing the publication of a file. This may also be a list of functions, which are all called in turn.
:htmlized-source
Non-nil
means, publish htmlized source.
The function must accept three arguments: a property list containing
at least a :publishing-directory
property, the name of the file to
be published, and the path to the publishing directory of the output
file. It should take the specified file, make the necessary
transformation, if any, and place the result into the destination
folder.
下一页: Publishing links, 上一页: Publishing action, 返回: Configuration [目录][索引]
The property list can be used to set many export options for the HTML and LaTeX exporters. In most cases, these properties correspond to user variables in Org. The table below lists these properties along with the variable they belong to. See the documentation string for the respective variable for details.
When a property is given a value in org-publish-project-alist
, its
setting overrides the value of the corresponding user variable, if
any, during publishing. Options set within a file (see Export Settings), however, override everything.
:archived-trees | org-export-with-archived-trees |
:exclude-tags | org-export-exclude-tags |
:headline-levels | org-export-headline-levels |
:language | org-export-default-language |
:preserve-breaks | org-export-preserve-breaks |
:section-numbers | org-export-with-section-numbers |
:select-tags | org-export-select-tags |
:with-author | org-export-with-author |
:with-broken-links | org-export-with-broken-links |
:with-clocks | org-export-with-clocks |
:with-creator | org-export-with-creator |
:with-date | org-export-with-date |
:with-drawers | org-export-with-drawers |
:with-email | org-export-with-email |
:with-emphasize | org-export-with-emphasize |
:with-fixed-width | org-export-with-fixed-width |
:with-footnotes | org-export-with-footnotes |
:with-latex | org-export-with-latex |
:with-planning | org-export-with-planning |
:with-priority | org-export-with-priority |
:with-properties | org-export-with-properties |
:with-special-strings | org-export-with-special-strings |
:with-sub-superscript | org-export-with-sub-superscripts |
:with-tables | org-export-with-tables |
:with-tags | org-export-with-tags |
:with-tasks | org-export-with-tasks |
:with-timestamps | org-export-with-timestamps |
:with-title | org-export-with-title |
:with-toc | org-export-with-toc |
:with-todo-keywords | org-export-with-todo-keywords |
:ascii-bullets | org-ascii-bullets |
:ascii-caption-above | org-ascii-caption-above |
:ascii-charset | org-ascii-charset |
:ascii-global-margin | org-ascii-global-margin |
:ascii-format-drawer-function | org-ascii-format-drawer-function |
:ascii-format-inlinetask-function | org-ascii-format-inlinetask-function |
:ascii-headline-spacing | org-ascii-headline-spacing |
:ascii-indented-line-width | org-ascii-indented-line-width |
:ascii-inlinetask-width | org-ascii-inlinetask-width |
:ascii-inner-margin | org-ascii-inner-margin |
:ascii-links-to-notes | org-ascii-links-to-notes |
:ascii-list-margin | org-ascii-list-margin |
:ascii-paragraph-spacing | org-ascii-paragraph-spacing |
:ascii-quote-margin | org-ascii-quote-margin |
:ascii-table-keep-all-vertical-lines | org-ascii-table-keep-all-vertical-lines |
:ascii-table-use-ascii-art | org-ascii-table-use-ascii-art |
:ascii-table-widen-columns | org-ascii-table-widen-columns |
:ascii-text-width | org-ascii-text-width |
:ascii-underline | org-ascii-underline |
:ascii-verbatim-format | org-ascii-verbatim-format |
:beamer-theme | org-beamer-theme |
:beamer-column-view-format | org-beamer-column-view-format |
:beamer-environments-extra | org-beamer-environments-extra |
:beamer-frame-default-options | org-beamer-frame-default-options |
:beamer-outline-frame-options | org-beamer-outline-frame-options |
:beamer-outline-frame-title | org-beamer-outline-frame-title |
:beamer-subtitle-format | org-beamer-subtitle-format |
:html-allow-name-attribute-in-anchors | org-html-allow-name-attribute-in-anchors |
:html-checkbox-type | org-html-checkbox-type |
:html-container | org-html-container-element |
:html-divs | org-html-divs |
:html-doctype | org-html-doctype |
:html-extension | org-html-extension |
:html-footnote-format | org-html-footnote-format |
:html-footnote-separator | org-html-footnote-separator |
:html-footnotes-section | org-html-footnotes-section |
:html-format-drawer-function | org-html-format-drawer-function |
:html-format-headline-function | org-html-format-headline-function |
:html-format-inlinetask-function | org-html-format-inlinetask-function |
:html-head-extra | org-html-head-extra |
:html-head-include-default-style | org-html-head-include-default-style |
:html-head-include-scripts | org-html-head-include-scripts |
:html-head | org-html-head |
:html-home/up-format | org-html-home/up-format |
:html-html5-fancy | org-html-html5-fancy |
:html-indent | org-html-indent |
:html-infojs-options | org-html-infojs-options |
:html-infojs-template | org-html-infojs-template |
:html-inline-image-rules | org-html-inline-image-rules |
:html-inline-images | org-html-inline-images |
:html-link-home | org-html-link-home |
:html-link-org-files-as-html | org-html-link-org-files-as-html |
:html-link-up | org-html-link-up |
:html-link-use-abs-url | org-html-link-use-abs-url |
:html-mathjax-options | org-html-mathjax-options |
:html-mathjax-template | org-html-mathjax-template |
:html-equation-reference-format | org-html-equation-reference-format |
:html-metadata-timestamp-format | org-html-metadata-timestamp-format |
:html-postamble-format | org-html-postamble-format |
:html-postamble | org-html-postamble |
:html-preamble-format | org-html-preamble-format |
:html-preamble | org-html-preamble |
:html-self-link-headlines | org-html-self-link-headlines |
:html-table-align-individual-field | de{org-html-table-align-individual-fields |
:html-table-attributes | org-html-table-default-attributes |
:html-table-caption-above | org-html-table-caption-above |
:html-table-data-tags | org-html-table-data-tags |
:html-table-header-tags | org-html-table-header-tags |
:html-table-row-tags | org-html-table-row-tags |
:html-table-use-header-tags-for-first-column | org-html-table-use-header-tags-for-first-column |
:html-tag-class-prefix | org-html-tag-class-prefix |
:html-text-markup-alist | org-html-text-markup-alist |
:html-todo-kwd-class-prefix | org-html-todo-kwd-class-prefix |
:html-toplevel-hlevel | org-html-toplevel-hlevel |
:html-use-infojs | org-html-use-infojs |
:html-validation-link | org-html-validation-link |
:html-viewport | org-html-viewport |
:html-wrap-src-lines | org-html-wrap-src-lines |
:html-xml-declaration | org-html-xml-declaration |
:latex-active-timestamp-format | org-latex-active-timestamp-format |
:latex-caption-above | org-latex-caption-above |
:latex-classes | org-latex-classes |
:latex-class | org-latex-default-class |
:latex-compiler | org-latex-compiler |
:latex-default-figure-position | org-latex-default-figure-position |
:latex-default-table-environment | org-latex-default-table-environment |
:latex-default-table-mode | org-latex-default-table-mode |
:latex-diary-timestamp-format | org-latex-diary-timestamp-format |
:latex-footnote-defined-format | org-latex-footnote-defined-format |
:latex-footnote-separator | org-latex-footnote-separator |
:latex-format-drawer-function | org-latex-format-drawer-function |
:latex-format-headline-function | org-latex-format-headline-function |
:latex-format-inlinetask-function | org-latex-format-inlinetask-function |
:latex-hyperref-template | org-latex-hyperref-template |
:latex-image-default-height | org-latex-image-default-height |
:latex-image-default-option | org-latex-image-default-option |
:latex-image-default-width | org-latex-image-default-width |
:latex-images-centered | org-latex-images-centered |
:latex-inactive-timestamp-format | org-latex-inactive-timestamp-format |
:latex-inline-image-rules | org-latex-inline-image-rules |
:latex-link-with-unknown-path-format | org-latex-link-with-unknown-path-format |
:latex-listings-langs | org-latex-listings-langs |
:latex-listings-options | org-latex-listings-options |
:latex-listings | org-latex-listings |
:latex-minted-langs | org-latex-minted-langs |
:latex-minted-options | org-latex-minted-options |
:latex-prefer-user-labels | org-latex-prefer-user-labels |
:latex-subtitle-format | org-latex-subtitle-format |
:latex-subtitle-separate | org-latex-subtitle-separate |
:latex-table-scientific-notation | org-latex-table-scientific-notation |
:latex-tables-booktabs | org-latex-tables-booktabs |
:latex-tables-centered | org-latex-tables-centered |
:latex-text-markup-alist | org-latex-text-markup-alist |
:latex-title-command | org-latex-title-command |
:latex-toc-command | org-latex-toc-command |
:md-footnote-format | org-md-footnote-format |
:md-footnotes-section | org-md-footnotes-section |
:md-headline-style | org-md-headline-style |
:odt-content-template-file | org-odt-content-template-file |
:odt-display-outline-level | org-odt-display-outline-level |
:odt-fontify-srcblocks | org-odt-fontify-srcblocks |
:odt-format-drawer-function | org-odt-format-drawer-function |
:odt-format-headline-function | org-odt-format-headline-function |
:odt-format-inlinetask-function | org-odt-format-inlinetask-function |
:odt-inline-formula-rules | org-odt-inline-formula-rules |
:odt-inline-image-rules | org-odt-inline-image-rules |
:odt-pixels-per-inch | org-odt-pixels-per-inch |
:odt-styles-file | org-odt-styles-file |
:odt-table-styles | org-odt-table-styles |
:odt-use-date-fields | org-odt-use-date-fields |
:texinfo-active-timestamp-format | org-texinfo-active-timestamp-format |
:texinfo-classes | org-texinfo-classes |
:texinfo-class | org-texinfo-default-class |
:texinfo-table-default-markup | org-texinfo-table-default-markup |
:texinfo-diary-timestamp-format | org-texinfo-diary-timestamp-format |
:texinfo-filename | org-texinfo-filename |
:texinfo-format-drawer-function | org-texinfo-format-drawer-function |
:texinfo-format-headline-function | org-texinfo-format-headline-function |
:texinfo-format-inlinetask-function | org-texinfo-format-inlinetask-function |
:texinfo-inactive-timestamp-format | org-texinfo-inactive-timestamp-format |
:texinfo-link-with-unknown-path-format | org-texinfo-link-with-unknown-path-format |
:texinfo-node-description-column | org-texinfo-node-description-column |
:texinfo-table-scientific-notation | org-texinfo-table-scientific-notation |
:texinfo-tables-verbatim | org-texinfo-tables-verbatim |
:texinfo-text-markup-alist | org-texinfo-text-markup-alist |
下一页: Site map, 上一页: Publishing options, 返回: Configuration [目录][索引]
To create a link from one Org file to another, you would use something like ‘[[file:foo.org][The foo]]’ or simply ‘[[file:foo.org]]’ (see External Links). When published, this link becomes a link to ‘foo.html’. You can thus interlink the pages of your “Org web” project and the links will work as expected when you publish them to HTML. If you also publish the Org source file and want to link to it, use an ‘http’ link instead of a ‘file:’ link, because ‘file’ links are converted to link to the corresponding ‘.html’ file.
You may also link to related files, such as images. Provided you are careful with relative file names, and provided you have also configured Org to upload the related files, these links will work too. See Complex example, for an example of this usage.
Eventually, links between published documents can contain some search options (see Search Options), which will be resolved to the appropriate location in the linked file. For example, once published to HTML, the following links all point to a dedicated anchor in ‘foo.html’.
[[file:foo.org::*heading]] [[file:foo.org::#custom-id]] [[file:foo.org::target]]
下一页: Generating an index, 上一页: Publishing links, 返回: Configuration [目录][索引]
The following properties may be used to control publishing of a map of files for a given project.
:auto-sitemap
When non-nil
, publish a sitemap during
org-publish-current-project
or org-publish-all
.
:sitemap-filename
Filename for output of sitemap. Defaults to ‘sitemap.org’, which becomes ‘sitemap.html’.
:sitemap-title
Title of sitemap page. Defaults to name of file.
:sitemap-format-entry
With this option one can tell how a site-map entry is formatted in
the site-map. It is a function called with three arguments: the
file or directory name relative to base directory of the project,
the site-map style and the current project. It is expected to
return a string. Default value turns file names into links and use
document titles as descriptions. For specific formatting needs, one
can use org-publish-find-date
, org-publish-find-title
and
org-publish-find-property
, to retrieve additional information
about published documents.
:sitemap-function
Plug-in function to use for generation of the sitemap. It is called
with two arguments: the title of the site-map and a representation
of the files and directories involved in the project as a nested
list, which can further be transformed using org-list-to-generic
,
org-list-to-subtree
and alike. Default value generates a plain
list of links to all files in the project.
:sitemap-sort-folders
Where folders should appear in the sitemap. Set this to first
(default) or last
to display folders first or last, respectively.
When set to ignore
, folders are ignored altogether. Any other
value mixes files and folders. This variable has no effect when
site-map style is tree
.
:sitemap-sort-files
How the files are sorted in the site map. Set this to
alphabetically
(default), chronologically
or
anti-chronologically
. chronologically
sorts the files with
older date first while anti-chronologically
sorts the files with
newer date first. alphabetically
sorts the files alphabetically.
The date of a file is retrieved with org-publish-find-date
.
:sitemap-ignore-case
Should sorting be case-sensitive? Default nil
.
:sitemap-file-entry-format
With this option one can tell how a sitemap’s entry is formatted in
the sitemap. This is a format string with some escape sequences:
%t
stands for the title of the file, %a
stands for the author of
the file and %d
stands for the date of the file. The date is
retrieved with the org-publish-find-date
function and formatted
with org-publish-sitemap-date-format
. Default %t
.
:sitemap-date-format
Format string for the format-time-string
function that tells how
a sitemap entry’s date is to be formatted. This property bypasses
org-publish-sitemap-date-format
which defaults to %Y-%m-%d
.
上一页: Site map, 返回: Configuration [目录][索引]
Org mode can generate an index across the files of a publishing project.
:makeindex
When non-nil
, generate in index in the file ‘theindex.org’ and
publish it as ‘theindex.html’.
The file is created when first publishing a project with the
:makeindex
set. The file only contains a statement ‘#+INCLUDE:
"theindex.inc"’. You can then build around this include statement by
adding a title, style information, etc.
Index entries are specified with ‘INDEX’ keyword. An entry that contains an exclamation mark creates a sub item.
*** Curriculum Vitae #+INDEX: CV #+INDEX: Application!CV
下一页: Sample Configuration, 上一页: Configuration, 返回: Publishing [目录][索引]
For those people already utilizing third party sync tools such as Rsync or Unison, it might be preferable not to use the built-in remote publishing facilities of Org mode which rely heavily on Tramp. Tramp, while very useful and powerful, tends not to be so efficient for multiple file transfer and has been known to cause problems under heavy usage.
Specialized synchronization utilities offer several advantages. In addition to timestamp comparison, they also do content and permissions/attribute checks. For this reason you might prefer to publish your web to a local directory—possibly even in place with your Org files—and then use Unison or Rsync to do the synchronization with the remote host.
Since Unison, for example, can be configured as to which files to
transfer to a certain remote destination, it can greatly simplify the
project publishing definition. Simply keep all files in the correct
location, process your Org files with org-publish
and let the
synchronization tool do the rest. You do not need, in this scenario,
to include attachments such as JPG, CSS or PNG files in the project
definition since the third-party tool syncs them.
Publishing to a local directory is also much faster than to a remote
one, so that you can afford more easily to republish entire projects.
If you set org-publish-use-timestamps-flag
to nil
, you gain the
main benefit of re-including any changed external files such as source
example files you might include with ‘INCLUDE’ keyword. The timestamp
mechanism in Org is not smart enough to detect if included files have
been modified.
下一页: Triggering Publication, 上一页: Uploading Files, 返回: Publishing [目录][索引]
Below we provide two example configurations. The first one is a simple project publishing only a set of Org files. The second example is more complex, with a multi-component project.
• 简单示例: | 单组件发布。 | |
• 复杂示例: | 多组件发布示例。 |
下一页: Complex example, 返回: Sample Configuration [目录][索引]
This example publishes a set of Org files to the ‘public_html’ directory on the local machine.
(setq org-publish-project-alist '(("org" :base-directory "~/org/" :publishing-directory "~/public_html" :section-numbers nil :table-of-contents nil :style "<link rel=\"stylesheet\" href=\"../other/mystyle.css\" type=\"text/css\"/>")))
上一页: Simple example, 返回: Sample Configuration [目录][索引]
This more complicated example publishes an entire website, including Org files converted to HTML, image files, Emacs Lisp source code, and style sheets. The publishing directory is remote and private files are excluded.
To ensure that links are preserved, care should be taken to replicate your directory structure on the web server, and to use relative file paths. For example, if your Org files are kept in ‘~/org/’ and your publishable images in ‘~/images/’, you would link to an image with
file:../images/myimage.png
On the web server, the relative path to the image should be the same. You can accomplish this by setting up an ‘images/’ folder in the right place on the web server, and publishing images to it.
(setq org-publish-project-alist '(("orgfiles" :base-directory "~/org/" :base-extension "org" :publishing-directory "/ssh:user@host:~/html/notebook/" :publishing-function org-html-publish-to-html :exclude "PrivatePage.org" ;; regexp :headline-levels 3 :section-numbers nil :with-toc nil :html-head "<link rel=\"stylesheet\" href=\"../other/mystyle.css\" type=\"text/css\"/>" :html-preamble t) ("images" :base-directory "~/images/" :base-extension "jpg\\|gif\\|png" :publishing-directory "/ssh:user@host:~/html/images/" :publishing-function org-publish-attachment) ("other" :base-directory "~/other/" :base-extension "css\\|el" :publishing-directory "/ssh:user@host:~/html/other/" :publishing-function org-publish-attachment) ("website" :components ("orgfiles" "images" "other"))))
上一页: Sample Configuration, 返回: Publishing [目录][索引]
Once properly configured, Org can publish with the following commands:
org-publish
)Prompt for a specific project and publish all files that belong to it.
org-publish-current-project
)Publish the project containing the current file.
org-publish-current-file
)Publish only the current file.
org-publish-all
)Publish every project.
Org uses timestamps to track when a file has changed. The above
functions normally only publish changed files. You can override this
and force publishing of all files by giving a prefix argument to any
of the commands above, or by customizing the variable
org-publish-use-timestamps-flag
. This may be necessary in
particular if files include other files via ‘SETUPFILE’ or ‘INCLUDE’
keywords.
下一页: Miscellaneous, 上一页: Publishing, 返回: Top [目录][索引]
Source code here refers to any plain text collection of computer instructions, possibly with comments, written using a human-readable programming language. Org can manage source code in an Org document when the source code is identified with begin and end markers. Working with source code begins with identifying source code blocks. A source code block can be placed almost anywhere in an Org document; it is not restricted to the preamble or the end of the document. However, Org cannot manage a source code block if it is placed inside an Org comment or within a fixed width section.
Here is an example source code block in the Emacs Lisp language:
#+BEGIN_SRC emacs-lisp (defun org-xor (a b) "Exclusive or." (if a (not b) b)) #+END_SRC
Source code blocks are one of many Org block types, which also include “center”, “comment”, “dynamic”, “example”, “export”, “quote”, “special”, and “verse”. This section pertains to blocks between ‘#+BEGIN_SRC’ and ‘#+END_SRC’.
Details of Org’s facilities for working with source code are described in the following sections.
• 功能概述: | 享受源码块的多功能性。 | |
• 代码块结构: | 代码块语法描述。 | |
• 使用标题参数: | 设置标头参数的不同方式。 | |
• 代码块环境: | 参数、会话、工作目录. | |
• 代码块求值: | 将求值结果放入Org缓冲区。 | |
• 求值结果: | 选择结果类型、后处理. | |
• 导出代码块: | 导出内容或结果。 | |
• 提取源代码: | 创建纯源代码文件。 | |
• 语言: | 支持的代码块语言列表。 | |
• 编辑源代码: | 语言主模式编辑。 | |
• Noweb引用语法: | Org模式下的文学编程。 | |
• Babel库: | 使用有用的代码块类库并为其做出贡献。 | |
• 按键绑定和有用的函数: | 快速处理代码块。 | |
• 批量执行: | 从命令行调用函数。 |
下一页: Structure of Code Blocks, 返回: Working with Source Code [目录][索引]
Org can manage the source code in the block delimited by ‘#+BEGIN_SRC’ … ‘#+END_SRC’ in several ways that can simplify housekeeping tasks essential to modern source code maintenance. Org can edit, format, extract, export, and publish source code blocks. Org can also compile and execute a source code block, then capture the results. The Org mode literature sometimes refers to source code blocks as live code blocks because they can alter the content of the Org document or the material that it exports. Users can control how live they want each source code block by tweaking the header arguments (see Using Header Arguments) for compiling, execution, extraction, and exporting.
For editing and formatting a source code block, Org uses an appropriate Emacs major mode that includes features specifically designed for source code in that language.
Org can extract one or more source code blocks and write them to one or more source files—a process known as tangling in literate programming terminology.
For exporting and publishing, Org’s back-ends can format a source code block appropriately, often with native syntax highlighting.
For executing and compiling a source code block, the user can configure Org to select the appropriate compiler. Org provides facilities to collect the result of the execution or compiler output, insert it into the Org document, and/or export it. In addition to text results, Org can insert links to other data types, including audio, video, and graphics. Org can also link a compiler error message to the appropriate line in the source code block.
An important feature of Org’s management of source code blocks is the ability to pass variables, functions, and results to one another using a common syntax for source code blocks in any language. Although most literate programming facilities are restricted to one language or another, Org’s language-agnostic approach lets the literate programmer match each programming task with the appropriate computer language and to mix them all together in a single Org document. This interoperability among languages explains why Org’s source code management facility was named Org Babel by its originators, Eric Schulte and Dan Davison.
Org mode fulfills the promise of easy verification and maintenance of publishing reproducible research by keeping text, data, code, configuration settings of the execution environment, the results of the execution, and associated narratives, claims, references, and internal and external links in a single Org document.
下一页: Using Header Arguments, 上一页: Features Overview, 返回: Working with Source Code [目录][索引]
Org offers two ways to structure source code in Org documents: in a source code block, and directly inline. Both specifications are shown below.
A source code block conforms to this structure:
#+NAME: <name> #+BEGIN_SRC <language> <switches> <header arguments> <body> #+END_SRC
Do not be put-off by having to remember the source block syntax. Org mode offers a command for wrapping existing text in a block (see Structure Templates). Org also works with other completion systems in Emacs, some of which predate Org and have custom domain-specific languages for defining templates. Regular use of templates reduces errors, increases accuracy, and maintains consistency.
An inline code block conforms to this structure:
src_<language>{<body>}
或者
src_<language>[<header arguments>]{<body>}
Optional. Names the source block so it can be called, like a function, from other source blocks or inline code to evaluate or to capture the results. Code from other blocks, other files, and from table formulas (see The Spreadsheet) can use the name to reference a source block. This naming serves the same purpose as naming Org tables. Org mode requires unique names. For duplicate names, Org mode’s behavior is undefined.
Mandatory. They mark the start and end of a block that Org requires. The ‘#+BEGIN_SRC’ line takes additional arguments, as described next.
Mandatory. It is the identifier of the source code language in the block. See Languages, for identifiers of supported languages.
Optional. Switches provide finer control of the code execution, export, and format (see the discussion of switches in Literal Examples).
Optional. Heading arguments control many aspects of evaluation, export and tangling of code blocks (see Using Header Arguments). Using Org’s properties feature, header arguments can be selectively applied to the entire buffer or specific sub-trees of the Org document.
Source code in the dialect of the specified language identifier.
下一页: Environment of a Code Block, 上一页: Structure of Code Blocks, 返回: Working with Source Code [目录][索引]
Org comes with many header arguments common to all languages. New header arguments are added for specific languages as they become available for use in source code blocks. A header argument is specified with an initial colon followed by the argument’s name in lowercase.
Since header arguments can be set in several ways, Org prioritizes them in case of overlaps or conflicts by giving local settings a higher priority. Header values in function calls, for example, override header values from global defaults.
System-wide values of header arguments can be specified by customizing
the org-babel-default-header-args
variable, which defaults to the
following values:
:session => "none" :results => "replace" :exports => "code" :cache => "no" :noweb => "no"
The example below sets ‘:noweb’ header arguments to ‘yes’, which makes Org expand ‘:noweb’ references by default.
(setq org-babel-default-header-args (cons '(:noweb . "yes") (assq-delete-all :noweb org-babel-default-header-args)))
Each language can have separate default header arguments by
customizing the variable org-babel-default-header-args:<LANG>
, where
<LANG> is the name of the language. For details, see the
language-specific online documentation at
https://orgmode.org/worg/org-contrib/babel/.
For header arguments applicable to the buffer, use ‘PROPERTY’ keyword anywhere in the Org file (see Property Syntax).
The following example makes all the R code blocks execute in the same session. Setting ‘:results’ to ‘silent’ ignores the results of executions for all blocks, not just R code blocks; no results inserted for any block.
#+PROPERTY: header-args:R :session *R* #+PROPERTY: header-args :results silent
Header arguments set through Org’s property drawers (see Property Syntax) apply at the sub-tree level on down. Since these property
drawers can appear anywhere in the file hierarchy, Org uses outermost
call or source block to resolve the values. Org ignores
org-use-property-inheritance
setting.
In this example, ‘:cache’ defaults to ‘yes’ for all code blocks in the sub-tree.
* sample header :PROPERTIES: :header-args: :cache yes :END:
Properties defined through org-set-property
function, bound to
C-c C-x p, apply to all active languages. They override
properties set in org-babel-default-header-args
.
Language-specific header arguments are also read from properties ‘header-args:<LANG>’ where <LANG> is the language identifier. 例如,
* Heading :PROPERTIES: :header-args:clojure: :session *clojure-1* :header-args:R: :session *R* :END: ** Subheading :PROPERTIES: :header-args:clojure: :session *clojure-2* :END:
would force separate sessions for Clojure blocks in ‘Heading’ and ‘Subheading’, but use the same session for all R blocks. Blocks in ‘Subheading’ inherit settings from ‘Heading’.
Header arguments are most commonly set at the source code block level,
on the ‘#+BEGIN_SRC’ line. Arguments set at this level take
precedence over those set in the org-babel-default-header-args
variable, and also those set as header properties.
In the following example, setting ‘:results’ to ‘silent’ makes it ignore results of the code execution. Setting ‘:exports’ to ‘code’ exports only the body of the code block to HTML or LaTeX.
#+NAME: factorial #+BEGIN_SRC haskell :results silent :exports code :var n=0 fac 0 = 1 fac n = n * fac (n-1) #+END_SRC
The same header arguments in an inline code block:
src_haskell[:exports both]{fac 5}
Code block header arguments can span multiple lines using ‘#+HEADER:’ on each line. Note that Org currently accepts the plural spelling of ‘#+HEADER:’ only as a convenience for backward-compatibility. It may be removed at some point.
Multi-line header arguments on an unnamed code block:
#+HEADER: :var data1=1 #+BEGIN_SRC emacs-lisp :var data2=2 (message "data1:%S, data2:%S" data1 data2) #+END_SRC #+RESULTS: : data1:1, data2:2
Multi-line header arguments on a named code block:
#+NAME: named-block #+HEADER: :var data=2 #+BEGIN_SRC emacs-lisp (message "data:%S" data) #+END_SRC #+RESULTS: named-block : data:2
Header arguments in function calls are the most specific and override all other settings in case of an overlap. They get the highest priority. Two ‘#+CALL:’ examples are shown below. For the complete syntax of ‘CALL’ keyword, see Evaluating Code Blocks.
In this example, ‘:exports results’ header argument is applied to the evaluation of the ‘#+CALL:’ line.
#+CALL: factorial(n=5) :exports results
In this example, ‘:session special’ header argument is applied to the evaluation of ‘factorial’ code block.
#+CALL: factorial[:session special](n=5)
下一页: Evaluating Code Blocks, 上一页: Using Header Arguments, 返回: Working with Source Code [目录][索引]
Use ‘var’ for passing arguments to source code blocks. The specifics of variables in code blocks vary by the source language and are covered in the language-specific documentation. The syntax for ‘var’, however, is the same for all languages. This includes declaring a variable, and assigning a default value.
The following syntax is used to pass arguments to code blocks using the ‘var’ header argument.
:var NAME=ASSIGN
NAME is the name of the variable bound in the code block body. ASSIGN is a literal value, such as a string, a number, a reference to a table, a list, a literal example, another code block—with or without arguments—or the results of evaluating a code block.
Here are examples of passing values by reference:
A table named with a ‘NAME’ keyword.
#+NAME: example-table | 1 | | 2 | | 3 | | 4 | #+NAME: table-length #+BEGIN_SRC emacs-lisp :var table=example-table (length table) #+END_SRC #+RESULTS: table-length : 4
When passing a table, you can treat specially the row, or the column, containing labels for the columns, or the rows, in the table.
The ‘colnames’ header argument accepts ‘yes’, ‘no’, or ‘nil’ values. The default value is ‘nil’: if an input table has column names—because the second row is a horizontal rule—then Org removes the column names, processes the table, puts back the column names, and then writes the table to the results block. Using ‘yes’, Org does the same to the first row, even if the initial table does not contain any horizontal rule. When set to ‘no’, Org does not pre-process column names at all.
#+NAME: less-cols | a | |---| | b | | c | #+BEGIN_SRC python :var tab=less-cols :colnames nil return [[val + '*' for val in row] for row in tab] #+END_SRC #+RESULTS: | a | |----| | b* | | c* |
Similarly, the ‘rownames’ header argument can take two values: ‘yes’ or ‘no’. When set to ‘yes’, Org removes the first column, processes the table, puts back the first column, and then writes the table to the results block. The default is ‘no’, which means Org does not pre-process the first column. Note that Emacs Lisp code blocks ignore ‘rownames’ header argument because of the ease of table-handling in Emacs.
#+NAME: with-rownames | one | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | | two | 6 | 7 | 8 | 9 | 10 | #+BEGIN_SRC python :var tab=with-rownames :rownames yes return [[val + 10 for val in row] for row in tab] #+END_SRC #+RESULTS: | one | 11 | 12 | 13 | 14 | 15 | | two | 16 | 17 | 18 | 19 | 20 |
A simple named list.
#+NAME: example-list - simple - not - nested - list #+BEGIN_SRC emacs-lisp :var x=example-list (print x) #+END_SRC #+RESULTS: | simple | list |
Note that only the top level list items are passed along. Nested list items are ignored.
A code block name, as assigned by ‘NAME’ keyword from the example above, optionally followed by parentheses.
#+BEGIN_SRC emacs-lisp :var length=table-length() (* 2 length) #+END_SRC #+RESULTS: : 8
A code block name, as assigned by ‘NAME’ keyword, followed by parentheses and optional arguments passed within the parentheses.
#+NAME: double #+BEGIN_SRC emacs-lisp :var input=8 (* 2 input) #+END_SRC #+RESULTS: double : 16 #+NAME: squared #+BEGIN_SRC emacs-lisp :var input=double(input=1) (* input input) #+END_SRC #+RESULTS: squared : 4
A literal example block named with a ‘NAME’ keyword.
#+NAME: literal-example #+BEGIN_EXAMPLE A literal example on two lines #+END_EXAMPLE #+NAME: read-literal-example #+BEGIN_SRC emacs-lisp :var x=literal-example (concatenate #'string x " for you.") #+END_SRC #+RESULTS: read-literal-example : A literal example : on two lines for you.
Indexing variable values enables referencing portions of a variable. Indexes are 0 based with negative values counting backwards from the end. If an index is separated by commas then each subsequent section indexes as the next dimension. Note that this indexing occurs before other table-related header arguments are applied, such as ‘hlines’, ‘colnames’ and ‘rownames’. The following example assigns the last cell of the first row the table ‘example-table’ to the variable ‘data’:
#+NAME: example-table | 1 | a | | 2 | b | | 3 | c | | 4 | d | #+BEGIN_SRC emacs-lisp :var data=example-table[0,-1] data #+END_SRC #+RESULTS: : a
Two integers separated by a colon reference a range of variable values. In that case the entire inclusive range is referenced. For example the following assigns the middle three rows of ‘example-table’ to ‘data’.
#+NAME: example-table | 1 | a | | 2 | b | | 3 | c | | 4 | d | | 5 | 3 | #+BEGIN_SRC emacs-lisp :var data=example-table[1:3] data #+END_SRC #+RESULTS: | 2 | b | | 3 | c | | 4 | d |
To pick the entire range, use an empty index, or the single character ‘*’. ‘0:-1’ does the same thing. Example below shows how to reference the first column only.
#+NAME: example-table | 1 | a | | 2 | b | | 3 | c | | 4 | d | #+BEGIN_SRC emacs-lisp :var data=example-table[,0] data #+END_SRC #+RESULTS: | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 |
Index referencing can be used for tables and code blocks. Index referencing can handle any number of dimensions. Commas delimit multiple dimensions, as shown below.
#+NAME: 3D #+BEGIN_SRC emacs-lisp '(((1 2 3) (4 5 6) (7 8 9)) ((10 11 12) (13 14 15) (16 17 18)) ((19 20 21) (22 23 24) (25 26 27))) #+END_SRC #+BEGIN_SRC emacs-lisp :var data=3D[1,,1] data #+END_SRC #+RESULTS: | 11 | 14 | 17 |
Note that row names and column names are not removed prior to variable indexing. You need to take them into account, even when ‘colnames’ or ‘rownames’ header arguments remove them.
Emacs lisp code can also set the values for variables. To differentiate a value from Lisp code, Org interprets any value starting with ‘(’, ‘[’, ‘'’ or ‘`’ as Emacs Lisp code. The result of evaluating that code is then assigned to the value of that variable. The following example shows how to reliably query and pass the file name of the Org mode buffer to a code block using headers. We need reliability here because the file’s name could change once the code in the block starts executing.
#+BEGIN_SRC sh :var filename=(buffer-file-name) :exports both wc -w $filename #+END_SRC
Note that values read from tables and lists are not mistakenly evaluated as Emacs Lisp code, as illustrated in the following example.
#+NAME: table | (a b c) | #+HEADER: :var data=table[0,0] #+BEGIN_SRC perl $data #+END_SRC #+RESULTS: : (a b c)
Two code blocks can share the same environment. The ‘session’ header argument is for running multiple source code blocks under one session. Org runs code blocks with the same session name in the same interpreter process.
Default. Each code block gets a new interpreter process to execute. The process terminates once the block is evaluated.
Any string besides ‘none’ turns that string into the name of that session. For example, ‘:session STRING’ names it ‘STRING’. If ‘session’ has no value, then the session name is derived from the source language identifier. Subsequent blocks with the same source code language use the same session. Depending on the language, state variables, code from other blocks, and the overall interpreted environment may be shared. Some interpreted languages support concurrent sessions when subsequent source code language blocks change session names.
Only languages that provide interactive evaluation can have session support. Not all languages provide this support, such as C and ditaa. Even languages, such as Python and Haskell, that do support interactive evaluation impose limitations on allowable language constructs that can run interactively. Org inherits those limitations for those code blocks running in a session.
The ‘dir’ header argument specifies the default directory during code
block execution. If it is absent, then the directory associated with
the current buffer is used. In other words, supplying ‘:dir
DIRECTORY’ temporarily has the same effect as changing the current
directory with M-x cd RET DIRECTORY, and then not setting
‘dir’. Under the surface, ‘dir’ simply sets the value of the Emacs
variable default-directory
. Setting ‘mkdirp’ header argument to
a non-nil
value creates the directory, if necessary.
For example, to save the plot file in the ‘Work/’ folder of the home directory—notice tilde is expanded:
#+BEGIN_SRC R :file myplot.png :dir ~/Work matplot(matrix(rnorm(100), 10), type="l") #+END_SRC
To evaluate the code block on a remote machine, supply a remote directory name using Tramp syntax. 例如:
#+BEGIN_SRC R :file plot.png :dir /scp:dand@yakuba.princeton.edu: plot(1:10, main=system("hostname", intern=TRUE)) #+END_SRC
Org first captures the text results as usual for insertion in the Org
file. Then Org also inserts a link to the remote file, thanks to
Emacs Tramp. Org constructs the remote path to the file name from
‘dir’ and default-directory
, as illustrated here:
[[file:/scp:dand@yakuba.princeton.edu:/home/dand/plot.png][plot.png]]
When ‘dir’ is used with ‘session’, Org sets the starting directory for a new session. But Org does not alter the directory of an already existing session.
Do not use ‘dir’ with ‘:exports results’ or with ‘:exports both’ to
avoid Org inserting incorrect links to remote files. That is because
Org does not expand default directory
to avoid some underlying
portability issues.
The ‘prologue’ header argument is for appending to the top of the code block for execution, like a reset instruction. For example, you may use ‘:prologue "reset"’ in a Gnuplot code block or, for every such block:
(add-to-list 'org-babel-default-header-args:gnuplot '((:prologue . "reset")))
Likewise, the value of the ‘epilogue’ header argument is for appending to the end of the code block for execution.
下一页: Results of Evaluation, 上一页: Environment of a Code Block, 返回: Working with Source Code [目录][索引]
A note about security: With code evaluation comes the risk of harm. Org safeguards by prompting for user’s permission before executing any code in the source block. To customize this safeguard, or disable it, see Code Evaluation Security.
Org captures the results of the code block evaluation and inserts them in the Org file, right after the code block. The insertion point is after a newline and the ‘RESULTS’ keyword. Org creates the ‘RESULTS’ keyword if one is not already there.
By default, Org enables only Emacs Lisp code blocks for execution. See Languages to enable other languages.
Org provides many ways to execute code blocks. C-c C-c or
C-c C-v e with the point on a code block142 calls the
org-babel-execute-src-block
function, which executes the code in the
block, collects the results, and inserts them in the buffer.
By calling a named code block143 from an Org mode buffer or a table. Org can call the named code blocks from the current Org mode buffer or from the “Library of Babel” (see Library of Babel).
The syntax for ‘CALL’ keyword is:
#+CALL: <name>(<arguments>) #+CALL: <name>[<inside header arguments>](<arguments>) <end header arguments>
The syntax for inline named code blocks is:
... call_<name>(<arguments>) ... ... call_<name>[<inside header arguments>](<arguments>)[<end header arguments>] ...
When inline syntax is used, the result is wrapped based on the
variable org-babel-inline-result-wrap
, which by default is set to
"=%s="
to produce verbatim text suitable for markup.
This is the name of the code block (see Structure of Code Blocks) to be evaluated in the current document. If the block is located in another file, start ‘<name>’ with the file name followed by a colon. For example, in order to execute a block named ‘clear-data’ in ‘file.org’, you can write the following:
#+CALL: file.org:clear-data()
Org passes arguments to the code block using standard function call syntax. For example, a ‘#+CALL:’ line that passes ‘4’ to a code block named ‘double’, which declares the header argument ‘:var n=2’, would be written as:
#+CALL: double(n=4)
Note how this function call syntax is different from the header argument syntax.
Org passes inside header arguments to the named code block using the header argument syntax. Inside header arguments apply to code block evaluation. For example, ‘[:results output]’ collects results printed to stdout during code execution of that block. Note how this header argument syntax is different from the function call syntax.
End header arguments affect the results returned by the code block. For example, ‘:results html’ wraps the results in a ‘#+BEGIN_EXPORT html’ block before inserting the results in the Org buffer.
The ‘eval’ header argument can limit evaluation of specific code blocks and ‘CALL’ keyword. It is useful for protection against evaluating untrusted code blocks by prompting for a confirmation.
Org never evaluates the source code.
Org prompts the user for permission to evaluate the source code.
Org does not evaluate the source code when exporting, yet the user can evaluate it interactively.
Org prompts the user for permission to evaluate the source code during export.
If ‘eval’ header argument is not set, then Org determines whether to
evaluate the source code from the org-confirm-babel-evaluate
variable (see Code Evaluation Security).
The ‘cache’ header argument is for caching results of evaluating code blocks. Caching results can avoid re-evaluating a code block that have not changed since the previous run. To benefit from the cache and avoid redundant evaluations, the source block must have a result already present in the buffer, and neither the header arguments—including the value of ‘var’ references—nor the text of the block itself has changed since the result was last computed. This feature greatly helps avoid long-running calculations. For some edge cases, however, the cached results may not be reliable.
The caching feature is best for when code blocks are pure functions, that is functions that return the same value for the same input arguments (see Environment of a Code Block), and that do not have side effects, and do not rely on external variables other than the input arguments. Functions that depend on a timer, file system objects, and random number generators are clearly unsuitable for caching.
A note of warning: when ‘cache’ is used in a session, caching may cause unexpected results.
When the caching mechanism tests for any source code changes, it does not expand noweb style references (see Noweb Reference Syntax). For reasons why, see https://orgmode.org/list/86fvqqc8jb.fsf@somewhere.org
The ‘cache’ header argument can have one of two values: ‘yes’ or ‘no’.
Default. No caching of results; code block evaluated every time.
Whether to run the code or return the cached results is determined by comparing the SHA1 hash value of the combined code block and arguments passed to it. This hash value is packed on the ‘#+RESULTS:’ line from previous evaluation. When hash values match, Org does not evaluate the code block. When hash values mismatch, Org evaluates the code block, inserts the results, recalculates the hash value, and updates ‘#+RESULTS:’ line.
In this example, both functions are cached. But ‘caller’ runs only if the result from ‘random’ has changed since the last run.
#+NAME: random #+BEGIN_SRC R :cache yes runif(1) #+END_SRC #+RESULTS[a2a72cd647ad44515fab62e144796432793d68e1]: random 0.4659510825295 #+NAME: caller #+BEGIN_SRC emacs-lisp :var x=random :cache yes x #+END_SRC #+RESULTS[bec9c8724e397d5df3b696502df3ed7892fc4f5f]: caller 0.254227238707244
下一页: Exporting Code Blocks, 上一页: Evaluating Code Blocks, 返回: Working with Source Code [目录][索引]
How Org handles results of a code block execution depends on many header arguments working together. The primary determinant, however, is the ‘results’ header argument. It accepts four classes of options. Each code block can take only one option per class:
For how the results should be collected from the code block;
For which type of result the code block will return; affects how Org processes and inserts results in the Org buffer;
For the result; affects how Org processes results;
For inserting results once they are properly formatted.
Collection options specify the results. Choose one of the options; they are mutually exclusive.
Default for most Babel libraries144. Functional mode. Org
gets the value by wrapping the code in a function definition in the
language of the source block. That is why when using ‘:results
value’, code should execute like a function and return a value. For
languages like Python, an explicit return
statement is mandatory
when using ‘:results value’. Result is the value returned by the
last statement in the code block.
When evaluating the code block in a session (see Environment of a Code Block), Org passes the code to an interpreter running as an
interactive Emacs inferior process. Org gets the value from the
source code interpreter’s last statement output. Org has to use
language-specific methods to obtain the value. For example, from
the variable _
in Ruby, and the value of .Last.value
in R.
Scripting mode. Org passes the code to an external process running the interpreter. Org returns the contents of the standard output stream as text results.
When using a session, Org passes the code to the interpreter running as an interactive Emacs inferior process. Org concatenates any text output from the interpreter and returns the collection as a result.
Type tells what result types to expect from the execution of the code block. Choose one of the options; they are mutually exclusive. The default behavior is to automatically determine the result type.
Interpret the results as an Org table. If the result is a single value, create a table with one row and one column. Usage example: ‘:results value table’.
In-between each table row or below the table headings, sometimes results have horizontal lines, which are also known as “hlines”. The ‘hlines’ argument with the default ‘no’ value strips such lines from the input table. For most code, this is desirable, or else those ‘hline’ symbols raise unbound variable errors. A ‘yes’ accepts such lines, as demonstrated in the following example.
#+NAME: many-cols | a | b | c | |---+---+---| | d | e | f | |---+---+---| | g | h | i | #+NAME: no-hline #+BEGIN_SRC python :var tab=many-cols :hlines no return tab #+END_SRC #+RESULTS: no-hline | a | b | c | | d | e | f | | g | h | i | #+NAME: hlines #+BEGIN_SRC python :var tab=many-cols :hlines yes return tab #+END_SRC #+RESULTS: hlines | a | b | c | |---+---+---| | d | e | f | |---+---+---| | g | h | i |
Interpret the results as an Org list. If the result is a single value, create a list of one element.
Interpret literally and insert as quoted text. Do not create a table. Usage example: ‘:results value verbatim’.
Interpret as a filename. Save the results of execution of the code block to that file, then insert a link to it. You can control both the filename and the description associated to the link.
Org first tries to generate the filename from the value of the ‘file’ header argument and the directory specified using the ‘output-dir’ header arguments. If ‘output-dir’ is not specified, Org assumes it is the current directory.
#+BEGIN_SRC asymptote :results value file :file circle.pdf :output-dir img/ size(2cm); draw(unitcircle); #+END_SRC
If ‘file’ header argument is missing, Org generates the base name of the output file from the name of the code block, and its extension from the ‘file-ext’ header argument. In that case, both the name and the extension are mandatory.
#+name: circle #+BEGIN_SRC asymptote :results value file :file-ext pdf size(2cm); draw(unitcircle); #+END_SRC
The ‘file-desc’ header argument defines the description (see Link Format) for the link. If ‘file-desc’ is present but has no value, the ‘file’ value is used as the link description. When this argument is not present, the description is omitted.
By default, Org assumes that a table written to a file has TAB-delimited output. You can choose a different separator with the ‘sep’ header argument.
The ‘file-mode’ header argument defines the file permissions. To make it executable, use ‘:file-mode (identity #o755)’.
#+BEGIN_SRC shell :results file :file script.sh :file-mode (identity #o755) echo "#!/bin/bash" echo "echo Hello World" #+END_SRC
Format pertains to the type of the result returned by the code block. Choose one of the options; they are mutually exclusive. The default follows from the type specified above.
Result enclosed in a code block. Useful for parsing. Usage example: ‘:results value code’.
Result wrapped in a ‘RESULTS’ drawer. Useful for containing ‘raw’ or ‘org’ results for later scripting and automated processing. Usage example: ‘:results value drawer’.
Results enclosed in a ‘BEGIN_EXPORT html’ block. Usage example: ‘:results value html’.
Results enclosed in a ‘BEGIN_EXPORT latex’ block. Usage example: ‘:results value latex’.
When used along with ‘file’ type, the result is a link to the file specified in ‘:file’ header argument. However, unlike plain ‘file’ type, nothing is written to the disk. The block is used for its side-effects only, as in the following example:
#+begin_src shell :results file link :file "download.tar.gz" wget -c "http://example.com/download.tar.gz" #+end_src
Results enclosed in a ‘BEGIN_SRC org’ block. For comma-escape, either TAB in the block, or export the file. Usage example: ‘:results value org’.
Result converted to pretty-print source code. Enclosed in a code block. Languages supported: Emacs Lisp, Python, and Ruby. Usage example: ‘:results value pp’.
Interpreted as raw Org mode. Inserted directly into the buffer. Aligned if it is a table. Usage example: ‘:results value raw’.
The ‘wrap’ header argument unconditionally marks the results block by appending strings to ‘#+BEGIN_’ and ‘#+END_’. If no string is specified, Org wraps the results in a ‘#+BEGIN_results’ … ‘#+END_results’ block. It takes precedent over the ‘results’ value listed above. E.g.,
#+BEGIN_SRC emacs-lisp :results html :wrap EXPORT markdown "<blink>Welcome back to the 90's</blink>" #+END_SRC #+RESULTS: #+BEGIN_EXPORT markdown <blink>Welcome back to the 90's</blink> #+END_EXPORT
Handling options after collecting the results.
Do not insert results in the Org mode buffer, but echo them in the minibuffer. Usage example: ‘:results output silent’.
Default. Insert results in the Org buffer. Remove previous results. Usage example: ‘:results output replace’.
Append results to the Org buffer. Latest results are at the bottom. Does not remove previous results. Usage example: ‘:results output append’.
Prepend results to the Org buffer. Latest results are at the top. Does not remove previous results. Usage example: ‘:results output prepend’.
The ‘post’ header argument is for post-processing results from block
evaluation. When ‘post’ has any value, Org binds the results to
*this*
variable for easy passing to ‘var’ header argument
specifications (see Environment of a Code Block). That makes results
available to other code blocks, or even for direct Emacs Lisp code
execution.
The following two examples illustrate ‘post’ header argument in action. The first one shows how to attach an ‘ATTR_LATEX’ keyword using ‘post’.
#+NAME: attr_wrap #+BEGIN_SRC sh :var data="" :var width="\\textwidth" :results output echo "#+ATTR_LATEX: :width $width" echo "$data" #+END_SRC #+HEADER: :file /tmp/it.png #+BEGIN_SRC dot :post attr_wrap(width="5cm", data=*this*) :results drawer digraph{ a -> b; b -> c; c -> a; } #+end_src #+RESULTS: :RESULTS: #+ATTR_LATEX :width 5cm [[file:/tmp/it.png]] :END:
The second example shows use of ‘colnames’ header argument in ‘post’ to pass data between code blocks.
#+NAME: round-tbl #+BEGIN_SRC emacs-lisp :var tbl="" fmt="%.3f" (mapcar (lambda (row) (mapcar (lambda (cell) (if (numberp cell) (format fmt cell) cell)) row)) tbl) #+end_src #+BEGIN_SRC R :colnames yes :post round-tbl[:colnames yes](*this*) set.seed(42) data.frame(foo=rnorm(1)) #+END_SRC #+RESULTS: | foo | |-------| | 1.371 |
下一页: Extracting Source Code, 上一页: Results of Evaluation, 返回: Working with Source Code [目录][索引]
It is possible to export the code of code blocks, the results of code block evaluation, both the code and the results of code block evaluation, or none. Org defaults to exporting code for most languages. For some languages, such as ditaa, Org defaults to results. To export just the body of code blocks, see Literal Examples. To selectively export sub-trees of an Org document, see Exporting.
The ‘exports’ header argument is to specify if that part of the Org file is exported to, say, HTML or LaTeX formats.
The default. The body of code is included into the exported file. Example: ‘:exports code’.
The results of evaluation of the code is included in the exported file. Example: ‘:exports results’.
Both the code and results of evaluation are included in the exported file. Example: ‘:exports both’.
Neither the code nor the results of evaluation is included in the exported file. Whether the code is evaluated at all depends on other options. Example: ‘:exports none’.
To stop Org from evaluating code blocks to speed exports, use the
header argument ‘:eval never-export’ (see Evaluating Code Blocks).
To stop Org from evaluating code blocks for greater security, set the
org-export-use-babel
variable to nil
, but understand that header
arguments will have no effect.
Turning off evaluation comes in handy when batch processing. For example, markup languages for wikis, which have a high risk of untrusted code. Stopping code block evaluation also stops evaluation of all header arguments of the code block. This may not be desirable in some circumstances. So during export, to allow evaluation of just the header arguments but not any code evaluation in the source block, set ‘:eval never-export’ (see Evaluating Code Blocks).
Org never evaluates code blocks in commented sub-trees when exporting (see Comment Lines). On the other hand, Org does evaluate code blocks in sub-trees excluded from export (see Export Settings).
下一页: Languages, 上一页: Exporting Code Blocks, 返回: Working with Source Code [目录][索引]
Extracting source code from code blocks is a basic task in literate programming. Org has features to make this easy. In literate programming parlance, documents on creation are woven with code and documentation, and on export, the code is tangled for execution by a computer. Org facilitates weaving and tangling for producing, maintaining, sharing, and exporting literate programming documents. Org provides extensive customization options for extracting source code.
When Org tangles code blocks, it expands, merges, and transforms them. Then Org recomposes them into one or more separate files, as configured through the options. During this tangling process, Org expands variables in the source code, and resolves any noweb style references (see Noweb Reference Syntax).
The ‘tangle’ header argument specifies if the code block is exported to source file(s).
Export the code block to source file. The file name for the source file is derived from the name of the Org file, and the file extension is derived from the source code language identifier. Example: ‘:tangle yes’.
The default. Do not extract the code in a source code file. Example: ‘:tangle no’.
Export the code block to source file whose file name is derived from any string passed to the ‘tangle’ header argument. Org derives the file name as being relative to the directory of the Org file’s location. Example: ‘:tangle FILENAME’.
The ‘mkdirp’ header argument creates parent directories for tangled files if the directory does not exist. A ‘yes’ value enables directory creation whereas ‘no’ inhibits it.
The ‘comments’ header argument controls inserting comments into tangled files. These are above and beyond whatever comments may already exist in the code block.
The default. Do not insert any extra comments during tangling.
Wrap the code block in comments. Include links pointing back to the place in the Org file from where the code was tangled.
Kept for backward compatibility; same as ‘link’.
Nearest headline text from Org file is inserted as comment. The exact text that is inserted is picked from the leading context of the source block.
Includes both ‘link’ and ‘org’ options.
Includes ‘link’ option, expands noweb references (see Noweb Reference Syntax), and wraps them in link comments inside the body of the code block.
The ‘padline’ header argument controls insertion of newlines to pad source code in the tangled file.
Default. Insert a newline before and after each code block in the tangled file.
Do not insert newlines to pad the tangled code blocks.
The ‘shebang’ header argument can turn results into executable script files. By setting it to a string value—for example, ‘:shebang "#!/bin/bash"’—Org inserts that string as the first line of the tangled file that the code block is extracted to. Org then turns on the tangled file’s executable permission.
The ‘tangle-mode’ header argument specifies what permissions to set
for tangled files by set-file-modes
. For example, to make
a read-only tangled file, use ‘:tangle-mode (identity #o444)’. To
make it executable, use ‘:tangle-mode (identity #o755)’. It also
overrides executable permission granted by ‘shebang’. When multiple
source code blocks tangle to a single file with different and
conflicting ‘tangle-mode’ header arguments, Org’s behavior is
undefined.
By default Org expands code blocks during tangling. The ‘no-expand’
header argument turns off such expansions. Note that one side-effect
of expansion by org-babel-expand-src-block
also assigns values (see
Environment of a Code Block) to variables. Expansions also replace
noweb references with their targets (see Noweb Reference Syntax).
Some of these expansions may cause premature assignment, hence this
option. This option makes a difference only for tangling. It has no
effect when exporting since code blocks for execution have to be
expanded anyway.
org-babel-tangle
Tangle the current file. Bound to C-c C-v t.
With prefix argument only tangle the current code block.
org-babel-tangle-file
Choose a file to tangle. Bound to C-c C-v f.
org-babel-post-tangle-hook
This hook is run from within code files tangled by
org-babel-tangle
, making it suitable for post-processing,
compilation, and evaluation of code in the tangled files.
Debuggers normally link errors and messages back to the source code.
But for tangled files, we want to link back to the Org file, not to
the tangled source file. To make this extra jump, Org uses
org-babel-tangle-jump-to-org
function with two additional source
code block header arguments:
下一页: Editing Source Code, 上一页: Extracting Source Code, 返回: Working with Source Code [目录][索引]
Code blocks in the following languages are supported.
Language | Identifier | Language | Identifier |
---|---|---|---|
Asymptote | ‘asymptote’ | Lisp | ‘lisp’ |
Awk | ‘awk’ | Lua | ‘lua’ |
C | ‘C’ | MATLAB | ‘matlab’ |
C++ | ‘C++’145 | Mscgen | ‘mscgen’ |
Clojure | ‘clojure’ | Objective Caml | ‘ocaml’ |
CSS | ‘css’ | Octave | ‘octave’ |
D | ‘D’146 | Org mode | ‘org’ |
ditaa | ‘ditaa’ | Oz | ‘oz’ |
Emacs Calc | ‘calc’ | Perl | ‘perl’ |
Emacs Lisp | ‘emacs-lisp’ | Plantuml | ‘plantuml’ |
Eshell | ‘eshell’ | Processing.js | ‘processing’ |
Fortran | ‘fortran’ | Python | ‘python’ |
Gnuplot | ‘gnuplot’ | R | ‘R’ |
GNU Screen | ‘screen’ | Ruby | ‘ruby’ |
Graphviz | ‘dot’ | Sass | ‘sass’ |
Haskell | ‘haskell’ | Scheme | ‘scheme’ |
Java | ‘java’ | Sed | ‘sed’ |
Javascript | ‘js’ | shell | ‘sh’ |
LaTeX | ‘latex’ | SQL | ‘sql’ |
Ledger | ‘ledger’ | SQLite | ‘sqlite’ |
Lilypond | ‘lilypond’ | Vala | ‘vala’ |
Additional documentation for some languages is at https://orgmode.org/worg/org-contrib/babel/languages.html.
By default, only Emacs Lisp is enabled for evaluation. To enable or
disable other languages, customize the org-babel-load-languages
variable either through the Emacs customization interface, or by
adding code to the init file as shown next.
In this example, evaluation is disabled for Emacs Lisp, and enabled for R.
(org-babel-do-load-languages 'org-babel-load-languages '((emacs-lisp . nil) (R . t)))
Note that this is not the only way to enable a language. Org also
enables languages when loaded with require
statement. For example,
the following enables execution of Clojure code blocks:
(require 'ob-clojure)
下一页: Noweb Reference Syntax, 上一页: Languages, 返回: Working with Source Code [目录][索引]
Use C-c ' to edit the current code block. It opens a new major mode edit buffer containing the body of the source code block, ready for any edits. Use C-c ' again to close the buffer and return to the Org buffer.
C-x C-s saves the buffer and updates the contents of the
Org buffer. Set org-edit-src-auto-save-idle-delay
to save the base
buffer after a certain idle delay time. Set
org-edit-src-turn-on-auto-save
to auto-save this buffer into
a separate file using Auto-save mode.
While editing the source code in the major mode, the Org Src minor
mode remains active. It provides these customization variables as
described below. For even more variables, look in the customization
group org-edit-structure
.
org-src-lang-modes
If an Emacs major-mode named <LANG>-mode
exists, where
<LANG> is the language identifier from code block’s
header line, then the edit buffer uses that major mode. Use this
variable to arbitrarily map language identifiers to major modes.
org-src-window-setup
For specifying Emacs window arrangement when the new edit buffer is created.
org-src-preserve-indentation
Default is nil
. Source code is indented. This indentation
applies during export or tangling, and depending on the context, may
alter leading spaces and tabs. When non-nil
, source code is
aligned with the leftmost column. No lines are modified during
export or tangling, which is very useful for white-space sensitive
languages, such as Python.
org-src-ask-before-returning-to-edit-buffer
When nil
, Org returns to the edit buffer without further prompts.
The default prompts for a confirmation.
Set org-src-fontify-natively
to non-nil
to turn on native code
fontification in the Org buffer. Fontification of code blocks can
give visual separation of text and code on the display page. To
further customize the appearance of org-block
for specific
languages, customize org-src-block-faces
. The following example
shades the background of regular blocks, and colors source blocks only
for Python and Emacs Lisp languages.
(require 'color) (set-face-attribute 'org-block nil :background (color-darken-name (face-attribute 'default :background) 3)) (setq org-src-block-faces '(("emacs-lisp" (:background "#EEE2FF")) ("python" (:background "#E5FFB8"))))
下一页: Library of Babel, 上一页: Editing Source Code, 返回: Working with Source Code [目录][索引]
Source code blocks can include references to other source code blocks, using a noweb147 style syntax:
<<CODE-BLOCK-ID>>
where CODE-BLOCK-ID refers to either the ‘NAME’ of a single source code block, or a collection of one or more source code blocks sharing the same ‘noweb-ref’ header argument (see Using Header Arguments). Org can replace such references with the source code of the block or blocks being referenced, or, in the case of a single source code block named with ‘NAME’, with the results of an evaluation of that block.
The ‘noweb’ header argument controls expansion of noweb syntax references. Expansions occur when source code blocks are evaluated, tangled, or exported.
Default. No expansion of noweb syntax references in the body of the code when evaluating, tangling, or exporting.
Expansion of noweb syntax references in the body of the code block when evaluating, tangling, or exporting.
Expansion of noweb syntax references in the body of the code block when tangling. No expansion when evaluating or exporting.
Expansion of noweb syntax references in the body of the code block when evaluating or tangling. No expansion when exporting.
Expansion of noweb syntax references in the body of the code block when expanding prior to evaluating or tangling. Removes noweb syntax references when exporting.
Expansion of noweb syntax references in the body of the code block only before evaluating.
In the most simple case, the contents of a single source block is inserted within other blocks. Thus, in following example,
#+NAME: initialization #+BEGIN_SRC emacs-lisp (setq sentence "Never a foot too far, even.") #+END_SRC #+BEGIN_SRC emacs-lisp :noweb yes <<initialization>> (reverse sentence) #+END_SRC
the second code block is expanded as
#+BEGIN_SRC emacs-lisp :noweb yes (setq sentence "Never a foot too far, even.") (reverse sentence) #+END_SRC
You may also include the contents of multiple blocks sharing a common ‘noweb-ref’ header argument, which can be set at the file, sub-tree, or code block level. In the example Org file shown next, the body of the source code in each block is extracted for concatenation to a pure code file when tangled.
#+BEGIN_SRC sh :tangle yes :noweb yes :shebang #!/bin/sh <<fullest-disk>> #+END_SRC * the mount point of the fullest disk :PROPERTIES: :header-args: :noweb-ref fullest-disk :END: ** query all mounted disks #+BEGIN_SRC sh df \ #+END_SRC ** strip the header row #+BEGIN_SRC sh |sed '1d' \ #+END_SRC ** output mount point of fullest disk #+BEGIN_SRC sh |awk '{if (u < +$5) {u = +$5; m = $6}} END {print m}' #+END_SRC
By default a newline separates each noweb reference concatenation. To use a different separator, edit the ‘noweb-sep’ header argument.
Alternatively, Org can include the results of evaluation of a single code block rather than its body. Evaluation occurs when parentheses, possibly including arguments, are appended to the code block name, as shown below.
<<NAME(optional arguments)>>
Note that in this case, a code block name set by ‘NAME’ keyword is required; the reference set by ‘noweb-ref’ will not work when evaluation is desired.
Here is an example that demonstrates how the exported content changes when noweb style references are used with parentheses versus without. Given:
#+NAME: some-code #+BEGIN_SRC python :var num=0 :results output :exports none print(num*10) #+END_SRC
this code block:
#+BEGIN_SRC text :noweb yes <<some-code>> #+END_SRC
expands to:
print(num*10)
Below, a similar noweb style reference is used, but with parentheses, while setting a variable ‘num’ to 10:
#+BEGIN_SRC text :noweb yes <<some-code(num=10)>> #+END_SRC
Note that the expansion now contains the results of the code block ‘some-code’, not the code block itself:
100
Noweb insertions honor prefix characters that appear before the noweb syntax reference. This behavior is illustrated in the following example. Because the ‘<<example>>’ noweb reference appears behind the SQL comment syntax, each line of the expanded noweb reference is commented. With:
#+NAME: example #+BEGIN_SRC text this is the multi-line body of example #+END_SRC
this code block:
#+BEGIN_SRC sql :noweb yes ---<<example>> #+END_SRC
expands to:
#+BEGIN_SRC sql :noweb yes ---this is the ---multi-line body of example #+END_SRC
Since this change does not affect noweb replacement text without newlines in them, inline noweb references are acceptable.
This feature can also be used for management of indentation in exported code snippets. With:
#+NAME: if-true #+BEGIN_SRC python :exports none print('do things when true') #+end_src #+name: if-false #+begin_src python :exports none print('do things when false') #+end_src
this code block:
#+begin_src python :noweb yes :results output if true: <<if-true>> else: <<if-false>> #+end_src
expands to:
if true: print('do things when true') else: print('do things when false')
When in doubt about the outcome of a source code block expansion, you can preview the results with the following command:
org-babel-expand-src-block
)Expand the current source code block according to its header arguments and pop open the results in a preview buffer.
下一页: Key bindings and Useful Functions, 上一页: Noweb Reference Syntax, 返回: Working with Source Code [目录][索引]
The “Library of Babel” is a collection of code blocks. Like a function library, these code blocks can be called from other Org files. A collection of useful code blocks is available on Worg. For remote code block evaluation syntax, see Evaluating Code Blocks.
For any user to add code to the library, first save the code in
regular code blocks of an Org file, and then load the Org file with
org-babel-lob-ingest
, which is bound to C-c C-v i.
下一页: Batch Execution, 上一页: Library of Babel, 返回: Working with Source Code [目录][索引]
Many common Org mode key sequences are re-bound depending on the context.
Active key bindings in code blocks:
Key binding | Function |
---|---|
C-c C-c | org-babel-execute-src-block |
C-c C-o | org-babel-open-src-block-result |
M-UP | org-babel-load-in-session |
M-DOWN | org-babel-pop-to-session |
Active key bindings in Org mode buffer:
Key binding | Function |
---|---|
C-c C-v p or C-c C-v C-p | org-babel-previous-src-block |
C-c C-v n or C-c C-v C-n | org-babel-next-src-block |
C-c C-v e or C-c C-v C-e | org-babel-execute-maybe |
C-c C-v o or C-c C-v C-o | org-babel-open-src-block-result |
C-c C-v v or C-c C-v C-v | org-babel-expand-src-block |
C-c C-v u or C-c C-v C-u | org-babel-goto-src-block-head |
C-c C-v g or C-c C-v C-g | org-babel-goto-named-src-block |
C-c C-v r or C-c C-v C-r | org-babel-goto-named-result |
C-c C-v b or C-c C-v C-b | org-babel-execute-buffer |
C-c C-v s or C-c C-v C-s | org-babel-execute-subtree |
C-c C-v d or C-c C-v C-d | org-babel-demarcate-block |
C-c C-v t or C-c C-v C-t | org-babel-tangle |
C-c C-v f or C-c C-v C-f | org-babel-tangle-file |
C-c C-v c or C-c C-v C-c | org-babel-check-src-block |
C-c C-v j or C-c C-v C-j | org-babel-insert-header-arg |
C-c C-v l or C-c C-v C-l | org-babel-load-in-session |
C-c C-v i or C-c C-v C-i | org-babel-lob-ingest |
C-c C-v I or C-c C-v C-I | org-babel-view-src-block-info |
C-c C-v z or C-c C-v C-z | org-babel-switch-to-session-with-code |
C-c C-v a or C-c C-v C-a | org-babel-sha1-hash |
C-c C-v h or C-c C-v C-h | org-babel-describe-bindings |
C-c C-v x or C-c C-v C-x | org-babel-do-key-sequence-in-edit-buffer |
上一页: Key bindings and Useful Functions, 返回: Working with Source Code [目录][索引]
Org mode features, including working with source code facilities can be invoked from the command line. This enables building shell scripts for batch processing, running automated system tasks, and expanding Org mode’s usefulness.
The sample script shows batch processing of multiple files using
org-babel-tangle
.
#!/bin/sh # Tangle files with Org mode # emacs -Q --batch --eval " (progn (require 'ob-tangle) (dolist (file command-line-args-left) (with-current-buffer (find-file-noselect file) (org-babel-tangle)))) " "$@"
下一页: Hacking, 上一页: Working with Source Code, 返回: Top [目录][索引]
• 补全: | M-TAB补全联想 | |
• 结构模板: | 快速插入结构元素。 | |
• 快捷键: | 标题开头的电子命令。 | |
• 净化视图: | 剔除大纲中的前面星号。 | |
• 在活动区执行命令: | 在Org或议程视图中对多个项执行命令。 | |
• 动态标题编号: | 显示和更新大纲编号。 | |
• 非常繁忙的C-c-c键: | 如果有疑问,请按C-c C-c。 | |
• 缓冲区内设置: | 关键字概述。 | |
• Org语法: | Org语法的正式描述。 | |
• 文档访问: | 阅读有关当前语法的文档。 | |
• 转义字符: | 阻止Org解释您的写作。 | |
• 代码求值安全性: | Org文件求值行内代码。 | |
• 交互: | 与其他Emacs软件包一起使用。 | |
• TTY按键: | 在tty上使用Org。 | |
• 协议: | 外部访问Emacs和Org。 | |
• Org加密: | 加密Org文件。 | |
• Org移动版: | 在移动设备上查看和捕获。 |
下一页: Structure Templates, 返回: Miscellaneous [目录][索引]
Org has in-buffer completions. Unlike minibuffer completions, which are useful for quick command interactions, Org’s in-buffer completions are more suitable for content creation in Org documents. Type one or more letters and invoke the hot key to complete the text in-place. Depending on the context and the keys, Org offers different types of completions. No minibuffer is involved. Such mode-specific hot keys have become an integral part of Emacs and Org provides several shortcuts.
Complete word at point.
org-tag-alist
, or from all tags used in the current
buffer.
下一页: Speed Keys, 上一页: Completion, 返回: Miscellaneous [目录][索引]
With just a few keystrokes, it is possible to insert empty structural blocks, such as ‘#+BEGIN_SRC’ … ‘#+END_SRC’, or to wrap existing text in such a block.
org-insert-structure-template
)Prompt for a type of block structure, and insert the block at point. If the region is active, it is wrapped in the block. First prompts the user for keys, which are used to look up a structure type from the variable below. If the key is TAB, RET, or SPC, the user is prompted to enter a block type.
Available structure types are defined in
org-structure-template-alist
, see the docstring for adding or
changing values.
Org Tempo expands snippets to structures defined in
org-structure-template-alist
and org-tempo-keywords-alist
. For
example, < s TAB creates a code block. Enable it by
customizing org-modules
or add ‘(require 'org-tempo)’ to your Emacs
init file148.
a | ‘#+BEGIN_EXPORT ascii’ … ‘#+END_EXPORT’ |
c | ‘#+BEGIN_CENTER’ … ‘#+END_CENTER’ |
C | ‘#+BEGIN_COMMENT’ … ‘#+END_COMMENT’ |
e | ‘#+BEGIN_EXAMPLE’ … ‘#+END_EXAMPLE’ |
E | ‘#+BEGIN_EXPORT’ … ‘#+END_EXPORT’ |
h | ‘#+BEGIN_EXPORT html’ … ‘#+END_EXPORT’ |
l | ‘#+BEGIN_EXPORT latex’ … ‘#+END_EXPORT’ |
q | ‘#+BEGIN_QUOTE’ … ‘#+END_QUOTE’ |
s | ‘#+BEGIN_SRC’ … ‘#+END_SRC’ |
v | ‘#+BEGIN_VERSE’ … ‘#+END_VERSE’ |
下一页: Clean View, 上一页: Structure Templates, 返回: Miscellaneous [目录][索引]
Single keystrokes can execute custom commands in an Org file when point is on a headline. Without the extra burden of a meta or modifier key, Speed Keys can speed navigation or execute custom commands. Besides faster navigation, Speed Keys may come in handy on small mobile devices that do not have full keyboards. Speed Keys may also work on TTY devices known for their problems when entering Emacs key chords.
By default, Org has Speed Keys disabled. To activate Speed Keys, set
the variable org-use-speed-commands
to a non-nil
value. To
trigger a Speed Key, point must be at the beginning of an Org
headline, before any of the stars.
Org comes with a pre-defined list of Speed Keys. To add or modify
Speed Keys, customize the variable, org-speed-commands-user
. For
more details, see the variable’s docstring. With Speed Keys
activated, M-x org-speed-command-help, or ? when
point is at the beginning of an Org headline, shows currently active
Speed Keys, including the user-defined ones.
下一页: Execute commands in the active region, 上一页: Speed Keys, 返回: Miscellaneous [目录][索引]
Org’s outline with stars and no indents can look cluttered for short documents. For book-like long documents, the effect is not as noticeable. Org provides an alternate stars and indentation scheme, as shown on the right in the following table. It displays only one star and indents text to line up with the heading:
* Top level headline | * Top level headline ** Second level | * Second level *** Third level | * Third level some text | some text *** Third level | * Third level more text | more text * Another top level headline | * Another top level headline
Org can achieve this in two ways, (1) by just displaying the buffer in this way without changing it, or (2) by actually indenting every line in the desired amount with hard spaces and hiding leading stars.
• Org缩进模式: | ||
• 硬缩进: |
下一页: Hard indentation, 返回: Clean View [目录][索引]
To display the buffer in the indented view, activate Org Indent minor mode, using M-x org-indent-mode. Text lines that are not headlines are prefixed with virtual spaces to vertically align with the headline text149.
To make more horizontal space, the headlines are shifted by two
characters. Configure org-indent-indentation-per-level
variable for
a different number.
By default, Org Indent mode turns off org-adapt-indentation
and does
hide leading stars by locally setting org-hide-leading-stars
to t
:
only one star on each headline is visible, the rest are masked with
the same font color as the background. If you want to customize this
default behavior, see org-indent-mode-turns-on-hiding-stars
and
org-indent-mode-turns-off-org-adapt-indentation
.
To globally turn on Org Indent mode for all files, customize the
variable org-startup-indented
. To control it for individual files,
use ‘STARTUP’ keyword as follows:
#+STARTUP: indent #+STARTUP: noindent
上一页: Org Indent Mode, 返回: Clean View [目录][索引]
It is possible to use hard spaces to achieve the indentation instead, if the bare ASCII file should have the indented look also outside Emacs150. With Org’s support, you have to indent all lines to line up with the outline headers. You would use these settings151:
(setq org-adapt-indentation t org-hide-leading-stars t org-odd-levels-only t)
org-adapt-indentation
)The first setting modifies paragraph filling, line wrapping, and structure editing commands to preserving or adapting the indentation as appropriate.
org-hide-leading-stars
)The second setting makes leading stars invisible by applying the
face org-hide
to them. For per-file preference, use these file
‘STARTUP’ options:
#+STARTUP: hidestars #+STARTUP: showstars
org-odd-levels-only
)The third setting makes Org use only odd levels, 1, 3, 5, …, in the outline to create more indentation. On a per-file level, control this with:
#+STARTUP: odd #+STARTUP: oddeven
To convert a file between single and double stars layouts, use M-x org-convert-to-odd-levels and M-x org-convert-to-oddeven-levels.
下一页: Dynamic Headline Numbering, 上一页: Clean View, 返回: Miscellaneous [目录][索引]
When in an Org buffer and the region is active, some commands will
apply to all the subtrees in the active region. For example, hitting
C-c C-s when multiple headlines are within the active region will
successively prompt you for a new schedule date and time. To disable
this, set the option org-loop-over-headlines-in-active-region
to
non-t
, activate the region and run the command normally.
org-agenda-loop-over-headlines-in-active-region
is the equivalent
option of the agenda buffer, where you can also use bulk editing of
selected entries.
Not all commands can loop in the active region and what subtrees or headlines are considered can be refined: see the docstrings of these options for more details.
下一页: The Very Busy C-c C-c Key, 上一页: Execute commands in the active region, 返回: Miscellaneous [Contents][Index]
The Org Num minor mode, toggled with M-x org-num-mode, displays outline numbering on top of headlines. It also updates it automatically upon changes to the structure of the document.
By default, all headlines are numbered. You can limit numbering to
specific headlines according to their level, tags, ‘COMMENT’ keyword,
or ‘UNNUMBERED’ property. Set org-num-max-level
,
org-num-skip-tags
, org-num-skip-commented
,
org-num-skip-unnumbered
, or org-num-skip-footnotes
accordingly.
If org-num-skip-footnotes
is non-nil
, footnotes sections (see
Creating Footnotes) are not numbered either.
You can control how the numbering is displayed by setting
org-num-face
and org-num-format-function
.
You can also turn this mode globally for all Org files by setting the
option org-startup-numerated
to ‘t’, or locally on a file by using
‘#+startup: num’.
下一页: In-buffer Settings, 上一页: Dynamic Headline Numbering, 返回: Miscellaneous [目录][索引]
The C-c C-c key in Org serves many purposes depending on the context. It is probably the most over-worked, multi-purpose key combination in Org. Its uses are well documented throughout this manual, but here is a consolidated list for easy reference.
下一页: Org Syntax, 上一页: The Very Busy C-c C-c Key, 返回: Miscellaneous [Contents][Index]
In-buffer settings start with ‘#+’, followed by a keyword, a colon, and then a word for each setting. Org accepts multiple settings on the same line. Org also accepts multiple lines for a keyword. This manual describes these settings throughout. A summary follows here.
C-c C-c activates any changes to the in-buffer settings. Closing and reopening the Org file in Emacs also activates the changes.
Sets the archive location of the agenda file. The corresponding
variable is org-archive-location
.
Sets the category of the agenda file, which applies to the entire document.
Set the default format for columns view. This format applies when columns view is invoked in locations where no ‘COLUMNS’ property applies.
Set file-local values for constants that table formulas can use.
This line sets the local variable
org-table-formula-constants-local
. The global version of this
variable is org-table-formula-constants
.
Set tags that all entries in the file inherit from, including the top-level entries.
Each line specifies one abbreviation for one link. Use multiple
‘LINK’ keywords for more, see Link Abbreviations. The
corresponding variable is org-link-abbrev-alist
.
This line sets the limits and the default for the priorities. All three must be either letters A–Z or numbers 0–9. The highest priority must have a lower ASCII number than the lowest priority.
This line sets a default inheritance value for entries in the current buffer, most useful for specifying the allowed values of a property.
The setup file or a URL pointing to such file is for additional in-buffer settings. Org loads this file and parses it for any settings in it only when Org opens the main file. If URL is specified, the contents are downloaded and stored in a temporary file cache. C-c C-c on the settings line parses and loads the file, and also resets the temporary file cache. Org also parses and loads the document during normal exporting process. Org parses the contents of this document as if it was included in the buffer. It can be another Org file. To visit the file—not a URL—use C-c ' while point is on the line with the file name.
Startup options Org uses when first visiting a file.
The first set of options deals with the initial visibility of the
outline tree. The corresponding variable for global default
settings is org-startup-folded
with a default value of
showeverything
.
‘overview’ | Top-level headlines only. |
‘content’ | All headlines. |
‘showall’ | No folding on any entry. |
‘showeverything’ | Show even drawer contents. |
Dynamic virtual indentation is controlled by the variable
org-startup-indented
152.
‘indent’ | Start with Org Indent mode turned on. |
‘noindent’ | Start with Org Indent mode turned off. |
Dynamic virtual numeration of headlines is controlled by the variable
org-startup-numerated
.
‘num’ | Start with Org num mode turned on. |
‘nonum’ | Start with Org num mode turned off. |
Aligns tables consistently upon visiting a file. The
corresponding variable is org-startup-align-all-tables
with
nil
as default value.
‘align’ | Align all tables. |
‘noalign’ | Do not align tables on startup. |
Shrink table columns with a width cookie. The corresponding
variable is org-startup-shrink-all-tables
with nil
as
default value.
When visiting a file, inline images can be automatically
displayed. The corresponding variable is
org-startup-with-inline-images
, with a default value nil
to
avoid delays when visiting a file.
‘inlineimages’ | Show inline images. |
‘noinlineimages’ | Do not show inline images on startup. |
Logging the closing and reopening of TODO items and clock
intervals can be configured using these options (see variables
org-log-done
, org-log-note-clock-out
, and org-log-repeat
).
‘logdone’ | Record a timestamp when an item is marked as done. |
‘lognotedone’ | Record timestamp and a note when DONE. |
‘nologdone’ | Do not record when items are marked as done. |
‘logrepeat’ | Record a time when reinstating a repeating item. |
‘lognoterepeat’ | Record a note when reinstating a repeating item. |
‘nologrepeat’ | Do not record when reinstating repeating item. |
‘lognoteclock-out’ | Record a note when clocking out. |
‘nolognoteclock-out’ | Do not record a note when clocking out. |
‘logreschedule’ | Record a timestamp when scheduling time changes. |
‘lognotereschedule’ | Record a note when scheduling time changes. |
‘nologreschedule’ | Do not record when a scheduling date changes. |
‘logredeadline’ | Record a timestamp when deadline changes. |
‘lognoteredeadline’ | Record a note when deadline changes. |
‘nologredeadline’ | Do not record when a deadline date changes. |
‘logrefile’ | Record a timestamp when refiling. |
‘lognoterefile’ | Record a note when refiling. |
‘nologrefile’ | Do not record when refiling. |
Here are the options for hiding leading stars in outline
headings, and for indenting outlines. The corresponding
variables are org-hide-leading-stars
and
org-odd-levels-only
, both with a default setting nil
(meaning ‘showstars’ and ‘oddeven’).
‘hidestars’ | Make all but one of the stars starting a headline invisible. |
‘showstars’ | Show all stars starting a headline. |
‘indent’ | Virtual indentation according to outline level. |
‘noindent’ | No virtual indentation according to outline level. |
‘odd’ | Allow only odd outline levels (1, 3, …). |
‘oddeven’ | Allow all outline levels. |
To turn on custom format overlays over timestamps (variables
org-put-time-stamp-overlays
and
org-time-stamp-overlay-formats
), use:
‘customtime’ | Overlay custom time format. |
The following options influence the table spreadsheet (variable
constants-unit-system
).
‘constcgs’ | ‘constants.el’ should use the c-g-s unit system. |
‘constSI’ | ‘constants.el’ should use the SI unit system. |
To influence footnote settings, use the following keywords. The
corresponding variables are org-footnote-define-inline
,
org-footnote-auto-label
, and org-footnote-auto-adjust
.
‘fninline’ | Define footnotes inline. |
‘fnnoinline’ | Define footnotes in separate section. |
‘fnlocal’ | Define footnotes near first reference, but not inline. |
‘fnprompt’ | Prompt for footnote labels. |
‘fnauto’ | Create ‘[fn:1]’-like labels automatically (default). |
‘fnconfirm’ | Offer automatic label for editing or confirmation. |
‘fnadjust’ | Automatically renumber and sort footnotes. |
‘nofnadjust’ | Do not renumber and sort automatically. |
To hide blocks on startup, use these keywords. The
corresponding variable is org-hide-block-startup
.
‘hideblocks’ | Hide all begin/end blocks on startup. |
‘nohideblocks’ | Do not hide blocks on startup. |
The display of entities as UTF-8 characters is governed by the
variable org-pretty-entities
and the keywords
‘entitiespretty’ | Show entities as UTF-8 characters where possible. |
‘entitiesplain’ | Leave entities plain. |
These lines (several such lines are allowed) specify the valid tags
in this file, and (potentially) the corresponding fast tag
selection keys. The corresponding variable is org-tag-alist
.
These lines set the TODO keywords and their interpretation in the
current file. The corresponding variable is org-todo-keywords
.
下一页: Documentation Access, 上一页: In-buffer Settings, 返回: Miscellaneous [目录][索引]
A reference document providing a formal description of Org’s syntax is available as a draft on Worg, written and maintained by Nicolas Goaziou. It defines Org’s core internal concepts such as “headlines”, “sections”, “affiliated keywords”, “(greater) elements” and “objects”. Each part of an Org document belongs to one of the previous categories.
To explore the abstract structure of an Org buffer, run this in a buffer:
M-: (org-element-parse-buffer) <RET>
It outputs a list containing the buffer’s content represented as an abstract structure. The export engine relies on the information stored in this list. Most interactive commands—e.g., for structure editing—also rely on the syntactic meaning of the surrounding context.
You can probe the syntax of your documents with the command
M-x org-lint <RET>
It runs a number of checks to find common mistakes. It then displays their location in a dedicated buffer, along with a description and a “trust level”, since false-positive are possible. From there, you can operate on the reports with the following keys:
C-j, TAB | Display the offending line |
RET | Move point to the offending line |
g | Check the document again |
h | Hide all reports from the same checker |
i | Also remove them from all subsequent checks |
S | Sort reports by the column at point |
下一页: Escape Character, 上一页: Org Syntax, 返回: Miscellaneous [目录][索引]
C-c C-x I in an Org file tries to open a suitable section of the Org manual depending on the syntax at point. For example, using it on a headline displays “Document Structure” section.
q closes the Info window.
下一页: Code Evaluation Security, 上一页: Documentation Access, 返回: Miscellaneous [目录][索引]
You may sometimes want to write text that looks like Org syntax, but should really read as plain text. Org may use a specific escape character in some situations, i.e., a backslash in macros (see Macro Replacement) and links (see Link Format), or a comma in source and example blocks (see Literal Examples). In the general case, however, we suggest to use the zero width space. You can insert one with any of the following:
C-x 8 <RET> zero width space <RET> C-x 8 <RET> 200B <RET>
For example, in order to write ‘[[1,2]]’ as-is in your document, you may write instead
[X[1,2]]
where ‘X’ denotes the zero width space character.
下一页: Interaction, 上一页: Escape Character, 返回: Miscellaneous [目录][索引]
Unlike plain text, running code comes with risk. Each source code block, in terms of risk, is equivalent to an executable file. Org therefore puts a few confirmation prompts by default. This is to alert the casual user from accidentally running untrusted code.
For users who do not run code blocks or write code regularly, Org’s default settings should suffice. However, some users may want to tweak the prompts for fewer interruptions. To weigh the risks of automatic execution of code blocks, here are some details about code evaluation.
Org evaluates code in the following circumstances:
Org evaluates source code blocks in an Org file during export. Org also evaluates a source code block with the C-c C-c key chord. Users exporting or running code blocks must load files only from trusted sources. Be wary of customizing variables that remove or alter default security measures.
When t
, Org prompts the user for confirmation before executing
each code block. When nil
, Org executes code blocks without
prompting the user for confirmation. When this option is set to
a custom function, Org invokes the function with these two
arguments: the source code language and the body of the code block.
The custom function must return either a t
or nil
, which
determines if the user is prompted. Each source code language can
be handled separately through this function argument.
For example, here is how to execute ditaa code blocks without prompting:
(defun my-org-confirm-babel-evaluate (lang body) (not (string= lang "ditaa"))) ;don't ask for ditaa (setq org-confirm-babel-evaluate #'my-org-confirm-babel-evaluate)
Org has two link types that can directly evaluate code (see External Links). Because such code is not visible, these links have a potential risk. Org therefore prompts the user when it encounters such links. The customization variables are:
Formulas in tables (see The Spreadsheet) are code that is evaluated either by the Calc interpreter, or by the Emacs Lisp interpreter.
下一页: TTY Keys, 上一页: Code Evaluation Security, 返回: Miscellaneous [目录][索引]
Org’s compatibility and the level of interaction with other Emacs packages are documented here.
• 合作: | 和Org合作的包。 | |
• 冲突: | 导致冲突的包。 |
下一页: Conflicts, 返回: Interaction [目录][索引]
Org uses the Calc package for implementing spreadsheet functionality in its tables (see The Spreadsheet). Org also uses Calc for embedded calculations. See (calc)GNU Emacs Calc Manual.
Org can use names for constants in formulas in tables. Org can also
use calculation suffixes for units, such as ‘M’ for ‘Mega’. For
a standard collection of such constants, install the ‘constants’
package. Install version 2.0 of this package, available at
http://www.astro.uva.nl/~dominik/Tools. Org checks if the function
constants-get
has been autoloaded. Installation instructions are
in the file ‘constants.el’.
Org mode can make use of the CDLaTeX package to efficiently enter LaTeX fragments into Org files. See CDLaTeX mode.
Imenu creates dynamic menus based on an index of items in a file. Org mode supports Imenu menus. Enable it with a mode hook as follows:
(add-hook 'org-mode-hook (lambda () (imenu-add-to-menubar "Imenu")))
By default the index is two levels deep—you can modify the
depth using the option org-imenu-depth
.
Speedbar package creates a special Emacs frame for displaying files and index items in files. Org mode supports Speedbar; users can drill into Org files directly from the Speedbar. The < in the Speedbar frame tweaks the agenda commands to that file or to a subtree.
Complex ASCII tables with automatic line wrapping, column- and row-spanning, and alignment can be created using the Emacs table package by Takaaki Ota. Org mode recognizes such tables and exports them properly. C-c ' to edit these tables in a special buffer, much like Org’s code blocks. Because of interference with other Org mode functionality, Takaaki Ota tables cannot be edited directly in the Org buffer.
org-edit-special
)Edit a ‘table.el’ table. Works when point is in a ‘table.el’ table.
org-table-create-with-table.el
)Insert a ‘table.el’ table. If there is already a table at point,
this command converts it between the ‘table.el’ format and the Org
mode format. See the documentation string of the command
org-convert-table
for the restrictions under which this is
possible.
上一页: Cooperation, 返回: Interaction [目录][索引]
In Emacs, shift-selection combines motions of point with shift key to
enlarge regions. Emacs sets this mode by default. This conflicts
with Org’s use of S-<cursor> commands to change timestamps,
TODO keywords, priorities, and item bullet types, etc. Since
S-<cursor> commands outside of specific contexts do not do
anything, Org offers the variable org-support-shift-select
for
customization. Org mode accommodates shift selection by (i) making it
available outside of the special contexts where special commands
apply, and (ii) extending an existing active region even if point
moves across a special context.
Org key bindings conflict with S-<cursor> keys used by
CUA mode. For Org to relinquish these bindings to CUA mode,
configure the variable org-replace-disputed-keys
. When set, Org
moves the following key bindings in Org files, and in the agenda
buffer—but not during date selection.
S-UP ⇒ M-p | S-DOWN ⇒ M-n |
S-LEFT ⇒ M-- | S-RIGHT ⇒ M-+ |
C-S-LEFT ⇒ M-S-- | C-S-RIGHT ⇒ M-S-+ |
Yes, these are unfortunately more difficult to remember. If you
want to have other replacement keys, look at the variable
org-disputed-keys
.
Ecomplete provides “electric” address completion in address header lines in message buffers. Sadly Orgtbl mode cuts Ecomplete’s power supply: no completion happens when Orgtbl mode is enabled in message buffers while entering text in address header lines. If one wants to use ecomplete one should not follow the advice to automagically turn on Orgtbl mode in message buffers (see Orgtbl Mode), but instead—after filling in the message headers—turn on Orgtbl mode manually when needed in the messages body.
Org mode tries to do the right thing when filling paragraphs, list items and other elements. Many users reported problems using both ‘filladapt.el’ and Org mode, so a safe thing to do is to disable filladapt like this:
(add-hook 'org-mode-hook 'turn-off-filladapt-mode)
Viper uses C-c / and therefore makes this key not access
the corresponding Org mode command org-sparse-tree
. You need to
find another key for this command, or override the key in
viper-vi-global-user-map
with
(define-key viper-vi-global-user-map "C-c /" 'org-sparse-tree)
This package also uses the S-<cursor> keys, so everything written in the paragraph above about CUA mode also applies here. If you want to make the windmove function active in locations where Org mode does not have special functionality on S-<cursor>, add this to your configuration:
;; Make windmove work in Org mode: (add-hook 'org-shiftup-final-hook 'windmove-up) (add-hook 'org-shiftleft-final-hook 'windmove-left) (add-hook 'org-shiftdown-final-hook 'windmove-down) (add-hook 'org-shiftright-final-hook 'windmove-right)
The way Org mode binds the TAB key (binding to [tab]
instead of "\t"
) overrules YASnippet’s access to this key. The
following code fixed this problem:
(add-hook 'org-mode-hook (lambda () (setq-local yas/trigger-key [tab]) (define-key yas/keymap [tab] 'yas/next-field-or-maybe-expand)))
The latest version of YASnippet does not play well with Org mode. If the above code does not fix the conflict, start by defining the following function:
(defun yas/org-very-safe-expand () (let ((yas/fallback-behavior 'return-nil)) (yas/expand)))
Then, tell Org mode to use that function:
(add-hook 'org-mode-hook (lambda () (make-variable-buffer-local 'yas/trigger-key) (setq yas/trigger-key [tab]) (add-to-list 'org-tab-first-hook 'yas/org-very-safe-expand) (define-key yas/keymap [tab] 'yas/next-field)))
下一页: Protocols, 上一页: Interaction, 返回: Miscellaneous [目录][索引]
Org provides alternative key bindings for TTY and modern mobile devices that cannot perform movement commands on point and key bindings with modifier keys. Some of these workarounds may be more cumbersome than necessary. Users should look into customizing these further based on their usage needs. For example, the normal S-<cursor> for editing timestamp might be better with C-c . chord.
Default | Alternative 1 | Speed key | Alternative 2 |
---|---|---|---|
S-TAB | C-u TAB | C | |
M-LEFT | C-c C-x l | l | Esc LEFT |
M-S-LEFT | C-c C-x L | L | |
M-RIGHT | C-c C-x r | r | Esc RIGHT |
M-S-RIGHT | C-c C-x R | R | |
M-UP | C-c C-x u | Esc UP | |
M-S-UP | C-c C-x U | U | |
M-DOWN | C-c C-x d | Esc DOWN | |
M-S-DOWN | C-c C-x D | D | |
S-RET | C-c C-x c | ||
M-RET | C-c C-x m | Esc RET | |
M-S-RET | C-c C-x M | ||
S-LEFT | C-c LEFT | ||
S-RIGHT | C-c RIGHT | ||
S-UP | C-c UP | ||
S-DOWN | C-c DOWN | ||
C-S-LEFT | C-c C-x LEFT | ||
C-S-RIGHT | C-c C-x RIGHT |
下一页: Org Crypt, 上一页: TTY Keys, 返回: Miscellaneous [目录][索引]
Org protocol is a tool to trigger custom actions in Emacs from external applications. Any application that supports calling external programs with an URL as argument may be used with this functionality. For example, you can configure bookmarks in your web browser to send a link to the current page to Org and create a note from it using capture (see Capture). You can also create a bookmark that tells Emacs to open the local source file of a remote website you are browsing.
In order to use Org protocol from an application, you need to register ‘org-protocol://’ as a valid scheme-handler. External calls are passed to Emacs through the ‘emacsclient’ command, so you also need to ensure an Emacs server is running. More precisely, when the application calls
emacsclient org-protocol://PROTOCOL?key1=val1&key2=val2
Emacs calls the handler associated to PROTOCOL with argument ‘(:key1 val1 :key2 val2)’.
Org protocol comes with three predefined protocols, detailed in the
following sections. Configure org-protocol-protocol-alist
to define
your own.
• 存储链接 协议: | 存储一个链接,将URL推送到剪切板。 | |
• 捕获 协议: | 用外部信息填充缓冲区。 | |
• 开源 协议: | 编辑发布的内容。 |
下一页: The capture
protocol, 返回: Protocols [目录][索引]
存储链接
协议Using the store-link
handler, you can copy links, to that they can
be inserted using M-x org-insert-link or yanking. More
precisely, the command
emacsclient org-protocol://store-link?url=URL&title=TITLE
stores the following link:
[[URL][TITLE]]
In addition, URL is pushed on the kill-ring for yanking. You need to encode URL and TITLE if they contain slashes, and probably quote those for the shell.
To use this feature from a browser, add a bookmark with an arbitrary name, e.g., ‘Org: store-link’ and enter this as Location:
javascript:location.href='org-protocol://store-link?url='+ encodeURIComponent(location.href);
下一页: The open-source
protocol, 上一页: The store-link
protocol, 返回: Protocols [Contents][Index]
捕获
协议Activating the “capture” handler pops up a ‘Capture’ buffer in Emacs, using acapture template.
emacsclient org-protocol://capture?template=X?url=URL?title=TITLE?body=BODY
To use this feature, add a bookmark with an arbitrary name, e.g., ‘Org: capture’, and enter this as ‘Location’:
javascript:location.href='org-protocol://capture?template=x'+ '&url='+encodeURIComponent(window.location.href)+ '&title='+encodeURIComponent(document.title)+ '&body='+encodeURIComponent(window.getSelection());
The capture template to be used can be specified in the bookmark (like
‘X’ above). If unspecified, the template key is set in the variable
org-protocol-default-template-key
. The following template
placeholders are available:
%:link The URL %:description The webpage title %:annotation Equivalent to [[%:link][%:description]] %i The selected text
上一页: The capture
protocol, 返回: Protocols [目录][索引]
开源
协议The open-source
handler is designed to help with editing local
sources when reading a document. To that effect, you can use
a bookmark with the following location:
javascript:location.href='org-protocol://open-source?&url='+ encodeURIComponent(location.href)
The variable org-protocol-project-alist
maps URLs to local file
names, by stripping URL parameters from the end and replacing the
:base-url
with :working-directory
and :online-suffix
with
:working-suffix
. For example, assuming you own a local copy of
‘https://orgmode.org/worg/’ contents at ‘/home/user/worg’, you can set
org-protocol-project-alist
to the following
(setq org-protocol-project-alist '(("Worg" :base-url "https://orgmode.org/worg/" :working-directory "/home/user/worg/" :online-suffix ".html" :working-suffix ".org")))
If you are now browsing ‘https://orgmode.org/worg/org-contrib/org-protocol.html’ and find a typo or have an idea about how to enhance the documentation, simply click the bookmark and start editing.
However, such mapping may not always yield the desired results.
Suppose you maintain an online store located at ‘http://example.com/’.
The local sources reside in ‘/home/user/example/’. It is common
practice to serve all products in such a store through one file and
rewrite URLs that do not match an existing file on the server. That
way, a request to ‘http://example.com/print/posters.html’ might be
rewritten on the server to something like
‘http://example.com/shop/products.php/posters.html.php’. The
open-source
handler probably cannot find a file named
‘/home/user/example/print/posters.html.php’ and fails.
Such an entry in org-protocol-project-alist
may hold an additional
property :rewrites
. This property is a list of cons cells, each of
which maps a regular expression to a path relative to the
:working-directory
.
Now map the URL to the path ‘/home/user/example/products.php’ by
adding :rewrites
rules like this:
(setq org-protocol-project-alist '(("example.com" :base-url "http://example.com/" :working-directory "/home/user/example/" :online-suffix ".php" :working-suffix ".php" :rewrites (("example.com/print/" . "products.php") ("example.com/$" . "index.php")))))
Since ‘example.com/$’ is used as a regular expression, it maps ‘http://example.com/’, ‘https://example.com’, ‘http://www.example.com/’ and similar to ‘/home/user/example/index.php’.
The :rewrites
rules are searched as a last resort if and only if no
existing file name is matched.
Two functions can help you filling org-protocol-project-alist
with
valid contents: org-protocol-create
and
org-protocol-create-for-org
. The latter is of use if you’re editing
an Org file that is part of a publishing project.
下一页: Org Mobile, 上一页: Protocols, 返回: Miscellaneous [目录][索引]
Org Crypt encrypts the text of an entry, but not the headline, or properties. Behind the scene, it uses the Emacs EasyPG library to encrypt and decrypt files.
Any text below a headline that has a ‘crypt’ tag is automatically
encrypted when the file is saved. To use a different tag, customize
the org-crypt-tag-matcher
setting.
Here is a suggestion for Org Crypt settings in Emacs init file:
(require 'org-crypt) (org-crypt-use-before-save-magic) (setq org-tags-exclude-from-inheritance '("crypt")) (setq org-crypt-key nil) ;; GPG key to use for encryption ;; Either the Key ID or set to nil to use symmetric encryption. (setq auto-save-default nil) ;; Auto-saving does not cooperate with org-crypt.el: so you need to ;; turn it off if you plan to use org-crypt.el quite often. Otherwise, ;; you'll get an (annoying) message each time you start Org. ;; To turn it off only locally, you can insert this: ;; ;; # -*- buffer-auto-save-file-name: nil; -*-
It’s possible to use different keys for different headings by specifying the respective key as property ‘CRYPTKEY’, e.g.:
* Totally secret :crypt: :PROPERTIES: :CRYPTKEY: 0x0123456789012345678901234567890123456789 :END:
Excluding the ‘crypt’ tag from inheritance prevents already encrypted text from being encrypted again.
上一页: Org Crypt, 返回: Miscellaneous [目录][索引]
Org Mobile is a protocol for synchronizing Org files between Emacs and other applications, e.g., on mobile devices. It enables offline-views and capture support for an Org mode system that is rooted on a “real” computer. The external application can also record changes to existing entries.
This appendix describes Org’s support for agenda view formats compatible with Org Mobile. It also describes synchronizing changes, such as to notes, between the mobile application and the computer.
To change tags and TODO states in the mobile application, first
customize the variables org-todo-keywords
, org-tag-alist
and
org-tag-persistent-alist
. These should cover all the important tags
and TODO keywords, even if Org files use only some of them. Though
the mobile application is expected to support in-buffer settings, it
is required to understand TODO states sets (see Per-file keywords) and mutually exclusive tags (see Setting Tags) only for those set in these variables.
• 设置舞台区域: | 用于移动设备。 | |
• 推送到移动应用: | 上传Org文件和议程。 | |
• 从移动应用拉取: | 集成捕获和标记的项。 |
下一页: Pushing to the mobile application, 返回: Org Mobile [目录][索引]
The mobile application needs access to a file directory on
a server153 to interact with Emacs. Pass its location through
the org-mobile-directory
variable. If you can mount that directory
locally just set the variable to point to that directory:
(setq org-mobile-directory "~/orgmobile/")
Alternatively, by using TRAMP (see (tramp)TRAMP User Manual),
org-mobile-directory
may point to a remote directory accessible
through, for example, SSH, SCP, or DAVS:
(setq org-mobile-directory "/davs:user@remote.host:/org/webdav/")
With a public server, consider encrypting the files. Org also
requires OpenSSL installed on the local computer. To turn on
encryption, set the same password in the mobile application and in
Emacs. Set the password in the variable
org-mobile-use-encryption
154. Note that even after the mobile
application encrypts the file contents, the file name remains visible
on the file systems of the local computer, the server, and the mobile
device.
下一页: Pulling from the mobile application, 上一页: Setting up the staging area, 返回: Org Mobile [目录][索引]
The command org-mobile-push
copies files listed in
org-mobile-files
into the staging area. Files include agenda files
(as listed in org-agenda-files
). Customize org-mobile-files
to
add other files. File names are staged with paths relative to
org-directory
, so all files should be inside this directory155.
Push creates a special Org file ‘agendas.org’ with custom agenda views defined by the user156.
Finally, Org writes the file ‘index.org’, containing links to other files. The mobile application reads this file first from the server to determine what other files to download for agendas. For faster downloads, it is expected to only read files whose checksums157 have changed.
上一页: Pushing to the mobile application, 返回: Org Mobile [目录][索引]
The command org-mobile-pull
synchronizes changes with the server.
More specifically, it first pulls the Org files for viewing. It then
appends captured entries and pointers to flagged or changed entries to
the file ‘mobileorg.org’ on the server. Org ultimately integrates its
data in an inbox file format, through the following steps:
org-mobile-inbox-for-pull
. It should reside neither in the
staging area nor on the server. Each captured entry and each
editing event is a top-level entry in the inbox file.
Pressing ? displays the entire flagged note in another window. Org also pushes it to the kill ring. To store flagged note as a normal note, use ? z C-y C-c C-c. Pressing ? twice does these things: first it removes the ‘FLAGGED’ tag; second, it removes the flagged note from the property drawer; third, it signals that manual editing of the flagged entry is now finished.
From the agenda dispatcher, ? returns to the view to finish processing flagged entries. Note that these entries may not be the most recent since the mobile application searches files that were last pulled. To get an updated agenda view with changes since the last pull, pull again.
下一页: History and Acknowledgments, 上一页: Miscellaneous, 返回: Top [目录][索引]
This appendix describes some ways a user can extend the functionality of Org.
• 钩子: | 如何进入Org的内部。 | |
• 附加软件包: | 可用的扩展。 | |
• 添加超链接类型: | 新的自定义链接类型。 | |
• 添加导出后端: | 如何编写新的导出后端。 | |
• 任意语法的表格: | 用于LaTeX和其他程序的Orgtbl。 | |
• 动态块: | 自动填充的块。 | |
• 特殊议程视图: | 自定义视图。 | |
• 加快您的议程: | 关于如何加快日程安排的小贴士。 | |
• 提取议程信息: | 后处理议程信息。 | |
• 使用属性接口: | 编写使用条目属性的程序。 | |
• 使用映射接口: | 在所有或选定条目上映射。 |
下一页: Add-on Packages, 返回: Hacking [目录][索引]
Org has a large number of hook variables for adding functionality. This appendix illustrates using a few. A complete list of hooks with documentation is maintained by the Worg project at https://orgmode.org/worg/doc.html#hooks.
下一页: Adding Hyperlink Types, 上一页: Hooks (2), 返回: Hacking [目录][索引]
Various authors wrote a large number of add-on packages for Org.
These packages are not part of Emacs, but they are distributed as contributed packages with the separate release available at https://orgmode.org. See the ‘contrib/README’ file in the source code directory for a list of contributed files. Worg page with more information is at: https://orgmode.org/worg/org-contrib/.
下一页: Adding Export Back-ends, 上一页: Add-on Packages, 返回: Hacking [目录][索引]
Org has many built-in hyperlink types (see Hyperlinks), and an interface for adding new link types. The following example shows the process of adding Org links to Unix man pages, which look like this
[[man:printf][The printf manual]]
The following ‘ol-man.el’ file implements it
;;; ol-man.el - Support for links to man pages in Org mode (require 'ol) (org-link-set-parameters "man" :follow #'org-man-open :export #'org-man-export :store #'org-man-store-link) (defcustom org-man-command 'man "The Emacs command to be used to display a man page." :group 'org-link :type '(choice (const man) (const woman))) (defun org-man-open (path _) "Visit the manpage on PATH. PATH should be a topic that can be thrown at the man command." (funcall org-man-command path)) (defun org-man-store-link () "Store a link to a man page." (when (memq major-mode '(Man-mode woman-mode)) ;; This is a man page, we do make this link. (let* ((page (org-man-get-page-name)) (link (concat "man:" page)) (description (format "Man page for %s" page))) (org-link-store-props :type "man" :link link :description description)))) (defun org-man-get-page-name () "Extract the page name from the buffer name." ;; This works for both `Man-mode' and `woman-mode'. (if (string-match " \\(\\S-+\\)\\*" (buffer-name)) (match-string 1 (buffer-name)) (error "Cannot create link to this man page"))) (defun org-man-export (link description format _) "Export a man page link from Org files." (let ((path (format "http://man.he.net/?topic=%s§ion=all" link)) (desc (or description link))) (pcase format (`html (format "<a target=\"_blank\" href=\"%s\">%s</a>" path desc)) (`latex (format "\\href{%s}{%s}" path desc)) (`texinfo (format "@uref{%s,%s}" path desc)) (`ascii (format "%s (%s)" desc path)) (t path)))) (provide ol-man) ;;; ol-man.el ends here
To activate links to man pages in Org, enter this in the Emacs init file:
(require 'ol-man)
A review of ‘ol-man.el’:
org-link-set-parameters
defines a new link type with ‘man’
prefix and associates functions for following, exporting and
storing such links. See the variable org-link-parameters
for
a complete list of possible associations.
For example, org-man-store-link
is responsible for storing a link
when org-store-link
(see Handling Links) is called from a buffer
displaying a man page. It first checks if the major mode is
appropriate. If check fails, the function returns nil
, which
means it isn’t responsible for creating a link to the current
buffer. Otherwise the function makes a link string by combining
the ‘man:’ prefix with the man topic. It also provides a default
description. The function org-insert-link
can insert it back
into an Org buffer later on.
下一页: Tables in Arbitrary Syntax, 上一页: Adding Hyperlink Types, 返回: Hacking [目录][索引]
Org’s export engine makes it easy for writing new back-ends. The framework on which the engine was built makes it easy to derive new back-ends from existing ones.
The two main entry points to the export engine are:
org-export-define-backend
and org-export-define-derived-backend
.
To grok these functions, see ‘ox-latex.el’ for an example of defining
a new back-end from scratch, and ‘ox-beamer.el’ for an example of
deriving from an existing engine.
For creating a new back-end from scratch, first set its name as
a symbol in an alist consisting of elements and export functions. To
make the back-end visible to the export dispatcher, set :menu-entry
keyword. For export options specific to this back-end, set the
:options-alist
.
For creating a new back-end from an existing one, set
:translate-alist
to an alist of export functions. This alist
replaces the parent back-end functions.
For complete documentation, see the Org Export Reference on Worg.
下一页: Dynamic Blocks, 上一页: Adding Export Back-ends, 返回: Hacking [目录][索引]
Due to Org’s success in handling tables with Orgtbl, a frequently requested feature is the use of Org’s table functions in other modes, e.g., LaTeX. This would be hard to do in a general way without complicated customization nightmares. Moreover, that would take Org away from its simplicity roots that Orgtbl has proven. There is, however, an alternate approach to accomplishing the same.
This approach involves implementing a custom translate function that operates on a native Org source table to produce a table in another format. This strategy would keep the excellently working Orgtbl simple and isolate complications, if any, confined to the translate function. To add more alien table formats, we just add more translate functions. Also the burden of developing custom translate functions for new table formats is in the hands of those who know those formats best.
• 无线电表格: | 发送和接收无线电表格。 | |
• LaTeX示例: | 一步一步,完整的教程。 | |
• 转换器函数: | 复制并修改。 |
下一页: A LaTeX example, 返回: Tables in Arbitrary Syntax [目录][索引]
Radio tables are target locations for translated tables that are not near their source. Org finds the target location and inserts the translated table.
The key to finding the target location is the magic words ‘BEGIN/END RECEIVE ORGTBL’. They have to appear as comments in the current mode. If the mode is C, then:
/* BEGIN RECEIVE ORGTBL table_name */ /* END RECEIVE ORGTBL table_name */
At the location of source, Org needs a special line to direct Orgtbl to translate and to find the target for inserting the translated table. 例如:
#+ORGTBL: SEND table_name translation_function arguments ...
‘table_name’ is the table’s reference name, which is also used in the receiver lines, and the ‘translation_function’ is the Lisp function that translates. This line, in addition, may also contain alternating key and value arguments at the end. The translation function gets these values as a property list. A few standard parameters are already recognized and acted upon before the translation function is called:
Skip the first N lines of the table. Hlines do count; include them if they are to be skipped.
List of columns to be skipped. First Org automatically discards columns with calculation marks and then sends the table to the translator function, which then skips columns as specified in ‘skipcols’.
To keep the source table intact in the buffer without being disturbed when the source file is compiled or otherwise being worked on, use one of these strategies:
\bye
in TeX
and \end{document}
in LaTeX.
下一页: Translator functions, 上一页: Radio tables, 返回: Tables in Arbitrary Syntax [目录][索引]
To wrap a source table in LaTeX, use the ‘comment’ environment
provided by ‘comment.sty’159. To activate it, put
\usepackage{comment}
in the document header. Orgtbl mode inserts
a radio table skeleton160 with the command M-x orgtbl-insert-radio-table, which prompts for a table name. For
example, if ‘salesfigures’ is the name, the template inserts:
% BEGIN RECEIVE ORGTBL salesfigures % END RECEIVE ORGTBL salesfigures \begin{comment} #+ORGTBL: SEND salesfigures orgtbl-to-latex | | | \end{comment}
The line ‘#+ORGTBL: SEND’ tells Orgtbl mode to use the function
orgtbl-to-latex
to convert the table to LaTeX format, then insert
the table at the target (receive) location named ‘salesfigures’. Now
the table is ready for data entry. It can even use spreadsheet
features161:
% BEGIN RECEIVE ORGTBL salesfigures % END RECEIVE ORGTBL salesfigures \begin{comment} #+ORGTBL: SEND salesfigures orgtbl-to-latex | Month | Days | Nr sold | per day | |-------+------+---------+---------| | Jan | 23 | 55 | 2.4 | | Feb | 21 | 16 | 0.8 | | March | 22 | 278 | 12.6 | #+TBLFM: $4=$3/$2;%.1f % $ (optional extra dollar to keep Font Lock happy, see footnote) \end{comment}
After editing, C-c C-c inserts the translated table at the target location, between the two marker lines.
For hand-made custom tables, note that the translator needs to skip the first two lines of the source table. Also the command has to splice out the target table without the header and footer.
\begin{tabular}{lrrr} Month & \multicolumn{1}{c}{Days} & Nr.\ sold & per day\\ % BEGIN RECEIVE ORGTBL salesfigures % END RECEIVE ORGTBL salesfigures \end{tabular} % \begin{comment} #+ORGTBL: SEND salesfigures orgtbl-to-latex :splice t :skip 2 | Month | Days | Nr sold | per day | |-------+------+---------+---------| | Jan | 23 | 55 | 2.4 | | Feb | 21 | 16 | 0.8 | | March | 22 | 278 | 12.6 | #+TBLFM: $4=$3/$2;%.1f \end{comment}
The LaTeX translator function orgtbl-to-latex
is already part of
Orgtbl mode and uses a ‘tabular’ environment to typeset the table and
marks horizontal lines with \hline
. For additional parameters to
control output, see Translator functions:
When {{{var(BOOLEAN}}} is non-nil
, return only table body lines;
i.e., not wrapped in ‘tabular’ environment. Default is nil
.
Format string to warp each field. It should contain ‘%s’ for the original field value. For example, to wrap each field value in dollar symbol, you could use ‘:fmt "$%s$"’. Format can also wrap a property list with column numbers and formats, for example ‘:fmt (2 "$%s$" 4 "%s\\%%")’. In place of a string, a function of one argument can be used; the function must return a formatted string.
Format numbers as exponentials. The spec should have ‘%s’ twice for inserting mantissa and exponent, for example ‘"%s\\times10^{%s}"’. This may also be a property list with column numbers and formats, for example ‘:efmt (2 "$%s\\times10^{%s}$" 4 "$%s\\cdot10^{%s}$")’. After EFMT has been applied to a value, FMT—see above—is also applied. Functions with two arguments can be supplied instead of strings. By default, no special formatting is applied.
上一页: A LaTeX example, 返回: Tables in Arbitrary Syntax [目录][索引]
Orgtbl mode has built-in translator functions: orgtbl-to-csv
(comma-separated values), orgtbl-to-tsv
(TAB-separated values),
orgtbl-to-latex
, orgtbl-to-html
, orgtbl-to-texinfo
,
orgtbl-to-unicode
and orgtbl-to-orgtbl
. They use the generic
translator, orgtbl-to-generic
, which delegates translations to
various export back-ends.
Properties passed to the function through the ‘ORGTBL SEND’ line take
precedence over properties defined inside the function. For example,
this overrides the default LaTeX line endings, \\
, with \\[2mm]
:
#+ORGTBL: SEND test orgtbl-to-latex :lend " \\\\[2mm]"
For a new language translator, define a converter function. It can be a generic function, such as shown in this example. It marks a beginning and ending of a table with ‘!BTBL!’ and ‘!ETBL!’; a beginning and ending of lines with ‘!BL!’ and ‘!EL!’; and uses a TAB for a field separator:
(defun orgtbl-to-language (table params) "Convert the orgtbl-mode TABLE to language." (orgtbl-to-generic table (org-combine-plists '(:tstart "!BTBL!" :tend "!ETBL!" :lstart "!BL!" :lend "!EL!" :sep "\t") params)))
The documentation for the orgtbl-to-generic
function shows
a complete list of parameters, each of which can be passed through to
orgtbl-to-latex
, orgtbl-to-texinfo
, and any other function using
that generic function.
For complicated translations the generic translator function could be
replaced by a custom translator function. Such a custom function must
take two arguments and return a single string containing the formatted
table. The first argument is the table whose lines are a list of
fields or the symbol hline
. The second argument is the property
list consisting of parameters specified in the ‘#+ORGTBL: SEND’ line.
Please share your translator functions by posting them to the Org
users mailing list, at emacs-orgmode@gnu.org.
下一页: Special Agenda Views, 上一页: Tables in Arbitrary Syntax, 返回: Hacking [目录][索引]
Org supports dynamic blocks in Org documents. They are inserted with begin and end markers like any other code block, but the contents are updated automatically by a user function.
You can insert a dynamic block with org-dynamic-block-insert-dblock
,
which is bound to C-c C-x x by default. For example,
C-c C-x x c l o c k t a b l e RET inserts a table that
updates the work time (see Clocking Work Time).
Dynamic blocks can have names and function parameters. The syntax is similar to source code block specifications:
#+BEGIN: myblock :parameter1 value1 :parameter2 value2 ... ... #+END:
These commands update dynamic blocks:
org-dblock-update
)Update dynamic block at point.
Update all dynamic blocks in the current file.
Before updating a dynamic block, Org removes content between the
‘BEGIN’ and ‘END’ markers. Org then reads the parameters on the
‘BEGIN’ line for passing to the writer function as a plist. The
previous content of the dynamic block becomes erased from the buffer
and appended to the plist under :content
.
The syntax for naming a writer function with a dynamic block labeled
‘myblock’ is: org-dblock-write:myblock
.
The following is an example of a dynamic block and a block writer function that updates the time when the function was last run:
#+BEGIN: block-update-time :format "on %m/%d/%Y at %H:%M" ... #+END:
The dynamic block’s writer function:
(defun org-dblock-write:block-update-time (params) (let ((fmt (or (plist-get params :format) "%d. %m. %Y"))) (insert "Last block update at: " (format-time-string fmt))))
To keep dynamic blocks up-to-date in an Org file, use the function,
org-update-all-dblocks
in hook, such as before-save-hook
. The
org-update-all-dblocks
function does not run if the file is not in
Org mode.
Dynamic blocks, like any other block, can be narrowed with
org-narrow-to-block
.
下一页: Speeding Up Your Agendas, 上一页: Dynamic Blocks, 返回: Hacking [目录][索引]
Org provides a special hook to further limit items in agenda views:
agenda
, agenda*
162, todo
, alltodo
, tags
, tags-todo
,
tags-tree
. Specify a custom function that tests inclusion of every
matched item in the view. This function can also skip as much as is
needed.
For a global condition applicable to agenda views, use the
org-agenda-skip-function-global
variable. Org uses a global
condition with org-agenda-skip-function
for custom searching.
This example defines a function for a custom view showing TODO items with ‘waiting’ status. Manually this is a multi-step search process, but with a custom view, this can be automated as follows:
The custom function searches the subtree for the ‘waiting’ tag and
returns nil
on match. Otherwise it gives the location from where
the search continues.
(defun my-skip-unless-waiting () "Skip trees that are not waiting" (let ((subtree-end (save-excursion (org-end-of-subtree t)))) (if (re-search-forward ":waiting:" subtree-end t) nil ; tag found, do not skip subtree-end))) ; tag not found, continue after end of subtree
To use this custom function in a custom agenda command:
(org-add-agenda-custom-command '("b" todo "PROJECT" ((org-agenda-skip-function 'my-skip-unless-waiting) (org-agenda-overriding-header "Projects waiting for something: "))))
Note that this also binds org-agenda-overriding-header
to a more
meaningful string suitable for the agenda view.
Search for entries with a limit set on levels for the custom search. This is a general approach to creating custom searches in Org. To include all levels, use ‘LEVEL>0’163. Then to selectively pick the matched entries, use org-agenda-skip-function
, which also accepts Lisp forms, such as org-agenda-skip-entry-if
and org-agenda-skip-subtree-if
. 例如:
Skip current entry if it has been scheduled.
Skip current entry if it has not been scheduled.
Skip current entry if it has a deadline.
Skip current entry if it has a deadline, or if it is scheduled.
Skip current entry if the TODO keyword is TODO or WAITING.
Skip current entry if the TODO keyword marks a DONE state.
Skip current entry if it has any timestamp, may also be deadline or scheduled.
Skip current entry if the regular expression matches in the entry.
Skip current entry unless the regular expression matches.
Same as above, but check and skip the entire subtree.
The following is an example of a search for ‘waiting’ without the special function:
(org-add-agenda-custom-command '("b" todo "PROJECT" ((org-agenda-skip-function '(org-agenda-skip-subtree-if 'regexp ":waiting:")) (org-agenda-overriding-header "Projects waiting for something: "))))
下一页: Extracting Agenda Information, 上一页: Special Agenda Views, 返回: Hacking [目录][索引]
Some agenda commands slow down when the Org files grow in size or number. Here are tips to speed up:
(setq org-agenda-dim-blocked-tasks nil)
(setq org-agenda-inhibit-startup t)
(setq org-agenda-use-tag-inheritance nil)
These options can be applied to selected agenda views. For more details about generation of agenda views, see the docstrings for the relevant variables, and this dedicated Worg page for agenda optimization.
下一页: Using the Property API, 上一页: Speeding Up Your Agendas, 返回: Hacking [目录][索引]
Org provides commands to access agendas through Emacs batch mode. Through this command-line interface, agendas are automated for further processing or printing.
org-batch-agenda
creates an agenda view in ASCII and outputs to
standard output. This command takes one string parameter. When
string consists of a single character, Org uses it as a key to
org-agenda-custom-commands
. These are the same ones available
through the agenda dispatcher (see Agenda Dispatcher).
This example command line directly prints the TODO list to the printer:
emacs -batch -l ~/.emacs -eval '(org-batch-agenda "t")' | lpr
When the string parameter length is two or more characters, Org matches it with tags/TODO strings. For example, this example command line prints items tagged with ‘shop’, but excludes items tagged with ‘NewYork’:
emacs -batch -l ~/.emacs \ -eval '(org-batch-agenda "+shop-NewYork")' | lpr
An example showing on-the-fly parameter modifications:
emacs -batch -l ~/.emacs \ -eval '(org-batch-agenda "a" \ org-agenda-span (quote month) \ org-agenda-include-diary nil \ org-agenda-files (quote ("~/org/project.org")))' \ | lpr
which produces an agenda for the next 30 days from just the ‘~/org/projects.org’ file.
For structured processing of agenda output, use org-batch-agenda-csv
with the following fields:
The category of the item
The headline, without TODO keyword, TAGS and PRIORITY
The type of the agenda entry, can be
todo | selected in TODO match |
tagsmatch | selected in tags match |
diary | imported from diary |
deadline | a deadline |
scheduled | scheduled |
timestamp | appointment, selected by timestamp |
closed | entry was closed on date |
upcoming-deadline | warning about nearing deadline |
past-scheduled | forwarded scheduled item |
block | entry has date block including date |
The TODO keyword, if any
All tags including inherited ones, separated by colons
The relevant date, like ‘2007-2-14’
The time, like ‘15:00-16:50’
String with extra planning info
The priority letter if any was given
The computed numerical priority
If the selection of the agenda item was based on a timestamp, including those items with ‘DEADLINE’ and ‘SCHEDULED’ keywords, then Org includes date and time in the output.
If the selection of the agenda item was based on a timestamp (or deadline/scheduled), then Org includes date and time in the output.
Here is an example of a post-processing script in Perl. It takes the CSV output from Emacs and prints with a checkbox:
#!/usr/bin/perl # define the Emacs command to run $cmd = "emacs -batch -l ~/.emacs -eval '(org-batch-agenda-csv \"t\")'"; # run it and capture the output $agenda = qx{$cmd 2>/dev/null}; # loop over all lines foreach $line (split(/\n/,$agenda)) { # get the individual values ($category,$head,$type,$todo,$tags,$date,$time,$extra, $priority_l,$priority_n) = split(/,/,$line); # process and print print "[ ] $head\n"; }
下一页: Using the Mapping API, 上一页: Extracting Agenda Information, 返回: Hacking [目录][索引]
Here is a description of the functions that can be used to work with properties.
Get all properties of the entry at point-or-marker POM.
This includes the TODO keyword, the tags, time strings for deadline,
scheduled, and clocking, and any additional properties defined in the
entry. The return value is an alist. Keys may occur multiple times
if the property key was used several times. POM may also
be nil
, in which case the current entry is used. If
WHICH is nil
or all
, get all properties. If
WHICH is special
or standard
, only get that subclass.
Get value of PROPERTY for entry at point-or-marker
POM. By default, this only looks at properties defined
locally in the entry. If INHERIT is non-nil
and the
entry does not have the property, then also check higher levels of the
hierarchy. If INHERIT is the symbol selective
, use
inheritance if and only if the setting of
org-use-property-inheritance
selects PROPERTY for
inheritance.
Delete the property PROPERTY from entry at point-or-marker POM.
Get all property keys in the current buffer.
Set PROPERTY at point-or-marker POM to VALUES. VALUES should be a list of strings. They are concatenated, with spaces as separators.
Treat the value of the property PROPERTY as a whitespace-separated list of values and return the values as a list of strings.
Treat the value of the property PROPERTY as a whitespace-separated list of values and make sure that VALUE is in this list.
Treat the value of the property PROPERTY as a whitespace-separated list of values and make sure that VALUE is not in this list.
Treat the value of the property PROPERTY as a whitespace-separated list of values and check if VALUE is in this list.
Hook for functions supplying allowed values for a specific property.
The functions must take a single argument, the name of the property,
and return a flat list of allowed values. If ‘:ETC’ is one of the
values, use the values as completion help, but allow also other values
to be entered. The functions must return nil
if they are not
responsible for this property.
上一页: Using the Property API, 返回: Hacking [目录][索引]
Org has sophisticated mapping capabilities to find all entries satisfying certain criteria. Internally, this functionality is used to produce agenda views, but there is also an API that can be used to execute arbitrary functions for each or selected entries. The main entry point for this API is:
Call FUNC at each headline selected by MATCH in SCOPE.
FUNC is a function or a Lisp form. With point positioned at the beginning of the headline, call the function without arguments. Org returns an alist of return values of calls to the function.
To avoid preserving point, Org wraps the call to FUNC in
save-excursion
form. After evaluation, Org moves point to the end
of the line that was just processed. Search continues from that point
forward. This may not always work as expected under some conditions,
such as if the current sub-tree was removed by a previous archiving
operation. In such rare circumstances, Org skips the next entry
entirely when it should not. To stop Org from such skips, make
FUNC set the variable org-map-continue-from
to a specific
buffer position.
MATCH is a tags/property/TODO match. Org iterates only
matched headlines. Org iterates over all headlines when
MATCH is nil
or t
.
SCOPE determines the scope of this command. It can be any of:
nil
The current buffer, respecting the restriction, if any.
tree
The subtree started with the entry at point.
region
The entries within the active region, if any.
file
The current buffer, without restriction.
file-with-archives
The current buffer, and any archives associated with it.
agenda
All agenda files.
agenda-with-archives
All agenda files with any archive files associated with them.
If this is a list, all files in the list are scanned.
The remaining arguments are treated as settings for the scanner’s skipping facilities. Valid arguments are:
The mapping routine can call any arbitrary function, even functions that change meta data or query the property API (see Using the Property API). Here are some handy functions:
Change the TODO state of the entry. See the docstring of the functions for the many possible values for the argument ARG.
Change the priority of the entry. See the docstring of this function for the possible values for ACTION.
Toggle the tag TAG in the current entry. Setting
ONOFF to either on
or off
does not toggle tag, but
ensure that it is either on or off.
This example turns all entries tagged with ‘TOMORROW’ into TODO entries with keyword ‘UPCOMING’. Org ignores entries in comment trees and archive trees.
(org-map-entries '(org-todo "UPCOMING") "+TOMORROW" 'file 'archive 'comment)
The following example counts the number of entries with TODO keyword ‘WAITING’, in all agenda files.
(length (org-map-entries t "/+WAITING" 'agenda))
下一页: GNU Free Documentation License, 上一页: Hacking, 返回: Top [目录][索引]
Org was born in 2003, out of frustration over the user interface of the Emacs Outline mode. I was trying to organize my notes and projects, and using Emacs seemed to be the natural way to go. However, having to remember eleven different commands with two or three keys per command, only to hide and show parts of the outline tree, that seemed entirely unacceptable to me. Also, when using outlines to take notes, I constantly wanted to restructure the tree, organizing it parallel to my thoughts and plans. Visibility cycling and structure editing were originally implemented in the package ‘outline-magic.el’, but quickly moved to the more general ‘org.el’. As this environment became comfortable for project planning, the next step was adding TODO entries, basic timestamps, and table support. These areas highlighted the two main goals that Org still has today: to be a new, outline-based, plain text mode with innovative and intuitive editing features, and to incorporate project planning functionality directly into a notes file.
Since the first release, literally thousands of emails to me or to the mailing list have provided a constant stream of bug reports, feedback, new ideas, and sometimes patches and add-on code. Many thanks to everyone who has helped to improve this package. I am trying to keep here a list of the people who had significant influence in shaping one or more aspects of Org. The list may not be complete, if I have forgotten someone, please accept my apologies and let me know.
Before I get to this list, a few special mentions are in order:
Bastien has written a large number of extensions to Org (most of them integrated into the core by now), including the LaTeX exporter and the plain list parser. His support during the early days was central to the success of this project. Bastien also invented Worg, helped establishing the Web presence of Org, and sponsored hosting costs for the orgmode.org website. Bastien stepped in as maintainer of Org between 2011 and 2013, at a time when I desperately needed a break.
Eric and Dan are jointly responsible for the Org Babel system, which turns Org into a multi-language environment for evaluating code and doing literate programming and reproducible research. This has become one of Org’s killer features that define what Org is today.
John has contributed a number of great ideas and patches directly to Org, including the attachment system (‘org-attach.el’), integration with Apple Mail (‘org-mac-message.el’), hierarchical dependencies of TODO items, habit tracking (‘org-habits.el’), and encryption (‘org-crypt.el’). Also, the capture system is really an extended copy of his great ‘remember.el’.
Without Sebastian, the HTML/XHTML publishing of Org would be the pitiful work of an ignorant amateur. Sebastian has pushed this part of Org onto a much higher level. He also wrote ‘org-info.js’, a JavaScript program for displaying webpages derived from Org using an Info-like or a folding interface with single-key navigation.
See below for the full list of contributions! Again, please let me know what I am missing here!
I (Bastien) have been maintaining Org between 2011 and 2013. This appendix would not be complete without adding a few more acknowledgments and thanks.
I am first grateful to Carsten for his trust while handing me over the maintainership of Org. His unremitting support is what really helped me getting more confident over time, with both the community and the code.
When I took over maintainership, I knew I would have to make Org more collaborative than ever, as I would have to rely on people that are more knowledgeable than I am on many parts of the code. Here is a list of the persons I could rely on, they should really be considered co-maintainers, either of the code or the community:
Eric is maintaining the Babel parts of Org. His reactivity here kept me away from worrying about possible bugs here and let me focus on other parts.
Nicolas is maintaining the consistency of the deepest parts of Org. His work on ‘org-element.el’ and ‘ox.el’ has been outstanding, and it opened the doors for many new ideas and features. He rewrote many of the old exporters to use the new export engine, and helped with documenting this major change. More importantly (if that’s possible), he has been more than reliable during all the work done for Org 8.0, and always very reactive on the mailing list.
Achim rewrote the building process of Org, turning some ad hoc tools into a flexible and conceptually clean process. He patiently coped with the many hiccups that such a change can create for users.
The Org mode mailing list would not be such a nice place without Nick, who patiently helped users so many times. It is impossible to overestimate such a great help, and the list would not be so active without him.
I received support from so many users that it is clearly impossible to be fair when shortlisting a few of them, but Org’s history would not be complete if the ones above were not mentioned in this manual.
下一页: Main Index, 上一页: History and Acknowledgments, 返回: Top [目录][索引]
Copyright © 2000, 2001, 2002, 2007, 2008 Free Software Foundation, Inc. http://fsf.org/ Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other functional and useful document free in the sense of freedom: to assure everyone the effective freedom to copy and redistribute it, with or without modifying it, either commercially or noncommercially. Secondarily, this License preserves for the author and publisher a way to get credit for their work, while not being considered responsible for modifications made by others.
This License is a kind of “copyleft”, which means that derivative works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense. It complements the GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft license designed for free software.
We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for free software, because free software needs free documentation: a free program should come with manuals providing the same freedoms that the software does. But this License is not limited to software manuals; it can be used for any textual work, regardless of subject matter or whether it is published as a printed book. We recommend this License principally for works whose purpose is instruction or reference.
This License applies to any manual or other work, in any medium, that contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it can be distributed under the terms of this License. Such a notice grants a world-wide, royalty-free license, unlimited in duration, to use that work under the conditions stated herein. The “Document”, below, refers to any such manual or work. Any member of the public is a licensee, and is addressed as “you”. You accept the license if you copy, modify or distribute the work in a way requiring permission under copyright law.
A “Modified Version” of the Document means any work containing the Document or a portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with modifications and/or translated into another language.
A “Secondary Section” is a named appendix or a front-matter section of the Document that deals exclusively with the relationship of the publishers or authors of the Document to the Document’s overall subject (or to related matters) and contains nothing that could fall directly within that overall subject. (Thus, if the Document is in part a textbook of mathematics, a Secondary Section may not explain any mathematics.) The relationship could be a matter of historical connection with the subject or with related matters, or of legal, commercial, philosophical, ethical or political position regarding them.
The “Invariant Sections” are certain Secondary Sections whose titles are designated, as being those of Invariant Sections, in the notice that says that the Document is released under this License. If a section does not fit the above definition of Secondary then it is not allowed to be designated as Invariant. The Document may contain zero Invariant Sections. If the Document does not identify any Invariant Sections then there are none.
The “Cover Texts” are certain short passages of text that are listed, as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice that says that the Document is released under this License. A Front-Cover Text may be at most 5 words, and a Back-Cover Text may be at most 25 words.
A “Transparent” copy of the Document means a machine-readable copy, represented in a format whose specification is available to the general public, that is suitable for revising the document straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for images composed of pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) some widely available drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to text formatters or for automatic translation to a variety of formats suitable for input to text formatters. A copy made in an otherwise Transparent file format whose markup, or absence of markup, has been arranged to thwart or discourage subsequent modification by readers is not Transparent. An image format is not Transparent if used for any substantial amount of text. A copy that is not “Transparent” is called “Opaque”.
Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain ASCII without markup, Texinfo input format, LaTeX input format, SGML or XML using a publicly available DTD, and standard-conforming simple HTML, PostScript or PDF designed for human modification. Examples of transparent image formats include PNG, XCF and JPG. Opaque formats include proprietary formats that can be read and edited only by proprietary word processors, SGML or XML for which the DTD and/or processing tools are not generally available, and the machine-generated HTML, PostScript or PDF produced by some word processors for output purposes only.
The “Title Page” means, for a printed book, the title page itself, plus such following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the material this License requires to appear in the title page. For works in formats which do not have any title page as such, “Title Page” means the text near the most prominent appearance of the work’s title, preceding the beginning of the body of the text.
The “publisher” means any person or entity that distributes copies of the Document to the public.
A section “Entitled XYZ” means a named subunit of the Document whose title either is precisely XYZ or contains XYZ in parentheses following text that translates XYZ in another language. (Here XYZ stands for a specific section name mentioned below, such as “Acknowledgements”, “Dedications”, “Endorsements”, or “History”.) To “Preserve the Title” of such a section when you modify the Document means that it remains a section “Entitled XYZ” according to this definition.
The Document may include Warranty Disclaimers next to the notice which states that this License applies to the Document. These Warranty Disclaimers are considered to be included by reference in this License, but only as regards disclaiming warranties: any other implication that these Warranty Disclaimers may have is void and has no effect on the meaning of this License.
You may copy and distribute the Document in any medium, either commercially or noncommercially, provided that this License, the copyright notices, and the license notice saying this License applies to the Document are reproduced in all copies, and that you add no other conditions whatsoever to those of this License. You may not use technical measures to obstruct or control the reading or further copying of the copies you make or distribute. However, you may accept compensation in exchange for copies. If you distribute a large enough number of copies you must also follow the conditions in section 3.
You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above, and you may publicly display copies.
If you publish printed copies (or copies in media that commonly have printed covers) of the Document, numbering more than 100, and the Document’s license notice requires Cover Texts, you must enclose the copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all these Cover Texts: Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and Back-Cover Texts on the back cover. Both covers must also clearly and legibly identify you as the publisher of these copies. The front cover must present the full title with all words of the title equally prominent and visible. You may add other material on the covers in addition. Copying with changes limited to the covers, as long as they preserve the title of the Document and satisfy these conditions, can be treated as verbatim copying in other respects.
If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit legibly, you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit reasonably) on the actual cover, and continue the rest onto adjacent pages.
If you publish or distribute Opaque copies of the Document numbering more than 100, you must either include a machine-readable Transparent copy along with each Opaque copy, or state in or with each Opaque copy a computer-network location from which the general network-using public has access to download using public-standard network protocols a complete Transparent copy of the Document, free of added material. If you use the latter option, you must take reasonably prudent steps, when you begin distribution of Opaque copies in quantity, to ensure that this Transparent copy will remain thus accessible at the stated location until at least one year after the last time you distribute an Opaque copy (directly or through your agents or retailers) of that edition to the public.
It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of the Document well before redistributing any large number of copies, to give them a chance to provide you with an updated version of the Document.
You may copy and distribute a Modified Version of the Document under the conditions of sections 2 and 3 above, provided that you release the Modified Version under precisely this License, with the Modified Version filling the role of the Document, thus licensing distribution and modification of the Modified Version to whoever possesses a copy of it. In addition, you must do these things in the Modified Version:
If the Modified Version includes new front-matter sections or appendices that qualify as Secondary Sections and contain no material copied from the Document, you may at your option designate some or all of these sections as invariant. To do this, add their titles to the list of Invariant Sections in the Modified Version’s license notice. These titles must be distinct from any other section titles.
You may add a section Entitled “Endorsements”, provided it contains nothing but endorsements of your Modified Version by various parties—for example, statements of peer review or that the text has been approved by an organization as the authoritative definition of a standard.
You may add a passage of up to five words as a Front-Cover Text, and a passage of up to 25 words as a Back-Cover Text, to the end of the list of Cover Texts in the Modified Version. Only one passage of Front-Cover Text and one of Back-Cover Text may be added by (or through arrangements made by) any one entity. If the Document already includes a cover text for the same cover, previously added by you or by arrangement made by the same entity you are acting on behalf of, you may not add another; but you may replace the old one, on explicit permission from the previous publisher that added the old one.
The author(s) and publisher(s) of the Document do not by this License give permission to use their names for publicity for or to assert or imply endorsement of any Modified Version.
You may combine the Document with other documents released under this License, under the terms defined in section 4 above for modified versions, provided that you include in the combination all of the Invariant Sections of all of the original documents, unmodified, and list them all as Invariant Sections of your combined work in its license notice, and that you preserve all their Warranty Disclaimers.
The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and multiple identical Invariant Sections may be replaced with a single copy. If there are multiple Invariant Sections with the same name but different contents, make the title of each such section unique by adding at the end of it, in parentheses, the name of the original author or publisher of that section if known, or else a unique number. Make the same adjustment to the section titles in the list of Invariant Sections in the license notice of the combined work.
In the combination, you must combine any sections Entitled “History” in the various original documents, forming one section Entitled “History”; likewise combine any sections Entitled “Acknowledgements”, and any sections Entitled “Dedications”. You must delete all sections Entitled “Endorsements.”
You may make a collection consisting of the Document and other documents released under this License, and replace the individual copies of this License in the various documents with a single copy that is included in the collection, provided that you follow the rules of this License for verbatim copying of each of the documents in all other respects.
You may extract a single document from such a collection, and distribute it individually under this License, provided you insert a copy of this License into the extracted document, and follow this License in all other respects regarding verbatim copying of that document.
A compilation of the Document or its derivatives with other separate and independent documents or works, in or on a volume of a storage or distribution medium, is called an “aggregate” if the copyright resulting from the compilation is not used to limit the legal rights of the compilation’s users beyond what the individual works permit. When the Document is included in an aggregate, this License does not apply to the other works in the aggregate which are not themselves derivative works of the Document.
If the Cover Text requirement of section 3 is applicable to these copies of the Document, then if the Document is less than one half of the entire aggregate, the Document’s Cover Texts may be placed on covers that bracket the Document within the aggregate, or the electronic equivalent of covers if the Document is in electronic form. Otherwise they must appear on printed covers that bracket the whole aggregate.
Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may distribute translations of the Document under the terms of section 4. Replacing Invariant Sections with translations requires special permission from their copyright holders, but you may include translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the original versions of these Invariant Sections. You may include a translation of this License, and all the license notices in the Document, and any Warranty Disclaimers, provided that you also include the original English version of this License and the original versions of those notices and disclaimers. In case of a disagreement between the translation and the original version of this License or a notice or disclaimer, the original version will prevail.
If a section in the Document is Entitled “Acknowledgements”, “Dedications”, or “History”, the requirement (section 4) to Preserve its Title (section 1) will typically require changing the actual title.
You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Document except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute it is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License.
However, if you cease all violation of this License, then your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated (a) provisionally, unless and until the copyright holder explicitly and finally terminates your license, and (b) permanently, if the copyright holder fails to notify you of the violation by some reasonable means prior to 60 days after the cessation.
Moreover, your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the violation by some reasonable means, this is the first time you have received notice of violation of this License (for any work) from that copyright holder, and you cure the violation prior to 30 days after your receipt of the notice.
Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate the licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License. If your rights have been terminated and not permanently reinstated, receipt of a copy of some or all of the same material does not give you any rights to use it.
The Free Software Foundation may publish new, revised versions of the GNU Free Documentation License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. See http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/.
Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version number. If the Document specifies that a particular numbered version of this License “or any later version” applies to it, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that specified version or of any later version that has been published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation. If the Document does not specify a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation. If the Document specifies that a proxy can decide which future versions of this License can be used, that proxy’s public statement of acceptance of a version permanently authorizes you to choose that version for the Document.
“Massive Multiauthor Collaboration Site” (or “MMC Site”) means any World Wide Web server that publishes copyrightable works and also provides prominent facilities for anybody to edit those works. A public wiki that anybody can edit is an example of such a server. A “Massive Multiauthor Collaboration” (or “MMC”) contained in the site means any set of copyrightable works thus published on the MMC site.
“CC-BY-SA” means the Creative Commons Attribution-Share Alike 3.0 license published by Creative Commons Corporation, a not-for-profit corporation with a principal place of business in San Francisco, California, as well as future copyleft versions of that license published by that same organization.
“Incorporate” means to publish or republish a Document, in whole or in part, as part of another Document.
An MMC is “eligible for relicensing” if it is licensed under this License, and if all works that were first published under this License somewhere other than this MMC, and subsequently incorporated in whole or in part into the MMC, (1) had no cover texts or invariant sections, and (2) were thus incorporated prior to November 1, 2008.
The operator of an MMC Site may republish an MMC contained in the site under CC-BY-SA on the same site at any time before August 1, 2009, provided the MMC is eligible for relicensing.
To use this License in a document you have written, include a copy of the License in the document and put the following copyright and license notices just after the title page:
Copyright (C) YEAR YOUR NAME. Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
If you have Invariant Sections, Front-Cover Texts and Back-Cover Texts, replace the “with…Texts.” line with this:
with the Invariant Sections being LIST THEIR TITLES, with the Front-Cover Texts being LIST, and with the Back-Cover Texts being LIST.
If you have Invariant Sections without Cover Texts, or some other combination of the three, merge those two alternatives to suit the situation.
If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we recommend releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of free software license, such as the GNU General Public License, to permit their use in free software.
下一页: Key Index, 上一页: GNU Free Documentation License, 返回: Top [目录][索引]
Jump to: | *
+
_
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z |
---|
Jump to: | *
+
_
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z |
---|
下一页: Command and Function Index, 上一页: Main Index, 返回: Top [目录][索引]
Jump to: | !
#
$
%
'
*
+
,
-
.
/
1
:
<
>
?
[
^
_
`
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Z |
---|
Jump to: | !
#
$
%
'
*
+
,
-
.
/
1
:
<
>
?
[
^
_
`
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Z |
---|
下一页: Variable Index, 上一页: Key Index, 返回: Top [目录][索引]
Jump to: | L N O P W |
---|
Jump to: | L N O P W |
---|
上一页: Command and Function Index, 返回: Top [目录][索引]
This is not a complete index of variables and faces, only the ones that are mentioned in the manual. For a more complete list, use M-x org-customize and then click yourself through the tree.
Jump to: | C L O P U |
---|
Jump to: | C L O P U |
---|
If you do not use Font Lock globally turn it on in Org buffer with ‘(add-hook 'org-mode-hook 'turn-on-font-lock)’.
Please consider subscribing to the mailing list in order to minimize the work the mailing list moderators have to do.
See the variables org-special-ctrl-a/e
, org-special-ctrl-k
,
and org-ctrl-k-protect-subtree
to configure special behavior of
C-a, C-e, and C-k in headlines. Note
also that clocking only works with headings indented less than 30
stars.
See, however, the option org-cycle-emulate-tab
.
The indirect buffer contains the entire buffer, but is narrowed to the current tree. Editing the indirect buffer also changes the original buffer, but without affecting visibility in that buffer. For more information about indirect buffers, see (emacs)GNU Emacs Manual.
When org-agenda-inhibit-startup
is non-nil
, Org does not
honor the default visibility state when first opening a file for the
agenda (see Speeding Up Your Agendas).
See also the variable org-show-context-detail
to decide how
much context is shown around each match.
This depends on the option org-remove-highlights-with-change
.
When using ‘*’ as a bullet, lines must be indented so that they are not interpreted as headlines. Also, when you are hiding leading stars to get a clean outline view, plain list items starting with a star may be hard to distinguish from true headlines. In short: even though ‘*’ is supported, it may be better to not use it for plain list items.
You can filter out any of them by configuring
org-plain-list-ordered-item-terminator
.
You can also get ‘a.’, ‘A.’, ‘a)’ and ‘A)’ by configuring
org-list-allow-alphabetical
. To minimize confusion with normal
text, those are limited to one character only. Beyond that limit,
bullets automatically become numbers.
If there’s a checkbox in the item, the cookie must be put before the checkbox. If you have activated alphabetical lists, you can also use counters like ‘[@b]’.
If you do not want the item to be split, customize the
variable org-M-RET-may-split-line
.
If you want to cycle around items that way, you may customize
org-list-use-circular-motion
.
See org-list-use-circular-motion
for a cyclic behavior.
Many desktops intercept M-TAB to switch windows. Use C-M-i or ESC TAB instead.
To insert a vertical bar into a table field, use ‘\vert’ or, inside a word ‘abc\vert{}def’.
Org understands references typed by the user as ‘B4’, but it
does not use this syntax when offering a formula for editing. You can
customize this behavior using the variable
org-table-use-standard-references
.
The computation time scales as O(N^2) because table FOO is parsed for each field to be copied.
The file ‘constants.el’ can supply the values of constants in
two different unit systems, ‘SI’ and ‘cgs’. Which one is used depends
on the value of the variable constants-unit-system
. You can use the
‘STARTUP’ options ‘constSI’ and ‘constcgs’ to set this value for the
current buffer.
The printf reformatting is limited in precision because the value passed to it is converted into an “integer” or “double”. The “integer” is limited in size by truncating the signed value to 32 bits. The “double” is limited in precision to 64 bits overall which leaves approximately 16 significant decimal digits.
Such names must start with an alphabetic character and use only alphanumeric/underscore characters.
Plain URIs are recognized only for a well-defined set of schemes. See External Links. Unlike URI syntax, they cannot contain parenthesis or white spaces, either. URIs within angle brackets have no such limitation.
More accurately, the precise behavior depends on how point arrived there—see (elisp)Invisible Text.
To insert a link targeting a headline, in-buffer completion can be used. Just type a star followed by a few optional letters into the buffer and press M-TAB. All headlines in the current buffer are offered as completions.
When targeting a ‘NAME’ keyword, the ‘CAPTION’ keyword is mandatory in order to get proper numbering (see Captions).
The actual behavior of the search depends on the value of the
variable org-link-search-must-match-exact-headline
. If its value is
nil
, then a fuzzy text search is done. If it is t
, then only the
exact headline is matched, ignoring spaces and statistic cookies. If
the value is query-to-create
, then an exact headline is searched; if
it is not found, then the user is queried to create it.
If the headline contains a timestamp, it is removed from the link, which results in a wrong link—you should avoid putting a timestamp in the headline.
The Org Id library must first be loaded, either through
org-customize
, by enabling id
in org-modules
, or by adding
‘(require 'org-id)’ in your Emacs init file.
Note that you do not have to use this command to insert a link. Links in Org are plain text, and you can type or paste them straight into the buffer. By using this command, the links are automatically enclosed in double brackets, and you will be asked for the optional descriptive text.
After insertion of a stored link, the link will be removed
from the list of stored links. To keep it in the list for later use,
use a triple C-u prefix argument to C-c C-l, or
configure the option org-link-keep-stored-after-insertion
.
This works if a function has been defined in the :complete
property of a link in org-link-parameters
.
See the variable org-link-use-indirect-buffer-for-internals
.
For backward compatibility, line numbers can also follow a single colon.
Of course, you can make a document that contains only long lists of TODO items, but this is not required.
Changing the variable org-todo-keywords
only becomes
effective after restarting Org mode in a buffer.
This is also true for the t command in the agenda buffer.
All characters are allowed except ‘@’, ‘^’ and ‘!’, which have a special meaning here.
Check also the variable org-fast-tag-selection-include-todo
,
it allows you to change the TODO state through the tags interface (see
Setting Tags), in case you like to mingle the two concepts. Note
that this means you need to come up with unique keys across both sets
of keywords.
Org mode parses these lines only when Org mode is activated after visiting a file. C-c C-c with point in a line starting with ‘#+’ is simply restarting Org mode for the current buffer.
The corresponding in-buffer setting is: ‘#+STARTUP: logdone’.
The corresponding in-buffer setting is: ‘#+STARTUP: lognotedone’.
See the variable org-log-states-order-reversed
.
Note that the ‘LOGBOOK’ drawer is unfolded when pressing SPC in the agenda to show an entry—use C-u SPC to keep it folded here.
It is possible that Org mode records two timestamps when you
are using both org-log-done
and state change logging. However, it
never prompts for two notes: if you have configured both, the state
change recording note takes precedence and cancel the closing note.
See also the option org-priority-start-cycle-with-default
.
To keep subtasks out of the global TODO list, see the option
org-agenda-todo-list-sublevels
.
With the exception of description lists. But you can allow it
by modifying org-list-automatic-rules
accordingly.
Set the variable org-hierarchical-checkbox-statistics
if you
want such cookies to count all checkboxes below the cookie, not just
those belonging to direct children.
C-u C-c C-c on the first item of a list with no checkbox adds checkboxes to the rest of the list.
As with all these in-buffer settings, pressing C-c C-c activates any changes in the line.
This is only true if the search does not involve more complex tests including properties (see Property Searches).
To extend this default list to all tags used in all agenda
files (see Agenda Views), customize the variable
org-complete-tags-always-offer-all-agenda-tags
.
Keys are automatically assigned to tags that have no configured keys.
If more than one summary type applies to the same property, the parent values are computed according to the first of them.
An age can be defined as a duration, using units defined in
org-duration-units
, e.g., ‘3d 1h’. If any value in the column is as
such, the summary is also expressed as a duration.
Please note that the ‘COLUMNS’ definition must be on a single line; it is wrapped here only because of formatting constraints.
Contributed packages are not part of Emacs, but are distributed with the main distribution of Org—visit https://orgmode.org.
The Org date format is inspired by the standard ISO 8601 date/time format. To use an alternative format, see Custom time format. The day name is optional when you type the date yourself. However, any date inserted or modified by Org adds that day name, for reading convenience.
When working with the standard diary expression functions, you
need to be very careful with the order of the arguments. That order
depends evilly on the variable calendar-date-style
. For example, to
specify a date December 12, 2005, the call might look like
‘(diary-date 12 1 2005)’ or ‘(diary-date 1 12 2005)’ or ‘(diary-date
2005 12 1)’, depending on the settings. This has been the source of
much confusion. Org mode users can resort to special versions of
these functions like org-date
or org-anniversary
. These work just
like the corresponding diary-
functions, but with stable ISO order
of arguments (year, month, day) wherever applicable, independent of
the value of calendar-date-style
.
See the variable org-read-date-prefer-future
. You may set
that variable to the symbol time
to even make a time before now
shift the date to tomorrow.
If you do not need/want the calendar, configure the variable
org-popup-calendar-for-date-prompt
.
You can also use the calendar command . to jump to today’s date, but if you are inserting an hour specification for your timestamp, . will then insert a dot after the hour. By contrast, C-. will always jump to today’s date.
If you find this distracting, turn off the display with
org-read-date-display-live
.
It will still be listed on that date after it has been marked
as done. If you do not like this, set the variable
org-agenda-skip-scheduled-if-done
.
The ‘SCHEDULED’ and ‘DEADLINE’ dates are inserted on the line right below the headline. Do not put any text between this line and the headline.
Note the corresponding ‘STARTUP’ options ‘logredeadline’, ‘lognoteredeadline’, and ‘nologredeadline’.
Note the corresponding ‘STARTUP’ options ‘logreschedule’, ‘lognotereschedule’, and ‘nologreschedule’.
Org does not repeat inactive timestamps, however. See Timestamps.
In fact, the target state is taken from, in this sequence, the
‘REPEAT_TO_STATE’ property, the variable org-todo-repeat-to-state
if
it is a string, the previous TODO state if org-todo-repeat-to-state
is t
, or the first state of the TODO state sequence.
You can change this using the option org-log-repeat
, or the
‘STARTUP’ options ‘logrepeat’, ‘lognoterepeat’, and ‘nologrepeat’.
With ‘lognoterepeat’, you will also be prompted for a note.
Clocking only works if all headings are indented with less
than 30 stars. This is a hard-coded limitation of lmax
in
org-clock-sum
.
To resume the clock under the assumption that you have worked on this task while outside Emacs, use ‘(setq org-clock-persist t)’.
To add an effort estimate “on the fly”, hook a function doing
this to org-clock-in-prepare-hook
.
The last reset of the task is recorded by the ‘LAST_REPEAT’ property.
See also the variable org-clock-mode-line-total
.
The corresponding in-buffer setting is: ‘#+STARTUP: lognoteclock-out’.
When using :step
, untilnow
starts from the beginning of
2003, not the beginning of time.
Language terms can be set through the variable
org-clock-clocktable-language-setup
.
Note that all parameters must be specified in a single line—the line is broken here only to fit it into the manual.
On computers using macOS, idleness is based on actual user
idleness, not just Emacs’ idle time. For X11, you can install
a utility program ‘x11idle.c’, available in the ‘contrib/scripts/’
directory of the Org Git distribution, or install the xprintidle
package and set it to the variable org-clock-x11idle-program-name
if
you are running Debian, to get the same general treatment of idleness.
On other systems, idle time refers to Emacs idle time only.
Please note the pitfalls of summing hierarchical data in a flat list (see Agenda Column View).
Note the corresponding ‘STARTUP’ options ‘logrefile’, ‘lognoterefile’, and ‘nologrefile’.
Org used to offer four different targets for date/week tree
capture. Now, Org automatically translates these to use
file+olp+datetree
, applying the :time-prompt
and :tree-type
properties. Please rewrite your date/week-tree targets using
file+olp+datetree
since the older targets are now deprecated.
A date tree is an outline structure with years on the highest level, months or ISO weeks as sublevels and then dates on the lowest level. Tags are allowed in the tree structure.
When the file name is not absolute, Org assumes it is relative
to org-directory
.
If you need one of these sequences literally, escape the ‘%’ with a backslash.
If you define your own link types (see Adding Hyperlink Types), any property you store with org-store-link-props
can be
accessed in capture templates in a similar way.
This is always the other, not the user. See the variable
org-link-from-user-regexp
.
This is always the other, not the user. See the variable
org-link-from-user-regexp
.
If the value of that variable is not a list, but a single file name, then the list of agenda files in maintained in that external file.
When using the dispatcher, pressing < before
selecting a command actually limits the command to the current file,
and ignores org-agenda-files
until the next dispatcher command.
For backward compatibility, you can also press 1 to restrict to the current buffer.
For backward compatibility, you can also press 0 to restrict to the current region/subtree.
For backward compatibility, the universal prefix argument C-u causes all TODO entries to be listed before the agenda. This feature is deprecated, use the dedicated TODO list, or a block agenda instead (see Block agenda).
The variable org-anniversary
used in the example is just
like diary-anniversary
, but the argument order is always according
to ISO and therefore independent of the value of
calendar-date-style
.
You can, however, disable this by setting
org-agenda-search-headline-for-time
variable to a nil
value.
Custom agenda commands can preset a filter by binding one of
the variables org-agenda-tag-filter-preset
,
org-agenda-category-filter-preset
, org-agenda-effort-filter-preset
or org-agenda-regexp-filter-preset
as an option. This filter is
then applied to the view and persists as a basic filter through
refreshes and more secondary filtering. The filter is a global
property of the entire agenda view—in a block agenda, you should
only set this in the global options section, not in the section of an
individual block.
Only tags filtering is respected here, effort filtering is ignored.
You can also create persistent custom functions through
org-agenda-bulk-custom-functions
.
This file is parsed for the agenda when
org-agenda-include-diary
is set.
You can provide a description for a prefix key by inserting a cons cell with the prefix and the description.
Planned means here that these entries have some planning
information attached to them, like a time-stamp, a scheduled or
a deadline string. See org-agenda-entry-types
on how to set what
planning information is taken into account.
For HTML you need to install Hrvoje Nikšić’s ‘htmlize.el’ as an Emacs package from MELPA or from Hrvoje Nikšić’s repository.
To create PDF output, the Ghostscript ps2pdf utility must be installed on the system. Selecting a PDF file also creates the postscript file.
If you want to store standard views like the weekly agenda or the global TODO list as well, you need to define custom commands for them in order to be able to specify file names.
Quoting depends on the system you use, please check the FAQ for examples.
You can turn this on by default by setting the variable
org-pretty-entities
, or on a per-file base with the ‘STARTUP’ option
‘entitiespretty’.
This behavior can be disabled with ‘-’ export setting (see Export Settings).
LaTeX is a macro system based on Donald E. Knuth’s TeX system. Many of the features described here as “LaTeX” are really from TeX, but for simplicity I am blurring this distinction.
When MathJax is used, only the environments recognized by MathJax are processed. When dvipng, dvisvgm, or ImageMagick suite is used to create images, any LaTeX environment is handled.
These are respectively available at
http://sourceforge.net/projects/dvipng/, http://dvisvgm.bplaced.net/
and from the ImageMagick suite. Choose the converter by setting the
variable org-preview-latex-default-process
accordingly.
Org mode has a method to test if point is inside such
a fragment, see the documentation of the function
org-inside-LaTeX-fragment-p
.
This works automatically for the HTML backend (it requires
version 1.34 of the ‘htmlize.el’ package, which you need to install).
Fontified code chunks in LaTeX can be achieved using either the
listings package or the minted package. Refer to
org-export-latex-listings
for details.
Source code in code blocks may also be evaluated either interactively or on export. See Working with Source Code for more information on evaluating code blocks.
Adding ‘-k’ to ‘-n -r’ keeps the labels in the source code while using line numbers for the links, which might be useful to explain those in an Org mode example code.
You may select a different mode with the variable
org-edit-fixed-width-region-mode
.
What Emacs considers to be an image depends on
image-file-name-extensions
and image-file-name-regexps
.
The variable org-startup-with-inline-images
can be set
within a buffer with the ‘STARTUP’ options ‘inlineimages’ and
‘noinlineimages’.
The corresponding in-buffer setting is: ‘#+STARTUP: fninline’ or ‘#+STARTUP: nofninline’.
The corresponding in-buffer options are ‘#+STARTUP: fnadjust’ and ‘#+STARTUP: nofnadjust’.
Many desktops intercept M-TAB to switch windows. Use C-M-i or ESC TAB instead.
The variable org-export-date-timestamp-format
defines how
this timestamp are exported.
DEFINITION NOT FOUND.
At the moment, some export back-ends do not obey this specification. For example, LaTeX export excludes every unnumbered headline from the table of contents.
Note that org-link-search-must-match-exact-headline
is
locally bound to non-nil
. Therefore, org-link-search
only matches
headlines and named elements.
Since commas separate the arguments, commas within arguments have to be escaped with the backslash character. So only those backslash characters before a comma need escaping with another backslash character.
For a less drastic behavior, consider using a select tag (see Export Settings) instead.
If ‘BEAMER_ENV’ is set, Org export adds ‘B_environment’ tag to make it visible. The tag serves as a visual aid and has no semantic relevance.
By default Org loads MathJax from cdnjs.com as recommended by MathJax.
Please note that exported formulas are part of an HTML document, and that signs such as ‘<’, ‘>’, or ‘&’ have special meanings. See MathJax TeX and LaTeX support.
See TeX and LaTeX extensions in the MathJax manual to learn about extensions.
If the classes on TODO keywords and tags lead to conflicts,
use the variables org-html-todo-kwd-class-prefix
and
org-html-tag-class-prefix
to make them unique.
This does not allow setting different bibliography compilers for different files. However, “smart” LaTeX compilation systems, such as latexmk, can select the correct bibliography compiler.
See Open Document Format for Office Applications (OpenDocument) Version 1.2.
See MathToWeb.
See http://dlmf.nist.gov/LaTeXML/.
OpenDocument-v1.2 Specification
See the ‘<table:table-template>’ element of the OpenDocument-v1.2 specification.
See the attributes ‘table:template-name’, ‘table:use-first-row-styles’, ‘table:use-last-row-styles’, ‘table:use-first-column-styles’, ‘table:use-last-column-styles’, ‘table:use-banding-rows-styles’, and ‘table:use-banding-column-styles’ of the ‘<table:table>’ element in the OpenDocument-v1.2 specification.
If the publishing directory is the same as the source directory, ‘file.org’ is exported as ‘file.org.org’, so you probably do not want to do this.
The option org-babel-no-eval-on-ctrl-c-ctrl-c
can be used
to remove code evaluation from the C-c C-c key binding.
Actually, the constructs ‘call_<name>()’ and ‘src_<lang>{}’ are not evaluated when they appear in a keyword (see In-buffer Settings).
Actually, the constructs ‘call_<name>()’ and ‘src_<lang>{}’ are not evaluated when they appear in a keyword (see In-buffer Settings).
C++ language is handled in ‘ob-C.el’. Even though the identifier for such source blocks is ‘C++’, you activate it by loading the C language.
D language is handled in ‘ob-C.el’. Even though the identifier for such source blocks is ‘D’, you activate it by loading the C language.
For noweb literate programming details, see http://www.cs.tufts.edu/~nr/noweb/.
For more information, please refer to the commentary section in ‘org-tempo.el’.
Org Indent mode also sets wrap-prefix
correctly for
indenting and wrapping long lines of headlines or text. This minor
mode also handles Visual Line mode and directly applied settings
through word-wrap
.
This works, but requires extra effort. Org Indent mode is more convenient for most applications.
org-adapt-indentation
can also be set to ‘'headline-data’,
in which case only data lines below the headline will be indented.
Note that Org Indent mode also sets the wrap-prefix
property, such that Visual Line mode (or purely setting word-wrap
)
wraps long lines, including headlines, correctly indented.
For a server to host files, consider using a WebDAV server, such as Nextcloud. Additional help is at this FAQ entry.
If Emacs is configured for safe storing of passwords, then
configure the variable org-mobile-encryption-password
; please read
the docstring of that variable.
Symbolic links in org-directory
need to have the same name
as their targets.
While creating the agendas, Org mode forces ‘ID’ properties
on all referenced entries, so that these entries can be uniquely
identified if Org Mobile flags them for further action. To avoid
setting properties configure the variable
org-mobile-force-id-on-agenda-items
to nil
. Org mode then relies
on outline paths, assuming they are unique.
Checksums are stored automatically in the file ‘checksums.dat’.
The file will be empty after this operation.
https://www.ctan.org/pkg/comment
By default this works only for LaTeX, HTML, and Texinfo.
Configure the variable orgtbl-radio-table-templates
to install
templates for other modes.
If the ‘TBLFM’ keyword contains an odd number of dollar
characters, this may cause problems with Font Lock in LaTeX mode. As
shown in the example you can fix this by adding an extra line inside
the ‘comment’ environment that is used to balance the dollar
expressions. If you are using AUCTeX with the font-latex library,
a much better solution is to add the ‘comment’ environment to the
variable LaTeX-verbatim-environments
.
The agenda*
view is the same as agenda
except that it
only considers appointments, i.e., scheduled and deadline items that
have a time specification ‘[h]h:mm’ in their time-stamps.
Note that, for org-odd-levels-only
, a level number
corresponds to order in the hierarchy, not to the number of stars.